## Are you sure?

This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?

SECOND ORDER

RATIONAL DIFFERENCE

EQUATIONS

With Open Problems and Conjectures

CHAPMAN & HALL/CRC

DYNAMICS of

SECOND ORDER

RATIONAL DIFFERENCE

EQUATIONS

M. R. S. Kulenovi´c

G. Ladas

Boca Raton London New York Washington, D.C.

With Open Problems and Conjectures

This book contains information obtained from authentic and highly regarded sources. Reprinted material

is quoted with permission, and sources are indicated. A wide variety of references are listed. Reasonable

efforts have been made to publish reliable data and information, but the author and the publisher cannot

assume responsibility for the validity of all materials or for the consequences of their use.

Neither this book nor any part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic

or mechanical, including photocopying, microﬁlming, and recording, or by any information storage or

retrieval system, without prior permission in writing from the publisher.

The consent of CRC Press LLC does not extend to copying for general distribution, for promotion, for

creating new works, or for resale. Speciﬁc permission must be obtained in writing from CRC Press LLC

for such copying.

Direct all inquiries to CRC Press LLC, 2000 N.W. Corporate Blvd., Boca Raton, Florida 33431.

Trademark Notice:

Product or corporate names may be trademarks or registered trademarks, and are

used only for identiﬁcation and explanation, without intent to infringe.

Visit the CRC Press Web site at www.crcpress.com

© 2002 by Chapman & Hall/CRC

No claim to original U.S. Government works

International Standard Book Number 1-58488-275-1

Library of Congress Card Number 20010370

Printed in the United States of America 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Printed on acid-free paper

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Kulenovi´ c, M.R.S. (Mustafa R.S.)

Dynamics of second order rational difference equations : with

open problems and conjectures / M.R.S. Kulenovi´ c, G. Ladas.

p. cm.

Includes bibliographical references and index.

ISBN 1-58488-275-1

1. Difference equations—Numerical solutions. I. Ladas, G.E.

II. Title.

QA431 .K84 2001

515

′

.625—dc21 20010370

disclaimer Page 1 Monday, June 18, 2001 9:53 AM

Contents

Preface ix

Acknowledgements xi

Introduction and Classiﬁcation of Equation Types 1

1 Preliminary Results 5

1.1 Deﬁnitions of Stability and Linearized Stability Analysis . . . . . . . . . 5

1.2 The Stable Manifold Theorem in the Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1.3 Global Asymptotic Stability of the Zero Equilibrium . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1.4 Global Attractivity of the Positive Equilibrium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1.5 Limiting Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

1.6 The Riccati Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

1.7 Semicycle Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

2 Local Stability, Semicycles, Periodicity, and Invariant Intervals 29

2.1 Equilibrium Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2.2 Stability of the Zero Equilibrium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

2.3 Local Stability of the Positive Equilibrium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

2.4 When is Every Solution Periodic with the Same Period? . . . . . . . . . 33

2.5 Existence of Prime Period-Two Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

2.6 Local Asymptotic Stability of a Two Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

2.7 Convergence to Period-Two Solutions When

C = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

2.8 Invariant Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

2.9 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

3 (1, 1)-Type Equations 47

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

3.2 The Case α = γ = A = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

3.3 The Case α = β = A = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

Bx

n

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

3.4 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

v

vi Contents

4 (1, 2)-Type Equations 53

4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

4.2 The Case β = γ = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

α

A+Bx

n

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

4.3 The Case β = γ = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4.4 The Case α = γ = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

A+Cx

n−1

- Pielou’s Equation . . . . . . 57

4.5 The Case α = γ = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

4.6 The Case α = β = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

4.7 The Case α = β = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

4.7.1 The Case p < 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.7.2 The Case p = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

4.7.3 The Case p > 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

4.8 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

5 (2, 1)-Type Equations 69

5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

5.2 The Case γ = A = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

Cx

n−1

- Lyness’ Equation . . . . . . . 70

5.3 The Case β = A = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

Bx

n

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

5.4 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

6 (2, 2)-Type Equations 77

6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

6.2 The Case γ = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

A+Bx

n

- Riccati Equation . . . . . . . . . . 78

6.3 The Case γ = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

A+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

6.4 The Case γ = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

6.4.1 Invariant Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

6.4.2 Semicycle Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

6.4.3 Global Stability and Boundedness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

6.5 The Case β = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

6.5.1 Semicycle Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

6.5.2 The Case q < 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

6.5.3 The Case q > 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

6.6 The Case β = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

6.6.1 Existence and Local Stability of Period-Two Cycles . . . . . . . . 93

6.6.2 Invariant Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

6.6.3 Semicycle Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

6.6.4 Global Behavior of Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

6.7 The Case α = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

6.7.1 Invariant Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

6.7.2 Semicycle Analysis of Solutions When q ≤ 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

6.7.3 Semicycle Analysis and Global Attractivity When q = 1 . . . . . . 105

6.7.4 Global Attractivity When q < 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Contents vii

6.7.5 Long-term Behavior of Solutions When q > 1 . . . . . . . . . . . 107

6.8 The Case α = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

6.8.1 Invariant Intervals and Semicycle Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

6.8.2 Global Stability of the Positive Equilibrium . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

6.9 The Case α = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

6.9.1 Existence of a Two Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

6.9.2 Semicycle Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

6.9.3 Global Stability Analysis When p < q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

6.9.4 Global Stability Analysis When p > q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

6.10 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

7 (1, 3)-Type Equations 131

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

7.2 The Case β = γ = 0 : x

n+1

=

α

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

7.3 The Case α = γ = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

7.4 The Case α = β = 0 : x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

7.5 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

8 (3, 1)-Type Equations 137

8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

8.2 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

9 (2, 3)-Type Equations 141

9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

9.2 The Case γ = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

9.2.1 Boundedness of Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

9.2.2 Invariant Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

9.2.3 Semicycle Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

9.2.4 Global Asymptotic Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

9.3 The Case β = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

9.3.1 Existence and Local Stability of Period-Two Cycles . . . . . . . . 150

9.3.2 Invariant Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

9.3.3 Convergence of Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

9.3.4 Global Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

9.3.5 Semicycle Analysis When pr = q +

q

2

r

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

9.4 The Case α = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

9.4.1 Invariant Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

9.4.2 Convergence of Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

9.5 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

viii Contents

10 (3, 2)-Type Equations 167

10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

10.2 The Case C = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

10.2.1 Proof of Part (b) of Theorem 10.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

10.2.2 Proof of Part (c) of Theorem 10.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

10.3 The Case B = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

10.3.1 Invariant Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

10.3.2 Global Stability When p ≥ r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

10.3.3 Convergence of Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

10.4 The Case A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

10.4.1 Invariant Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

10.4.2 Convergence of Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

10.5 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

11 The (3, 3)-Type Equation x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

183

11.1 Linearized Stability Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

11.2 Invariant Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

11.3 Convergence Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

11.3.1 Global Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

11.4 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

A Global Attractivity for Higher Order Equations 201

Bibliography 211

Index 217

Preface

In this monograph, we present the known results and derive several new ones on the

boundedness, the global stability, and the periodicity of solutions of all rational diﬀerence

equations of the form

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

+ γx

n−1

A +Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (1)

where the parameters α, β, γ, A, B, C and the initial conditions x

−1

and x

0

are nonneg-

ative real numbers.

We believe that the results about Eq(1) are of paramount importance in their own

right and furthermore we believe that these results oﬀer prototypes towards the devel-

opment of the basic theory of the global behavior of solutions of nonlinear diﬀerence

equations of order greater than one. The techniques and results which we develop in

this monograph to understand the dynamics of Eq(1) are also extremely useful in ana-

lyzing the equations in the mathematical models of various biological systems and other

applications.

It is an amazing fact that Eq(1) contains, as special cases, a large number of equations

whose dynamics have not been thoroughly understood yet and remain a great challenge

for further investigation. To this end we pose several Open Problems and Conjec-

tures which we believe will stimulate further interest towards a complete understanding

of the dynamics of Eq(1) and its functional generalizations.

Chapter 1 contains some basic deﬁnitions and some general results which are used

throughout the book. In this sense, this is a self-contained monograph and the main

prerequisite that the reader needs to understand the material presented here and to be

able to attack the open problems and conjectures is a good foundation in analysis. In an

appendix, at the end of this monograph, we present some global attractivity results for

higher order diﬀerence equations which may be useful for extensions and generalizations.

In Chapter 2 we present some general results about periodic solutions and invariant

intervals of Eq(1). In particular we present necessary and suﬃcient conditions for Eq(1)

to have period-two solutions and we also present a table of invariant intervals.

In Chapters 3 to 11 we present the known results and derive several new ones on the

various types of equations which comprise Eq(1).

Every chapter in this monograph contains several open problems and conjectures

related to the particular equation which is investigated and its generalizations.

ix

Acknowledgements

This monograph is the outgrowth of lecture notes and seminars which were given at the

University of Rhode Island during the last ﬁve years. We are thankful to Professors R.

D. Driver, E. A. Grove, J. Hoag, W. Kosmala, L. F. Martins, O. Merino, S. Schultz,

and W. S. Sizer and to our graduate students A. M. Amleh, W. Briden, E. Camouzis,

C. A. Clark, K. Cunningham, R. C. DeVault, H. El-Metwally, J. Feuer, C. Gibbons, E.

Janowski, C. Kent, L. McGrath, M. Predescu, N. Prokup, M. Radin, I. W. Rodrigues,

C. T. Teixeira, S. Valicenti, and K. P. Wilkinson for their enthusiastic participation and

useful suggestions which helped to improve the exposition.

xi

To

Senada and Theodora

Introduction and Classiﬁcation of

Equation Types

In this monograph, we present the known results and derive several new ones on the

boundedness, the global stability, and the periodicity of solutions of all rational diﬀerence

equations of the form

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

+ γx

n−1

A + Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (1)

where the parameters α, β, γ, A, B, C are nonnegative real numbers and the initial con-

ditions x

−1

and x

0

are arbitrary nonnegative real numbers such that

A + Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

> 0 for all n ≥ 0.

We believe that the results about Eq(1) are of paramount importance in their own

right and furthermore we believe that these results oﬀer prototypes towards the devel-

opment of the basic theory of the global behavior of solutions of nonlinear diﬀerence

equations of order greater than one. The techniques and results which we develop in

this monograph to understand the dynamics of Eq(1) are also extremely useful in ana-

lyzing the equations in the mathematical models of various biological systems and other

applications.

It is an amazing fact that Eq(1) contains as special cases, a large number of equa-

tions whose dynamics have not been thoroughly established yet. To this end we pose

several Open Problems and Conjectures which we believe will stimulate further

interest towards a complete understanding of the dynamics of Eq(1) and its functional

generalizations.

Eq(1) includes among others the following well known classes of equations:

1. The Riccati diﬀerence equation when

γ = C = 0.

This equation is studied in many textbooks on diﬀerence equations, such as [1], [21],

[41], [42], etc. See Section 1.6 where, in addition to the basic description of the solutions

1

2 Introduction and Classiﬁcation

of the Riccati equation, we introduce the forbidden set of the equation. This is the

set F of all initial conditions x

0

∈ R through which the equation

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

A + Bx

n

(2)

is not well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. Hence the solution {x

n

} of Eq(2) exists for all n ≥ 0,

if and only if x

0

/ ∈ F.

The problem of existence of solutions for diﬀerence equations is of paramount

importance but so far has been systematically neglected. See [13], [18], [32], [69], and

Section 1.6 for some results in this regard.

Throughout this monograph we pose several open problems related to the existence

of solutions of some simple equations with the hope that their investigation may throw

some light into this very diﬃcult problem.

An example of such a problem is the following:

Open Problem Find all initial points (x

−1

, x

0

) ∈ R×R through which the equa-

tion

x

n+1

= −1 +

x

n−1

x

n

is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. See [13].

2. Pielou’s discrete delay logistic model when

α = γ = B = 0.

See ([42], p. 75), [55], [66], [67], and Section 4.4.

We believe that the techniques which we develop in this monograph to understand

the dynamics of Eq(1) will also be of paramount importance in analyzing the equations

in the mathematical models of various biological systems and other applications. For

example, it is interesting to note the similarities of the dynamics of the population model

x

n+1

= α + βx

n−1

e

−x

n

, n = 0, 1, . . .

and the rational equation

x

n+1

=

α + αx

n

+ βx

n−1

1 + x

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . .

See [24] and Sections 2.7 and 10.2.

3. Lyness’ equation when

γ = A = B = 0.

See [42], [44], [49], [57], and Section 5.2. This is a fascinating equation with many

interesting extensions and generalizations. A characteristic feature of this equation is

that it possesses an invariant which can be used to understand the character of its

Introduction and Classiﬁcation 3

solutions. Without the use of this invariant we are still unable to show, for example,

that every positive solution of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

α + x

n

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

where α ∈ (0, ∞), is bounded.

It is an amazing fact that Eq(1) contains, as special cases, a large number of equations

whose dynamics have not been thoroughly established yet.

For convenience we classify all the special cases of Eq(1) as follows.

Let k and l be positive integers from the set {1, 2, 3}. We will say that a special case

of Eq(1) is of (k, l)-type if the equation is of the form of Eq(1) with k positive parameters

in the numerator and l positive parameters in the denominator.

For example the following equations

x

n+1

=

x

n

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

γ + x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

x

n+1

=

1 + x

n

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

x

n+1

=

βx

n

+ γx

n−1

A + Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

are of types (1, 1), (2, 2), (2, 1), and (2, 3) respectively.

In this sense, Eq(1) contains 49 equations as follows:

9 equations of type (1, 1)

9 equations of type (1, 2)

9 equations of type (2, 1)

9 equations of type (2, 2)

3 equations of type (1, 3)

3 equations of type (3, 1)

3 equations of type (2, 3)

3 equations of type (3, 2)

1 equation of type (3, 3).

Of these 49 equations, 21 are either trivial, or linear, or of the Riccati type. The

remaining 28 are quite interesting nonlinear diﬀerence equations. Some of them have

been recently investigated and have led to the development of some general theory about

diﬀerence equations. See [7], [15], [28], [29], [42], [43], [45] and [52]-[54]. However to this

day, many special cases of Eq(1) are not thoroughly understood yet and remain a great

challenge for further investigation.

Our goal in this monograph is to familiarize readers with the recent techniques and

results related to Eq(1) and its extensions, and to bring to their attention several Open

Research Problems and Conjectures related to this equation and its functional

generalization.

Chapter 1

Preliminary Results

In this chapter we state some known results and prove some new ones about diﬀerence

equations which will be useful in our investigation of Eq(1).

The reader may just glance at the results in this chapter and return for the details

when they are needed in the sequel. See also [1], [4], [16], [21], [22], [33], [34], [41], [63],

and [68].

1.1 Deﬁnitions of Stability and Linearized Stability

Analysis

Let I be some interval of real numbers and let

f : I ×I →I

be a continuously diﬀerentiable function.

Then for every set of initial conditions x

0

, x

−1

∈ I, the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

= f(x

n

, x

n−1

), n = 0, 1, . . . (1.1)

has a unique solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

.

A point x ∈ I is called an equilibrium point of Eq(1.1) if

x = f(x, x);

that is,

x

n

= x for n ≥ 0

is a solution of Eq(1.1), or equivalently, x is a ﬁxed point of f.

Deﬁnition 1.1.1 Let x be an equilibrium point of Eq(1.1).

5

6 Chapter 1. Preliminary Results

(i) The equilibrium x of Eq(1.1) is called locally stable if for every ε > 0, there

exists δ > 0 such that for all x

0

, x

−1

∈ I with |x

0

−x| +|x

−1

−x| < δ,

we have

|x

n

−x| < ε for all n ≥ −1.

(ii) The equilibrium x of Eq(1.1) is called locally asymptotically stable if it is

locally stable, and if there exists γ > 0 such that for all x

0

, x

−1

∈ I with |x

0

−x| +

|x

−1

−x| < γ,

we have

lim

n→∞

x

n

= x.

(iii) The equilibrium x of Eq(1.1) is called a global attractor if for every x

0

, x

−1

∈ I

we have

lim

n→∞

x

n

= x.

(iv) The equilibrium x of Eq(1.1) is called globally asymptotically stable if it is

locally stable and a global attractor.

(v) The equilibrium x of Eq(1.1) is called unstable if it is not stable.

(vi) The equilibrium x of Eq(1.1) is called a source, or a repeller, if there exists r > 0

such that for all x

0

, x

−1

∈ I with 0 < |x

0

−x| +|x

−1

−x| < r, there exists N ≥ 1

such that

|x

N

−x| ≥ r.

Clearly a source is an unstable equilibrium.

Let

p =

∂f

∂u

(x, x) and q =

∂f

∂v

(x, x)

denote the partial derivatives of f(u, v) evaluated at the equilibrium x of Eq(1.1).

Then the equation

y

n+1

= py

n

+ qy

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (1.2)

is called the linearized equation associated with Eq(1.1) about the equilibrium point x.

Theorem 1.1.1 (Linearized Stability)

(a) If both roots of the quadratic equation

λ

2

−pλ −q = 0 (1.3)

lie in the open unit disk |λ| < 1, then the equilibrium x of Eq(1.1) is locally

asymptotically stable.

1.2. The Stable Manifold Theorem in the Plane 7

(b) If at least one of the roots of Eq(1.3) has absolute value greater than one, then the

equilibrium x of Eq(1.1) is unstable.

(c) A necessary and suﬃcient condition for both roots of Eq(1.3) to lie in the open

unit disk |λ| < 1, is

|p| < 1 −q < 2. (1.4)

In this case the locally asymptotically stable equilibrium x is also called a sink.

(d) A necessary and suﬃcient condition for both roots of Eq(1.3) to have absolute value

greater than one is

|q| > 1 and |p| < |1 −q| .

In this case x is a repeller.

(e) A necessary and suﬃcient condition for one root of Eq(1.3) to have absolute value

greater than one and for the other to have absolute value less than one is

p

2

+ 4q > 0 and |p| > |1 −q| .

In this case the unstable equilibrium x is called a saddle point.

(f ) A necessary and suﬃcient condition for a root of Eq(1.3) to have absolute value

equal to one is

|p| = |1 −q|

or

q = −1 and |p| ≤ 2.

In this case the equilibrium x is called a nonhyperbolic point.

Deﬁnition 1.1.2 (a) A solution {x

n

} of Eq(1.1) is said to be periodic with period p

if

x

n+p

= x

n

for all n ≥ −1. (1.5)

(b) A solution {x

n

} of Eq(1.1) is said to be periodic with prime period p, or a

p-cycle if it is periodic with period p and p is the least positive integer for which

(1.5) holds.

1.2 The Stable Manifold Theorem in the Plane

Let T be a diﬀeomorphism in I × I, i.e., one-to-one, smooth mapping, with smooth

inverse.

Assume that p ∈ I ×I is a saddle ﬁxed point of T, i.e., T(p) = p and the Jacobian

J

T

(p) has one eigenvalue s with |s| < 1 and one eigenvalue u with |u| > 1.

8 Chapter 1. Preliminary Results

Let v

s

be an eigenvector corresponding to s and let v

u

be an eigenvector correspond-

ing to u.

Let S be the stable manifold of p, i.e., the set of initial points whose forward orbits

(under iteration by T)

p, T(p), T

2

(p), . . .

converge to p.

Let U be the unstable manifold of p, i.e., the set of initial points whose backward

orbits (under iteration by the inverse of T)

p, T

−1

(p), T

−2

(p), . . .

converge to p. Then, both S and U are one dimensional manifolds (curves) that contain

p. Furthermore, the vectors v

s

and v

u

are tangent to S and U at p, respectively.

The map T for Eq(1.1) is found as follows:

Set

u

n

= x

n−1

and v

n

= x

n

for n ≥ 0.

Then

u

n+1

= x

n

and v

n+1

= f(v

n

, u

n

) for n ≥ 0

and so

T

u

v

=

v

f(v, u)

.

Therefore the eigenvalues of the Jacobian J

T

x

x

**at the equilibrium point x of Eq(1.1)
**

are the roots of Eq(1.3).

In this monograph, the way we will make use of the Stable Manifold Theorem in our

investigation of the rational diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

+ γx

n−1

A + Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (1.6)

is as follows:

Under certain conditions the positive equilibrium of Eq(1.6) will be a saddle point

and under the same conditions Eq(1.6) will have a two cycle

. . . φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . . (1.7)

which is locally asymptotically stable. Under these conditions, the two cycle (1.7) cannot

be a global attractor of all non-equilibrium solutions. See, for example, Sections 6.6 and

6.9.

1.3. Global Asymptotic Stability of the Zero Equilibrium 9

1.3 Global Asymptotic Stability of the Zero Equi-

librium

When zero is an equilibrium point of the Eq(1.6), which we are investigating in this

monograph (with β > 0), then the following theorem will be employed to establish

conditions for its global asymptotic stability. Amazingly the same theorem is a powerful

tool for establishing the global asymptotic stability of the zero equilibrium of several

biological models. See, for example, [31] and [48].

Theorem 1.3.1 ([31]. See also [48], and [70]) Consider the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

= f

0

(x

n

, x

n−1

)x

n

+ f

1

(x

n

, x

n−1

)x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (1.8)

with nonnegative initial conditions and

f

0

, f

1

∈ C[[0, ∞) ×[0, ∞), [0, 1)].

Assume that the following hypotheses hold:

(i) f

0

and f

1

are non-increasing in each of their arguments;

(ii) f

0

(x, x) > 0 for all x ≥ 0;

(iii) f

0

(x, y) + f

1

(x, y) < 1 for all x, y ∈ (0, ∞).

Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(1.8) is globally asymptotically stable.

1.4 Global Attractivity of the Positive Equilibrium

Unfortunately when it comes to establishing the global attractivity of the positive equi-

librium of the Eq(1.6) which we are investigating in this monograph, there are not

enough results in the literature to cover all various cases. We strongly believe that the

investigation of the various special cases of our equation has already played and will

continue to play an important role in the development of the stability theory of general

diﬀerence equations of orders greater than one.

The ﬁrst theorem, which has also been very useful in applications to mathematical

biology, see [31] and [48], was really motivated by a problem in [35].

Theorem 1.4.1 ([31]. See also [35], [48], and ([42], p. 53). Let I ⊆ [0, ∞) be some

interval and assume that f ∈ C[I ×I, (0, ∞)] satisﬁes the following conditions:

(i) f(x, y) is non-decreasing in each of its arguments;

(ii) Eq(1.1) has a unique positive equilibrium point x ∈ I and the function f(x, x)

satisﬁes the negative feedback condition:

(x −x)(f(x, x) −x) < 0 for every x ∈ I −{x}.

Then every positive solution of Eq(1.1) with initial conditions in I converges to x.

10 Chapter 1. Preliminary Results

The following theorem was inspired by the results in [55] that deal with the global

asymptotic stability of Pielou’s equation (see Section 4.4), which is a special case of

the equation that we are investigating in this monograph.

Theorem 1.4.2 ([42], p. 27) Assume

(i) f ∈ C[(0, ∞) ×(0, ∞), (0, ∞)];

(ii) f(x, y) is nonincreasing in x and decreasing in y;

(iii) xf(x, x) is increasing in x;

(iv) The equation

x

n+1

= x

n

f(x

n

, x

n−1

), n = 0, 1, . . . (1.9)

has a unique positive equilibrium x.

Then x is globally asymptotically stable.

Theorem 1.4.3 ([27]) Assume

(i) f ∈ C[[0, ∞) ×[0, ∞), (0, ∞)];

(ii) f(x, y) is nonincreasing in each argument;

(iii) xf(x, y) is nondecreasing in x;

(iv) f(x, y) < f(y, x) ⇐⇒x > y;

(v) The equation

x

n+1

= x

n−1

f(x

n−1

, x

n

), n = 0, 1, . . . (1.10)

has a unique positive equilibrium x.

Then x is a global attractor of all positive solutions of Eq(1.10).

The next result is known as the stability trichotomy result:

Theorem 1.4.4 ([46]) Assume

f ∈ C

1

[[0, ∞) ×[0, ∞), [0, ∞)]

is such that

x

∂f

∂x

+ y

∂f

∂y

< f(x, y) for all x, y ∈ (0, ∞). (1.11)

Then Eq(1.1) has stability trichotomy, that is exactly one of the following three cases

holds for all solutions of Eq(1.1):

(i) lim

n→∞

x

n

= ∞ for all (x

−1

, x

0

) = (0, 0) .

(ii) lim

n→∞

x

n

= 0 for all initial points and 0 is the only equilibrium point of Eq(1.1).

(iii) lim

n→∞

x

n

= x ∈ (0, ∞) for all (x

−1

, x

0

) = (0, 0) and x is the only positive equi-

librium of Eq(1.1).

1.4. Global Attractivity of the Positive Equilibrium 11

Very often the best strategy for obtaining global attractivity results for Eq(1.1) is

to work in the regions where the function f(x, y) is monotonic in its arguments. In this

regard there are four possible scenarios depending on whether f(x, y) is nondecreasing

in both arguments, or nonincreasing in both arguments, or nonincreasing in one and

nondecreasing in the other.

The next two theorems are slight modiﬁcations of results which were obtained in [54]

and were developed while we were working on a special case of the equation that we are

investigating in this monograph. (See Section 6.9.) The ﬁrst theorem deals with the case

where the function f(x, y) is non-decreasing in x and non-increasing in y and the second

theorem deals with the case where the function f(x, y) is non-increasing in x and non-

decreasing in y. Theorems 1.4.8 and 1.4.7 below are new and deal with the remaining

two cases relative to the monotonic character of f(x, y). See Sections 6.4 and 6.8 where

these theorems are utilized. See also the Appendix, at the end of this monograph, which

describes the extension of these results to higher order diﬀerence equations.

Theorem 1.4.5 ([54]) Let [a, b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that

f : [a, b] ×[a, b] →[a, b]

is a continuous function satisfying the following properties:

(a) f(x, y) is non-decreasing in x ∈ [a, b] for each y ∈ [a, b], and f(x, y) is non-

increasing in y ∈ [a, b] for each x ∈ [a, b];

(b) If (m, M) ∈ [a, b] ×[a, b] is a solution of the system

f(m, M) = m and f(M, m) = M,

then m = M.

Then Eq(1.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a, b] and every solution of Eq(1.1) con-

verges to x.

Proof. Set

m

0

= a and M

0

= b

and for i = 1, 2, . . . set

M

i

= f(M

i−1

, m

i−1

) and m

i

= f(m

i−1

, M

i−1

).

Now observe that for each i ≥ 0,

m

0

≤ m

1

≤ . . . ≤ m

i

≤ . . . ≤ M

i

≤ . . . ≤ M

1

≤ M

0

and

m

i

≤ x

k

≤ M

i

for k ≥ 2i + 1.

Set

m = lim

i→∞

m

i

and M = lim

i→∞

M

i

.

12 Chapter 1. Preliminary Results

Then

M ≥ limsup

i→∞

x

i

≥ liminf

i→∞

x

i

≥ m (1.12)

and by the continuity of f,

m = f(m, M) and M = f(M, m).

Therefore in view of (b),

m = M

from which the result follows. 2

Theorem 1.4.6 ([54]) Let [a, b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that

f : [a, b] ×[a, b] →[a, b]

is a continuous function satisfying the following properties:

(a) f(x, y) is non-increasing in x ∈ [a, b] for each y ∈ [a, b], and f(x, y) is non-

decreasing in y ∈ [a, b] for each x ∈ [a, b];

(b) The diﬀerence equation Eq(1.1) has no solutions of prime period two in [a, b].

Then Eq(1.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a, b] and every solution of Eq(1.1) converges

to x.

Proof. Set

m

0

= a and M

0

= b

and for i = 1, 2, . . . set

M

i

= f(m

i−1

, M

i−1

) and m

i

= f(M

i−1

, m

i−1

).

Now observe that for each i ≥ 0,

m

0

≤ m

1

≤ . . . ≤ m

i

≤ . . . ≤ M

i

≤ . . . ≤ M

1

≤ M

0

,

and

m

i

≤ x

k

≤ M

i

for k ≥ 2i + 1.

Set

m = lim

i→∞

m

i

and M = lim

i→∞

M

i

.

Then clearly (1.12) holds and by the continuity of f,

m = f(M, m) and M = f(m, M).

In view of (b),

m = M

from which the result follows. 2

1.4. Global Attractivity of the Positive Equilibrium 13

Theorem 1.4.7 Let [a, b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that

f : [a, b] ×[a, b] →[a, b]

is a continuous function satisfying the following properties:

(a) f(x, y) is non-increasing in each of its arguments;

(b) If (m, M) ∈ [a, b] ×[a, b] is a solution of the system

f(m, m) = M and f(M, M) = m,

then m = M.

Then Eq(1.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a, b] and every solution of Eq(1.1) con-

verges to x.

Proof. Set

m

0

= a and M

0

= b

and for i = 1, 2, . . . set

M

i

= f(m

i−1

, m

i−1

) and m

i

= f(M

i−1

, M

i−1

).

Now observe that for each i ≥ 0,

m

0

≤ m

1

≤ . . . ≤ m

i

≤ . . . ≤ M

i

≤ . . . ≤ M

1

≤ M

0

,

and

m

i

≤ x

k

≤ M

i

for k ≥ 2i + 1.

Set

m = lim

i→∞

m

i

and M = lim

i→∞

M

i

.

Then clearly (1.12) holds and by the continuity of f,

m = f(M, M) and M = f(m, m).

In view of (b),

m = M = x

from which the result follows. 2

Theorem 1.4.8 Let [a, b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that

f : [a, b] ×[a, b] →[a, b]

is a continuous function satisfying the following properties:

(a) f(x, y) is non-decreasing in each of its arguments;

(b) The equation

f(x, x) = x,

has a unique positive solution.

Then Eq(1.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a, b] and every solution of Eq(1.1) con-

verges to x.

14 Chapter 1. Preliminary Results

Proof. Set

m

0

= a and M

0

= b

and for i = 1, 2, . . . set

M

i

= f(M

i−1

, M

i−1

) and m

i

= f(m

i−1

, m

i−1

).

Now observe that for each i ≥ 0,

m

0

≤ m

1

≤ . . . ≤ m

i

≤ . . . ≤ M

i

≤ . . . ≤ M

1

≤ M

0

,

and

m

i

≤ x

k

≤ M

i

for k ≥ 2i + 1.

Set

m = lim

i→∞

m

i

and M = lim

i→∞

M

i

.

Then clearly the inequality (1.12) is satisﬁed and by the continuity of f,

m = f(m, m) and M = f(M, M).

In view of (b),

m = M = x,

from which the result follows. 2

1.5 Limiting Solutions

The concept of limiting solutions was introduced by Karakostas [37] (see also [40]) and

is a useful tool in establishing that under certain conditions a solution of a diﬀerence

equation which is bounded from above and from below has a limit.

In this section we ﬁrst give a self-contained version of limiting solutions the way we

will use them in this monograph.

Let J be some interval of real numbers, f ∈ C[J ×J, J], and let k ≥ 1 be a positive

integer. Assume that {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

is a solution of Eq(1.1) such that

A ≤ x

n

≤ B for all n ≥ −1,

where A, B ∈ J. Let L be a limit point of the solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

(For example L is the

limit superior S or the limit inferior I of the solution). Now with the above hypotheses,

we will show that there exists a solution {L

n

}

∞

n=−k

of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

= f(x

n

, x

n−1

), n ≥ −k + 1, . . . (1.13)

1.5. Limiting Solutions 15

such that

L

0

= L

and for every N ≥ −k, the term L

N

is a limit point of the solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

.

The solution {L

n

}

∞

n=−k

is called a limiting solution of Eq(1.13) associated with the

solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(1.1).

Karakostas takes k = ∞and calls the solution {L

n

}

∞

n=−∞

a full limiting sequence

of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

= f(x

n

, x

n−1

), (1.14)

associated with the solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(1.1). (See Theorem 1.5.2 below.)

We now proceed to show the existence of a limiting solution {L

n

}

∞

n=−k

.

Clearly there exists a subsequence {x

n

i

}

∞

i=1

of {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

such that

lim

i→∞

x

n

i

= L.

Next the subsequence {x

n

i

−1

}

∞

i=1

of {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

also lies in interval [A, B] and so it has a

further subsequence {x

n

i

j

}

∞

j=1

which converges to some limit which we call L

−1

. There-

fore,

lim

i→∞

x

n

i

j

= L and lim

i→∞

x

n

i

j

−1

= L

−1

.

Continuing in this way and by considering further and further subsequences we obtain

numbers L

−2

, L

−3

, . . . , L

−k

and a subsequence {x

n

j

}

∞

n=−1

such that

lim

j→∞

x

n

j

= L

lim

j→∞

x

n

j

−1

= L

−1

. . .

lim

j→∞

x

n

j

−k

= L

−k

.

Let {

n

}

∞

n=−k

be the solution of Eq(1.13) with

−k

= L

−k

and

−k+1

= L

−k+1

.

Then clearly,

−k+2

= f(

−k+1

,

−k

) = f(L

−k+1

, L

−k

)

= lim

j→∞

f(x

n

j

−k+1

, x

n

j

−k

) = lim

j→∞

x

n

j

−k+2

= L

−k+2

.

It follows by induction that the sequence

L

−k

, L

−k+1

, . . . , L

−1

, L

0

= L =

0

, L

1

=

1

, . . .

satisﬁes Eq(1.13) and every term of this sequence is a limit point of the solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

.

The following result, which is a consequence of the above discussion, is stated in the

way we will use it in this monograph:

16 Chapter 1. Preliminary Results

Theorem 1.5.1 Let J be some interval of real numbers, f ∈ C[J ×J, J], and let k ≥ 1

be a positive integer. Suppose that {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

is a bounded solution of Eq(1.1) with limit

inferior I and limit superior S, with I, S ∈ J. Then Eq(1.13) has two solutions {I

n

}

∞

n=−k

and {S

n

}

∞

n=−k

with the following properties:

I

0

= I, S

0

= S

and

I

n

, S

n

∈ [I, S] for n ≥ −k.

We now state the complete version of full limiting sequences, as developed by Karakostas.

Theorem 1.5.2 ([37]) Let J be some interval of real numbers, f ∈ C[J

ν+1

, J], and let

{x

n

}

∞

n=−ν

be a bounded solution of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

= f(x

n

, x

n−1

, . . . , x

n−ν

), n = 0, 1, . . . (1.15)

with

I = liminf

n→∞

x

n

, S = limsup

n→∞

x

n

and with I, S ∈ J.

Let Z denote the set of all integers {. . . , −1, 0, 1, . . .}. Then there exist two solutions

{I

n

}

∞

n=−∞

and {S

n

}

∞

n=−∞

of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

= f(x

n

, x

n−1

, . . . , x

n−ν

) (1.16)

which satisfy the equation for all n ∈ Z, with

I

0

= I, S

0

= S, I

n

, S

n

∈ [I, S] for all n ∈ Z

and such that for every N ∈ Z, I

N

and S

N

are limit points of {x

n

}

∞

n=−ν

.

Furthermore for every m ≤ −ν, there exist two subsequences {x

r

n

} and {x

l

n

} of the

solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−ν

such that the following are true:

lim

n→∞

x

r

n

+N

= I

N

and lim

n→∞

x

l

n

+N

= S

N

for every N ≥ m.

The solutions {I

n

}

∞

n=−∞

and {S

n

}

∞

n=−∞

of the diﬀerence equation (1.16) are called

full limiting solutions of Eq(1.16) associated with the solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−k

of Eq(1.15).

See [23] and [25] for an application of Theorem 1.5.2 to diﬀerence equations of the form

x

n+1

=

k

i=0

A

i

x

n−i

, n = 0, 1, . . .

which by the change of variables x

n

=

1

y

n

reduce to rational diﬀerence equations of the

form

y

n+1

=

1

k

i=0

A

i

y

n−i

, n = 0, 1, . . . .

1.6. The Riccati Equation 17

1.6 The Riccati Equation

A diﬀerence equation of the form

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

A + Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (1.17)

where the parameters α, β, A, B and the initial condition x

0

are real numbers is called a

Riccati diﬀerence equation.

To avoid degenerate cases, we will assume that

B = 0 and αB −βA = 0. (1.18)

Indeed when B = 0, Eq(1.17) is a linear equation and when αB − βA = 0, Eq(1.17)

reduces to

x

n+1

=

βA

B

+ βx

n

A + Bx

n

=

β

B

for all n ≥ 0.

The set of initial conditions x

0

∈ R through which the denominator A+Bx

n

in Eq(1.17)

will become zero for some value of n ≥ 0 is called the forbidden set F of Eq(1.17).

One of our goals in this section is to determine the forbidden set F of Eq(1.17). It

should be mentioned here that there is practically nothing known about the forbidden

set of Eq(1) (when the parameters α, β, γ, A, B, C and the initial conditions x

−1

, x

0

are

all real numbers) other than the material presented here, which is extracted from [32].

(See also [13] and [69].)

The other goal we have is to describe in detail the long- and short-term behavior of

solutions of Eq(1.17) when x

0

/ ∈ F.

The ﬁrst result in this section addresses a very special case of Eq(1.17) regarding

period-two solutions. The proof is straightforward and will be omitted.

Theorem 1.6.1 Assume that (1.18) holds and that Eq(1.17) possesses a prime period-

two solution. Then

β + A = 0. (1.19)

Furthermore when (1.19) holds every solution of Eq(1.17) with

x

0

=

β

B

(1.20)

is periodic with period two.

In the sequel, in addition to (1.18), we will assume that

β + A = 0. (1.21)

18 Chapter 1. Preliminary Results

Now observe that the change of variable

x

n

=

β + A

B

w

n

−

A

B

for n ≥ 0 (1.22)

transforms Eq(1.17) into the diﬀerence equation

w

n+1

= 1 −

R

w

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (1.23)

where

R =

βA −αB

(β + A)

2

is a nonzero real number, called the Riccati number of Eq(1.17).

It is interesting to note that the four parameters of Eq(1.17) have been reduced to

the single parameter R of Eq(1.23). If we set

y = g(w) = 1 −

R

w

then we note that the two asymptotes

x = −

A

B

and y =

β

B

of the function

y = f(x) =

α + βx

A + Bx

have now been reduced to the two asymptotes

w = 0 and y = 1

of the function

y = 1 −

R

w

.

Also note that the signum of R is equal to the signum of the derivative

f

(x) =

βA −αB

(A + Bx)

2

.

For the remainder of this section we focus on Eq(1.23) and present its forbidden set F

and the character of its solutions. Similar results can be obtained for Eq(1.17) through

the change of variables (1.22).

From Eq(1.23) it follows that when

R <

1

4

1.6. The Riccati Equation 19

Eq(1.23) has the two equilibrium points w

−

and w

+

with

w

−

=

1 −

√

1 −4R

2

<

1 +

√

1 −4R

2

= w

+

and

|w

−

| < w

+

.

Also

w

−

< 0 if R < 0

and

w

−

> 0 if R ∈ (0,

1

4

).

When

R =

1

4

,

Eq(1.23) has exactly one equilibrium point namely,

w =

1

2

.

Finally, when

R >

1

4

,

Eq(1.23) has no equilibrium points.

Now observe that the change of variables

w

n

=

y

n+1

y

n

for n = 0, 1, . . .

with

y

0

= 1 and y

1

= w

0

reduces Eq(1.23) to the second order linear diﬀerence equation

y

n+2

−y

n+1

+ Ry

n

= 0, n = 0, 1, . . . (1.24)

which can be solved explicitly.

The forbidden set of Eq(1.23) is clearly the set of points where the sequence {y

n

}

∞

n=0

vanishes.

The next two theorems deal with the cases R <

1

4

and R =

1

4

, respectively, where

the characteristic roots of Eq(1.24) are real numbers. Note that in these two cases the

characteristic roots of Eq(1.24) are the equilibrium points of Eq(1.23).

20 Chapter 1. Preliminary Results

Theorem 1.6.2 Assume

R <

1

4

.

Then

w

−

=

1 −

√

1 −4R

2

and w

+

=

1 +

√

1 −4R

2

are the only equilibrium points of Eq(1.23).

The forbidden set F of Eq(1.23) is the sequence of points

f

n

=

w

n−1

+

−w

n−1

−

w

n

+

−w

n

−

w

+

w

−

for n = 1, 2, . . . . (1.25)

When w

0

/ ∈ F, the solution of Eq(1.23) is given by

w

n

=

(w

0

−w

−

)w

n+1

+

−(w

+

−w

0

)w

n+1

−

(w

0

−w

−

)w

n

+

−(w

+

−w

0

)w

n

−

, n = 1, 2, . . . . (1.26)

It is now clear from Theorem 1.6.2 that

lim

n→∞

f

n

= w

−

,

and

f

n

< w

−

if R > 0

while

(f

n

−w

−

)(f

n+1

−w

−

) < 0 if R < 0.

The equilibrium w

+

is a global attractor as long as

w

0

/ ∈ F ∪ {w

−

}

and the equilibrium w

−

is a repeller.

Theorem 1.6.3 Assume

R =

1

4

.

Then

w =

1

2

is the only equilibrium point of Eq(1.23).

The forbidden set F of Eq(1.23) is the sequence of points

f

n

=

n −1

2n

for n = 1, 2, . . . , (1.27)

1.6. The Riccati Equation 21

which converges to the equilibrium from the left.

When w

0

/ ∈ F, the solution of Eq(1.23) is given by

w

n

=

1 + (2w

0

−1)(n + 1)

2 + 2(2w

0

−1)n

for n = 0, 1, . . . . (1.28)

From Theorem 1.6.3 it follows that the equilibrium w =

1

2

of Eq(1.23) is a global

attractor for all solutions with w

0

/ ∈ F but is locally unstable, more precisely, it is a sink

from the right and a source from the left.

Finally consider the case

R >

1

4

.

The characteristic roots of Eq(1.24) in this case are

λ

±

=

1

2

±i

√

4R −1

2

with

|λ

±

| =

√

R.

Let

φ ∈ (0,

π

2

)

be such that

cos φ =

1

2

√

R

and sin φ =

√

4R −1

2

√

R

.

Then

y

n

= R

n

2

(C

1

cos(nφ) + C

2

sin(nφ)), n = 0, 1, . . .

with

C

1

= y

0

= 1

and

√

R(C

1

cos φ + C

2

sin φ) = y

1

= w

0

.

It follows that

C

1

= 1 and C

2

=

2w

0

−1

√

4R −1

.

Hence

w

n

=

√

R

√

4R −1 cos(n + 1)φ + (2w

0

−1) sin(n + 1)φ

√

4R −1 cos(nφ) + (2w

0

−1) sin(nφ)

, n = 0, 1, . . . (1.29)

22 Chapter 1. Preliminary Results

as long as the denominator is diﬀerent from zero, that is,

w

0

=

1

2

−

√

4R −1

2

cot(nφ) for n = 1, 2, . . . .

The following theorem summarizes the above discussion.

Theorem 1.6.4 Assume that

R >

1

4

and let φ ∈ (0,

π

2

) be such that

cos φ =

1

2

√

R

and sin φ =

√

4R −1

2

√

R

.

Then the forbidden set F of Eq(1.23) is the sequence of points

f

n

=

1

2

−

√

4R −1

2

cot(nφ) for n = 1, 2, . . . . (1.30)

When w

0

/ ∈ F, the solution of Eq(1.23) is given by (1.29).

Clearly when R >

1

4

the character of the solution {w

n

} and the forbidden set F

depends on whether or not the number φ ∈ (0,

π

2

) is a rational multiple of π.

Let θ ∈ (−

π

2

,

π

2

) be such that

cos θ =

√

4R −1

r

and sin θ =

2x

0

−1

r

where

r =

(4R −1)

2

+ (2x

0

−1)

2

.

Then we obtain,

w

n

=

√

R

cos(nφ + φ −θ)

cos(nφ −θ)

=

√

R

cos(nφ −θ) cos φ −sin(nφ −θ) sin φ

cos(nφ −θ)

=

√

R(cos φ −sin φtan(nφ −θ))

and so

w

n

=

1

2

−

√

4R −1

2

tan(nφ −θ), n = 0, 1, . . . (1.31)

from which the character of the solutions of Eq(1.23), when R >

1

4

, can now be easily

revealed.

For example, assume φ is a rational multiple of π, that is,

φ =

k

N

π ∈ (0,

π

2

) (1.32)

1.6. The Riccati Equation 23

for some

k, N ∈ {1, 2, . . .} with 2k < N.

Then

w

N

=

1

2

−

√

4R −1

2

tan(kπ −θ) =

1

2

−

√

4R −1

2

tan(−θ) = w

0

and so every solution of Eq(1.23) is periodic with period N.

Equivalently assume that

A =

1

4 cos

2

φ

with φ =

k

N

π

where

k, N ∈ {1, 2, . . .} and 2k < N,

then every solution of Eq(1.23) is periodic with period N.

The following theorem summarizes the above discussion.

Theorem 1.6.5 Assume that

φ =

k

p

π ∈ (0,

π

2

)

where k and p are positive comprimes and suppose that

cos φ =

1

2

√

R

and sin φ =

√

4R −1

2

√

R

,

or equivalently

4Rcos

2

(

k

p

π) = 1.

Then every solution of Eq(1.23) with

w

0

=

sin(n

k

p

π) −

√

4R −1 cos(n

k

p

π)

2 sin(n

k

p

π)

for n = 1, 2, . . . , p −1

is periodic with period p.

When the number φ in Theorem 1.6.5 is not a rational multiple of π, then the

following result is true:

Theorem 1.6.6 Assume that the number φ in Theorem 1.6.5 is not a rational multiple

of π. Then the following statements are true:

(i) No solution of Eq(1.23) is periodic.

(ii) The set of limit points of a solution of Eq(1.23) with w

0

/ ∈ F is dense in R.

24 Chapter 1. Preliminary Results

Proof. Statement (i) is true because,

w

k

= w

l

if and only if

tan(kφ −θ) = tan(lφ −θ)

if and only if for some integer N

kφ −θ −(lφ −θ) = Nπ

if and only if

(k −l)φ = Nπ

that is,

φ is a rational multiple of π.

The proof of statement (ii) is a consequence of the form of the solution of Eq(1.23) and

the fact that when φ is not a rational multiple of π, then the values

(nφ −θ)(mod π) for n = 0, 1, . . .

are dense in the interval (−

π

2

,

π

2

). 2

1.7 Semicycle Analysis

We strongly believe that a semicycle analysis of the solutions of a scalar diﬀerence equa-

tion is a powerful tool for a detailed understanding of the entire character of solutions

and often leads to straightforward proofs of their long term behavior.

In this section, we present some results about the semicycle character of solutions of

some general diﬀerence equations of the form

x

n+1

= f(x

n

, x

n−1

), n = 0, 1, . . . (1.33)

under appropriate hypotheses on the function f.

First we give the deﬁnitions for the positive and negative semicycle of a solution of

Eq(1.33) relative to an equilibrium point x.

A positive semicycle of a solution {x

n

} of Eq(1.1) consists of a “string” of terms

{x

l

, x

l+1

, . . . , x

m

}, all greater than or equal to the equilibrium x, with l ≥ −1 and m ≤ ∞

and such that

either l = −1, or l > −1 and x

l−1

< x

and

either m = ∞, or m < ∞ and x

m+1

< x.

1.7. Semicycle Analysis 25

A negative semicycle of a solution {x

n

} of Eq(1.33) consists of a “string” of terms

{x

l

, x

l+1

, . . . , x

m

}, all less than the equilibrium x, with l ≥ −1 and m ≤ ∞ and such

that

either l = −1, or l > −1 and x

l−1

≥ x

and

either m = ∞, or m < ∞ and x

m+1

≥ x.

Deﬁnition 1.7.1 (Oscillation)

(a) A sequence {x

n

} is said to oscillate about zero or simply to oscillate if the terms

x

n

are neither eventually all positive nor eventually all negative. Otherwise the

sequence is called nonoscillatory. A sequence {x

n

} is called strictly oscillatory

if for every n

0

≥ 0, there exist n

1

, n

2

≥ n

0

such that x

n

1

x

n

2

< 0.

(b) A sequence {x

n

} is said to oscillate about x if the sequence x

n

− x oscillates.

The sequence {x

n

} is called strictly oscillatory about x if the sequence x

n

−x

is strictly oscillatory.

The ﬁrst result was established in [28] while we were working on a special case of the

equation we are investigating in this monograph. (See Section 6.5.)

Theorem 1.7.1 ([28]) Assume that f ∈ C[(0, ∞) ×(0, ∞), (0, ∞)] is such that:

f(x, y) is decreasing in x for each ﬁxed y, and f(x, y) is increasing in y for each ﬁxed

x.

Let x be a positive equilibrium of Eq(1.33). Then except possibly for the ﬁrst semi-

cycle, every solution of Eq(1.33) has semicycles of length one.

Proof. Let {x

n

} be a solution of Eq(1.33) with at least two semicycles. Then there

exists N ≥ 0 such that either

x

N−1

< x ≤ x

N

or

x

N−1

≥ x > x

N

.

We will assume that

x

N−1

< x ≤ x

N

.

All other cases are similar and will be omitted. Then by using the monotonic character

of f(x, y) we have

x

N+1

= f(x

N

, x

N−1

) < f(x, x) = x

and

x

N+2

= f(x

N+1

, x

N

) > f(x, x) = x.

Thus

x

N+1

< x < x

N+2

26 Chapter 1. Preliminary Results

and the proof follows by induction. 2

The next result applies when the function f is decreasing in both arguments.

Theorem 1.7.2 Assume that f ∈ C[(0, ∞)×(0, ∞), (0, ∞)] and that f(x, y) is decreas-

ing in both arguments.

Let x be a positive equilibrium of Eq(1.33). Then every oscillatory solution of

Eq(1.33) has semicycles of length at most two.

Proof. Assume that {x

n

} is an oscillatory solution with two consecutive terms x

N−1

and x

N

in a positive semicycle

x

N−1

≥ x and x

N

≥ x

with at least one of the inequalities being strict. The proof in the case of negative

semicycle is similar and is omitted. Then by using the decreasing character of f we

obtain:

x

N+1

= f(x

N

, x

N−1

) < f(x, x) = x

which completes the proof. 2

The next result applies when the function f is increasing in both arguments.

Theorem 1.7.3 Assume that f ∈ C[(0, ∞)×(0, ∞), (0, ∞)] and that f(x, y) is increas-

ing in both arguments.

Let x be a positive equilibrium of Eq(1.33). Then except possibly for the ﬁrst semi-

cycle, every oscillatory solution of Eq(1.33) has semicycles of length one.

Proof. Assume that {x

n

} is an oscillatory solution with two consecutive terms x

N−1

and x

N

in a positive semicycle

x

N−1

≥ x and x

N

≥ x,

with at least one of the inequalities being strict. The proof in the case of negative

semicycle is similar and is omitted. Then by using the increasing character of f we

obtain:

x

N+1

= f(x

N

, x

N−1

) > f(x, x) = x

which shows that the next term x

N+1

also belongs to the positive semicycle. It follows by

induction that all future terms of this solution belong to this positive semicycle, which

is a contradiction. 2

The next result applies when the function f(x, y) is increasing in x and decreasing

in y.

1.7. Semicycle Analysis 27

Theorem 1.7.4 Assume that f ∈ C[(0, ∞) ×(0, ∞), (0, ∞)] is such that:

f(x, y) is increasing in x for each ﬁxed y, and f(x, y) is decreasing in y for each ﬁxed

x.

Let x be a positive equilibrium of Eq(1.33).

Then, except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle, every oscillatory solution of Eq(1.33)

has semicycles of length at least two.

Furthermore, if we assume that

f(u, u) = x for every u (1.34)

and

f(x, y) < x for every x > y > x (1.35)

then {x

n

} oscillates about the equilibrium x with semicycles of length two or three, except

possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle which may have length one. The extreme in each semicycle

occurs in the ﬁrst term if the semicycle has two terms, and in the second term if the

semicycle has three terms.

Proof. Assume that {x

n

} is an oscillatory solution with two consecutive terms x

N−1

and x

N

such that

x

N−1

< x ≤ x

N

.

Then by using the increasing character of f we obtain

x

N+1

= f(x

N

, x

N−1

) > f(x, x) = x

which shows that the next term x

N+1

also belongs to the positive semicycle. The proof

in the case

x

N−1

≥ x > x

N

,

is similar and is omitted.

Now also assume that {x

n

} is an oscillatory solution with two consecutive terms

x

N−1

and x

N

such that

x

N−1

> x

N

≥ x and x

N−2

< x.

Then by using the increasing character of f and Condition (1.34) we obtain

x

N+1

= f(x

N

, x

N−1

) < f(x

N

, x

N

) = x

which shows that the positive semicycle has length two. If

x

N

> x

N−1

> x

then by using the increasing character of f and Condition (1.34) we obtain:

x

N+1

= f(x

N

, x

N−1

) > f(x

N

, x

N

) = x

28 Chapter 1. Preliminary Results

and by using Condition (1.35) we ﬁnd

x

N+1

= f(x

N

, x

N−1

) < x

N

and the proof is complete.

2

Condition (1.34) is not enough to guarantee the above result. If, instead of Condition

(1.35), we assume

f(x, y) > x for every x > y > x. (1.36)

then Eq(1.33) has monotonic solutions.

Theorem 1.7.5 Assume that f ∈ C[(0, ∞) ×(0, ∞), (0, ∞)] is such that:

f(x, y) is increasing in x for each ﬁxed y, and f(x, y) is decreasing in y for each ﬁxed

x.

Let x be a positive equilibrium of Eq(1.33). Assume that f satisﬁes Conditions (1.34)

and (1.36).

Then if x

0

> x

−1

> x, the corresponding solution is increasing.

If, on the other hand, f satisﬁes Condition (1.34), and

f(x, y) < x for every x < y < x (1.37)

then if x

0

< x

−1

< x, the corresponding solution is decreasing.

Proof. First, assume that Condition (1.36) is satisﬁed and that x

0

> x

−1

> x. Then

by the monotonic character of f and (1.34), we obtain

x

1

= f(x

0

, x

−1

) > f(x

−1

, x

−1

) = x.

In view of Condition (1.36) we get

x

1

= f(x

0

, x

−1

) > x

0

.

and the proof follows by induction.

The proof of the remaining case is similar and will be omitted. 2

Chapter 2

Local Stability, Semicycles,

Periodicity, and Invariant Intervals

2.1 Equilibrium Points

Here we investigate the equilibrium points of the general equation

x

n+1

=

α +βx

n

+γx

n−1

A +Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (2.1)

where

α, β, γ, A, B, C ∈ [0, ∞) with α +β + γ, B +C ∈ (0, ∞) (2.2)

and where the initial conditions x

−1

and x

0

are arbitrary nonnegative real numbers such

that the right hand side of Eq(2.1) is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0.

In view of the above restriction on the initial conditions of Eq(2.1), the equilibrium

points of Eq(2.1) are the nonnegative solutions of the equation

x =

α + (β +γ)x

A + (B +C)x

(2.3)

or equivalently

(B +C)x

2

−(β + γ −A)x −α = 0. (2.4)

Zero is an equilibrium point of Eq(2.1) if and only if

α = 0 and A > 0. (2.5)

When (2.5) holds, in addition to the zero equilibrium , Eq(2.1) has a positive equilibrium

if and only if

β +γ > A.

29

30 Chapter 2. Local Stability, Semicycles, Periodicity, and Invariant Intervals

In fact in this case the positive equilibrium of Eq(2.1) is unique and is given by

x =

β +γ −A

B +C

. (2.6)

When

α = 0 and A = 0

the only equilibrium point of Eq(2.1) is positive and is given by

x =

β +γ

B +C

. (2.7)

Note that in view of Condition (2.2), when α = 0, the quantity β +γ is positive.

Finally when

α > 0

the only equilibrium point of Eq(2.1) is the positive solution

x =

β +γ −A +

(β + γ −A)

2

+ 4α(B + C)

2(B +C)

(2.8)

of the quadratic equation (2.4).

If we had allowed negative initial conditions then the negative solution of Eq(2.4)

would also be an equilibrium worth investigating. The problem of investigating Eq(2.1)

when the initial conditions and the coeﬃcients of the equation are real numbers is of

great mathematical importance and, except for our presentation in Section 1.6 about

the Riccati equation

x

n+1

=

α +βx

n

A +Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . ,

there is very little known. (See [13], [18], [32], and [69] for some results in this regard.)

In summary, it is interesting to observe that when Eq(2.1) has a positive equilibrium

x, then x is unique, it satisﬁes Eqs(2.3) and (2.4), and it is given by (2.8). This ob-

servation simpliﬁes the investigation of the local stability of the positive equilibrium of

Eq(2.1).

2.2 Stability of the Zero Equilibrium

Here we investigate the stability of the zero equilibrium of Eq(2.1).

Set

f(u, v) =

α +βu + γv

A +Bu + Cv

and observe that

f

u

(u, v) =

(βA −αB) + (βC −γB)v

(A +Bu +Cv)

2

(2.9)

2.2. Stability of the Zero Equilibrium 31

and

f

v

(u, v) =

(γA −αC) −(βC −γB)u

(A +Bu +Cv)

2

. (2.10)

If x denotes an equilibrium point of Eq(2.1), then the linearized equation associated

with Eq(2.1) about the equilibrium point x is

z

n+1

−pz

n

−qz

n−1

= 0

where

p = f

u

(x, x) and q = f

v

(x, x).

The local stability character of x is now described by the linearized stability Theorem

1.1.1.

For the zero equilibrium of Eq(2.1) we have

p =

β

A

and q =

γ

A

and so the linearized equation associated with Eq(2.1) about the zero equilibrium point

is

z

n+1

−

β

A

z

n

−

γ

A

z

n−1

= 0, n = 0, 1, . . . .

For the stability of the zero equilibrium of Eq(2.1), in addition to the local stability The-

orem 1.1.1, we have the luxury of the global stability Theorem 1.3.1. As a consequence

of these two theorems we obtain the following global result:

Theorem 2.2.1 Assume that A > 0. Then the zero equilibrium point of the equation

x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A +Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

is globally asymptotically stable when

β + γ ≤ A

and is unstable when

β +γ > A.

Furthermore the zero equilibrium point is

a sink when A > β +γ

a saddle point when A < β +γ < A + 2β

a repeller when β +γ > A + 2β.

32 Chapter 2. Local Stability, Semicycles, Periodicity, and Invariant Intervals

2.3 Local Stability of the Positive Equilibrium

As we mentioned in Section 2.1, Eq(2.1) has a positive equilibrium when either

α = 0 and β +γ > A

or

α > 0.

In these cases the positive equilibrium x is unique, it satisﬁes Eqs(2.3) and (2.4), and it

is given by (2.8). By using the identity

(B +C)x

2

= (β + γ −A)x +α,

we see that

p = f

u

(x, x) =

(βA −αB) + (βC −γB)x

(A + (B +C)x)

2

=

(βA −αB) + (βC −γB)x

A

2

+ α(B +C) + (B +C)(A +β + γ)x

and

q = f

v

(x, x) =

(γA −αC) −(βC −γB)x

(A + (B +C)x)

2

=

(γA −αC) −(βC −γB)x

A

2

+α(B +C) + (B +C)(A +β +γ)x

.

Hence the conditions for the local asymptotic stability of x are (see Theorem 1.1.1) the

following:

|p| < 1 −q (2.11)

and

q > −1. (2.12)

Inequalities (2.11) and (2.12) are equivalent to the following three inequalities:

¸

A +β + γ + 2

βC −γB

B + C

¸

x > −α −

A

2

+ (βA −αB) −(γA −αC)

B +C

(2.13)

(A +β +γ)x > −α −

A

2

−(βA −αB) −(γA −αC)

B + C

(2.14)

¸

A +β + γ −

βC −γB

B +C

¸

x > −α −

A

2

+ (γA −αC)

B +C

. (2.15)

Out of these inequalities we will obtain explicit stability conditions by using the following

procedure:

First we observe that Inequalities (2.13)-(2.15), are equivalent to some inequalities

of the form

x > ρ

2.4. When is Every Solution Periodic with the Same Period? 33

and/or

x < σ

for some ρ, σ ∈ [0, ∞).

Now if we set

F(u) = (B +C)u

2

−(β +γ −A)u −α,

it is clear that

F(x) = 0

and that

x > ρ if and only if F(ρ) < 0

while

x < σ if and only if F(σ) > 0.

2.4 When is Every Solution Periodic with the Same

Period?

The following four special examples of Eq(2.1)

x

n+1

=

1

x

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (2.16)

x

n+1

=

1

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (2.17)

x

n+1

=

1 +x

n

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (2.18)

x

n+1

=

x

n

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (2.19)

are remarkable in the sense that all positive solutions of each of these four nontrivial

equations are periodic with periods 2, 4, 5, and 6 respectively.

The following result characterizes all possible special cases of equations of the form

of Eq(2.1) with the property that every solution of the equation is periodic with the

same period. (See also [75], [73], and [74].)

Theorem 2.4.1 Let p ≥ 2 be a positive integer and assume that every positive solution

of Eq(2.1) is periodic with period p. Then the following statements are true:

(i) Assume C > 0. Then A = B = γ = 0.

(ii) Assume C = 0. Then γ(α +β) = 0.

34 Chapter 2. Local Stability, Semicycles, Periodicity, and Invariant Intervals

Proof. Consider the solution with

x

−1

= 1 and x

0

∈ (0, ∞).

Then clearly

x

0

= x

p

and x

p−1

= x

−1

= 1

and so from Eq(2.1)

x

p

=

α +β + γx

p−2

A + B +Cx

p−2

= x

0

.

Hence

(A +B)x

0

+ (Cx

0

−γ)x

p−2

= α +β. (2.20)

(i) Assume that C > 0. Then we claim that

A = B = 0. (2.21)

Otherwise A +B > 0 and by choosing

x

0

> max

α +β

A +B

,

γ

C

¸

we see that (2.20) is impossible. Hence (2.21) holds. In addition to (2.21) we now

claim that also

γ = 0. (2.22)

Otherwise γ > 0 and by choosing

x

0

< min

α +β

A +B

,

γ

C

¸

we see that (2.20) is impossible. Thus (2.22) holds .

(ii) Assume C = 0 and, for the sake of contradiction, assume that

γ(α +β) > 0.

Then by choosing x

0

suﬃciently small, we see that (2.20) is impossible.

The proof is complete. 2

Corollary 2.4.1 Let p ∈ {2, 3, 4, 5, 6}. Assume that every positive solution of Eq(2.1)

is periodic with period p. Then up to a change of variables of the form

x

n

= λy

n

Eq(2.1) reduces to one of the equations (2.16)-(2.19) .

2.5. Existence of Prime Period-Two Solutions 35

2.5 Existence of Prime Period-Two Solutions

In this section we give necessary and suﬃcient conditions for Eq(2.1) to have a prime

period-two solution and we exhibit all prime period-two solutions of the equation. (See

[50].)

Furthermore we are interested in conditions under which every solution of Eq(2.1)

converges to a period-two solution in a nontrivial way according to the following con-

vention.

Convention Throughout this book when we say that “every solution of a certain

diﬀerence equation converges to a periodic solution with period p” we mean that every

solution converges to a, not necessarily prime, solution with period p and furthermore

the set of solutions of the equation with prime period p is nonempty.

Assume that

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

is a prime period-two solution of Eq(2.1). Then

φ =

α +βψ +γφ

A +Bψ + Cφ

and

ψ =

α + βφ +γψ

A +Bφ +Cψ

from which we ﬁnd that

C(φ +ψ) = γ −β −A (2.23)

and when

C > 0 (2.24)

we also ﬁnd that

(B −C)φψ =

αC +β(γ −β −A)

C

. (2.25)

One can show that when

C = 0 and B > 0 (2.26)

Eq(2.1) has a prime period-two solution if and only if

γ = β + A. (2.27)

Furthermore when (2.26) and (2.27) hold

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

is a prime period-two solution of Eq(2.1) if and only if

α + β(φ +ψ) = Bφψ with φ, ψ ∈ [0, ∞) and φ = ψ

36 Chapter 2. Local Stability, Semicycles, Periodicity, and Invariant Intervals

or equivalently

φ >

β

B

, φ =

β +

√

β

2

+ αB

B

, and ψ =

α + βφ

−β +Bφ

. (2.28)

Next assume that (2.24) holds and that Eq(2.1) possesses a prime period-two solution

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . . .

Then it follows from (2.23) and (2.25) that one of the following three conditions must

be satisﬁed:

B = C, α = β = 0, and φψ = 0; (2.29)

γ > β + A and B = C, α = β = 0, and φψ ≥ 0; (2.30)

B > C, α + β > 0, and φψ > 0. (2.31)

When (2.29) holds, the two cycle is

. . . , 0,

γ −A

C

, 0,

γ −A

C

, . . . .

When (2.30) holds, the two cycle is

. . . , φ,

γ −A

C

−φ, φ,

γ −A

C

−φ, . . . with 0 ≤ φ <

γ −A

C

.

Finally when (2.31) holds, the values φ and ψ of the two cycle are given by the two roots

of the quadratic equation

t

2

−

γ −β −A

C

t +

αC +β(γ −β −A)

C(B −C)

= 0

and we should also require that the discriminant of this quadratic equation be positive.

That is,

α <

(γ −β −A)[B(γ −β −A) −C(γ + 3β −A)]

4C

2

. (2.32)

2.6 Local Asymptotic Stability of a Two Cycle

Let

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

be a two cycle of the diﬀerence equation (2.1).

Set

u

n

= x

n−1

and v

n

= x

n

for n = 0, 1, . . .

2.6. Local Asymptotic Stability of a Two Cycle 37

and write Eq(2.1) in the equivalent form:

u

n+1

= v

n

v

n+1

=

α+βv

n

+γu

n

A+Bv

n

+Cu

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . .

Let T be the function on [0, ∞) ×[0, ∞) deﬁned by:

T

u

v

=

v

βv+γu+α

Bv+Cu+A

.

Then

φ

ψ

**is a ﬁxed point of T
**

2

, the second iterate of T. Furthermore

T

2

u

v

=

g(u, v)

h(u, v)

where

g(u, v) =

α +βv + γu

A + Bv +Cu

and h(u, v) =

α +β

α+βv+γu

A+Bv+Cu

+γv

A +B

α+βv+γu

A+Bv+Cu

+ Cv

.

The two cycle is locally asymptotically stable if the eigenvalues of the Jacobian matrix

J

T

2, evaluated at

φ

ψ

**lie inside the unit disk.
**

By deﬁnition

J

T

2

φ

ψ

=

¸

¸

∂g

∂u

(φ, ψ)

∂g

∂v

(φ, ψ)

∂h

∂u

(φ, ψ)

∂h

∂v

(φ, ψ)

¸

.

By computing the partial derivatives of g and h and by using the fact that

φ =

α +βψ + γφ

A +Bψ +Cφ

and ψ =

α +βφ + γψ

A + Bφ +Cψ

we ﬁnd the following identities:

∂g

∂u

(φ, ψ) =

(γA −αC) + (γB −βC)ψ

(A +Bψ +Cφ)

2

,

∂g

∂v

(φ, ψ) =

(βA −αB) −(γB −βC)φ

(A +Bψ +Cφ)

2

,

∂h

∂u

(φ, ψ) =

[(βA −αB) −(γB −βC)ψ][(γA −αC) + (γB −βC)ψ]

(A +Bφ +Cψ)

2

(A + Bψ +Cφ)

2

,

38 Chapter 2. Local Stability, Semicycles, Periodicity, and Invariant Intervals

∂h

∂v

(φ, ψ) =

[(βA −αB) −(γB −βC)ψ][(βA −αB) −(γB −βC)φ]

(A + Bφ +Cψ)

2

(A +Bψ + Cφ)

2

+

(γA −αC) + (γB −βC)φ

(A +Bφ + Cψ)

2

.

Set

S =

∂g

∂u

(φ, ψ) +

∂h

∂v

(φ, ψ)

and

D =

∂g

∂u

(φ, ψ)

∂h

∂v

(φ, ψ) −

∂g

∂v

(φ, ψ)

∂h

∂u

(φ, ψ).

Then it follows from Theorem 1.1.1 (c) that both eigenvalues of J

T

2

φ

ψ

**lie inside the
**

unit disk |λ| < 1, if and only if

|S| < 1 +D and D < 1.

See Sections 6.6, 6.9, and 7.4 for some applications.

Deﬁnition 2.6.1 (Basin of Attraction of a Two Cycle)

Let

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

be a two cycle of Eq(2.1). The basin of attraction of this two cycle is the set B of all

initial conditions (x

−1

, x

0

) through which the solution of Eq(2.1) converges to the two

cycle.

2.7 Convergence to Period-Two Solutions When

C = 0

In this section we consider the equation

x

n+1

=

α +βx

n

+γx

n−1

A +Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (2.33)

where

α, β, γ, A, B ∈ [0, ∞) with α + β +γ, A +B ∈ (0, ∞)

and nonnegative initial conditions and obtain a signum invariant for its solutions which

will be used in the sequel (See Sections 4.7, 6.5, 6.7, and 10.2) to obtain conditions on

α, β, γ, A and B so that every solution of Eq(2.33) converges to a period-two solution.

That is, every solution converges to a (not necessarily prime) period-two solution and

2.7. Convergence to Period-Two Solutions When C = 0 39

there exist prime period-two solutions. (See also Section 10.2 where we present the

complete character of solutions of Eq(2.33).)

Now before we see that when B > 0 every solution of Eq(2.33) converges to a period-

two solution if and only if (2.27) holds, we need the following result, the proof of which

follows by straightforward computations.

Lemma 2.7.1 Assume that (2.27) holds, and let {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(2.33).

Set

J

n

= α +β(x

n−1

+x

n

) −Bx

n−1

x

n

for n ≥ 0. (2.34)

Then the following statements are true:

(a)

J

n+1

=

β +A

A +Bx

n

J

n

for n ≥ 0.

In particular, the sign of the quantity J

n

is constant along each solution.

(b)

x

n+1

−x

n−1

=

J

n

A +Bx

n

for n ≥ 0.

In particular, one and only one of the following three statements is true for each solution

of Eq(2.33):

(i)

x

n+1

−x

n−1

= 0 for all n ≥ 0;

(ii)

x

n+1

−x

n−1

< 0 for all n ≥ 0;

(iii)

x

n+1

−x

n−1

> 0 for all n ≥ 0.

Clearly (i) holds, if and only if, (β + A)J

0

= 0. In this case, the solution {x

n

} is

periodic with period-two.

Statement (ii) holds if and only if J

0

< 0 and β+A > 0. In this case the subsequences

{x

2n

}

∞

n=0

and {x

2n−1

}

∞

n=0

of the solution {x

n

}

∞

n=0

are both decreasing to ﬁnite limits and

so in this case the solution converges to a period-two solution.

Finally (iii) holds, if and only if J

0

> 0 and β +A > 0. In this case the subsequences

{x

2n

}

∞

n=0

and {x

2n−1

}

∞

n=0

of the solution {x

n

}

∞

n=0

are both increasing and so if we can

show that they are bounded, the solution would converge to a period-two solution.

Now observe that

x

n+1

−x

n−1

=

β +A

A +Bx

n

(x

n

−x

n−2

) for n ≥ 1

40 Chapter 2. Local Stability, Semicycles, Periodicity, and Invariant Intervals

and so

x

n+1

−x

n−1

= (x

1

−x

−1

)

n

¸

k=1

β +A

A + Bx

k

. (2.35)

We will now employ (2.35) to show that the subsequences of even and odd terms of

the solution are bounded. We will give the details for the subsequence of even terms.

The proof for the subsequence of odd terms is similar and will be omitted. To this end

assume, for the sake of contradiction, that the subsequence of even terms increases to

∞. Then there exists N ≥ 0 such that

ρ =

A +β

A + Bx

2N+1

A +β

A +Bx

2N

< 1.

Clearly for all n > N,

A +β

A +Bx

2n+1

A + β

A +Bx

2n

<

A + β

A +Bx

2N+1

A +β

A +Bx

2N

= ρ.

Set

K = |x

2N

−x

2N−2

|.

Then

|x

2N+2

−x

2N

| =

A + β

A +Bx

2N+1

A +β

A +Bx

2N

|x

2N

−x

2N−2

| < Kρ

|x

2N+4

−x

2N+2

| =

A + β

A + Bx

2N+3

A + β

A + Bx

2N+2

|x

2N+2

−x

2N

| < Kρ

2

and by induction

|x

2N+2m

−x

2N+2(m−1)

| < Kρ

m

for m = 1, 2, . . . .

But then

x

2N+2m

≤ |x

2N+2m

−x

2N+2m−2

| +. . . +|x

2N+2

−x

2N

| +x

2N

≤ K

m

¸

i=1

ρ

i

+x

2N

<

Kρ

1 −ρ

+x

2N

which contradicts the hypothesis that the subsequence of even terms is unbounded.

In summary we have established the following result.

Theorem 2.7.1 Assume B > 0. Then the following statements hold:

(a) Eq(2.33) has a prime period-two solution if and only if (2.27) holds.

(b) When (2.27) holds all prime period-two solutions

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

of Eq(2.33) are given by (2.28).

(c) When (2.27) holds every solution of Eq(2.33) converges to a period-two solution.

2.8. Invariant Intervals 41

2.8 Invariant Intervals

An invariant interval for Eq(2.1) is an interval I with the property that if two con-

secutive terms of the solution fall in I then all the subsequent terms of the solution also

belong to I. In other words I is an invariant interval for the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

= f(x

n

, x

n−1

), n = 0, 1, . . . (2.36)

if x

N−1

, x

N

∈ I for some N ≥ 0, then x

n

∈ I for every n > N.

Invariant intervals for Eq(2.36) are determined from the intervals where the function

f(x, y) is monotonic in its arguments.

For Eq(2.1) the partial derivatives are given by (2.9) and (2.10) and are

f

x

(x, y) =

L +My

(A +Bx + Cy)

2

and f

y

(x, y) =

N −Mx

(A +Bx + Cy)

2

,

where

L = βA −αB, M = βC −γB, and N = γA −αC.

The following table gives the signs of f

x

and f

y

in all possible nondegenerate cases.

Case L M N Signs of derivatives f

x

and f

y

1 + + +

f

x

> 0

f

y

> 0 if x <

N

M

; f

y

< 0 if x >

N

M

2 + + 0 f

x

> 0 and f

y

< 0

3 + + − f

x

> 0 and f

y

< 0

4 + 0 + f

x

> 0 and f

y

> 0

5 + 0 0 f

x

> 0 and f

y

= 0

6 + − +

f

x

> 0 if y < −

L

M

; f

x

< 0 if y > −

L

M

f

y

> 0

7 0 + 0 f

x

> 0 and f

y

< 0

8 0 + − f

x

> 0 and f

y

< 0

9 0 − + f

x

< 0 and f

y

> 0

10 0 − 0 f

x

< 0 and f

y

> 0

11 − + −

f

x

> 0 if y > −

L

M

; f

x

< 0 if y < −

L

M

f

y

< 0

12 − 0 0 f

x

< 0 and f

y

= 0

13 − 0 − f

x

< 0 and f

y

< 0

14 − − + f

x

< 0 and f

y

> 0

15 − − 0 f

x

< 0 and f

y

> 0

16 − − −

f

x

< 0

f

y

> 0 if x >

N

M

; f

y

< 0 if x <

N

M

Using this table, we obtain the following table of invariant intervals for Eq(2.1).

42 Chapter 2. Local Stability, Semicycles, Periodicity, and Invariant Intervals

Case Invariant intervals

1

[0,

N

M

] if

αM+(β+γ)N

AM+(B+C)N

<

N

M

[

N

M

,

(β−A)M−CN+

√

((β−A)M−NC)

2

+4BM(αM+γN)

2BM

] if

αM+(β+γ)N

AM+(B+C)N

>

N

M

and B > 0

[

N

M

,

αM+γN

(A−β)M+CN

] if B = 0 and (A−β)M +CN > 0

2

[0,

β−A+

√

(β−A)

2

+4Bα

2B

] if B > 0

[0,

α

A−β

] if B = 0, α > 0 and A > β

3

[0,

β−A+

√

(β−A)

2

+4Bα

2B

] if B > 0

[0,

α

A−β

] if B = 0, α > 0 and A > β

4 [0,

β+γ−A+

√

(β+γ−A)

2

+4α(B+C)

2(B+C)

] if B +C > 0

5

[

α

A

,

β−A+

√

(β−A)

2

+4αB

2B

] if B > 0

[

α

A

,

α

A−β

] if B = 0 and A > β

6

[0, −

L

M

] if

αM−(β+γ)L

AM−(B+C)L

< −

L

M

[−

L

M

,

(A−γ)M−BL+

√

((A−γ)M−BL)

2

+4CM(αM−βL)

−2CM

] if C = 0 and

βMK+αM−γL

BMK+AM−CL

> −

L

M

[−

L

M

,

βL−αM

(γ−A)M+BL

] if C = 0, (γ −A)M +BL > 0 and −(βM +BL)K ≥ αM +AL

7

[

γ

C

,

β

B

] if B > 0

[

γ

C

,

γ

2

C(γ−β)

] if B = 0 and β < γ

8

[0,

β

B

] if B = 0

[

γ

C

,

αC+γ

2

γ−βC

] if B = 0 and γ > βC

9

[0,

γ

C

] if C > 0

[k, K] if C = 0 where k and K satisfy α +βk + (γ −A)K ≤ BkK ≤ α +βK −Ak

10

[

β

B

,

γ

C

] if C > 0

[

β

B

,

β

2

B(β−γ)

] if C = 0 and β > γ

11

[

αM−L(β+γ)

AM−L(B+C)

, −

L

M

] if

αM−L(β+γ)

AM−L(B+C)

< −

L

M

[−

L

M

,

(β−A)M+LC+

√

((β−A)M+LC)

2

+4BM(αM−γL)

2BM

] if

αM−βL+γMK

AM−BL+CMK

> −

L

M

12

[

α(A+β)

A

2

+Bα

,

α

A

] if A > 0

[

β

B

,

β

B

+

α

β

] if A = 0 and β > 0

13

[0,

α

A

] if A > 0

[k, K] if A = 0 where k and K satisfy

α+(β+γ)k

B+C

≤ kK ≤

α+(β+γ)K

B+C

14

[0,

γ

C

] if C > 0

[k, K] if C = 0 where k and K satisfy α +βk + (γ −A)K ≤ BkK ≤ α +βK −Ak

15

[0,

γ

C

] if C > 0

[

β

B

,

αB+β

2

B(β−γ)

] if A = 0 and β > γ

16

[

αM+(β+γ)N

AM+(B+C)N

,

N

M

] if

αM+(β+γ)N

AM+(B+C)N

<

N

M

[

N

M

,

(γ−A)M−BN+

√

((γ−A)M−BN)

2

+4BM(αM+βN)

2CM

] if

αM+βK+γNM

AM+BK+CNM

>

N

M

2.9. Open Problems and Conjectures 43

2.9 Open Problems and Conjectures

What is it that makes all solutions of a nonlinear diﬀerence equation periodic with the

same period?

For a linear equation, every solution is periodic with period p ≥ 2, if and only if

every root of the characteristic equation is a pth root of unity.

Open Problem 2.9.1 Assume that f ∈ C

1

[(0, ∞) × (0, ∞), (0, ∞)] is such that every

positive solution of the equation

x

n+1

= f(x

n

, x

n−1

), n = 0, 1, . . . (2.37)

is periodic with period p ≥ 2.

Is it true that the linearized equation about a positive equilibrium point of Eq(2.37)

has the property that every one of its solutions is also periodic with the same period p?

What is it that makes every positive solution of a diﬀerence equation converge to a

periodic solution with period p ≥ 2 ?

Open Problem 2.9.2 Let f ∈ C

1

[[0, ∞) × [0, ∞), [0, ∞)] and let p ≥ 2 be an integer.

Find necessary and suﬃcient conditions so that every nonnegative solution of the diﬀer-

ence equation (2.37) converges to a periodic solution with period p. In particular address

the case p = 2.

Open Problem 2.9.3 Let p ≥ 2 be an integer and assume that every positive solution

of Eq(2.1) with

α, β, γ, A, B, C ∈ [0, ∞)

converges to a solution with period p . Is it true that

p ∈ {2, 4, 5, 6}?

Open Problem 2.9.4 It is known (see Sections 2.7, 4.7, 6.5, and 6.7) that every pos-

itive solution of each of the following three equations

x

n+1

= 1 +

x

n−1

x

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (2.38)

x

n+1

=

1 +x

n−1

1 + x

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (2.39)

x

n+1

=

x

n

+ 2x

n−1

1 + x

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (2.40)

44 Chapter 2. Local Stability, Semicycles, Periodicity, and Invariant Intervals

converges to a solution with (not necessarily prime) period-two:

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . . . (2.41)

In each case, determine φ and ψ in terms of the initial conditions x

−1

and x

0

.

Conversely, if (2.41) is a period-two solution of Eq(2.38) or Eq(2.39) or Eq(2.40), de-

termine all initial conditions (x

−1

, x

0

) ∈ (0, ∞)×(0, ∞) for which the solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

converges to the period-two solution (2.41).

Conjecture 2.9.1 Assume

α, β, γ, A, B, C ∈ (0, ∞).

Show that every positive solution of Eq(2.1) is bounded.

Open Problem 2.9.5 Assume

α, β, γ, A, B ∈ (0, ∞) and γ > β +A.

Determine the set of initial conditions x

−1

and x

0

for which the solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

of

Eq(2.33) is bounded.

(See Sections 2.7, 4.7, 6.5, 6.7, and 10.2.)

Conjecture 2.9.2 Assume

α, β, γ, A, B, C ∈ (0, ∞)

and that Eq(2.1) has no period-two solution. Show that the positive equilibrium is globally

asymptotically stable.

Conjecture 2.9.3 Assume

α, β, γ, A, B, C ∈ (0, ∞)

and that Eq(2.1) has a positive prime period-two solution. Show that the positive equi-

librium of Eq(2.1) is a saddle point.

2.9. Open Problems and Conjectures 45

Open Problem 2.9.6 Assume

α, β, γ, A, B, C ∈ [0, ∞).

Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions in terms of the coeﬃcients so that every

positive solution of Eq(2.1) is bounded.

Conjecture 2.9.4 Assume that

α, β, γ, A, B, C ∈ [0, ∞).

Show that Eq(2.1) cannot have a positive prime two cycle which attracts all positive

non-equilibrium solutions.

Open Problem 2.9.7 Assume f ∈ C[(0, ∞), (0, ∞)]. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient

conditions on f for every solution of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

f(x

n

)

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

to be bounded.

(See Section 5.2).

Open Problem 2.9.8 Assume f ∈ C[(0, ∞), (0, ∞)]. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient

conditions on f for every positive solution of the equation

x

n+1

= 1 +

f(x

n−1

)

x

n

, n = 0, 1, . . .

to converge to a period-two solution.

(See Section 4.7).

Open Problem 2.9.9 Extend Theorem 2.7.1 to third order diﬀerence equations

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

+ γx

n−1

+δx

n−2

A +Bx

n−1

+ Dx

n−2

, n = 0, 1, . . .

with nonnegative parameters and nonnegative initial conditions such that

γ = β +δ +A.

What additional conditions should the parameters satisfy?

46 Chapter 2. Local Stability, Semicycles, Periodicity, and Invariant Intervals

Open Problem 2.9.10 Extend the linearized stability Theorem 1.1.1 to third order dif-

ference equations

x

n+1

= f(x

n

, x

n−1

, x

n−2

), n = 0, 1, . . . . (2.42)

For the equation

λ

3

+aλ

2

+ bλ +c = 0

one can see that all roots lie inside the unit disk |λ| < 1 if and only if

|a +c| < 1 +b

|a −3c| < 3 −b

b +c

2

< 1 +ac

.

But how about necessary and suﬃcient conditions for the equilibrium of Eq(2.42) to

be a repeller, or a saddle point, or nonhyperbolic?

Extend these results to fourth order diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

= f(x

n

, x

n−1

, x

n−2

, x

n−3

), n = 0, 1, . . . .

Chapter 3

(1, 1)-Type Equations

3.1 Introduction

Eq(1) contains the following nine equations of the (1, 1)-type:

x

n+1

=

α

A

, n = 0, 1, . . . (3.1)

x

n+1

=

α

Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (3.2)

x

n+1

=

α

Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (3.3)

x

n+1

=

βx

n

A

, n = 0, 1, . . . (3.4)

x

n+1

=

β

B

, n = 0, 1, . . . (3.5)

x

n+1

=

βx

n

Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (3.6)

47

48 Chapter 3. (1, 1)-Type Equations

x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

A

, n = 0, 1, . . . (3.7)

x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (3.8)

and

x

n+1

=

γ

C

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (3.9)

Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all parameters that appear in these

equations are positive, the initial conditions are nonnegative, and the denominators are

always positive.

Of these nine equations, Eqs(3.1), (3.5), and (3.9) are trivial. Eqs (3.4) and (3.7)

are linear diﬀerence equation. Every solution of Eq(3.2) is periodic with period two and

every solution of Eq(3.4) is periodic with period four. The remaining two equations,

namely, Eqs(3.6) and (3.8), are treated in the next two sections.

3.2 The Case α = γ = A = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

Cx

n−1

This is the (1, 1)-type Eq(3.6) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

β

C

y

n

reduces to the equation

y

n+1

=

y

n

y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (3.10)

It is easy to see that every positive solution of Eq(3.10) is periodic with period six.

Indeed the solution with initial conditions y

−1

and y

0

is the six-cycle:

y

−1

, y

0

,

y

0

y

−1

,

1

y

−1

,

1

y

0

,

y

−1

y

0

, . . . .

It is interesting to note that except for the equilibrium solution y = 1, every other

solution of Eq(3.10) has prime period six.

3.3. The Case α = β = A = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

Bx

n

49

3.3 The Case α = β = A = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

Bx

n

This is the (1, 1)-type Eq(3.8) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

γ

B

e

y

n

reduces to the linear equation

y

n+1

+ y

n

−y

n−1

= 0, n = 0, 1, . . . . (3.11)

The general solution of Eq(3.11) is

y

n

= C

1

−1 +

√

5

2

n

+ C

2

−1 −

√

5

2

n

, n = 0, 1, . . .

from which the behavior of solutions is easily derived.

3.4 Open Problems and Conjectures

Of the nine equations in this chapter we would like to single out the two nonlinear

equations, (3.2) and (3.6), which possess the property that every positive nontrivial

solution of each of these two equations is periodic with the same prime period, namely

two and six, respectively. Eq(3.3) also has the property that every nontrivial positive

solution is periodic with prime period four but this equation is really a variant of Eq(3.2).

Also every solution of Eq(3.7) is periodic with period two but this is a linear equation.

Eq(3.2) is of the form

x

n+1

= f(x

n

), n = 0, 1, . . . (3.12)

where

f ∈ C[(0, ∞), (0, ∞)], (3.13)

while Eq(3.6) is of the form

x

n+1

= f(x

n

, x

n−1

), n = 0, 1, . . . (3.14)

where

f ∈ C[(0, ∞) ×(0, ∞), (0, ∞)]. (3.15)

What is it that makes every solution of a nonlinear diﬀerence equation periodic with the

same period? We believe this is a question of paramount importance and so we pose the

following open problems.

50 Chapter 3. (1, 1)-Type Equations

Open Problem 3.4.1 Let k ≥ 2 be a positive integer and assume that (3.13) holds.

Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on f so that every positive solution of Eq(3.12)

is periodic with period k.

Open Problem 3.4.2 Let k ≥ 2 be a positive integer and assume that (3.15) holds.

Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on f so that every positive solution of Eq(3.14)

is periodic with period k. In particular address the cases

k = 4, 5, 6.

Open Problem 3.4.3 Let k be a positive integer and assume that

α, β, γ ∈ (−∞, ∞).

Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on α, β, γ so that every solution of the equa-

tion

x

n+1

= α|x

n

| + βx

n−1

+ γ, n = 0, 1, . . .

with real initial conditions is periodic with period k. In particular address the cases:

k = 5, 6, 7, 8, 9.

(See [10], [17], and [59].)

Conjecture 3.4.1 Let f ∈ C

1

[[0, ∞), [0, ∞)] be such that every positive nontrivial so-

lution of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

f(x

n

)

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (3.16)

is periodic with prime period six. Show that

f(x) = x.

Conjecture 3.4.2 Let f ∈ C

1

[[0, ∞), [0, ∞)] be such that every positive nontrivial so-

lution of the diﬀerence equation (3.16) is periodic with prime period ﬁve. Show that

f(x) = 1 + x.

3.4. Open Problems and Conjectures 51

Open Problem 3.4.4 Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on f ∈ C[[0, ∞), [0, ∞)]

such that every positive nontrivial solution of the equation

x

n+1

=

f(x

n

)

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (3.17)

is periodic with prime period three.

Open Problem 3.4.5 Let {p

n

}

∞

n=0

be a sequence of nonzero real numbers. In each of

the following cases investigate the asymptotic behavior of all positive solutions of the

diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

p

n

x

n

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (3.18)

(i) {p

n

}

∞

n=0

converges to a ﬁnite limit;

(ii) {p

n

}

∞

n=0

converges to ±∞;

(iii) {p

n

}

∞

n=0

is periodic with prime period k ≥ 2.

Chapter 4

(1, 2)-Type Equations

4.1 Introduction

Eq(1) contains the following nine equations of the (1, 2)-type:

x

n+1

=

α

A + Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.1)

x

n+1

=

α

A + Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.2)

x

n+1

=

α

Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.3)

x

n+1

=

βx

n

A + Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.4)

x

n+1

=

βx

n

A + Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.5)

x

n+1

=

βx

n

Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.6)

53

54 Chapter 4. (1, 2)-Type Equations

x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

A + Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.7)

x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

A + Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.8)

and

x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (4.9)

Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all parameters that appear in these

equations are positive, the initial conditions are nonnegative, and the denominators are

always positive.

Two of these equations, namely Eqs(4.1) and (4.4) are Riccati-type diﬀerence equa-

tions. (See Section 1.6 in the Preliminary Results). Also Eqs(4.2) and (4.8) are essen-

tially Riccati equations. Indeed if {x

n

} is a solution of Eq(4.2), then the subsequences

{x

2n−1

} and {x

2n

} satisfy the Riccati equation of the form of Eq(4.1). Similarly, if {x

n

}

is a solution of Eq(4.8), then the subsequences {x

2n−1

} and {x

2n

} satisfy the Riccati

equation

y

n+1

=

γy

n

A + Cy

n

n = 0, 1, . . . .

It is also interesting to note that the change of variables

x

n

=

1

y

n

reduces the Riccati equation (4.4) to the linear equation

y

n+1

=

A

β

y

n

+

B

β

, n = 0, 1, . . .

from which the global behavior of solutions is easily derived.

In view of the above, Eqs(4.2), (4.4), and (4.8) will not be discussed any further in

this chapter.

4.2 The Case β = γ = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

α

A+Bx

n

This is the (1, 2)-type Eq(4.1) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

A

B

y

n

4.3. The Case β = γ = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

55

reduces to the Riccati equation

y

n+1

=

p

1 + y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.10)

where

p =

αB

A

2

.

The Riccati number associated with this equation (see Section 1.6) is

R = −p < 0

and so the following result is a consequence of Theorem 1.6.2.

Theorem 4.2.1 The positive equilibrium

y =

−1 +

√

1 + 4p

2

of Eq(4.10) is globally asymptotically stable.

4.3 The Case β = γ = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

This is the (1, 2)-type Eq(4.3) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

√

α

y

n

(4.11)

is transformed to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

B

y

n

+

C

y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (4.12)

Eq(4.12) was investigated in [65]. (See also [12].)

We will ﬁrst show that every solution of Eq(4.12) is bounded and then we will use

the method of “limiting solutions” to show that every solution of Eq(4.12) converges to

its equilibrium

√

B + C.

Theorem 4.3.1 Every solution of Eq(4.12) is bounded and persists.

Proof. It is easy to see that if a solution of Eq(4.12) is bounded from above then it is

also bounded from below and vice-versa. So if the theorem is false there should exist a

solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

which is neither bounded from above nor from below. That is,

limsup

n→∞

y

n

= ∞ and liminf

n→∞

y

n

= 0.

56 Chapter 4. (1, 2)-Type Equations

Then clearly we can ﬁnd indices i and j with 1 ≤ i < j such that

y

i

> y

n

> y

j

for all n ∈ {−1, . . . , j −1}.

Hence

y

j

=

B

y

j−1

+

C

y

j−2

>

B + C

y

i

and

y

i

=

B

y

i−1

+

C

y

i−2

≤

B + C

y

j

.

That is ,

B + C < y

i

y

j

≤ B + C

which is impossible. 2

Theorem 4.3.2 The equilibrium y =

√

B + C of Eq(4.12) is globally asymptotically

stable.

Proof. The linearized equation of Eq(4.12) about the equilibrium y =

√

B + C is

z

n+1

= −

B

B + C

z

n

−

C

B + C

z

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (4.13)

and by Theorem 1.1.1, y is locally asymptotically stable for all positive values of B and

C.

It remains to be shown that y is a global attractor of all solutions of Eq(4.12). To

this end, let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(4.12). Then by Theorem 4.3.1 , {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

is

bounded and persists. Therefore there exist positive numbers m and M such that

m ≤ y

n

≤ M for n ≥ −1.

Let

I = liminf

n→∞

y

n

and S = limsup

n→∞

y

n

.

We will show that

I = S.

By the theory of limiting solutions (see Section 1.5) there exist two solutions {I

n

}

∞

n=−3

and {S

n

}

∞

n=−3

of the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

B

y

n

+

C

y

n−1

, n = −3, −2, . . .

with the following properties:

I

0

= I, S

0

= S

4.4. The Case α = γ = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

A+Cx

n−1

- Pielou’s Equation 57

and

I

n

, S

n

∈ [I, S] for n ≥ −3.

Then

S =

B

S

−1

+

C

S

−2

≤

B + C

I

and

I =

B

I

−1

+

C

I

−2

≥

B + C

S

.

Hence

B + C = SI.

Thus

B

S

−1

+

C

S

−2

= S =

B + C

I

=

B

I

+

C

I

from which it follows that

S

−1

= S

−2

= I. (4.14)

Therefore

B

S

+

C

S

= I = S

−1

=

B

S

−2

+

C

S

−3

from which it follows that

S = S

−2

. (4.15)

From (4.14) and (4.15) we conclude that

S = I

and the proof is complete. 2

4.4 The Case α = γ = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

A+Cx

n−1

- Pielou’s

Equation

This is the (1, 2)-type Eq(4.5) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

A

C

y

n

,

reduces to Pielou’s diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

py

n

1 + y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.16)

where

p =

β

A

.

58 Chapter 4. (1, 2)-Type Equations

This equation was proposed by Pielou in her books ([66], p.22) and ([67], p.79) as a

discrete analogue of the delay logistic equation

dN

dt

= rN(t)

1 −

N(t −τ)

P

, t ≥ 0

which is a prototype of modelling the dynamics of single-species.

Eq(4.16) was investigated in [55]. (See also ([42], p.75).)

When

p ≤ 1,

it follows from Eq(4.16) that every positive solution converges to 0.

Furthermore, 0 is locally asymptotically stable when p ≤ 1 and unstable when p > 1.

So the interesting case for Eq(4.16) is when

p > 1. (4.17)

In this case the zero equilibrium of Eq(4.16) is unstable and Eq(4.16) possesses the

unique positive equilibrium

y = p −1,

which is locally asymptotically stable.

In fact by employing Theorem 1.4.2, it follows that when (4.17) holds, x is globally

asymptotically stable.

We summarize the above discussion in the following theorem.

Theorem 4.4.1 (a) Assume

p ≤ 1.

Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(4.16) is globally asymptotically stable.

(b) Assume y

0

∈ (0, ∞) and

p > 1.

Then the positive equilibrium y = p −1 of Eq(4.16) is globally asymptotically stable.

4.5 The Case α = γ = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

This is the (1, 2)-type Eq(4.6) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

β

B + Cy

n

,

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

p + y

n

p + y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.18)

4.6. The Case α = β = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

59

where

p =

B

C

.

Eq(4.18) was investigated in ([42] Corollary 3.4.1 (e), p. 73) where it was shown that

its equilibrium one is globally asymptotically stable .

4.6 The Case α = β = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

This is the (1, 2)-type Eq(4.7) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

γ

B

y

n

,

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

y

n−1

p + y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.19)

where

p =

A

γ

∈ (0, ∞).

Eq(4.19) was investigated in [28].

The following local result is a straightforward application of the linearized stability

Theorem 1.1.1.

Lemma 4.6.1 (a) Assume

p > 1.

Then 0 is the only equilibrium point of Eq(4.19) and it is locally asymptotically stable.

(b) Assume

p < 1.

Then 0 and y = 1 − p are the only equilibrium points of Eq(4.19) and they are both

unstable. In fact, 0 is a repeller and y = 1 −p is a saddle point equilibrium.

The oscillatory character of the solutions of Eq(4.19) is a consequence of Theorem

1.7.1. That is, except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle, every solution of Eq(4.19) has

semicycles of length one.

It follows directly from Eq(4.19) (see also Section 2.5) that

y

n+1

<

1

p

y

n−1

for n ≥ 0

and so when

p > 1

60 Chapter 4. (1, 2)-Type Equations

the zero equilibrium of Eq(4.19) is globally asymptotically stable. On the other hand

when

p = 1,

y

n+1

< y

n−1

for n ≥ 0

and so every positive solution of Eq(4.19) converges to a period-two solution

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . . .

Furthermore we can see that

φψ = 0

but whether there exists solutions with

φ = ψ = 0

remains an open question.

Finally when

p < 1

by invoking the stable manifold theory one can see that there exist nonoscillatory solu-

tions which converge monotonically to the positive equilibrium 1−p. It follows from the

identity

y

n+1

−y

n−1

=

(1 −p) −y

n

p + y

n

y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

that every oscillatory solution is such that the subsequences of even and odd terms

converge monotonically one to ∞ and the other to 0.

4.7 The Case α = β = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

This is the (1, 2)-type Eq(4.9) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

γ

By

n

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

= p +

y

n−1

y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.20)

where

p =

C

B

∈ (0, ∞).

This equation was investigated in [7] where it was shown that the following statements

are true:

4.7. The Case α = β = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

61

(i) p ≥ 1 is a necessary and suﬃcient condition for every solution of Eq(4.20) to be

bounded;

(ii) When p = 1, every solution of Eq(4.20) converges to a period-two solution;

(iii) When p > 1, the equilibrium y = p + 1 of Eq(4.20) is globally asymptotically

stable.

We now proceed to establish the above results.

Clearly the only equilibrium point of Eq(4.20) is y = p + 1.

The linearized equation of Eq(4.20) about the equilibrium point y = p + 1 is

z

n+1

+

1

p + 1

z

n

−

1

p + 1

z

n−1

= 0, n = 0, 1, . . . . (4.21)

As a simple consequence of the linearized stability Theorem 1.1.1 we obtain the following

result:

Theorem 4.7.1 The equilibrium point y = p + 1 of Eq(4.20) is locally asymptotically

stable when p > 1 and is an unstable saddle point when p < 1.

The next result about semicycles is an immediate consequence of some straightfor-

ward arguments and Theorem 1.7.1.

Theorem 4.7.2 (a) Let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(4.20) which consists of at least

two semicycles. Then {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

is oscillatory. Moreover, with the possible excep-

tion of the ﬁrst semicycle, every semicycle has length one.

(b) Let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(4.20) which consists of a single semicycle. Then

{y

n

}

∞

n=−1

converges monotonically to y = p + 1.

4.7.1 The Case p < 1

Here we show that there exist solutions of Eq(4.20) which are unbounded. In fact the

following result is true.

Theorem 4.7.3 Let p < 1, and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(4.20) such that 0 <

y

−1

≤ 1 and y

0

≥

1

1−p

. Then the following statements are true:

1. lim

n→∞

y

2n

= ∞.

2. lim

n→∞

y

2n+1

= p.

Proof. Note that

1

1−p

> p + 1, and so y

0

> p + 1. It suﬃces to show that

y

1

∈ (p, 1] and y

2

≥ p + y

0

and use induction to complete the proof.

62 Chapter 4. (1, 2)-Type Equations

Indeed y

1

= p +

y

1

y

0

> p. Also,

y

1

= p +

y

−1

y

0

≤ p +

1

y

0

≤ 1,

and so y

1

∈ (p, 1]. Hence y

2

= p +

y

0

y

1

≥ p + y

0

. 2

4.7.2 The Case p = 1

The following result follows from Lemma 2.7.1 and some straightforward arguments. See

also Section 2.5.

Theorem 4.7.4 Let p = 1, and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(4.20). Then the

following statements are true.

(a) Suppose {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

consists of a single semicycle. Then {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

converges mono-

tonically to y = 2.

(b) Suppose {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

consists of at least two semicycles. Then {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

converges to

a prime period-two solution of Eq(4.20).

(c) Every solution of Eq(4.20) converges to a period-two solution if and only if p = 1.

4.7.3 The Case p > 1

Here we show that the equilibrium point y = p+1 of Eq(4.20) is globally asymptotically

stable. The following result will be useful.

Lemma 4.7.1 Let p > 1, and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(4.20). Then

p +

p −1

p

≤ liminf

n→∞

y

n

≤ limsup

n→∞

y

n

≤

p

2

p −1

.

Proof. It follows from Theorem 4.7.2 that we may assume that every semicycle of

{y

n

}

∞

n=−1

has length one, that p < y

n

for all n ≥ −1, and that p < y

0

< p + 1 < y

−1

.

We shall ﬁrst show that limsup

n→∞

y

n

≤

p

2

p−1

. Note that for n ≥ 0,

y

2n+1

< p +

y

2n−1

p

.

So as every solution of the diﬀerence equation

y

m+1

= p +

1

p

y

m

, m = 0, 1, . . .

4.7. The Case α = β = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

63

converges to

p

2

p−1

, it follows that limsup

n→∞

y

n

≤

p

2

p−1

.

We shall next show that p +

p−1

p

≤ liminf

n→∞

y

n

. Let > 0. There clearly exists

N ≥ 0 such that for all n ≥ N,

y

2n−1

<

p

2

+

p −1

.

Let n ≥ N. Then

y

2n

= p +

y

2n−2

y

2n−1

> p + p

p −1

p

2

+

=

p

3

+ p + p(p −1)

p

2

+

.

So as is arbitrary, we have

liminf

n→∞

y

n

≥

p

3

+ p(p −1)

p

2

= p +

p −1

p

.

2

We are now ready for the following result.

Theorem 4.7.5 Let p > 1. Then the equilibrium y = p + 1 is globally asymptotically

stable.

Proof. We know by Theorem 4.7.1 that y = p + 1 is a locally asymptotically stable

equilibrium point of Eq(4.20). So let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(4.20). It suﬃces to

show that

lim

n→∞

y

n

= p + 1.

For x, y ∈ (0, ∞), set

f(x, y) = p +

y

x

.

Then f ∈ C[(0, ∞) ×(0, ∞), (0, ∞)] , f is decreasing in x ∈ (0, ∞) for each y ∈ (0, ∞),

and f is increasing in y ∈ (0, ∞) for each x ∈ (0, ∞). Recall that by Theorem 4.7.4,

there exist no solutions of Eq(4.20) with prime period two. Let > 0, and set

a = p and b =

p

2

+

p −1

.

Note that

f

p

2

+

p −1

, p

= p + p

p −1

p

2

+

> p

and

f

p,

p

2

+

p −1

=

p

3

+ p

p

2

−p

=

p

2

+

p −1

.

Hence

p < f(x, y) <

p

2

+

p −1

for all x, y ∈

p,

p

2

+

p −1

.

64 Chapter 4. (1, 2)-Type Equations

Finally note that by Lemma 4.7.1,

p < p +

p −1

p

≤ liminf

n→∞

y

n

≤ limsup

n→∞

y

n

≤

p

2

p −1

<

p

2

+

p −1

and so by Theorem 1.4.6,

lim

n→∞

y

n

= p + 1.

2

4.8 Open Problems and Conjectures

Conjecture 4.8.1 Consider the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

A

x

n−k

+

B

x

n−l

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.22)

where

A, B ∈ (0, ∞) and k, l ∈ {0, 1, . . .} with k < l.

and where the initial conditions x

−l

, . . . , x

0

are arbitrary positive real numbers.

Show that every solution of Eq(4.22) converges, either to the equilibrium or to a

periodic solution with period p ≥ 2 and that what happens and the exact value of p are

uniquely determined from the characteristic roots of the linearized equation

λ

l+1

+

A

A + B

λ

l−k

+

B

A + B

= 0.

(See [19], [23], [25], [60], and [61].)

Open Problem 4.8.1 Let

. . . , φ

1

, φ

2

, . . . , φ

p

, . . .

be a given prime period p solution of Eq(4.22). Determine the set of all positive initial

conditions x

−l

, . . . , x

0

such that {x

n

}

∞

n=−l

converges to this periodic solution.

Open Problem 4.8.2 (see [18]) Assume that A, B ∈ (0, ∞).

(a) Find all initial conditions y

−1

, y

0

with

y

−1

y

0

< 0

for which the equation

y

n+1

=

A

y

n

+

B

y

n−1

, (4.23)

is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0.

(b) Assume that the initial conditions y

−1

, y

0

are such that y

−1

y

0

< 0 and such that

Eq(4.23) is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. Investigate the global behavior of the solution

{y

n

}. Is it bounded? Does lim

n→∞

y

n

exist? When does {y

n

} converge to a two cycle?

4.8. Open Problems and Conjectures 65

Conjecture 4.8.2 Assume that p = 1. Show that Eq(4.19) has a solution which con-

verges to zero.

Open Problem 4.8.3 Assume that p < 1. Determine the set of initial conditions

y

−1

, y

0

∈ (0, ∞)

for which the solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(4.19) is bounded.

Open Problem 4.8.4 Determine the set G of all initial conditions (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ R × R

through which the equation

y

n+1

=

y

n−1

1 + y

n

is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0 and, for these initial points, investigate the global character

of {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

.

Conjecture 4.8.3 Show that Eq(4.20) possesses a solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

which remains

above the equilibrium for all n ≥ −1.

Open Problem 4.8.5 (a) Assume p ∈ (0, ∞). Determine all initial conditions y

−1

, y

0

∈

R such that the equation (4.20) is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0.

(b) Let y

−1

, y

0

∈ R be such that Eq(4.20) is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. For such an

initial point, investigate the boundedness, the asymptotic behavior, and the periodic

nature of the solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(4.20).

(c) Discuss (a) and (b) when p < 0.

Open Problem 4.8.6 (See [13]) Find the set G of all initial points (x

−1

, x

0

) ∈ R ×R

through which the equation

x

n+1

= −1 +

x

n−1

x

n

(4.24)

is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0.

Conjecture 4.8.4 Assume that (x

−1

, x

0

) ∈ R × R is such that the equation (4.24) is

well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0 and bounded. Show that {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

is a three cycle.

66 Chapter 4. (1, 2)-Type Equations

Open Problem 4.8.7 Let f ∈ C[(0, ∞), (0, ∞)]. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient con-

ditions on f for every positive solution of the equation

x

n+1

=

f(x

n

)

x

n

+ x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

to be bounded.

Open Problem 4.8.8 Let a, a

i

∈ (0, ∞) for i = 0, . . . , k. Investigate the global asymp-

totic stability of the equilibrium points of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

x

n

a + a

0

x

n

+ . . . + a

k

x

n−k

, n = 0, 1, . . .

with positive initial conditions.

Conjecture 4.8.5 (See [27]) Assume r ∈ (0, ∞). Show that every positive solution of

the population model

J

n+1

= J

n−1

e

r−(J

n

+J

n−1

)

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to a period-two solution.

Conjecture 4.8.6 (Pielou’s Discrete Logistic Model; see [55], [66], and [67].) As-

sume

α ∈ (1, ∞) and k ∈ {0, 1, . . .}.

Show that the positive equilibrium of Pielou’s discrete logistic model

x

n+1

=

αx

n

1 + x

n−k

, n = 0, 1, . . .

with positive initial conditions is globally asymptotically stable if and only if

α −1

α

< 2 cos

kπ

2k + 1

.

Open Problem 4.8.9 (See [5]) For which initial values x

−1

, x

0

∈ (0, ∞) does the se-

quence deﬁned by

x

n+1

= 1 +

x

n−1

x

n

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to two?

4.8. Open Problems and Conjectures 67

(See also Section 4.7)

Open Problem 4.8.10 (See [31]) Consider the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

= y

n−1

e

−y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.25)

with nonnegative initial conditions.

One can easily see that every solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(4.25) converges to a period-two

solution

. . . , , 0, , 0, . . . .

More precisely, each of the subsequences {y

2n

}

∞

n=0

and {y

2n+1

}

∞

n=−1

is decreasing and

[ lim

n→∞

y

2n

][ lim

n→∞

y

2n+1

] = 0.

(a) Find all initial points y

−1

, y

0

∈ [0, ∞) through which the solutions of Eq(4.25)

converge to zero. In other words, ﬁnd the basin of attraction of the equilibrium of

Eq(4.25).

(b) Determine the limits of the subsequences of even and odd terms of every solution

of Eq(4.25), in terms of the initial conditions y

−1

and y

0

of the solution.

Open Problem 4.8.11 Assume p ∈ (0, 1).

(a) Find the set B of all initial conditions y

−1

, y

0

∈ (0, ∞) such that the solutions

{y

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(4.20) are bounded.

(b) Let y

−1

, y

0

∈ B. Investigate the asymptotic behavior of {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

.

Open Problem 4.8.12 Let {p

n

}

∞

n=0

be a convergent sequence of nonnegative real num-

bers with a ﬁnite limit,

p = lim

n→∞

p

n

.

Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of

each of the following diﬀerence equations:

y

n+1

=

p

n

y

n

+

1

y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.26)

y

n+1

=

p

n

y

n

1 + y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.27)

68 Chapter 4. (1, 2)-Type Equations

y

n+1

=

p

n

+ y

n

p

n

+ y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.28)

y

n+1

=

y

n−1

p

n

+ y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (4.29)

y

n+1

= p

n

+

y

n−1

y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (4.30)

Open Problem 4.8.13 Let {p

n

}

∞

n=0

be a periodic sequence of nonnegative real numbers

with period k ≥ 2. Investigate the global character of all positive solutions of each of

Eqs(4.26) - (4.30).

Open Problem 4.8.14 For each of the following diﬀerence equations determine the

“good” set G ⊂ R × R of all initial conditions (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ R × R through which the

equation is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. Then for every (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ G, investigate the long

term behavior of the solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

:

y

n+1

=

y

n

1 −y

n−1

, (4.31)

y

n+1

=

1 + y

n

1 −y

n−1

, (4.32)

y

n+1

=

y

n−1

1 −y

n

, (4.33)

y

n+1

= −1 +

y

n−1

y

n

. (4.34)

For those equations from the above list for which you were successful, extend your result

by introducing arbitrary real parameters in the equation.

Chapter 5

(2, 1)-Type Equations

5.1 Introduction

Eq(1) contains the following nine equations of the (2, 1)-type:

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

A

, n = 0, 1, . . . (5.1)

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (5.2)

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (5.3)

x

n+1

=

α + γx

n−1

A

, n = 0, 1, . . . (5.4)

x

n+1

=

α + γx

n−1

Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (5.5)

x

n+1

=

α + γx

n−1

Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (5.6)

69

70 Chapter 5. (2, 1)-Type Equations

x

n+1

=

βx

n

+ γx

n−1

A

, n = 0, 1, . . . (5.7)

x

n+1

=

βx

n

+ γx

n−1

Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (5.8)

and

x

n+1

=

βx

n

+ γx

n−1

Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (5.9)

Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all parameters that appear in these

equations are positive, the initial conditions are nonnegative, and the denominators are

always positive.

Of these nine equations, Eqs(5.1), (5.4) and (5.7) are linear. Eq(5.2) is a Riccati

equation and Eq(5.6) is essentially like Eq(5.2).

The change of variables

x

n

=

γ

B

y

n

,

reduces Eq(5.8) to Eq(4.20) with p =

β

γ

, which was investigated in Section 4.7.

Finally the change of variables

x

n

=

γ

C

+

β

C

y

n

,

reduces Eq(5.9) to Eq(4.18) with p =

γ

β

, which was investigated in Section 4.5.

Therefore there remain Eqs(5.3) and (5.5), which will be investigated in the next two

sections.

5.2 The Case γ = A = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

Cx

n−1

- Lyness’

Equation

This is the (2, 1)-type Eq(5.3) which by the change of variables reduces to the equation

y

n+1

=

p + y

n

y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (5.10)

5.2. The Case γ = A = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

Cx

n−1

- Lyness’ Equation 71

where

p =

αC

β

2

.

The special case of Eq(5.10) where

p = 1

was discovered by Lyness in 1942 while he was working on a problem in Number Theory.

(See ([42], p. 131) for the history of the problem.) In this special case, the equation

becomes

y

n+1

=

1 + y

n

y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (5.11)

every solution of which is periodic with period ﬁve. Indeed the solution of Eq(5.11) with

initial conditions y

−1

and y

0

is the ﬁve-cycle:

y

−1

, y

0

,

1 + y

0

y

−1

,

1 + y

−1

+ y

0

y

−1

y

0

,

1 + y

−1

y

0

, . . . .

Eq(5.10) possesses the invariant

I

n

= (p + y

n−1

+ y

n

)

1 +

1

y

n−1

1 +

1

y

n

= constant (5.12)

from which it follows that every solution of Eq(5.10) is bounded from above and from

below by positive constants.

It was shown in [30] that no nontrivial solution of Eq(5.10) has a limit.

It was also shown in [44] by using KAM theory that the positive equilibrium y of

Eq(5.10) is stable but not asymptotically stable. This result was also established in [49]

by using a Lyapunov function.

Concerning the semicycles of solutions of Eq(5.10) the following result was established

in [43]:

Theorem 5.2.1 Assume that p > 0. Then the following statements about the positive

solutions of Eq(5.10) are true:

(a) The absolute extreme in a semicycle occurs in the ﬁrst or in the second term.

(b) Every nontrivial semicycle, after the ﬁrst one, contains at least two and at most

three terms.

There is substantial literature on Lyness’ Equation. See [11], [42], [43], [57]-[59], [71],

and [72] and the references cited therein.

72 Chapter 5. (2, 1)-Type Equations

5.3 The Case β = A = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

Bx

n

This is the (2, 1)-type Eq(5.5) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

γ

B

y

n

reduces to the equation

y

n+1

=

p + y

n−1

y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (5.13)

where

p =

αB

γ

2

.

Eq(5.13) was investigated in [28].

By the linearized stability Theorem 1.1.1 one can see that the unique equilibrium

point

y =

1 +

√

1 + 4p

2

of Eq(5.13) is a saddle point.

By Theorem 1.7.1 one can see that except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle, every

oscillatory solution of Eq(5.13) has semicycles of length one.

Concerning the nonoscillatory solutions of Eq(5.13) one can easily see that every

nonoscillatory solution of Eq(5.13) converges monotonically to the equilibrium y.

The global character of solutions of Eq(5.13) is a consequence of the identity

y

n+1

−y

n−1

=

y

n−1

−y

n−2

y

n

for n ≥ 1.

From this it follows that a solution of Eq(5.13) either approaches the positive equilibrium

y monotonically or it oscillates about y with semicycles of length one in such a way that

{y

2n

} and {y

2n+1

} converge monotonically one to zero and other to ∞.

5.4 Open Problems and Conjectures

By using the invariant (5.12), one can easily see that every solution of Lyness’ Eq(5.10)

is bounded from above and from below by positive numbers. To this day we have not

found a proof for the boundedness of solutions of Eq(5.10) without using essentially the

invariant.

Open Problem 5.4.1 Show that every solution of Lyness’ Eq(5.10) is bounded without

using the invariant (5.12).

5.4. Open Problems and Conjectures 73

Open Problem 5.4.2 Assume that f ∈ C[(0, ∞), (0, ∞)]. Obtain necessary and suﬃ-

cient conditions in terms of f so that every positive solution of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

f(x

n

)

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (5.14)

is bounded.

What is it that makes Lyness’ equation possess an invariant? What type of diﬀerence

equations possess an invariant? Along these lines, we oﬀer the following open problems

and conjectures.

Open Problem 5.4.3 Assume that f ∈ C[(0, ∞), (0, ∞)]. Obtain necessary and suﬃ-

cient conditions in terms of f so that the diﬀerence equation (5.14) possesses a (non-

trivial) invariant.

Conjecture 5.4.1 Assume that f ∈ C[(0, ∞), (0, ∞)] and that the diﬀerence equation

(5.14) possesses a unique positive equilibrium point x and a nontrivial invariant. Show

that the linearized equation of Eq(5.14) about x does not have both eigenvalues in |λ| < 1

and does not have both eigenvalues in |λ| > 1.

When we allow the initial conditions to be real numbers the equation

y

n+1

=

p + y

n

y

n−1

(5.15)

may not even be well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. To illustrate, we oﬀer the following open

problems and conjectures.

Open Problem 5.4.4 (See [26].) Assume p ∈ (−∞, ∞). Determine the set G of all

initial conditions y

−1

, y

0

∈ (−∞, ∞) through which Eq(5.15) is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0.

Conjecture 5.4.2 Let G be the set of initial conditions deﬁned in the Open problem

5.4.4. Show that the subset of G through which the solutions of Eq(5.15) are unbounded

is a set of measure zero.

74 Chapter 5. (2, 1)-Type Equations

Conjecture 5.4.3 Assume p ∈ (−∞, ∞). Show that the set of points (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈

(−∞, ∞) × (−∞, ∞) through which Eq(5.15) is not well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0, is a

set of points without interior.

Open Problem 5.4.5 Determine all positive integers k with the property that every

positive solution of the equation

y

n+1

=

1 + . . . + y

n−k

y

n−k−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

is periodic.

Conjecture 5.4.4 Show that every positive solution of the equation

y

n+1

=

y

n

y

n−1

+

y

n−4

y

n−3

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to a period-six solution.

Conjecture 5.4.5 (See [20]) Show that every positive solution of the equation

y

n+1

=

1

y

n

y

n−1

+

1

y

n−3

y

n−4

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to a period-three solution.

Conjecture 5.4.6 Show that the equation

y

n+1

=

1 + y

n−1

y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . .

has a nontrivial positive solution which decreases monotonically to the equilibrium of the

equation.

Open Problem 5.4.6 Find the set G of all initial points (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ R × R through

which the equation

y

n+1

=

1 + y

n−1

y

n

is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. Determine the periodic character and the asymptotic

behavior of all solutions with (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ G.

5.4. Open Problems and Conjectures 75

Conjecture 5.4.7 (May’s Host Parasitoid Model; see [59]) Assume α > 1. Show

that every positive solution of May’s Host Parasitoid Model

x

n+1

=

αx

2

n

(1 + x

n

)x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

is bounded.

Conjecture 5.4.8 (The Gingerbreadman Map; see [59]) Let A ∈ (0, ∞). Show that

every positive solution of the equation

x

n+1

=

max{x

2

n

, A}

x

n

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (5.16)

is bounded.

Note that the change of variables

x

n

=

A

1+y

n

2

if A > 1

e

y

n

2

if A = 1

A

−1+y

n

2

if A < 1

reduces Eq(5.16) to

y

n+1

= |y

n

| −y

n−1

+ δ, n = 0, 1, . . . (5.17)

where

δ =

1 if A < 1

0 if A = 1

−1 if A > 1.

When δ = 1, Eq(5.17) is called the Gingerbreadman Map and was investigated

by Devaney [17].

Chapter 6

(2, 2)-Type Equations

6.1 Introduction

Eq(1) contains the following nine equations of the (2, 2)-type:

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

A + Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.1)

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

A + Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.2)

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.3)

x

n+1

=

α + γx

n−1

A + Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.4)

x

n+1

=

α + γx

n−1

A + Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.5)

x

n+1

=

α + γx

n−1

Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.6)

77

78 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

x

n+1

=

βx

n

+ γx

n−1

A + Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.7)

x

n+1

=

βx

n

+ γx

n−1

A + Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.8)

x

n+1

=

βx

n

+ γx

n−1

Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (6.9)

Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all parameters that appear in these

equations are positive, the initial conditions are nonnegative, and the denominators are

always positive.

Eq(6.5) is essentially similar to Eq(6.1). In fact if {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

is a positive solution of

Eq(6.5) then {x

2n

}

∞

n=0

and {x

2n−1

}

∞

n=0

are both solutions of the Riccati equations

z

n+1

=

α + γz

n

A + Cz

n

, n = 0, 1, . . .

with

z

n

= x

2n

for n ≥ 0

and

z

n+1

=

α + γz

n

A + Cz

n

, n = −1, 0, . . .

with

z

n

= x

2n+1

for n ≥ −1,

respectively.

Therefore we will omit any further discussion of Eq(6.5).

6.2 The Case γ = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

A+Bx

n

- Riccati

Equation

This is the (2, 2)-type Eq(6.1) which is in fact a Riccati equation. See Section 1.6.

To avoid a degenerate situation we will assume that

αB −βA = 0.

6.3. The Case γ = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

A+Cx

n−1

79

The Riccati number associated with this equation is

R =

βA −αB

(β + A)

2

and clearly

R <

1

4

.

Now the following result is a consequence of Theorem 1.6.2:

Theorem 6.2.1 The positive equilibrium of Eq(6.1) is globally asymptotically stable.

6.3 The Case γ = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

A+Cx

n−1

This is the (2, 2)-type Eq(6.2) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

A

C

y

n

reduces to the equation

y

n+1

=

p + qy

n

1 + y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.10)

where

p =

αC

A

2

and q =

β

A

.

(Eq(6.10) was investigated in [42] and [43]. See also [36].)

Eq(6.10) has the unique positive equilibrium y given by

y =

q −1 +

(q −1)

2

+ 4p

2

.

By applying the linearized stability Theorem 1.1.1 we obtain the following result.

Lemma 6.3.1 The equilibrium y of Eq(6.10) is locally asymptotically stable for all val-

ues of the parameters p and q.

Eq(6.10) is a very simple looking equation for which it has long been conjectured

that its equilibrium is globally asymptotically stable. To this day, the conjecture has

not been proven or refuted.

The main results known about Eq(6.10) are the following:

Theorem 6.3.1 Every solution of Eq(6.10) is bounded from above and from below by

positive constants.

80 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

Proof. Let {y

n

} be a solution of Eq(6.10). Clearly, if the solution is bounded from

above by a constant M, then

y

n+1

≥

p

1 + M

and so it is also bounded from below. Now assume for the sake of contradiction that the

solution is not bounded from above. Then there exists a subsequence {y

1+n

k

}

∞

k=0

such

that

lim

k→∞

n

k

= ∞, lim

k→∞

y

1+n

k

= ∞, and y

1+n

k

= max{y

n

: n ≤ n

k

} for k ≥ 0.

From (6.10) we see that

y

n+1

< qy

n

+ p for n ≥ 0

and so

lim

k→∞

y

n

k

= lim

k→∞

y

n

k

−1

= ∞.

Hence, for suﬃciently large k,

0 ≤ y

1+n

k

−y

n

k

=

p + [(q −1) −y

n

k

−1

]y

n

k

1 + y

n

k

−1

< 0

which is a contradiction and the proof is complete. 2

The oscillatory character of solutions for Eq(6.10) is described by the following result:

Theorem 6.3.2 Let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a nontrivial solution of Eq(6.10). Then the following

statements are true:

(i) Every semicycle, except perhaps for the ﬁrst one, has at least two terms.

(ii) The extreme in each semicycle occurs at either the ﬁrst term or the second. Fur-

thermore after the ﬁrst, the remaining terms in a positive semicycle are strictly

decreasing and in a negative semicycle are strictly increasing.

(iii) In any two consecutive semicycles, their extrema cannot be consecutive terms.

(iv) Assume

q ≤ p.

Then, except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle, every semicycle contains two or three

terms. Furthermore, in every semicycle, there is at most one term which follows

the extreme.

Proof. We present the proofs for positive semicycles only. The proofs for negative

semicycles are similar and will be omitted.

6.3. The Case γ = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

A+Cx

n−1

81

(i) Assume that for some N ≥ 0,

y

N−1

< y and y

N

≥ y.

Then

y

N+1

=

p + qy

N

1 + y

N−1

>

p + qy

1 + y

= y.

(ii) Assume that for some N ≥ 0, the ﬁrst two terms in a positive semicycle are y

N

and y

N+1

. Then

y

N

≥ y, y

N+1

> y

and

y

N+2

y

N+1

=

1

y

N+1

p + qy

N+1

1 + y

N

=

p

y

N+1

+ q

1 + y

N

<

p

y

+ q

1 + y

= 1.

(iii) We consider the case where a negative semicycle is followed by a positive one. The

opposite case is similar and will be omitted. So assume that for some N ≥ 0 the

last two terms in a negative semicycle are y

N−1

and y

N

with

y

N−1

≥ y

N

.

Then

y

N+1

=

p + qy

N

1 + y

N−1

<

p + qy

N+1

1 + y

N

= y

N+2

.

(iv) Assume that for some N ≥ 0, the terms y

N

, y

N+1

, and y

N+2

are all in a positive

semicycle. Then

y

N+3

=

p + qy

N+2

1 + y

N+1

<

p + qy

N+1

1 + y

N+1

<

p + qy

1 + y

= y.

2

Theorem 6.3.3 The positive equilibrium of Eq(6.10) is globally asymptotically stable if

one of the following two conditions holds:

(i)

q < 1;

(ii)

q ≥ 1

and

either p ≤ q or q < p ≤ 2(q + 1).

82 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

Proof.

(i) In view of Lemma 6.3.1, it remains to show that every solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(6.10)

tends to y as n →∞. To this end, let

i = liminf

n→∞

y

n

and s = limsup

n→∞

y

n

which by Theorem 6.3.1 exist and are positive numbers. Then Eq(6.10) yields

i ≥

p + qi

1 + s

and s ≤

p + qs

1 + i

.

Hence

p + (q −1)i ≤ is ≤ p + (q −1)s

and so because q < 1,

i ≥ s

from which the result follows.

(ii) The proof when

p < q

follows by applying Theorem 1.4.2. This result was ﬁrst established in [43].

For the proof when

1 ≤ q ≤ p ≤ 2(q + 1)

see ([42], Theorem 3.4.3 (f), p. 71).

2

6.4 The Case γ = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

This is the (2, 2)-type Eq(6.3) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

β

B

y

n

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

y

n

+ p

y

n

+ qy

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.11)

where

p =

αB

β

2

and q =

C

B

.

Eq(6.11) was investigated in [15].

The following result is a consequence of the linearized stability Theorem 1.1.1.

6.4. The Case γ = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

83

Theorem 6.4.1 The unique positive equilibrium point

y =

1 +

1 + 4p(q + 1)

2(q + 1)

of Eq(6.11) is locally asymptotically stable for all values of the parameters p and q.

6.4.1 Invariant Intervals

The following result establishes that the interval I with end points 1 and

p

q

is an invari-

ant interval for Eq(6.11) in the sense that if, for some k ≥ 0, two consecutive values

y

k−1

and y

k

of a solution lie in I, then y

m

∈ I for all m > k.

Lemma 6.4.1 Let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(6.11). Then the following statements

are true:

(a) Assume p < q and suppose that for some k ≥ 0,

y

k−1

, y

k

∈

¸

p

q

, 1

¸

.

Then

y

n

∈

¸

p

q

, 1

¸

for all n > k.

(b) Assume p > q and suppose that for some k ≥ 0,

y

k−1

, y

k

∈

¸

1,

p

q

¸

.

Then

y

n

∈

¸

1,

p

q

¸

for all n > k.

Proof.

(a) The basic ingredient behind the proof is the fact that when u, v ∈ [

p

q

, ∞), the

function

f(u, v) =

u + p

u + qv

is increasing in u and decreasing in v. Indeed,

y

k+1

=

y

k

+ p

y

k

+ qy

k−1

≤

y

k

+ p

y

k

+ q

p

q

= 1,

y

k+1

=

y

k

+ p

y

k

+ qy

k−1

≥

p

q

+ p

p

q

+ q

>

p

q

and the proof follows by induction.

(b) The proof is similar and will be omitted. 2

84 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

6.4.2 Semicycle Analysis

Let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(6.11). Then observe that the following identities are

true:

y

n+1

−1 = q

p

q

−y

n−1

y

n

+ qy

n−1

for n ≥ 0, (6.12)

y

n+1

−

p

q

=

(q −p) + pq(1 −y

n−1

)

q(y

n

+ qy

n−1

)

for n ≥ 0, (6.13)

and

y

n

−y

n+4

=

(y

n

−1)[qy

n

y

n+3

+ y

n+1

y

n+3

] + qy

n+1

(y

n

−

p

q

)

q(p + y

n+1

) + y

n+3

(y

n+1

+ qy

n

)

for n ≥ 0. (6.14)

First we will analyze the semicycles of the solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

under the assumption

that

p > q. (6.15)

The following result is a direct consequence of (6.12)-(6.15):

Lemma 6.4.2 Assume that (6.15) holds and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(6.11).

Then the following statements are true:

(i) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N−1

<

p

q

, then y

N+1

> 1;

(ii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N−1

=

p

q

, then y

N+1

= 1;

(iii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N−1

>

p

q

, then y

N+1

< 1;

(iv) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N−1

≥ 1, then y

N+1

<

p

q

;

(v) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N−1

≤ 1, then y

N+1

> 1;

(vi) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≥

p

q

, then y

N+4

< y

N

;

(vii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≤ 1, then y

N+4

> y

N

;

(viii) If for some N ≥ 0, 1 ≤ y

N−1

≤

p

q

, then 1 ≤ y

N+1

≤

p

q

;

(ix) If for some N ≥ 0, 1 ≤ y

N−1

, y

N

≤

p

q

, then y

n

∈ [1,

p

q

] for n ≥ N. That is [1,

p

q

] is

an invariant interval for Eq(6.11);

(x)

1 < y <

p

q

.

6.4. The Case γ = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

85

The next result, which is a consequence of Theorem 1.7.2, states that when (6.15)

holds, every nontrivial and oscillatory solution of Eq(6.11), which lies in the interval

[1,

p

q

], oscillates about the equilibrium y with semicycles of length one or two.

Theorem 6.4.2 Assume that Eq(6.11) holds. Then every nontrivial and oscillatory

solution of Eq(6.11) which lies in the interval [1,

p

q

], oscillates about y with semicycles

of length one or two.

Next we will analyze the semicycles of the solutions {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

under the assumption

that

q = p. (6.16)

In this case, Eq(6.11) reduces to

y

n+1

=

y

n

+ p

y

n

+ py

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.17)

with the unique equilibrium point

y = 1.

Also identities (6.12)-(6.14) reduce to

y

n+1

−1 = p

1 −y

n−1

y

n

+ py

n−1

for n ≥ 0 (6.18)

and

y

n

−y

n+4

= (y

n

−1)

py

n+1

+ py

n

y

n+3

+ y

n+1

y

n+3

p(p + y

n+1

) + y

n+3

(y

n+1

+ py

n

)

for n ≥ 0. (6.19)

and so the following results follow immediately:

Lemma 6.4.3 Let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(6.17). Then the following statements

are true:

(i) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N−1

< 1, then y

N+1

> 1;

(ii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N−1

= 1, then y

N+1

= 1;

(iii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N−1

> 1, then y

N+1

< 1;

(iv) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

< 1, then y

N

< y

N+4

< 1;

(v) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

> 1, then y

N

> y

N+4

> 1.

Corollary 6.4.1 Let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a nontrivial solution of Eq(6.17). Then {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

oscillates about the equilibrium 1 and, except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle, the following

are true:

86 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

(i) If y

−1

= 1 or y

0

= 1, then the positive semicycle has length three and the negative

semicycle has length one.

(ii) If (1 −y

−1

)(1 −y

0

) = 0, then every semicycle has length two.

Finally we will analyze the semicycles of the solutions {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

under the assumption

that

p < q. (6.20)

The following result is a direct consequence of (6.12)-(6.14) and (6.20).

Lemma 6.4.4 Assume that (6.20) holds and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(6.11).

Then the following statements are true:

(i) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N−1

<

p

q

, then y

N+1

> 1;

(ii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N−1

=

p

q

, then y

N+1

= 1;

(iii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N−1

>

p

q

, then y

N+1

< 1;

(iv) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N−1

≤ 1, then y

N+1

>

p

q

;

(v) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N−1

≤

p

q

, then y

N+1

>

p

q

;

(vi) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≥ 1, then y

N+4

< y

N

;

(vii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≤

p

q

, then y

N+4

> y

N

;

(viii) If for some N ≥ 0,

p

q

≤ y

N−1

≤ 1, then

p

q

≤ y

N+1

≤ 1;

(ix) If for some N ≥ 0,

p

q

≤ y

N−1

, y

N

≤ 1, then y

n

∈ [

p

q

, 1] for n ≥ N. That is, [

p

q

, 1] is

an invariant interval for Eq(6.11);

(x)

p

q

< y < 1.

The next result, which is a consequence of Theorem 1.7.4, states that when (6.20)

holds, every nontrivial and oscillatory solution of Eq(6.11) which lies in the interval

[

p

q

, 1], after the ﬁrst semicycle, oscillates with semicycles of length at least two.

Theorem 6.4.3 Assume that (6.20) holds. Then every nontrivial and oscillatory solu-

tion of Eq(6.11) which lies in the interval [

p

q

, 1], after the ﬁrst semicycle, oscillates with

semicycles of length at least two.

6.4. The Case γ = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

87

How do solutions which do not eventually lie in the invariant interval behave?

First assume that

p > q

and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution which does not eventually lie in the interval I = [1,

p

q

].

Then one can see that the solution oscillates relative to the interval [1,

p

q

], essentially in

one of the following two ways:

(i) Two consecutive terms in (

p

q

, ∞) are followed by two consecutive terms in (0, 1),

are followed by two consecutive terms in (

p

q

, ∞), and so on. The solution never visits

the interval (1,

p

q

).

(ii) There exists exactly one term in (

p

q

, ∞), which is followed by exactly one term in

(1,

p

q

), which is followed by exactly one term in (0, 1), which is followed by exactly one

term in (1,

p

q

), which is followed by exactly one term in (

p

q

, ∞), and so on. The solution

visits consecutively the intervals

. . . ,

p

q

, ∞

,

1,

p

q

, (0, 1),

1,

p

q

,

p

q

, ∞

, . . .

in this order with one term per interval.

The situation is essentially the same relative to the interval [

p

q

, 1] when

p < q.

6.4.3 Global Stability and Boundedness

Our goal in this section is to establish the following result:

Theorem 6.4.4 (a) The equilibrium y of Eq(6.11) is globally asymptotically stable

when

q ≤ 1 + 4p. (6.21)

(b) Assume that

q > 1 + 4p.

Then every solution of Eq(6.11) lies eventually in the interval

p

q

, 1

.

Proof.

(a) We have already shown that the equilibrium y is locally asymptotically stable so

it remains to be shown that y is a global attractor of every solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

of

Eq(6.11).

Case 1 Assume p = q. It follows from (6.19) that each of the four subsequences

{y

4n+i

}

∞

n=0

for i = 1, 2, 3, 4

88 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

is either identically equal to one or else it is strictly monotonically convergent. Set

L

i

= lim

n→∞

y

4n+i

for i = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Thus clearly

. . . , L

1

, L

2

, L

3

, L

4

, . . . (6.22)

is a periodic solution of Eq(6.11) with period four. By applying (6.19) to the

solution (6.22) we see that

L

i

= 1 for i = 1, 2, 3, 4

and so

lim

n→∞

y

n

= 1.

Case 2 Assume p = q. First, we assume that p > q.

Recall from Lemma 6.4.2 that [1,

p

q

] is an invariant interval. In this interval the

function

f(u, v) =

u + p

u + qv

is decreasing in both variables and so it follows by applying Theorem 1.4.7 that

every solution of Eq(6.11) with two consecutive values in [1,

p

q

] converges to y. By

using an argument similar to that in the case p = q, we can see that if a solution is

not eventually in [1,

p

q

], it converges to a periodic solution with period-four which

is not the equilibrium. By applying (6.14) to this period four solution we obtain a

contradiction and so every solution of Eq(6.11) must lie eventually in [1,

p

q

].

Hence for every solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(6.11)

lim

n→∞

y

n

= y

and the proof is complete.

Now, assume that p < q.

As in Case 2 we can see that every solution of Eq(6.11) must eventually lie in the

interval [

p

q

, 1]. In this interval the function

f(u, v) =

u + p

u + qv

is increasing in u and decreasing in v. Under the assumption that q ≤ 1 + 4p,

Theorem 1.4.5 applies and so every solution of Eq(6.11) converges to y.

(b) The proof follows from the discussion in part (a).

2

6.5. The Case β = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

89

6.5 The Case β = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

This is the (2, 2)-type Eq(6.4) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

A

B

y

n

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

p + qy

n−1

1 + y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.23)

where

p =

αB

A

2

and q =

γ

A

.

(Eq(6.23) was investigated in [28].)

The only equilibrium point of Eq(6.23) is

y =

q −1 +

(q −1)

2

+ 4p

2

and by applying the linearized stability Theorem 1.1.1 we obtain the following result:

Theorem 6.5.1 The equilibrium y of Eq(6.23) is locally asymptotically stable when

q < 1,

and is an unstable saddle point when

q > 1.

Concerning prime period-two solutions, the following result is a consequence of the

results in Section 2.7.

Theorem 6.5.2 (a) Eq(6.23) has a prime period-two solution

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . . (6.24)

if and only if

q = 1. (6.25)

(b) Assume (6.25) holds. Then the values φ and ψ of all prime period-two solutions

(6.24) are given by

{φ, ψ ∈ (0, ∞) : φψ = p}.

(c) Assume that (6.25) holds. Then every solution of Eq(6.23) converges to a period

two solution.

90 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

6.5.1 Semicycle Analysis

Our results on the semicycles of solutions for Eq(6.23) are as follows:

Theorem 6.5.3 Let {y

n

} be a nontrivial solution of Eq(6.23) and let y denote the

unique positive equilibrium of Eq(6.23). Then the following statements are true:

(a) After the ﬁrst semicycle, an oscillatory solution {y

n

} of Eq(6.23) oscillates about

the equilibrium y with semicycles of length one.

(b) Assume p ≥ q. Then every nonoscillatory solution of Eq(6.23) converges mono-

tonically to the equilibrium y.

Proof. (a) This follows immediately from Theorem 1.7.1

(b) Let {y

n

} be a nonoscillatory solution of Eq(6.23). We will assume that there exists

a positive integer K such that y

n−1

≥ y for every n ≥ K. The case where y

n−1

< y for

n ≥ K is similar and will be omitted. It is suﬃcient to show that {y

n

} is a decreasing

sequence for n ≥ K. So assume for the sake of contradiction that for some n

0

≥ K,

y

n

0

> y

n

0

−1

.

Clearly, the condition p ≥ q implies that the function

f(x) =

p + qx

1 + x

is decreasing. Then

y

n

0

+1

=

p + qy

n

0

−1

1 + y

n

0

= f(y

n

0

, y

n

0

−1

) < f(y

n

0

, y

n

0

) < f(y, y) = y,

which is impossible. 2

6.5.2 The Case q < 1

The main result in this section is the following:

Theorem 6.5.4 Assume that

q < 1.

Then the positive equilibrium of Eq(6.23) is globally asymptotically stable.

Proof. Clearly

y

n+1

=

p + qy

n−1

1 + y

n

< p + qy

n−1

, n ≥ 0. (6.26)

Set

M =

p

1 −q

+ ,

6.5. The Case β = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

91

where is some positive number.

From Eq(6.26) and Eq(6.23), it now follows that every solution of Eq(6.23) lies

eventually in the interval [0, M].

Set

f(x, y) =

p + qy

1 + x

, a = 0, and b =

p

1 −q

+ .

Then clearly,

a ≤ f(x, y) ≤ b,

for all (x, y) ∈ [a, b] ×[a, b]. By applying Theorem 1.4.6 it follows that y is a global at-

tractor of all solutions of Eq(6.23). The local stability of y was established in Theorem

6.5.1. The proof is complete. 2

6.5.3 The Case q > 1

In this case we will show that there exist solutions that have two subsequences, one of

which is monotonically approaching 0 and the other is monotonically approaching ∞.

In fact this is true for every solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

whose initial conditions are such that the

following inequalities are true:

y

−1

< q −1 and y

0

> q −1 +

p

q −1

.

To this end observe that

y

1

=

p + qy

−1

1 + y

0

<

p + q(q −1)

1 + y

0

< q −1

and

y

2

=

p + qy

0

1 + y

1

>

p + qy

0

q

= y

0

+

p

q

and by induction,

y

2n−1

< q −1 and y

2n

> y

0

+ n

p

q

for n ≥ 1.

Hence

lim

n→∞

y

2n

= ∞

and

lim

n→∞

y

2n+1

= lim

n→∞

p + qy

2n−1

1 + y

2n

= 0

and the proof is complete.

92 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

6.6 The Case β = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

This is the (2, 2)-type Eq(6.6) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

γ

C

y

n

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

p + y

n−1

qy

n

+ y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.27)

where

p =

αC

γ

2

and q =

B

C

.

(Eq(6.27) was investigated in [45].)

Eq(6.27) has the unique positive equilibrium

y =

1 +

1 + 4p(1 + q)

2(1 + q)

.

The linearized equation associated with Eq(6.27) about y is

z

n+1

+

q

1 + q

z

n

−

qy −p

(y + p)(1 + q)

z

n−1

= 0, n = 0, 1, . . . . (6.28)

By employing Theorem 1.1.1 we see that y is locally asymptotically stable when

(q −1)y < 2p (6.29)

and unstable (a saddle point) when

(q −1)y > 2p. (6.30)

Clearly the equilibrium y is the positive solution of the quadratic equation

(1 + q)y

2

−y −p = 0.

If we now set

F(u) = (1 + q)u

2

−u −p,

it is easy to see that (6.29) is satisﬁed if and only if either

q ≤ 1

or

q > 1 and F

2p

q −1

> 0.

6.6. The Case β = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

93

Similarly (6.30) is satisﬁed if and only if

q > 1 and F

2p

q −1

< 0.

The following result is now a consequence of the above discussion and some simple

calculations:

Theorem 6.6.1 The equilibrium y of Eq(6.27) is locally asymptotically stable when

q < 1 + 4p (6.31)

and unstable, and more precisely a saddle point equilibrium, when

q > 1 + 4p. (6.32)

6.6.1 Existence and Local Stability of Period-Two Cycles

Let

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

be a period-two cycle of Eq(6.27). Then

φ =

p + φ

qψ + φ

and ψ =

p + ψ

qφ + ψ

.

It now follows after some calculations that the following result is true:

Theorem 6.6.2 Eq(6.27) has a prime period-two solution

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

if and only if

q > 1 + 4p.

Furthermore when (6.32) holds, the period-two solution is “unique” and the values of φ

and ψ are the positive roots of the quadratic equation

t

2

−t +

p

q −1

= 0.

94 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

To investigate the local stability of the two cycle

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

we set

u

n

= y

n−1

and v

n

= y

n

, for n = 0, 1, . . .

and write Eq(6.27) in the equivalent form:

u

n+1

= v

n

v

n+1

=

p+u

n

qv

n

+u

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . .

Let T be the function on (0, ∞) ×(0, ∞) deﬁned by:

T

u

v

=

v

p+u

qv+u

.

Then

φ

ψ

**is a ﬁxed point of T
**

2

, the second iterate of T. By a simple calculation we ﬁnd that

T

2

u

v

=

g(u, v)

h(u, v)

where

g(u, v) =

p + u

qv + u

and h(u, v) =

p + v

qg(u, v) + v

.

Clearly the two cycle is locally asymptotically stable when the eigenvalues of the

Jacobian matrix J

T

2, evaluated at

φ

ψ

**lie inside the unit disk.
**

We have

J

T

2

φ

ψ

=

¸

¸

∂g

∂u

(φ, ψ)

∂g

∂v

(φ, ψ)

∂h

∂u

(φ, ψ)

∂h

∂v

(φ, ψ)

¸

where,

∂g

∂u

(φ, ψ) =

qψ −p

(qψ + φ)

2

,

∂g

∂v

(φ, ψ) = −

(p + φ)q

(qψ + φ)

2

,

6.6. The Case β = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

95

∂h

∂u

(φ, ψ) = −

q(p + ψ)(qψ −p)

(qφ + ψ)

2

(qψ + φ)

2

,

∂h

∂v

(φ, ψ) =

q

2

(p + φ)(p + ψ)

(qφ + ψ)

2

(qψ + φ)

2

+

qφ −p

(qφ + ψ)

2

.

Set

S =

∂g

∂u

(φ, ψ) +

∂h

∂v

(φ, ψ)

and

D =

∂g

∂u

(φ, ψ)

∂h

∂v

(φ, ψ) −

∂g

∂v

(φ, ψ)

∂h

∂u

(φ, ψ).

Then it follows from Theorem 1.1.1 that both eigenvalues of J

T

2

φ

ψ

**lie inside the
**

unit disk |λ| < 1, if and only if

|S| < 1 +D < 2. (6.33)

Inequality (6.33) is equivalent to the following three inequalities:

S < 1 +D (6.34)

−1 −D < S (6.35)

D < 1. (6.36)

First we will establish Inequality (6.34).

To this end observe that (6.34) is equivalent to

(qψ −p)(qφ + ψ)

2

+ (qφ −p)(qψ + φ)

2

+ q

2

(p + ψ)(p + φ) −(qψ −p)(qφ −p)

< (qψ + φ)

2

(qφ + ψ)

2

which is true if and only if

p

q −1

(q

3

+ 2q

2

−4qp + 2q

2

p + 2p −3q) + q −p + q

2

p

2

+ qp −p

2

< (qψ + φ)

2

(qφ + ψ)

2

which is true if and only if

−q

3

p + 7q

2

p −8qp

2

+ 4q

2

p

2

+ 4p

2

−7qp + 2q

2

−q + p −q

3

< 0

which is true if and only if

−(p + 1)(q −1)(q −

p

p + 1

)[q −(1 + 4p)] < 0

which is true because q > 1 + 4p.

96 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

Next we will establish Inequality (6.35). Observe that (6.35) is equivalent to

−(qψ + φ)

2

(qφ + ψ)

2

< (qψ −p)(qφ + ψ)

2

+ (qφ −p)

2

(qψ + φ)

2

+ q

2

(p + ψ)(p + φ) + (qψ −p)(qφ −p)

which is true if and only if

−(qψ + φ)

2

(qφ + ψ)

2

<

p

q −1

(q

3

+ 4q

2

−4qp + 2q

2

p + 2p −3q) −p + q

2

p

2

which is true if and only if

q

2

+ 2pq + 2p

2

q

2

−p

2

+ qp

2

−q

3

−3q

3

p −2q

3

p

2

−p < 0

which is true if and only if

p

2

(−2q

3

+ 2q

2

+ q −1) + p(−3q

3

+ 2q −1) −q

3

+ q

2

< 0

which is true because q > 1.

Finally, we establish Inequality (6.36). Observe that (6.36) is true if and only if

(qψ −p)(qφ −p) < (qψ + φ)

2

(qφ + ψ)

2

which is true if and only if

p

q −1

[q

2

−(q −1)(q −p)] < (pq −p + q)

2

which is true if and only if

q(pq −p + q)(pq −2p + q −1) > 0

which is true because q > 1 + 4p.

6.6.2 Invariant Intervals

Here we show that the interval I with end points one and

p

q

is an invariant interval for

Eq(6.27). More precisely we show that the values of any solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(6.27)

either remain forever outside the interval I or the solution is eventually trapped into I.

Theorem 6.6.3 Let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(6.27). Then the following statements

are true.

(a) Assume that p ≤ q and that for some N ≥ 0,

p

q

≤ y

N

≤ 1.

Then

p

q

≤ y

n

≤ 1 for all n ≥ N.

6.6. The Case β = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

97

(b) Assume that p ≥ q and that for some N ≥ 0,

1 ≤ y

N

≤

p

q

.

Then

1 ≤ y

n

≤

p

q

for all n ≥ N.

Proof.

(a) Indeed we have

y

N+1

=

p + y

N−1

qy

N

+ y

N−1

≤

p + y

N−1

p + y

N−1

= 1

and

y

N+1

=

p + y

N−1

qy

N

+ y

N−1

=

p + y

N−1

q

p

(py

N

+

p

q

y

N−1

)

≥

p

q

p + y

N−1

p + y

N−1

=

p

q

and the proof follows by induction.

(b) Clearly,

y

N+1

=

p + y

N−1

qy

N

+ y

N−1

≥

p + y

N−1

p + y

N−1

= 1

and

y

N+1

=

p + y

N−1

qy

N

+ y

N−1

=

p

q

p + y

N−1

py

N

+

p

q

y

N−1

≤

p

q

p + y

N−1

p + y

N−1

=

p

q

and the proof follows by induction.

2

6.6.3 Semicycle Analysis

Here we present a thorough semicycle analysis of the solutions of Eq(6.27) relative to

the equilibrium y and relative to the end points of the invariant interval of Eq(6.27).

Let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(6.27). Then observe that the following identities

are true:

y

n+1

−1 = q

p

q

−y

n

qy

n

+ y

n−1

for n ≥ 0, (6.37)

y

n+1

−

p

q

=

qy

n−1

(1 −

p

q

) + pq(1 −y

n

)

q(qy

n

+ y

n−1

)

for n ≥ 0, (6.38)

y

n

−y

n+2

=

qy

n−1

(y

n

−

p

q

) + (y

n

−1)(y

n−1

y

n

+ qy

2

n

)

q(p + y

n−1

) + y

n

(qy

n

+ y

n−1

)

for n ≥ 0. (6.39)

98 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

When

p = q

that is for the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

p + y

n−1

py

n

+ y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.40)

the above identities reduce to the following:

y

n+1

−1 = p

1 −y

n

py

n

+ y

n−1

for n ≥ 0 (6.41)

and

y

n

−y

n+2

= (y

n

−1)

py

n−1

+ y

n−1

y

n

+ py

2

n

p(p + y

n−1

) + y

n

(py

n

+ y

n−1

)

for n ≥ 0. (6.42)

The following three lemmas are now direct consequences of (6.37)-(6.42).

Lemma 6.6.1 Assume that

p > q

and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(6.27). Then the following statements are true:

(i) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

<

p

q

, then y

N+1

> 1;

(ii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

=

p

q

, then y

N+1

= 1;

(iii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

>

p

q

, then y

N+1

< 1;

(iv) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≥ 1, then y

N+1

<

p

q

;

(v) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≥

p

q

, then y

N+2

< y

N

;

(vi) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≤ 1, then y

N+2

> y

N

;

(vii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≤

p

q

, then y

n

∈ [1,

p

q

] for n ≥ N. In particular [1,

p

q

] is an

invariant interval for Eq(6.27);

(viii)

1 < y <

p

q

.

Lemma 6.6.2 Assume that

p = q

and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(6.27). Then the following statements are true:

(i) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

< 1, then y

N+1

> 1;

6.6. The Case β = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

99

(ii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

= 1, then y

N+1

= 1;

(iii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

> 1, then y

N+1

< 1;

(iv) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

< 1, then y

N

< y

N+2

< 1;

(v) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

> 1, then y

N

> y

N+2

> 1.

Lemma 6.6.3 Assume that

p < q

and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(6.27). Then the following statements are true:

(i) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

<

p

q

, then y

N+1

> 1;

(ii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

=

p

q

, then y

N+1

= 1;

(iii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

>

p

q

, then y

N+1

< 1;

(iv) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≤ 1, then y

N+1

>

p

q

;

(v) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≤

p

q

, then y

N+1

≥ 1;

(vi) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≥ 1, then y

N+2

< y

N

;

(vii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≤

p

q

, then y

N+2

> y

N

;

(viii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≤ 1, then y

n

∈ [

p

q

, 1] for n ≥ N. In particular [

p

q

, 1] is an

invariant interval for Eq(6.27);

(ix)

p

q

< y < 1.

Note that the function

f(u, v) =

p + v

qu + v

is always decreasing in u but in v it is decreasing when u <

p

q

and increasing when u >

p

q

.

The following result is now a consequence of Theorems 1.7.1 and 1.7.2 and Lemmas

6.6.1-6.6.3:

100 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

Theorem 6.6.4 Let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(6.27). Let I be the closed interval

with end points 1 and

p

q

and let J and K be the intervals which are disjoint from I and

such that

I ∪ J ∪ K = (0, ∞).

Then either all the even terms of the solution lie in J and all odd terms lie in K, or

vice-versa, or for some N ≥ 0,

y

n

∈ I for n ≥ N. (6.43)

When (6.43) holds, except for the length of the ﬁrst semicycle of the solution, if

p < q

the length is one, while if

p > q

the length is at most two.

6.6.4 Global Behavior of Solutions

Recall that Eq(6.27) has a unique equilibrium y which is locally stable when (6.31) holds.

When (6.32) holds, and only then, Eq(6.27) has a “unique” prime period-two solution

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . . (6.44)

with

φ + ψ = 1 and φψ =

p

q −1

. (6.45)

Also recall that a solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(6.27) either eventually enters the interval I

with end points 1 and

p

q

and remains there, or stays forever outside I.

Now when

q ≤ 1 + 4p

there are no period-two solutions and so the solutions must eventually enter and remain

in I and, in view of Theorems 1.4.6 and 1.4.7, must converge to y.

On the other hand when (6.32) holds, any solution which remains forever outside the

interval I = [

p

q

, 1] must converge to the two cycle (6.44)-(6.45). But this two cycle lies

inside the interval I. Hence, when (6.32) holds, every solution of Eq(6.27) eventually

enters and remains in the interval I.

The character of these solutions remains an open question.

The above observations are summarized in the following theorem:

Theorem 6.6.5 (a) Assume

q ≤ 1 + 4p. (6.46)

Then the equilibrium y of Eq(6.27) is global attractor.

6.7. The Case α = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

101

(b) Assume

q > 1 + 4p.

Then every solution of Eq(6.27) eventually enters and remains in the interval [

p

q

, 1].

6.7 The Case α = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

This is the (2, 2)-type equation Eq(6.7) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

A

B

y

n

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ qy

n−1

1 + y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.47)

where

p =

β

A

and q =

γ

A

.

(Eq(6.47) was investigated in [52].)

The equilibrium points of Eq(6.47) are the solutions of the equation

y =

py + qy

1 + y

.

So y = 0 is always an equilibrium point, and when

p + q > 1,

y = p + q −1 is the only positive equilibrium point of Eq(6.47).

The following result follows from Theorem 1.3.1 and the linearized stability Theorem

1.1.1:

Theorem 6.7.1 (a) Assume

p + q ≤ 1.

Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(6.47) is globally asymptotically stable.

(b) Assume

p + q > 1.

Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(6.47) is unstable. More precisely it is a saddle

point when

1 −p < q < 1 + p

and a repeller when

q > 1 + p.

102 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

(c) Assume

1 −p < q < 1 + p.

Then the positive equilibrium y = p + q − 1 of Eq(6.47) is locally asymptotically

stable.

(d) Assume

q > 1 + p.

Then the positive equilibrium y = p+q −1 of Eq(6.47) is an unstable saddle point.

Concerning prime period-two solutions it follows from Sections 2.5 that the following

result is true:

Theorem 6.7.2 Eq(6.47) has a prime period-two solution

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

if and only if

q = 1 + p. (6.48)

Furthermore when (6.48) holds, the values of φ and ψ of all prime period-two solutions

are given by:

{φ, ψ ∈ (p, ∞) : ψ =

pφ

φ −p

= 2p}.

6.7.1 Invariant Intervals

The main result here is the following theorem about Eq(6.47) with q = 1. The case

q = 1 (6.49)

is treated in Section 6.7.3.

Theorem 6.7.3 (a) Assume that

q < 1. (6.50)

Then every solution of Eq(6.47) eventually enters the interval (0,

p

q

]. Furthermore,

(0,

p

q

] is an invariant interval for Eq(6.47). That is, every solution of Eq(6.47)

with initial conditions in (0,

p

q

], remains in this interval.

(b) Assume that

q > 1. (6.51)

Then every solution of Eq(6.47) eventually enters the interval [

p

q

, ∞). Further-

more, [

p

q

, ∞) is an invariant interval for Eq(6.47).

6.7. The Case α = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

103

The proof of the above theorem is an elementary consequence of the following lemma,

whose proof is straightforward and will be omitted.

Lemma 6.7.1 (a) Assume that (6.50) holds. Then for any k, m ∈ N,

y

k

≤

p

q

=⇒y

k+2

≤ p <

p

q

and

y

k+2

≥

p

q

m

=⇒y

k

>

p

q

m+1

> p.

(b) Assume that (6.51) holds. Then for any k, m ∈ N,

y

k

≥

p

q

=⇒y

k+2

≥ p >

p

q

and

y

k+2

≤

p

q

m

=⇒y

k

>

p

q

m+1

> p.

6.7.2 Semicycle Analysis of Solutions When q ≤ 1

Here we discuss the behavior of the semicycles of solutions of Eq(6.47) when

p + q > 1 and q ≤ 1.

Hereafter, y refers to the positive equilibrium p + q −1 of Eq(6.47).

Let f : [0, ∞) ×[0, ∞) →[0, ∞) denote the function

f(x, y) =

px + qy

1 + x

.

Then f satisﬁes the negative feedback condition; that is,

(x −x)(f(x, x) −x) < 0 for x ∈ (0, ∞) −{x}.

Consider the function g : [0, ∞) →[0, ∞) deﬁned by

g(x) =

(p + q)x

1 + x

.

Observe that g(y) = y and that g increases on [0, ∞).

Theorem 6.7.4 Suppose

p + q > 1 and q ≤ 1.

Let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a positive solution of Eq(6.47). Then the following statements are true

for every n ≥ 0:

104 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

(a) If y ≤ y

n−1

, y

n

, then y ≤ y

n+1

≤ max{y

n−1

, y

n

}.

(b) If y

n−1

, y

n

≤ y, then min{y

n−1

, y

n

} ≤ y

n+1

< y.

(c) If y

n−1

< y ≤ y

n

, then y

n−1

< y

n+1

< y

n

.

(d) If y

n

< y ≤ y

n−1

, then y

n

< y

n+1

< y

n−1

.

(e) If y < y

k

<

y

2−q

, for every k ≥ −1, then {y

n

} decreases to the equilibrium y.

Proof.

(a) Suppose y ≤ y

n−1

, y

n

. Then

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ qy

n−1

1 + y

n

≤

(p + q) max{y

n−1

, y

n

}

1 + y

= max{y

n−1

, y

n

}.

Since the function

px + qx

1 + x

,

is increasing for y <

p

q

, which is equivalent to q ≤ 1, we obtain

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ qy

n−1

1 + y

n

≥

py

n

+ qy

1 + y

n

≥ g(y) = y.

Observe that all inequalities are strict if we assume that y

n−1

> y or y

n

> y.

(b) Suppose y

n−1

, y

n

≤ y. Then in view of the previous case

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ qy

n−1

1 + y

n

≤

py

n

+ qy

1 + y

n

< g(y) = y

and

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ qy

n−1

1 + y

n

≥

(p + q) min{y

n−1

, y

n

}

1 + y

= min{y

n−1

, y

n

}.

Observe that all inequalities are strict if we assume that y

n−1

< y or y

n

< y.

(c) Suppose y

n−1

< y ≤ y

n

. Then

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ qy

n−1

1 + y

n

<

(p + q)y

n

1 + y

n

=

(1 + y)y

n

1 + y

n

< y

n

.

Since q ≤ 1 and y

n−1

< y,

p −qy

n−1

> p −qy = (1 −q)(p + q) ≥ 0.

Thus

px+qy

n−1

1+x

increases in x and so

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ qy

n−1

1 + y

n

>

py

n−1

+ qy

n−1

1 + y

n−1

= g(y

n−1

) > y

n−1

.

The last inequality follows from the negative feedback property.

6.7. The Case α = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

105

(d) Suppose y

n

< y ≤ y

n−1

. Then

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ qy

n−1

1 + y

n

>

py

n

+ qy

n

1 + y

n

= g(y

n

) > y

n

by the negative feedback property.

To see that y

n+1

< y

n−1

, we must consider two cases:

Case 1. Suppose p −qy

n−1

≥ 0. Then

px+qy

n−1

1+x

increases in x and so

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ qy

n−1

1 + y

n

≤

py

n−1

+ qy

n−1

1 + y

n−1

< y

n−1

.

The last inequality follows from the negative feedback property.

Case 2. Suppose p −qy

n−1

< 0. Then

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ qy

n−1

1 + y

n

<

qy

n−1

(y

n

+ 1)

1 + y

n

≤ y

n−1

.

(e) Observe that

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ qy

n−1

1 + y

n

> y = p + q −1

and so

y

n−1

≥ qy

n−1

> y + (q −1)y

n

> y

n

from which the result follows.

2

6.7.3 Semicycle Analysis and Global Attractivity When q = 1

Here we discuss the behavior of the solutions of Eq(6.47) when

q = 1.

Here the positive equilibrium of Eq(6.47) is

y = p.

Theorem 6.7.5 Suppose that q = 1 and let y

−1

+ y

0

> 0. Then the equilibrium y of

Eq(6.47) is globally asymptotically stable. More precisely the following statements are

true.

(a) Assume y

−1

≥ p and y

0

≥ p. Then y

n

≥ p for all n > 0 and

lim

n→∞

y

n

= p. (6.52)

(b) Assume y

−1

≤ p and y

0

≤ p. Then y

n

≤ p for all n > 0 and (6.52) holds.

(c) Assume either y

−1

< p < y

0

or y

−1

> p > y

0

. Then {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

oscillates about the

equilibrium p with semicycles of length one and (6.52) holds.

106 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

Proof. (a) The case where y

−1

= y

0

= p is trivial. We will assume that y

−1

≥ p and

y

0

> p. The case y

−1

> p and y

0

≥ p is similar and will be omitted. Then

y

1

=

py

0

+ y

−1

1 + y

0

≥

py

0

+ p

1 + y

0

= p,

and

y

2

=

py

1

+ y

0

1 + y

1

>

py

1

+ p

1 + y

1

= p.

It follows by induction that y

n

≥ p for all n > 0. Furthermore, y

−1

≥ p implies that

py

0

+ y

−1

≤ y

−1

y

0

+ y

−1

and so

y

1

=

py

0

+ y

−1

1 + y

0

≤

y

−1

y

0

+ y

−1

1 + y

0

= y

−1

.

Similarly, we can show that y

2

< y

0

and by induction

y

−1

≥ y

1

≥ y

3

≥ . . . ≥ p

and

y

0

> y

2

> y

4

> . . . > p.

Thus, there exist m ≥ p and M ≥ p such that

lim

k→∞

y

2k+1

= m and lim

k→∞

y

2k

= M.

As Eq(6.47) has no period-two solutions when q = 1, it follows that m = M = p and

the proof of part (a) is complete.

It is interesting to note that

y

−1

= p ⇒y

2k+1

= p for k ≥ 0 and y

0

= p ⇒y

2k

= p for k ≥ 0.

(b) The proof of (b) is similar to the proof of (a) and will be omitted.

(c) Assume y

−1

< p < y

0

. The proof when y

0

< p < y

−1

is similar and will be

omitted.

y

1

=

py

0

+ y

−1

1 + y

0

<

py

0

+ p

1 + y

0

= p,

and

y

2

=

py

1

+ y

0

1 + y

1

>

py

1

+ p

1 + y

1

= p.

It follows by induction that the solution oscillates about p with semicycles of length one.

Next, we claim that the subsequence {y

2k+1

}

∞

k=−1

is increasing, and so convergent. In

fact, since y

−1

+ py

0

> y

−1

+ y

−1

y

0

then

y

1

=

py

0

+ y

−1

1 + y

0

> y

−1

6.7. The Case α = C = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

107

and the claim follows by induction. In a similar way we can show that the subsequence

{y

2k

}

∞

k=0

is decreasing, and so convergent. Thus, there exist m ≤ p and M ≥ p such

that

lim

k→∞

y

2k+1

= m and lim

k→∞

y

2k

= M

and as in (a), m = M. 2

6.7.4 Global Attractivity When q < 1

Here we consider the case where

1 −p < q < 1,

and we show that the equilibrium point y = p + q −1 of Eq(6.47) is global attractor of

all positive solutions of Eq(6.47).

Theorem 6.7.6 Assume

1 −p < q < 1.

Then every positive solution of Eq(6.47) converges to the positive equilibrium y.

Proof. Observe that the consistency condition y ≤

p

q

is equivalent to the condition

q ≤ 1. By Theorem 6.7.3 (a) we may assume that the initial conditions y

−1

and y

0

lie

in the interval I = (0,

p

q

]. Now clearly the function

f(x, y) =

px + qy

1 + x

satisﬁes the hypotheses of Theorem 1.4.5 in the interval I from which the result follows.

2

6.7.5 Long-term Behavior of Solutions When q > 1

Here we discuss the behavior of the solutions of Eq(6.47) when

q > 1

which is equivalent to

y >

p

q

.

In this case, every positive solution of Eq(6.47) lies eventually in the interval [p, ∞).

Concerning the long-term behavior of solutions of Eq(6.47) we may assume, without

loss of generality, that

y

−1

, y

0

∈ [p, ∞).

108 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

Then the change of variable

y

n

= u

n

+ p,

transforms Eq(6.47) to the equation

u

n+1

=

p(q −1) + qu

n−1

1 + p + u

n

(6.53)

where u

n

≥ 0 for n ≥ 0.

The character of solutions of Eq(6.53) was investigated in Section 6.5. By apply-

ing the results of Section 6.5 to Eq(6.53), we obtain the following theorems about the

solutions of Eq(6.47) when q > 1:

Theorem 6.7.7 After the ﬁrst semicycle, an oscillatory solution of Eq(6.47) oscillates

about the positive equilibrium y with semicycles of length one.

Theorem 6.7.8 (a) Assume

q = 1 + p.

Then every solution of Eq(6.47) converges to a period-two solution.

(b) Assume

1 < q < 1 + p.

Then every positive solution of Eq(6.47) converges to the positive equilibrium of

Eq(6.47).

(c) Assume

q > 1 + p.

Then Eq(6.47) has unbounded solutions.

6.8. The Case α = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Cx

n−1

109

6.8 The Case α = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Cx

n−1

This is the (2, 2)-type Eq(6.8) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

γ

C

y

n

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ y

n−1

q + y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.54)

where

p =

β

γ

and q =

A

γ

.

(Eq(6.54) was investigated in [53].)

The equilibrium points of Eq(6.54) are the solutions of the equation

y =

py + y

q + y

.

So y = 0 is always an equilibrium point of Eq(6.54) and when

p + 1 > q,

Eq(6.54) also possesses the unique positive equilibrium y = p + 1 −q.

The following result follows from Theorems 1.1.1 and 1.3.1.

Theorem 6.8.1 (a) Assume

p + 1 ≤ q.

Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(6.54) is globally asymptotically stable.

(b) Assume

p + 1 > q. (6.55)

Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(6.54) is unstable and the positive equilibrium

y = p + 1 − q of Eq(6.54) is locally asymptotically stable. Furthermore the zero

equilibrium is a saddle point when

1 −p < q < 1 + p

and a repeller when

q < 1 −p.

In the remainder of this section we will investigate the character of the positive

equilibrium of Eq(6.54) and so we will assume without further mention that (6.55) holds.

Our goal is to show that when (6.55) holds and y

−1

+ y

0

> 0, the positive equilibrium

y = p + 1 −q of Eq(6.54) is globally asymptotically stable.

110 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

6.8.1 Invariant Intervals and Semicycle Analysis

Let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a positive solution of Eq(6.54). Then the following identities are easily

established:

y

n+1

−1 = p

y

n

−

q

p

q + y

n−1

for n ≥ 0, (6.56)

y

n+1

−

q

p

=

p

2

[y

n

−

q

p

2

] + (p −q)y

n−1

p(q + y

n−1

)

for n ≥ 0, (6.57)

and

y

n+1

−y

n

=

(p −q)y

n

+ (1 −y

n

)y

n−1

q + y

n−1

for n ≥ 0. (6.58)

Note that the positive equilibrium

y = p + 1 −q

of Eq(6.54) is such that:

y is

< 1 if p < q < p + 1

= 1 if p = q

> 1 if p > q.

When

p = q

that is for the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ y

n−1

p + y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.59)

the identities (6.56)-(6.58) reduce to the following:

y

n+1

−1 = (y

n

−1)

p

p + y

n−1

for n ≥ 0 (6.60)

and

y

n+1

−y

n

= (1 −y

n

)

y

n−1

p + y

n−1

for n ≥ 0. (6.61)

The following three lemmas are now direct consequences of the above identities.

Lemma 6.8.1 Assume that

p < q (6.62)

and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a positive solution of Eq(6.54). Then the following statements are

true:

6.8. The Case α = B = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Cx

n−1

111

(i) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

<

q

p

, then y

N+1

< 1;

(ii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

=

q

p

, then y

N+1

= 1;

(iii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

>

q

p

, then y

N+1

> 1;

(iv) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

>

q

p

2

, then y

N+1

<

q

p

;

(v) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≤ 1, then y

N+1

< 1;

(vi) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≥ 1, then y

N+1

< y

N

.

Lemma 6.8.2 Assume that

p = q (6.63)

and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a positive solution of Eq(6.54). Then the following statements are

true:

(i) If y

0

< 1, then for n ≥ 0, y

n

< 1 and the solution is strictly increasing;

(ii) If y

0

= 1, then y

n

= 1 for n ≥ 0;

(iii) If y

0

> 1, then for n ≥ 0, y

n

> 1 and the solution is strictly decreasing.

Lemma 6.8.3 Assume that

p > q (6.64)

and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a positive solution of Eq(6.54). Then the following statements are

true:

(i) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

<

q

p

, then y

N+1

< 1;

(ii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

=

q

p

, then y

N+1

= 1;

(iii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

>

q

p

, then y

N+1

> 1;

(iv) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

>

q

p

2

, then y

N+1

>

q

p

;

(v) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≤ 1, then y

N+1

> y

N

;

(vi) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

≥ 1, then y

N+1

>

q

p

and y

N+2

> 1.

112 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

6.8.2 Global Stability of the Positive Equilibrium

When (6.62) holds, it follows from Lemma 6.8.1 that if a solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

is such that

y

n

≥ 1 for all n ≥ 0

then the solution decreases and its limit lies in the interval [1, ∞). This is impossible

because y < 1. Hence, by Lemma 6.8.1, every positive solution of Eq(6.54) eventually

enters and remains in the interval (0, 1). Now in the interval (0, 1) the function

f(u, v) =

pu + v

q + v

is increasing in both arguments and by Theorem 1.4.8, y is a global attractor.

When (6.63) holds, it follows from Lemma 6.8.2 that every solution of Eq(6.54)

converges to the equilibrium y = 1.

Next, assume that (6.64) holds. Here it is clear from Lemma 6.8.3 that every solu-

tion of Eq(6.54) eventually enters and remains in the interval (1, ∞). Without loss of

generality we will assume that

y

n

> 1 for n ≥ −1.

Set

y

n

= 1 + (q + 1)u

n

for n ≥ −1.

Then we can see that {u

n

}

∞

n=−1

satisﬁes the diﬀerence equation

u

n+1

=

p−q

(q+1)

2

+

p

q+1

u

n

1 + u

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.65)

with positive parameters and positive initial conditions. This (2, 2)-type equation was

investigated in Section 6.3 where we established in Theorem 6.3.3 that every solution

converges to its positive equilibrium

u =

p −q

q + 1

.

From the above observations and in view of Theorem 6.8.1 we have the following

result:

Theorem 6.8.2 Assume that p + 1 > q and that y

−1

+ y

0

> 0. Then the positive

equilibrium y = p + 1 −q of Eq(6.54) is globally asymptotically stable.

6.9. The Case α = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

113

6.9 The Case α = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

This is the (2, 2)-type Eq(6.9) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

γ

C

y

n

reduces to the equation

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ y

n−1

qy

n

+ y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.66)

where

p =

β

γ

and q =

B

C

.

To avoid a degenerate situation we will also assume that

p = q.

(Eq(6.66) was investigated in [54].)

The only equilibrium point of Eq(6.66) is

y =

p + 1

q + 1

and the linearized equation of Eq(6.66) about y is

z

n+1

−

p −q

(p + 1)(q + 1)

z

n

+

p −q

(p + 1)(q + 1)

z

n−1

= 0, n = 0, 1, . . . .

By applying the linearized stability Theorem 1.1.1 we obtain the following result:

Theorem 6.9.1 (a) Assume that

p > q.

Then the positive equilibrium of Eq(6.66) is locally asymptotically stable.

(b) Assume that

p < q.

Then the positive equilibrium of Eq(6.66) is locally asymptotically stable when

q < pq + 1 + 3p (6.67)

and is unstable (and more precisely a saddle point equilibrium) when

q > pq + 1 + 3p. (6.68)

114 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

6.9.1 Existence of a Two Cycle

It follows from Section 2.5 that when p > q, Eq(6.66) has no prime period-two solutions.

On the other hand when

p < q

and

q > pq + 1 + 3p,

Eq(6.66) possesses a unique prime period-two solution:

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . . (6.69)

where the values of φ and ψ are the (positive and distinct) solutions of the quadratic

equation

t

2

−(1 −p)t +

p(1 −p)

q −1

= 0. (6.70)

In order to investigate the stability nature of this prime period-two solution, we set

u

n

= y

n−1

and v

n

= y

n

for n = 0, 1, . . .

and write Eq(6.66) in the equivalent form:

u

n+1

= v

n

v

n+1

=

pv

n

+u

n

qv

n

+u

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . .

Let T be the function on (0, ∞) ×(0, ∞) deﬁned by:

T

u

v

=

v

pv+u

qv+u

.

Then

φ

ψ

**is a ﬁxed point of T
**

2

, the second iterate of T. One can see that

T

2

u

v

=

g(u, v)

h(u, v)

where

g(u, v) =

pv + u

qv + u

and h(u, v) =

p

pv+u

qv+u

+ v

q

pv+u

qv+u

+ v

.

The prime period-two solution (6.69) is asymptotically stable if the eigenvalues of the

Jacobian matrix J

T

2, evaluated at

φ

ψ

**lie inside the unit disk. One can see that
**

J

T

2

φ

ψ

=

¸

¸

¸

−

(p−q)ψ

(qψ+φ)

2

(p−q)φ

(qψ+φ)

2

−

(p−q)

2

ψ

2

(qψ+φ)

2

(qφ+ψ)

2

(p−q)φ

(qφ+ψ)

2

(p−q)ψ

(qψ+φ)

2

−1

¸

.

6.9. The Case α = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

115

Set

P =

p −q

(qψ + φ)

2

and Q =

p −q

(qφ + ψ)

2

.

Then

J

T

2

φ

ψ

=

−Pψ Pφ

−PQψ

2

PQφψ −Qφ

**and its characteristic equation is
**

λ

2

+ (Pψ + Qφ −PQφψ)λ + PQφψ = 0.

By applying Theorem 1.1.1 (c), it follows that both eigenvalues of

J

T

2

φ

ψ

**lie inside the unit disk if and only if
**

|Pψ + Qφ −PQφψ| < 1 + PQφψ < 2

or equivalently if and only if the following three inequalities hold:

Pψ + Qφ + 1 > 0 (6.71)

Pψ + Qφ < 1 + 2PQφψ (6.72)

and

PQφψ < 1. (6.73)

Observe that

φ > 0, ψ > 0, P < 0 and Q < 0

and so Inequality (6.72) is always true.

Next we will establish Inequality (6.71). We will use the fact that

φ + ψ = 1 −p, φψ =

p(1 −p)

q −1

φ =

pψ + φ

qψ + φ

and ψ =

pφ + ψ

qφ + ψ

.

Inequality (6.71) is equivalent to

(p −q)ψ

(qψ + φ)

2

+

(p −q)φ

(qφ + ψ)

2

+ 1 > 0

which is true if and only if

(q −p)[(qφ + ψ)

2

ψ + (qψ + φ)

2

φ] < (qψ + φ)

2

(qφ + ψ)

2

116 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

if and only if

(q −p)[(qφ + ψ)(pφ + ψ) + (qψ + φ)(pψ + φ)] < [(qφ + ψ)(qψ + φ)]

2

. (6.74)

Now observe that the lefthand side of (6.74) is

I = (q −p)[(qp + 1)(φ

2

+ ψ

2

) + 2(p + q)φψ]

= (q −p)[(qp + 1)(φ + ψ)

2

−2φψ(qp + 1 −p −q)]

= (q −p)[(qp + 1)(1 −p)

2

−2

p(1 −p)

q −1

(p −1)(q −1)]

= (q −p)(1 −p)

2

(qp + 1 + 2p).

The righthand side of (6.74) is

II = [(qψ + φ)(qφ + ψ)]

2

= [(q

2

+ 1)ψφ + q(φ

2

+ ψ

2

)]

2

= [q(φ + ψ)

2

+ (q −1)

2

φψ]

2

= [q(1 −p)

2

+ (q −1)p(1 −p)]

2

= (1 −p)

2

(q −p)

2

.

Hence, Inequality (6.71) is true if and only if (6.68) holds.

Finally, Inequality (6.73) is equivalent to

(p −q)

2

φψ < (qψ + φ)

2

(qφ + ψ)

2

which is true if and only if

(q −p)

φψ < (qψ + φ)(qφ + ψ)

if and only if

(q −p)

φψ < (q

2

+ 1)φψ + q(φ

2

+ ψ

2

)

if and only if

(q −p)

φψ < (q

2

+ 1)φψ + q[(φ + ψ)

2

−2φψ]

if and only if

(q −p)

φψ < (q −1)

2

φψ + q(φ + ψ)

2

if and only if

(q −p)

φψ < (q −1)

2

p(1 −p)

q −1

+ q(1 −p)

2

if and only if

(q −p)

φψ < (1 −p)(q −p)

6.9. The Case α = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

117

if and only if

p(1 −p)

q −1

< (1 −p)

2

if and only if q > pq + 1 which is clearly true.

In summary, the following result is true about the local stability of the prime period-

two solution (6.69) of Eq(6.66):

Theorem 6.9.2 Assume that Condition (6.68) holds. Then Eq(6.66) posseses the prime

period-two solution

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

where φ and ψ are the two positive and distinct roots of the quadratic Eq(6.70). Fur-

thermore this prime period-two solution is locally asymptotically stable.

6.9.2 Semicycle Analysis

In this section, we present a semicycle analysis of the solutions of Eq(6.66).

Theorem 6.9.3 Let {y

n

} be a nontrivial solution of Eq(6.66). Then the following state-

ments are true:

(a) Assume p > q. Then {y

n

} oscillates about the equilibrium y with semicycles of

length two or three, except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle which may have length one.

The extreme in each semicycle occurs in the ﬁrst term if the semicycle has two terms

and in the second term if the semicycle has three terms.

(b) Assume p < q. Then either {y

n

} oscillates about the equilibrium y with semicycles

of length one, after the ﬁrst semicycle, or {y

n

} converges monotonically to y.

Proof. (a) The proof follows from Theorem 1.7.4 by observing that the condition p > q

implies that the function

f(x, y) =

px + y

qx + y

is increasing in x and decreasing in y. This function also satisﬁes Condition (1.35).

(b) The proof follows from Theorem 1.7.1 by observing that when p < q, the function

f(x, y) is increasing in y and decreasing in x. 2

6.9.3 Global Stability Analysis When p < q

The main result in this section is the following

Theorem 6.9.4 Assume that

p < q

and (6.67) holds. Then the positive equilibrium y of Eq(6.66) is globally asymptotically

stable.

118 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

Proof. Set

f(x, y) =

px + y

qx + y

,

and note that f(x, y) is decreasing in x for each ﬁxed y, and increasing in y for each

ﬁxed x. Also clearly,

p

q

≤ f(x, y) ≤ 1 for all x, y > 0.

Finally in view of (6.67), Eq(6.66) has no prime period-two solution. Now the conclusion

of Theorem 6.9.4 follows as a consequence of Theorem 1.4.6 and the fact that y is locally

asymptotically stable. 2

The method employed in the proof of Theorem 1.4.6 can also be used to establish

that certain solutions of Eq(6.66) converge to the two cycle (6.69) when instead of (6.67),

(6.68) holds.

Theorem 6.9.5 Assume that (6.68) holds. Let φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . ., with φ < ψ, denote the

two cycle of Eq(6.66). Assume that for some solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(6.66) and for

some index N ≥ −1,

y

N

≥ ψ and y

N+1

≤ φ. (6.75)

Then this solution converges to the two cycle φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . ..

Proof. Assume that (6.75) holds. Set

f(x, y) =

px + y

qx + y

.

Then clearly,

y

N+2

= f(y

N+1

, y

N

) ≥ f(φ, ψ) = ψ,

y

N+3

= f(y

N+2

, y

N+1

) ≤ f(ψ, φ) = φ

and in general

y

N+2k

≥ ψ and y

N+2k+1

≤ φ for k = 0, 1, . . . .

Now as in the proof of Theorem 1.4.6

limsup

n→∞

y

n

= ψ and liminf

n→∞

y

n

= φ

from which we conclude that

lim

k→∞

y

N+2k

= ψ and lim

k→∞

y

N+2k+1

= φ.

2

Next we want to ﬁnd more cases where the conclusion of the last theorem holds. We

consider ﬁrst the case where eventually consecutive terms y

i

, y

i+1

lie between m and M.

6.9. The Case α = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

119

Lemma 6.9.1 Suppose that for some i ≥ 0,

m ≤ y

i

, y

i+1

≤ M.

Then y

k

∈ [m, M] for every k > i.

Proof. Using the monotonic character of the function f we have

m = f(M, m) ≤ f(y

i+1

, y

i

) = y

i+2

≤ f(m, M) = M,

and the result follows by induction. 2

If we never get two successive terms in the interval [m, M] and if we never get two

successive terms outside of the interval [m, M] (that is, for every i, either y

i

> M and

y

i+1

< m or y

i

< m and y

i+1

> M), then we have one of the following four cases:

(A) y

2n

> M and M ≥ y

2n+1

> m for every n;

(B) y

2n+1

> M and M ≥ y

2n

> m for every n;

(C) y

2n

< m and m ≤ y

2n+1

< M for every n;

(D) y

2n+1

< m and m ≤ y

2n

< M for every n.

Lemma 6.9.2 In all cases (A)-(D) the corresponding solution {y

n

} converges to the

two cycle

. . . φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . . .

Proof. Since the proofs are similar for all cases we will give the details in case (A). By

our earlier observation we have that M ≥ limsup

i→∞

y

i

, and so

M ≥ limsup

n→∞

y

2n

≥ liminf

n→∞

y

2n

≥ M.

Hence lim

n→∞

y

2n

= M. From Eq(6.66) we have

y

2n+1

=

y

2n

−y

2n

y

2n+2

qy

2n+2

−p

.

and so

lim

n→∞

y

2n+1

=

M −M

2

qM −p

.

On the other hand by solving the equation

M = f(m, M) =

pm + M

qm + M

for m we ﬁnd

m =

M −M

2

qM −p

.

Thus, lim

n→∞

y

2n+1

= m and the proof is complete. 2

Since the case in which the solution lies outside of the interval [m, M] is answered by

Theorem 6.9.5, we are left with the case in which the solution lies eventually in [m, M].

120 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

Lemma 6.9.3 Suppose M ≥ y

i+2

≥ y

i

≥ y ≥ y

i+1

≥ y

i+3

≥ m and not both y

i+2

and

y

i+3

are equal to y. Then {y

n

} converges to the two cycle

. . . φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . . .

Proof. Here we have

y

i+4

= f(y

i+3

, y

i+2

) ≥ f(y

i+1

, y

i

) = y

i+2

and

y

i+5

= f(y

i+4

, y

i+3

) ≤ f(y

i+2

, y

i+1

) = y

i+3

.

Induction on i then establishes the monotonicity of the two sequences. Thus, the se-

quence {y

i+2k

} is non decreasing and bounded above by M, and the sequence {y

i+2k+1

}

is a non increasing sequence and bounded below by m. Therefore, both subsequences

converge and their limits form a two cycle. In view of the uniqueness of the two cycle

and the fact that at least one of y

i

, y

i+1

is diﬀerent from y, the proof is complete.The

case M ≥ y

i+3

≥ y

i+1

≥ y ≥ y

i

≥ y

i+2

≥ m is handled in a similar way. 2

Using a similar technique one can prove that if

M ≥ y

i

≥ y

i+2

≥ y ≥ y

i+3

≥ y

i+1

≥ m

or

M ≥ y

i+1

≥ y

i+3

≥ y ≥ y

i+2

≥ y

i

≥ m

we would get convergence to y , but this situation cannot occur, as the following results

show. Let us consider the ﬁrst case. The second case can be handled in a similar way.

In this case we need to know more about the condition y

i+2

= f(y

i+1

, y

i

) ≤ y

i

, so we are

led to the general equation

f(x, y) = y. (6.76)

It makes sense to consider this equation only for y ∈ (

p

q

, 1), in which case Eq(6.76) has a

unique positive solution for x, which of course depends on y. We denote this value by y

.

Thus f(y

, y) = y. The correspondence between y and y

**has the following properties:
**

Lemma 6.9.4 (1) f(x, y) > y if and only if x < y

.

(2) x > y if and only if x

< y

.

(3) For y < y < M, f(y, y

) < y

and y > y

, and for m < y < y, f(y, y

) > y

and y

> y.

Proof.

6.9. The Case α = A = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

121

(1) Since f is decreasing in the ﬁrst variable and f(y

, y) = y, x < y

**if and only if
**

f(x, y) > f(y

, y) = y.

(2) Solving f(y

, y) = y for y

gives

y

= g(y) =

y −y

2

qy −p

.

Computing the derivative of g we get

g

(y) = −

p −2y + qy

2

(p −qy)

2

.

The discriminant of the numerator is 4p

2

− 4pq = 4p(p − q) < 0, so the roots of

the numerator are not real. For y ∈ (

p

q

, 1), g

(y) < 0, so y

**is decreasing function
**

of y.

(3) Eliminating y

from the equations y = f(y

, y) and y

= f(y, y

) we get

x −x

2

qx −p

=

px +

x−x

2

qx−p

qx +

x−x

2

qx−p

.

Simplifying this equation we get a fourth degree polynomial equation with roots

0, y, m, M. Thus each of these roots is simple and so f(y, y

)−y

changes sign as y

passes each of these values. Clearly as y approaches

p

q

y

approaches ∞. However

p

q

< f(y, y

) < 1. Thus for y < m, f(y, y

) < y

. Hence

m < y < y ⇒f(y, y

) > y

,

y < y < M ⇒f(y, y

) < y

,

M < y <⇒f(y, y

) > y

.

By (1) then, for m < y < y, y < y

, and for y < y < M, y > y

.

2

Now we will use this result to prove the following:

Lemma 6.9.5 Assume that for some i,

M ≥ y

i

≥ y

i+2

≥ y ≥ y

i+1

≥ m.

Then y

i+3

≤ y

i+1

with equality only in the case of a two cycle.

122 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

Proof. To show y

i+3

= f(y

i+2

, y

i+1

) ≤ y

i+1

, we must show y

i+2

≥ y

i+1

.

Since y

i+2

= f(y

i+1

, y

i

) ≤ y

i

, we have y

i+1

≥ y

i

. Thus by (2) of the previous lemma

y

i

≥ y

i+1

, and by (3) y

i

≥ y

i

. Thus y

i

≥ y

i+1

. Since f is increasing in the second

argument and y

i

≥ y

i+1

we get

y

i+2

= f(y

i+1

, y

i

) ≥ f(y

i+1

, y

i+1

).

By (3) of the previous lemma, since m ≤ y

i+1

≤ y, f(y

i+1

, y

i+1

) ≥ y

i+1

. Thus y

i+2

≥ y

i+1

,

as required. To get equality we must have y

i+1

= y

i

or equivalently y

i+2

= y

i

, as well as

y

i+3

= y

i+1

. Thus equality occurs only in the case of a two cycle. 2

The case

m ≤ y

i

≤ y

i+2

≤ y ≤ y

i+1

≤ M

is similar.

We also obtain the following lemma:

Lemma 6.9.6 Unless {y

n

} is a period-two solution, there is no i such that either

M ≥ y

i

≥ y

i+2

≥ . . . ≥ y ≥ y

i+1

≥ y

i+3

≥ . . . ≥ m,

or

M ≥ . . . ≥ y

i+2

≥ y

i

≥ y ≥ . . . ≥ y

i+3

≥ y

i+1

≥ . . . ≥ m.

Proof. We will consider the ﬁrst case; the second case is similar. Since {y

i+2k+1

} is a

bounded monotonic sequence it has a limit c. The value c will be one value in a two

cycle, so either c = y or c = m. If c = y, then y

i+2n+1

= y for all n, and solving for y

i+2n

we see y

i+2n

= y also. But then y

i

= y

i+1

= y, and our solution is a two cycle.. If c = m,

solving for lim

n→∞

y

i+2n

gives lim

n→∞

y

i+2n

= M. This can only happen if y

i+2n

= M

for all n, in which case y

i+2n+1

= m for all n, which also gives a two cycle. 2

The above sequence of lemmas leads to the following result:

Theorem 6.9.6 Assume that

p < q,

and that Eq(6.66) possesses the two-cycle solution (6.69). Then every oscillatory solution

of Eq(6.66) converges to this two cycle.

Remark. Since some of the oscillatory solutions of Eq(6.66) are generated by initial

values {y

−1

, y

0

} that are on opposite sides of the equilibrium y, it follows by Theorem

6.9.6 that all such pairs belong to the stable manifold of the two cycle.

6.10. Open Problems and Conjectures 123

6.9.4 Global Stability Analysis When p > q

Here we have the following result:

Theorem 6.9.7 Assume that

p > q

and

p ≤ pq + 1 + 3q. (6.77)

Then the positive equilibrium y of Eq(6.66) is globally asymptotically stable.

Proof. We will employ Theorem 1.4.5. To this end, set

f(x, y) =

px + y

qx + y

,

and observe that when p > q, the function f(x, y) is increasing in x for each ﬁxed y, and

is decreasing in y for each ﬁxed x. Also

1 ≤ f(x, y) ≤

p

q

for all x, y > 0.

Finally observe that when (6.77) holds, the only solution of the system

M =

pM + m

qM + m

, m =

pm + M

qm + M

,

is

m = M.

Now the result is a consequence of Theorem 1.4.5. 2

6.10 Open Problems and Conjectures

Open Problem 6.10.1 (See [64]) Assume that

a, b, c, d ∈ R.

(a) Investigate the forbidden set F of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

ax

n

+ bx

n−1

cx

n

+ dx

n−1

x

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . .

(b) For every point (x

−1

, x

0

) / ∈ F, investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic

nature of the solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

.

124 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

(See Section 1.6.)

Open Problem 6.10.2 Assume that

α

n

, β

n

, A

n

, B

n

∈ R for n = 0, 1, . . .

are convergent sequences of real numbers with ﬁnite limits. Investigate the forbidden set

and the asymptotic character of solutions of the nonautonomous Riccati equation

x

n+1

=

α

n

+ β

n

x

n

A

n

+ B

n

x

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . .

(See Section 1.6 for the autonomous case.)

Conjecture 6.10.1 Assume

p, q ∈ (0, ∞).

Show that every positive solution of Eq(6.10) has a ﬁnite limit.

(Note that by Theorem 6.3.3, we need only to conﬁrm this conjecture for p > 2(q +1)

and q ≥ 1. See also [36].)

Conjecture 6.10.2 Assume that

p, q ∈ (0, ∞).

Show that every positive solution of Eq(6.11) has a ﬁnite limit.

(Note that by Theorem 6.4.4, this conjecture has been conﬁrmed for q ≤ 1 + 4p.)

Conjecture 6.10.3 Assume p ∈ (0, ∞). Show that the equation

y

n+1

=

p + y

n−1

1 + y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . .

has a positive and monotonically decreasing solution.

(Note that by Theorem 6.5.2, every positive solution converges to a, not necessarily

prime, period-two solution.)

6.10. Open Problems and Conjectures 125

Conjecture 6.10.4 Assume that

p, q ∈ (0, ∞).

Show that every positive solution of Eq(6.27) either converges to a ﬁnite limit or to a

two cycle.

(See Section 6.6.)

Open Problem 6.10.3 Assume that

p, q ∈ (0, ∞)

and

q > 1 + 4p.

Find the basin of attraction of the period-two solution of Eq(6.27).

Open Problem 6.10.4 Assume that

p, q ∈ (0, ∞)

and

q > pq + 1 + 3p.

Find the basin of attraction of the period-two solution of Eq(6.66).

Conjecture 6.10.5 Assume

p > q.

Show that every positive solution of Eq(6.66) has a ﬁnite limit.

(Note that by Theorem 6.9.7, this conjecture has been conﬁrmed for p ≤ pq +1+3q.)

Open Problem 6.10.5 Find the set of all initial conditions (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ R×R through

which the solution of the equation

y

n+1

=

y

n

+ y

n−1

1 + y

n

is well deﬁned and converges to 1, as n →∞.

126 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

Open Problem 6.10.6 Find the set of all initial conditions (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ R×R through

which the solution of the equation

y

n+1

=

y

n

+ y

n−1

1 + y

n−1

is well deﬁned and converges to 1, as n →∞.

Open Problem 6.10.7 For each of the following diﬀerence equations determine the

“good” set G ⊂ R×R of initial conditions (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ R×R through which the equation

is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0.Then for every (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ G, investigate the long-term

behavior of the solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

:

y

n+1

=

1 −y

n

1 −y

n−1

(6.78)

y

n+1

=

y

n

−1

y

n

−y

n−1

(6.79)

y

n+1

=

1 −y

n−1

1 −y

n

(6.80)

y

n+1

=

1 −y

n−1

y

n

−y

n−1

(6.81)

y

n+1

=

y

n

−y

n−1

y

n

−1

(6.82)

y

n+1

=

y

n

−y

n−1

1 −y

n−1

(6.83)

y

n+1

=

y

n

+ y

n−1

y

n

−y

n−1

. (6.84)

For those equations from the above list for which you were successful, extend your

result by introducing arbitrary real parameters in the equation.

Open Problem 6.10.8 Assume

α, β, γ, A, B, C ∈ (0, ∞).

Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of solutions of the diﬀerence

equation

x

n+1

=

αx

n

+ βx

n−1

+ γx

n−2

Ax

n

+ Bx

n−1

+ Cx

n−2

, n = 0, 1, . . . .

Extend and generalize.

6.10. Open Problems and Conjectures 127

Open Problem 6.10.9 Assume that {p

n

}

∞

n=0

and {q

n

}

∞

n=0

are convergent sequences of

nonnegative real numbers with ﬁnite limits,

p = lim

n→∞

p

n

and q = lim

n→∞

q

n

.

Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of

each of the following eight diﬀerence equations:

y

n+1

=

p

n

+ y

n

q

n

+ y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.85)

y

n+1

=

p

n

+ q

n

y

n

1 + y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.86)

y

n+1

=

y

n

+ p

n

y

n

+ q

n

y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.87)

y

n+1

=

p

n

+ q

n

y

n−1

1 + y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.88)

y

n+1

=

p

n

+ y

n−1

q

n

y

n

+ y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.89)

y

n+1

=

p

n

y

n

+ q

n

y

n−1

1 + y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.90)

y

n+1

=

p

n

y

n

+ y

n−1

q

n

+ y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.91)

y

n+1

=

p

n

y

n

+ y

n−1

q

n

y

n

+ y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (6.92)

Open Problem 6.10.10 Assume that {p

n

}

∞

n=0

and {q

n

}

∞

n=0

are period-two sequences

of nonnegative real numbers. Investigate the global character of all positive solutions of

Eqs(6.85)-(6.92). Extend and generalize.

Open Problem 6.10.11 Assume q ∈ (1, ∞).

(a) Find the set B of all initial conditions (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ (0, ∞) × (0, ∞) such that the

solutions {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(6.23) are bounded.

(b) Let (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ B. Investigate the asymptotic behavior of {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

.

128 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

Open Problem 6.10.12 Assume q ∈ (1, ∞).

(a) Find the set B of all initial conditions (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ (0, ∞) × (0, ∞) such that the

solutions {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(6.47) are bounded.

(b) Let (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ B. Investigate the asymptotic behavior of {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

.

Open Problem 6.10.13 (A Plant-Herbivore System; See [9], [3], and [2]) Assume

α ∈ (1, ∞), β ∈ (0, ∞), and γ ∈ (0, 1) with α + β > 1 +

β

γ

.

Obtain conditions for the global asymptotic stability of the positive equilibrium of the

system

x

n+1

=

αx

n

βx

n

+e

y

n

y

n+1

= γ(x

n

+ 1)y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (6.93)

Conjecture 6.10.6 Assume x

0

, y

0

∈ (0, ∞) and that

α ∈ (2, 3), β = 1 and γ =

1

2

.

Show that the positive equilibrium of System (6.93) is globally asymptotically stable.

Open Problem 6.10.14 (Discrete Epidemic Models; See [14].) Let A ∈ (0, ∞).

(a) Determine the set G of initial conditions (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ (0, ∞) ×(0, ∞) through which

the solutions {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

= (1 −x

n

−x

n−1

)(1 −e

−Ax

n

), n = 0, 1, . . . (6.94)

are nonnegative.

(b) Let (x

−1

, x

0

) ∈ G. Investigate the boundedness character, the periodic nature, and

the asymptotic behavior of the solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(6.94).

(c) Extend and generalize.

6.10. Open Problems and Conjectures 129

Open Problem 6.10.15 (The Flour Beetle Model; See [48]). Assume

a ∈ (0, 1), b ∈ (0, ∞), and c

1

, c

2

∈ [0, ∞) with c

1

+ c

2

> 0.

Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions for the global asymptotic stability of the Flour

Beetle Model:

x

n+1

= ax

n

+ bx

n−2

e

−c

1

x

n

−c

2

x

n−2

, n = 0, 1, . . .

with positive initial conditions.

Open Problem 6.10.16 (A Population Model) Assume

α ∈ (0, 1) and β ∈ (1, ∞).

Investigate the global character of all positive solutions of the system

x

n+1

= αx

n

e

−y

n

+ β

y

n+1

= αx

n

(1 −e

−y

n

)

, n = 0, 1, . . . .

which may be viewed as a population model.

Open Problem 6.10.17 Assume that

p, q ∈ [0, ∞) and k ∈ {2, 3, . . .}.

Investigate the global behavior of all positive solutions of each of the following diﬀerence

equations:

y

n+1

=

p + qy

n

1 + y

n−k

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.95)

y

n+1

=

y

n

+ p

y

n

+ qy

n−k

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.96)

y

n+1

=

p + qy

n−k

1 + y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.97)

y

n+1

=

p + y

n−k

qy

n

+ y

n−k

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.98)

y

n+1

=

y

n

+ py

n−k

y

n

+ q

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.99)

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ y

n−k

q + y

n−k

, n = 0, 1, . . . (6.100)

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ y

n−k

qy

n

+ y

n−k

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (6.101)

130 Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

Open Problem 6.10.18 Obtain a general result for an equation of the form

y

n+1

= f(y

n

, y

n−1

), n = 0, 1, . . .

which extends and uniﬁes the global asymptotic stability results for Eqs(6.11) and (6.27).

Open Problem 6.10.19 Assume that every positive solution of an equation of the form

x

n+1

= f(x

n

, x

n−1

), n = 0, 1, . . . (6.102)

converges to a period-two solution. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on f so

that every positive solution of the equation

x

n+1

= f(x

n−2

, x

n−1

), n = 0, 1, . . . (6.103)

also converges to a period-two solution.

Extend and generalize.

Open Problem 6.10.20 Assume that Eq(6.102) has a two cycle which is locally asymp-

totically stable. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on f so that the same two

cycle is a locally asymptotically stable solution of Eq(6.103).

Chapter 7

(1, 3)-Type Equations

7.1 Introduction

Eq(1) contains the following three equations of the (1, 3)-type:

x

n+1

=

α

A +Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (7.1)

x

n+1

=

βx

n

A +Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (7.2)

and

x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

A +Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (7.3)

Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all the parameters in the above

(1, 3)-type equations are positive and that the initial conditions are nonnegative.

7.2 The Case β = γ = 0 : x

n+1

=

α

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

This is the (1, 3)-type Eq.(7.1) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

α

A

y

n

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

1

1 +py

n

+qy

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (7.4)

where

p =

αB

A

2

and q =

αC

A

2

.

131

132 Chapter 7. (1, 3)-Type Equations

One can easily see that the positive equilibrium of Eq(7.4) is locally asymptotically stable

for all values of the parameters and that Eq(7.4) has no prime period two solutions.

The following result is now a straightforward consequence of either the stability

trichotomy Theorem 1.4.4, or Theorem 1.4.7 in the interval [0, 1].

Theorem 7.2.1 The positive equilibrium of Eq(7.4) is globally asymptotically stable.

7.3 The Case α = γ = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

This is the (1, 3)-type Eq(7.2) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

A

C

y

n

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

y

n

1 +py

n

+qy

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (7.5)

where

p =

β

A

and q =

B

C

.

Eq(7.5) always has zero as an equilibrium point and when

p > 1

it also has the unique positive equilibrium point

y =

p −1

q + 1

.

The following result is a straightforward consequence of Theorem 1.3.1.

Theorem 7.3.1 Assume

p ≤ 1.

Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(7.5) is globally asymptotically stable.

The following result is a straightforward consequence of Theorem 1.4.2. It also follows

by applying Theorem 1.4.5 in the interval [0,

p

q

].

Theorem 7.3.2 Assume that y

−1

, y

0

∈ (0, ∞) and

p > 1.

Then the positive equilibrium of Eq(7.5) is globally asymptotically stable.

7.4. The Case α = β = 0 : x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

133

7.4 The Case α = β = 0 : x

n+1

=

γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

This is the (1, 3)-type Eq(7.3) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

γ

C

y

n

reduces to the equation

y

n+1

=

y

n−1

p +qy

n

+y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (7.6)

where

p =

A

γ

and q =

B

C

.

Eq(7.6) always has the zero equilibrium and when

p < 1

it also has the unique positive equilibrium

y =

1 −p

1 +q

.

The subsequent result is a straightforward application of Theorems 1.1.1 and 1.3.1.

Theorem 7.4.1 (a) The zero equilibrium of Eq(7.6) is globally asymptotically stable

when

p ≥ 1

and is unstable (a repeller) when

p < 1.

(b) Assume that p < 1. Then the positive equilibrium of Eq(7.6) is locally asymptot-

ically stable when

q < 1

and is unstable (a saddle point) when

q > 1.

Concerning prime period-two solutions one can see that Eq(7.6) has a prime period-

two solution

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

if and only if

p < 1.

134 Chapter 7. (1, 3)-Type Equations

Furthermore when

p < 1 and q = 1

the only prime period-two solution is

. . . , 0, 1 −p, 0, 1 −p, . . . .

On the other hand, when

p < 1 and q = 1

all prime period-two solutions of Eq(7.6) are given by

. . . , φ, 1 −p −φ, φ, 1 −p −φ, . . .

with

0 ≤ φ ≤ 1 −p and φ =

1 −p

2

.

Theorem 7.4.2 Assume that

p < 1 and q > 1. (7.7)

Then the period-two solution

. . . , 0, 1 −p, 0, 1 −p, . . . (7.8)

of Eq(7.6) is locally asymptotically stable.

Proof. It follows from Section 2.6 that here

J

T

2

0

1 −p

=

1

p+q(1−p)

0

−

q(1−p)

p+q(1−p)

p

and in view of (7.7) both eigenvalues of J

T

2

0

1 −p

**lie in the disk |λ| < 1. Therefore
**

the prime period-two solution (7.8) is locally asymptotically stable. 2

7.5 Open Problems and Conjectures

Conjecture 7.5.1 Assume

p, q ∈ (0, 1).

Show that every positive solution of Eq(7.6) has a ﬁnite limit.

7.5. Open Problems and Conjectures 135

Conjecture 7.5.2 Assume

p < 1 and q ≥ 1.

Show that every positive solution of Eq(7.6) converges to a, not necessarily prime, period-

two solution.

Open Problem 7.5.1 Assume

p ∈ (0, 1) and q ∈ (1, ∞).

Find the basin of attraction of the two cycle

. . . , 0, 1 −p, 0, 1 −p, . . .

of Eq(7.6).

Open Problem 7.5.2 Investigate the asymptotic character and the periodic nature of

all positive solutions of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

x

n−2

1 +px

n

+qx

n−1

+x

n−2

, n = 0, 1, . . .

where

p, q ∈ [0, ∞).

Extend and generalize.

Open Problem 7.5.3 For each of the equations given below, ﬁnd the set G of all points

(x

−1

, x

0

) ∈ R ×R through which the equation is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0:

x

n+1

=

1

1 +x

n

+x

n−1

(7.9)

x

n+1

=

x

n

1 +x

n

+x

n−1

(7.10)

x

n+1

=

x

n−1

1 +x

n

+x

n−1

. (7.11)

Now for each of the equations (7.9)-(7.11), let (x

−1

, x

0

) ∈ G be an initial point

through which the corresponding equation is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0, and investigate

the long term-behavior of the solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

.

136 Chapter 7. (1, 3)-Type Equations

Open Problem 7.5.4 Assume that {p

n

}

∞

n=0

and {q

n

}

∞

n=0

are convergent sequences of

nonnegative real numbers with ﬁnite limits,

p = lim

n→∞

p

n

and q = lim

n→∞

q

n

.

Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of

each of the following three diﬀerence equations:

y

n+1

=

1

1 +p

n

y

n

+q

n

y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (7.12)

y

n+1

=

y

n

1 +p

n

y

n

+q

n

y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (7.13)

y

n+1

=

y

n−1

p

n

+q

n

y

n

+y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (7.14)

Open Problem 7.5.5 Assume that {p

n

}

∞

n=0

and {q

n

}

∞

n=0

are period-two sequences of

nonnegative real numbers. Investigate the global character of all positive solutions of

Eqs(7.12)-(7.14). Extend and generalize.

Chapter 8

(3, 1)-Type Equations

8.1 Introduction

Eq(1) contains the following three equations of the (1, 3)-type:

x

n+1

=

α +βx

n

+γx

n−1

A

, n = 0, 1, . . . (8.1)

x

n+1

=

α +βx

n

+γx

n−1

Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (8.2)

and

x

n+1

=

α +βx

n

+γx

n−1

Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (8.3)

Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all parameters that appear in these

equations are positive, the initial conditions are nonnegative, and the denominators are

always positive.

Eq(8.1) is a linear diﬀerence equation and can be solved explicitly.

Eq(8.2) by the change of the variables

x

n

= y

n

+

β

B

,

is reduced to a (2, 2)-type equation of the form of Eq(6.4) (see Section 6.5), namely,

y

n+1

=

(α +

βγ

B

) +γy

n−1

β +By

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . .

Eq(8.3) by the change of the variables

x

n

= y

n

+

γ

C

,

137

138 Chapter 8. (3, 1)-Type Equations

is reduced to a (2, 2)-type equation of the form of Eq(6.2) (see Section 6.3) namely,

y

n+1

=

(α +

βγ

C

) +βy

n

γ +Cy

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . .

Hence there is nothing else remaining to do about these equations other than to pose

some Open Problems and Conjectures.

8.2 Open Problems and Conjectures

Open Problem 8.2.1 Assume γ > β. Determine the set of initial conditions (x

−1

, x

0

) ∈

(0, ∞) ×(0, ∞) through which the solutions of Eq(8.2) are bounded.

Open Problem 8.2.2 (a) Assume γ = β and let

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . . (8.4)

be a period-two solution of Eq(8.2). Determine the basin of attraction of (8.4).

(b) Let {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a positive solution of Eq(8.2) which converges to (8.4). Determine

the values of φ and ψ in terms of the initial conditions x

−1

and x

0

.

Conjecture 8.2.1 Show that every positive solution of Eq(8.3) converges to the positive

equilibrium of the equation.

Open Problem 8.2.3 Determine the set G of all initial points (x

−1

, x

0

) ∈ R × R

through which the equation

x

n+1

=

1 +x

n

+x

n−1

x

n

is well deﬁned for all n and for these initial points determine the long-term behavior of

the solutions {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

.

Open Problem 8.2.4 Determine the set G of all initial points (x

−1

, x

0

) ∈ R × R

through which the equation

x

n+1

=

1 +x

n

+x

n−1

x

n−1

is well deﬁned for all n and for these initial points determine the long-term behavior of

the solutions {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

.

8.2. Open Problems and Conjectures 139

Open Problem 8.2.5 Assume that {p

n

}

∞

n=0

and {q

n

}

∞

n=0

are convergent sequences of

nonnegative real numbers with ﬁnite limits,

p = lim

n→∞

p

n

and q = lim

n→∞

q

n

.

Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of

each of the following two diﬀerence equations:

y

n+1

=

p

n

+x

n

+x

n−1

q

n

x

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (8.5)

y

n+1

=

p

n

+x

n

+x

n−1

q

n

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (8.6)

Open Problem 8.2.6 Assume that {p

n

}

∞

n=0

and {q

n

}

∞

n=0

are period-two sequences of

nonnegative real numbers. Investigate the global character of all positive solutions of

Eqs(8.5) and (8.6). Extend and generalize.

Chapter 9

(2, 3)-Type Equations

9.1 Introduction

Eq(1) contains the following three equations of the (2, 3)-type:

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

A + Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (9.1)

x

n+1

=

α + γx

n−1

A + Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (9.2)

and

x

n+1

=

βx

n

+ γx

n−1

A + Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (9.3)

Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all the parameters in the above

(2, 3)-type equations are positive and the initial conditions are nonnegative.

9.2 The Case γ = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

This is the (2, 3)-type Eq(9.1) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

A

B

y

n

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

p + qy

n

1 + y

n

+ ry

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (9.4)

where

p =

αB

A

2

, q =

β

A

, and r =

C

B

.

141

142 Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

(Eq(9.4) was investigated in [51].)

Here we make some simple observations about linearized stability, invariant intervals,

and the convergence of solutions in certain regions of initial conditions.

Eq(9.4) has a unique equilibrium y which is positive and is given by

y =

q −1 +

(q −1)

2

+ 4p(r + 1)

2(r + 1)

.

By employing the linearized stability Theorem 1.1.1, we obtain the following result:

Theorem 9.2.1 The equilibrium y of Eq(9.4) is locally asymptotically stable for all

values of the parameters p, q and r.

9.2.1 Boundedness of Solutions

We will prove that all solutions of Eq(9.4) are bounded.

Theorem 9.2.2 Every solution of Eq(9.4) is bounded from above and from below by

positive constants.

Proof. Let {y

n

} be a solution of Eq(9.4). Clearly, if the solution is bounded from above

by a constant M, then

y

n+1

≥

p

1 + (1 + r)M

and so it is also bounded from below. Now assume for the sake of contradiction that the

solution is not bounded from above. Then there exists a subsequence {y

1+n

k

}

∞

k=0

such

that

lim

k→∞

n

k

= ∞, lim

k→∞

y

1+n

k

= ∞, and y

1+n

k

= max{y

n

: n ≤ n

k

} for k ≥ 0.

From (9.4) we see that

y

n+1

< qy

n

+ p for n ≥ 0

and so

lim

k→∞

y

n

k

= lim

k→∞

y

n

k

−1

= ∞.

Hence for suﬃciently large k,

0 < y

1+n

k

−y

n

k

=

p + [(q −1) −y

n

k

−ry

n

k

−1

]y

n

k

1 + y

n

k

+ ry

n

k

−1

< 0

which is a contradiction and the proof is complete. 2

The above proof has an advantage that extends to several equations of the form

of Eq(9.1) with nonnegative parameters. The boundedness of solutions of the special

9.2. The Case γ = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

143

equation (9.4) with positive parameters immediately follows from the observation that

if

M = max{1, p, q}

then

y

n+1

≤

M + My

n

1 + y

n

= M for n ≥ 0.

9.2.2 Invariant Intervals

The following result, which can be established by direct calculation, gives a list of in-

variant intervals for Eq(9.4). Recall that I is an invariant interval, if whenever,

y

N

, y

N+1

∈ I for some integer N ≥ 0,

then

y

n

∈ I for n ≥ N.

Lemma 9.2.1 Eq(9.4) possesses the following invariant intervals:

(a)

0,

q −1 +

(q −1)

2

+ 4p

2

¸

¸

, when p ≤ q;

(b)

¸

p −q

qr

, q

¸

, when q < p < q(rq + 1);

(c)

¸

q,

p −q

qr

¸

, when p > q(rq + 1).

Proof.

(a) Set

g(x) =

p + qx

1 + x

and b =

q −1 +

(q −1)

2

+ 4p

2

and observe that g is an increasing function and g(b) ≤ b. Using Eq(9.4) we see

that when y

k−1

, y

k

∈ [0, b], then

y

k+1

=

p + qy

k

1 + y

k

+ ry

k−1

≤

p + qy

k

1 + y

k

= g(y

k

) ≤ g(b) ≤ b.

The proof follows by induction.

144 Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

(b) It is clear that the function

f(x, y) =

p + qx

1 + x + ry

is increasing in x for y >

p−q

qr

. Using Eq(9.4) we see that when y

k−1

, y

k

∈

p−q

qr

, q

,

then

y

k+1

=

p + qy

k

1 + y

k

+ ry

k−1

= f(y

k

, y

k−1

) ≤ f

q,

p −q

qr

= q.

Also by using the condition p < q(rq + 1) we obtain

y

k+1

=

p + qy

k

1 + y

k

+ ry

k−1

= f(y

k

, y

k−1

) ≥ f

p −q

qr

, q

=

q(pr + p −q)

(rq)

2

+ rq + p −q

>

p −q

qr

.

The proof follows by the induction.

(c) It is clear that the function

f(x, y) =

p + qx

1 + x + ry

is decreasing in x for y <

p−q

qr

. Using Eq(9.4) we see that when y

k−1

, y

k

∈

q,

p−q

qr

,

then

y

k+1

=

p + qy

k

1 + y

k

+ ry

k−1

= f(y

k

, y

k−1

) ≥ f

p −q

qr

,

p −q

qr

= q.

Also by using the condition p > q(rq + 1) we obtain

y

k+1

=

p + qy

k

1 + y

k

+ ry

k−1

= f(y

k

, y

k−1

) ≤ f(q, q) =

p + q

2

1 + (r + 1)q

<

p −q

qr

.

The proof follows by induction.

2

9.2.3 Semicycle Analysis

Let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(9.4). Then the following identitites are true for n ≥ 0:

y

n+1

−q =

qr(

p−q

qr

−y

n−1

)

1 + y

n

+ ry

n−1

, (9.5)

y

n+1

−

p −q

qr

=

qr

q −

p−q

qr

y

n

+ qr

y

n−1

−

p−q

qr

+ pr(q −y

n−1

)

qr(1 + y

n

+ ry

n−1

)

, (9.6)

y

n

−y

n+4

=

9.2. The Case γ = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

145

qr

y

n

−

p−q

qr

y

n+1

+ (y

n

−q)(y

n+1

y

n+3

+ y

n+3

+ y

n+1

+ ry

n

y

n+3

) + y

n

+ ry

2

n

−p

(1 + y

n+3

)(1 + y

n+1

+ ry

n

) + r(p + qy

n+1

)

,

(9.7)

y

n+1

−y =

(y −q)(y −y

n

) + yr(y −y

n−1

)

1 + y

n

+ ry

n−1

. (9.8)

The proofs of the following two lemmas are straightforward consequences of the Identities

(9.5)- (9.8) and will be omitted.

Lemma 9.2.2 Assume

p > q(qr + 1)

and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(9.4). Then the following statements are true:

(i) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

>

p−q

qr

, then y

N+2

< q;

(ii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

=

p−q

qr

, then y

N+2

= q;

(iii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

<

p−q

qr

, then y

N+2

> q;

(iv) If for some N ≥ 0, q < y

N

<

p−q

qr

, then q < y

N+2

<

p−q

qr

;

(v) If for some N ≥ 0, y ≥ y

N−1

and y ≥ y

N

, then y

N+1

≥ y;

(vi) If for some N ≥ 0, y < y

N−1

and y < y

N

, then y

N+1

< y;

(vii) q < y <

p−q

qr

.

Lemma 9.2.3 Assume

q < p < q(qr + 1)

and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(9.4). Then the following statements are true:

(i) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

<

p−q

qr

, then y

N+2

> q;

(ii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

=

p−q

qr

, then y

N+2

= q;

(iii) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

>

p−q

qr

, then y

N+2

< q;

(iv) If for some N ≥ 0, y

N

>

p−q

qr

and y

N

< q then q > y

N+2

>

p−q

qr

;

(v)

p−q

qr

< y < q.

146 Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

Lemma 9.2.4 Assume

p = q(qr + 1)

and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(9.4). Then

y

n+1

−q =

qr

1 + y

n

+ ry

n−1

(q −y

n−1

). (9.9)

Furthermore when qr < 1, then

lim

n→∞

y

n

= y. (9.10)

Proof. Identity (9.9) follows by straightforward computation. The limit (9.10) is a

consequence of the fact that in this case qr ∈ (0, ∞) and Eq(9.4) has no period-two

solution. 2

Here we present a semicycle analysis of the solutions of Eq(9.4) when p = q(1 +rq).

In this case Eq(9.4) becomes

y

n+1

=

q + rq

2

+ qy

n

1 + y

n

+ ry

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

and the only equilibrium point is y = q.

Theorem 9.2.3 Suppose that p = q + rq

2

and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a nontrivial solution of

Eq(9.4). Then this solution is oscillatory and the sum of the lengths of two consecutive

semicycles, excluding the ﬁrst, is equal to four. More precisely, the following statements

are true for all k ≥ 0:

(i)

y

−1

> q and y

0

≤ q =⇒y

4k−1

> q, y

4k

≤ 1, y

4k+1

< q, and y

4k+2

≥ q;

(ii)

y

−1

< q and y

0

≥ q =⇒y

4k−1

< q, y

4k

≥ 1, y

4k+1

> q, and y

4k+2

≤ q;

(iii)

y

−1

> q and y

0

≥ q =⇒y

4k−1

> q, y

4k

≥ 1, y

4k+1

< q, and y

4k+2

≤ q;

(iv)

y

−1

< q and y

0

≤ q =⇒y

4k−1

< q, y

4k

≤ 1, y

4k+1

> q, and y

4k+2

≥ q.

Proof. The proof follows from identity (9.5). 2

9.2. The Case γ = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

147

9.2.4 Global Asymptotic Stability

The following lemma establishes that when p = q(qr + 1), every solution of Eq(9.4)

is eventually trapped into one of the three invariant intervals of Eq(9.4) described in

Lemma 9.2.1. More precisely, the following is true:

Lemma 9.2.5 Let I denote the interval which is deﬁned as follows:

I =

[0,

q−1+

√

(q−1)

2

+4p

2

] if p ≤ q;

[

p−q

qr

, q] if q < p < q(qr + 1);

[q,

p−q

qr

] if p > q(qr + 1).

Then every solution of Eq(9.4) lies eventually in I.

Proof. Let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a solution of Eq(9.4). First assume that

p ≤ q.

Then clearly, y ∈ I. Set

b =

q −1 +

(q −1)

2

+ 4p

2

and observe that

y

n+1

−b =

(q −p)(y

n

−b) −r(p + qb)y

n−1

(1 + y

n

+ ry

n−1

)(1 + b)

, n ≥ 0.

Hence, if for some N, y

N

≤ b, then y

N+1

< b. Now assume for the sake of contradiction

that

y

n

> b for n > 0.

Then y

n

> y for n ≥ 0 and so

lim

n→∞

y

n

= y ∈ I

which is a contradiction.

Next assume that

q < p < q(qr + 1)

and, for the sake of contradiction, also assume that the solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

is not even-

tually in the interval I. Then by Lemma 9.2.3, there exists N > 0 such that one of the

following three cases holds:

(i) y

N

> q, y

N+1

> q, and y

N+2

<

p−q

qr

;

(ii) y

N

> q, y

N+1

<

p−q

qr

, and y

N+2

<

p−q

qr

;

148 Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

(iii) y

N

> q,

p−q

qr

≤ y

N+1

≤ q, and y

N+2

<

p−q

qr

.

Also observe that

if y

N

≥ q, then y

N

+ ry

2

N

−p > 0

and

if y

N

≤

p−q

qr

, then y

N

+ ry

2

N

−p < 0.

The desired contradiction is now obtained by using the Identity (9.7) from which it

follows that for j ∈ {0, 1, 2, 3}, each subsequence {y

n+4k+j

}

∞

k=0

with all its terms outside

the interval I converges monotonically and enters in the interval I.

The proof when

p > q(qr + 1)

is similar and will be omitted. 2

By using the monotonic character of the function

f(x, y) =

p + qx

1 + x + ry

in each of the intervals in Lemma 9.2.1, together with the appropriate convergence

Theorems 1.4.7 and 1.4.5, we can obtain some global asymptotic stability results for the

solutions of Eq(9.4). For example, the following results are true for Eq(9.4):

Theorem 9.2.4 (a) Assume that either

p ≥ q + q

2

r,

or

p <

q

1 + r

.

Then the equilibrium y of Eq(9.4) is globally asymptotically stable.

(b) Assume that either

p ≤ q

or

q < p < q + q

2

r

and that one of the following conditions is also satisﬁed:

(i) q ≤ 1;

(ii) r ≤ 1;

(iii) r > 1 and (q −1)

2

(r −1) ≤ 4p.

Then the equilibrium y of Eq(9.4) is globally asymptotically stable.

Proof.

9.3. The Case β = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

149

(a) The proof follows from Lemmas 9.2.1 and 9.2.4 and Theorems 1.4.7 and 1.4.2.

(b) In view of Lemma 9.2.1 we see that when y

−1

, y

0

∈

¸

0,

q−1+

√

(q−1)

2

+4p

2

, then y

n

∈

¸

0,

q−1+

√

(q−1)

2

+4p

2

**for all n ≥ 0. It is easy to check that y ∈
**

¸

0,

q−1+

√

(q−1)

2

+4p

2

**and that in the interval
**

¸

0,

q−1+

√

(q−1)

2

+4p

2

**, the function f increases in x and
**

decreases in y.

We will employ Theorem 1.4.5 and so it remains to be shown that if

m = f(m, M) and M = f(M, m)

then M = m. This system has the form

m =

p + qm

1 + m + rM

and M =

p + qM

1 + M + rm

.

Hence (M −m)(1 −q + M + m) = 0. Now if m + M = q −1, then M = m. For

instance, this is the case if Condition (i) is satisﬁed. If m + M = q − 1 then m

and M satisfy the equation

(r −1)m

2

+ (r −1)(1 −q)m + p = 0.

Clearly now if Condition (ii) or (iii) is satisﬁed, m = M from which the result

follows.

The proof when q < p < q + q

2

r holds follows from Lemma 9.2.1 and Theorem

1.4.5.

2

9.3 The Case β = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

This is the (2, 3)-type Eq(9.2) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

A

B

y

n

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

p + qy

n−1

1 + y

n

+ ry

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (9.11)

where

p =

αB

A

2

, q =

γ

A

, and r =

C

B

.

150 Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

This equation has not been investigated yet. Here we make some simple observations

about linearized stability, invariant intervals, and the convergence of solutions in certain

regions of initial conditions.

Eq(9.11) has a unique equilibrium y which is positive and is given by

y =

q −1 +

(q −1)

2

+ 4p(r + 1)

2(r + 1)

.

By employing the linearized stability Theorem 1.1.1 we obtain the following result.

Theorem 9.3.1 (a) The equilibrium y of Eq(9.11) is locally asymptotically stable when

either

q ≤ 1

or

q > 1 and (r −1)(q −1)

2

+ 4pr

2

> 0.

(b) The equilibrium y of Eq(9.11) is unstable, and more precisely a saddle point,

when

q > 1 and (r −1)(q −1)

2

+ 4pr

2

< 0. (9.12)

9.3.1 Existence and Local Stability of Period-Two Cycles

Let

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

be a period-two cycle of Eq(9.11). Then

φ =

p + qφ

1 + ψ + rφ

and ψ =

p + qψ

1 + φ + rψ

.

It now follows after some calculation that the following result is true.

Lemma 9.3.1 Eq(9.11) has a prime period-two solution

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

if and only if (9.12) holds.

Furthermore when (9.12) holds, the period-two solution is “unique” and the values

of φ and ψ are the positive roots of the quadratic equation

t

2

−

q −1

r

t +

p

1 −r

= 0.

9.3. The Case β = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

151

To investigate the local stability of the two cycle

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

we set

u

n

= y

n−1

and v

n

= y

n

, for n = 0, 1, . . .

and write Eq(9.11) in the equivalent form:

u

n+1

= v

n

v

n+1

=

p+qu

n

1+v

n

+ru

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . .

Let T be the function on (0, ∞) ×(0, ∞) deﬁned by:

T

u

v

=

v

p+qu

1+v+ru

.

Then

φ

ψ

**is a ﬁxed point of T
**

2

, the second iterate of T. By a simple calculation we ﬁnd that

T

2

u

v

=

g(u, v)

h(u, v)

where

g(u, v) =

p + qu

1 + v + ru

and h(u, v) =

p + qv

1 + g(u, v) + rv

.

Clearly the two cycle is locally asymptotically stable when the eigenvalues of the

Jacobian matrix J

T

2, evaluated at

φ

ψ

**, lie inside the unit disk.
**

We have

J

T

2

φ

ψ

=

¸

¸

∂g

∂u

(φ, ψ)

∂g

∂v

(φ, ψ)

∂h

∂u

(φ, ψ)

∂h

∂v

(φ, ψ)

¸

,

where

∂g

∂u

(φ, ψ) =

q −pr + qψ

(1 + ψ + rφ)

2

,

∂g

∂v

(φ, ψ) =

−p −qφ

(1 + ψ + rφ)

2

,

152 Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

∂h

∂u

(φ, ψ) =

(p + qψ)(pr −q −qψ)

(1 + ψ + rφ)

2

(1 + φ + rψ)

2

,

∂h

∂v

(φ, ψ) =

(p + qψ)(p + qφ)

(1 + ψ + rφ)

2

(1 + φ + rψ)

2

+

q −pr + qφ

(1 + φ + rψ)

2

.

Set

S =

∂g

∂u

(φ, ψ) +

∂h

∂v

(φ, ψ)

and

D =

∂g

∂u

(φ, ψ)

∂h

∂v

(φ, ψ) −

∂g

∂v

(φ, ψ)

∂h

∂u

(φ, ψ).

Then it follows from Theorem 1.1.1 that both eigenvalues of J

T

2

φ

ψ

**lie inside the
**

unit disk |λ| < 1, if and only if

|S| < 1 +D < 2. (9.13)

Inequality (9.13) is equivalent to the following three inequalities:

D < 1 (9.14)

S < 1 +D (9.15)

−1 −D < S. (9.16)

First we will establish Inequality (9.14). This inequality is equivalent to

(q −pr + qφ) (q −pr + qψ) −(1 + ψ + rφ)

2

(1 + φ + rψ)

2

< 0.

Observe that,

(q −pr + qφ) (q −pr + qψ) = (q −pr)

2

+ q(q −pr)(φ + ψ) + q

2

φψ =

=

−2q

2

r + q

2

r

2

+ 3qpr

2

−2qpr

3

−p

2

r

3

+ p

2

r

4

−q

3

+ rq

3

+ q

2

−pr

2

q

2

−qpr

r (−1 + r)

and that

(1 + ψ + rφ)

2

(1 + φ + rψ)

2

=

1 + φ + rψ + ψ + ψφ + rψ

2

+ rφ + φ

2

r + r

2

φψ

2

=

−pr

2

+ qr + pr −q + q

2

r

2

.

Thus

9.3. The Case β = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

153

(q −pr + qφ) (q −pr + qψ) −(1 + ψ + rφ)

2

(1 + φ + rψ)

2

=

−pr

3

q

2

+ 2q

2

r −q

2

r

2

−q

2

+ 3p

2

r

3

−2p

2

r

4

−3rq

3

+ 3qpr

3

−5qpr

2

r

2

(1 −r)

+

2qpr + 4pr

2

q

2

+ 2q

3

+ q

4

r −p

2

r

2

−2prq

2

−q

4

+ r

2

q

3

r

2

(1 −r)

=

(2r

2

p −rp + q −q

2

−qr + q

2

r) (−r

2

p + rp −q + q

2

+ qr)

r

2

(1 −r)

.

Note that

−r

2

p + rp −q + q

2

+ qr = rp(1 −r) + q(q −1) + qr > 0.

Also by using Condition (9.12) we see that

(r −1)(q −1)

2

+ 4pr

2

= q

2

r −2qr + r −q

2

+ 2q −1 + 4r

2

p < 0

and so

2r

2

p −rp + q −q

2

−qr + q

2

r < 2r

2

p −rp + q −qr + 2qr −r −2q + 1 −4r

2

p

= −2r

2

p −rp −q + qr −r + 1 = −2r

2

p −rp + (r −1) (q −1) < 0

from which the result follows.

Next we turn to Inequality (9.15). This inequality is equivalent to

(q −pr + qψ)(1 + φ + rψ)

2

+ (p + qψ)(p + qφ) + (q −pr + qφ)(1 + ψ + rφ)

2

−(q −pr + qφ) (q −pr + qψ) −(1 + ψ + rφ)

2

(1 + φ + rψ)

2

< 0.

After some lengthy calculation one can see that this inequality is a consequence of

Condition (9.12).

Finally Inequality (9.16) is equivalent to

(q −pr + qψ)(1 + φ + rψ)

2

+ (p + qψ)(p + qφ) + (q −pr + qφ)(1 + ψ + rφ)

2

+(q −pr + qφ) (q −pr + qψ) + (1 + ψ + rφ)

2

(1 + φ + rψ)

2

> 0.

After some lengthy calculation one can see that this inequality is also a consequence

of Condition (9.12).

In summary, we have established the following result:

154 Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

Theorem 9.3.2 Eq(9.11) has a unique prime period-two solution

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

if and only if (9.12) holds.

Furthermore when (9.12) holds, this period-two solution is locally asymptotically sta-

ble.

9.3.2 Invariant Intervals

The following result, which can be established by direct calculation, gives a list of in-

variant intervals for Eq(9.11).

Lemma 9.3.2 Eq(9.11) possesses the following invariant intervals:

(a)

0,

q −1 +

(q −1)

2

+ 4pr

2r

¸

¸

when pr ≤ q;

(b)

¸

pr −q

q

,

q

r

¸

when 1 < q < pr < q +

q

2

r

−

q

r

;

(c)

¸

q

r

,

pr −q

q

¸

when pr ≥ q +

q

2

r

.

Proof.

(a) Set

g(x) =

p + qx

1 + rx

and b =

q −1 +

(q −1)

2

+ 4pr

2r

and observe that g is an increasing function and g(b) ≤ b. Using Eq(9.11) we see

that when y

k−1

, y

k

∈ [0, b], then

y

k+1

=

p + qy

k−1

1 + y

k

+ qy

k−1

≤

p + qy

k−1

1 + ry

k−1

= g(y

k−1

) ≤ g(b) ≤ b.

The proof follows by induction.

9.3. The Case β = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

155

(b) It is clear that the function

f(x, y) =

p + qy

1 + x + ry

is increasing in y for x >

pr−q

q

. Using Eq(9.11) we see that when y

k−1

, y

k

∈

pr−q

q

,

q

r

,

then

y

k+1

=

p + qy

k−1

1 + y

k

+ ry

k−1

= f(y

k

, y

k−1

) ≥ f

q

r

,

pr −q

q

≥

pr −q

q

.

Now by using the monotonic character of the function f(x, y) and the condition

q < pr < q +

q

2

r

we obtain

y

k+1

=

p + qy

k−1

1 + y

k

+ ry

k−1

= f(y

k

, y

k−1

) ≤ f

pr −q

q

,

q

r

=

q

r

.

The proof follows by induction.

(c) It is clear that the function

f(x, y) =

p + qy

1 + x + ry

is decreasing in y for x <

pr−q

q

. Using Eq(9.11) we see that when y

k−1

, y

k

∈

q

r

,

pr−q

q

, then

y

k+1

=

p + qy

k−1

1 + y

k

+ qy

k−1

= f(y

k

, y

k−1

) ≥ f

pr −q

q

,

pr −q

q

=

q

r

.

By using the fact that f(x, y) is decreasing in both arguments and the condition

pr > q +

q

r

2

we obtain

y

k+1

=

p + qy

k−1

1 + y

k

+ qy

k−1

= f(y

k

, y

k−1

) ≤ f

q

r

,

q

r

=

pr + q

2

r + (r + 1)q

<

pr −q

q

.

The proof follows by induction.

2

156 Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

9.3.3 Convergence of Solutions

By using the monotonic character of the function

f(x, y) =

p + qy

1 + x + ry

in each of the intervals in Lemma 9.3.2, together with the appropriate convergence

theorem (from among Theorems 1.4.5-1.4.8) we can obtain some convergence results for

the solutions with initial conditions in the invariant intervals. For example, the following

results are true for Eq(9.11):

Theorem 9.3.3 Assume that

pr ≤ q

and that one of the following conditions is also satisﬁed:

(i) q ≤ 1;

(ii) r ≥ 1;

(iii) r < 1 and (r −1)(q −1)

2

+ 4pr

2

≥ 0.

Then every solution of Eq(9.11) with initial conditions in the invariant interval

0,

q −1 +

(q −1)

2

+ 4pr

2r

¸

¸

converges to the equilibrium y.

Proof. In view of Lemma 9.3.2 we see that when y

−1

, y

0

∈

¸

0,

q−1+

√

(q−1)

2

+4pr

2r

, then

y

n

∈

¸

0,

q−1+

√

(q−1)

2

+4pr

2r

**for all n ≥ 0. It is easy to check that y ∈
**

¸

0,

q−1+

√

(q−1)

2

+4pr

2r

**and that in the interval
**

¸

0,

q−1+

√

(q−1)

2

+4pr

2r

**the function f decreases in x and increases
**

in y. The result now follows by employing Theorem 1.4.6.

2

Theorem 9.3.4 (a) Assume that 1 < q < pr < q+

q

2

r

−

q

r

and that one of the following

conditions is also satisﬁed:

(i) r ≥ 1;

(ii) r < 1 and (r −1)(q −1)

2

+ 4pr

2

≥ 0.

9.3. The Case β = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

157

Then every solution of Eq(9.11) with initial conditions in the invariant interval

¸

pr −q

q

,

q

r

¸

converges to the equilibrium y.

(b) Assume that pr > q +

q

2

r

. Then every solution of Eq(9.11) with initial conditions

in the invariant interval

¸

q

r

,

pr −q

q

¸

converges to the equilibrium y.

Proof.

(a) In view of Lemma 9.3.2 we conclude that y

n

∈

pr−q

q

,

q

r

**for all n ≥ 0. It is easy to
**

check that y ∈

pr−q

q

,

q

r

**and that the function f(x, y) decreases in x and increases
**

in y. The result now follows by employing Theorem 1.4.6.

(b) In view of Lemma 9.3.2 we conclude that y

n

∈

q

r

,

pr−q

q

**for all n ≥ 0. It is easy to
**

check that y ∈

q

r

,

pr−q

q

and that in the interval

q

r

,

pr−q

q

**the function f decreases
**

in both x and in y. The result now follows by employing Theorem 1.4.7.

2

9.3.4 Global Stability

By applying Theorem 1.4.3 to Eq(9.11), we obtain the following global asymptotic sta-

bility result.

Theorem 9.3.5 Assume

r ≥ 1 and pr ≤ q.

Then the positive equilibrium of Eq(9.11) is globally asymptotically stable.

9.3.5 Semicycle Analysis When pr = q +

q

2

r

Here we present a semicycle analysis of the solutions of Eq(9.11) when pr = q +

q

2

r

. In

this case Eq(9.11) becomes

y

n+1

=

qr + q

2

+ qr

2

y

n−1

r

2

+ r

2

y

n

+ r

3

y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

and the only positive equilibrium is y =

q

r

.

158 Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

Theorem 9.3.6 Suppose that pr = q +

q

2

r

and let {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

be a nontrivial solution of

Eq(9.11). Then after the ﬁrst semicycle, the solution oscillates about the equilibrium y

with semicycles of length one.

Proof. The proof follows from the relation

y

n+1

−

q

r

= (

q

r

−y

n

)

qr

2

r

3

(1 + y

n

+ ry

n−1

)

.

2

9.4 The Case α = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

This is the (2, 3)-type Eq(9.3) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

γ

C

y

n

,

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ y

n−1

r + qy

n

+ y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (9.17)

where

p =

β

γ

, q =

B

C

, and r =

A

γ

.

This equation has not been investigated yet. Here we make some simple observations

about linearized stability, invariant intervals, and the convergence of solutions in certain

regions of initial conditions.

The equilibrium points of Eq(9.17) are the nonnegative solutions of the equation

y =

(p + 1)y

r + (1 + q)y

.

Hence zero is always an equilibrium point and when

p + 1 > r, (9.18)

Eq(9.17) also possesses the unique positive equilibrium

y =

p + 1 −r

q + 1

.

The following theorem is a consequence of Theorem 1.1.1 and Theorem 1.3.1.

9.4. The Case α = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

159

Theorem 9.4.1 (a) Assume that

p + 1 ≤ r.

Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(9.17) is globally asymptotically stable.

(b) Assume that

p + 1 > r.

Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(9.17) is unstable. Furthermore the zero equilibrium

is a saddle point when

1 −p < r < 1 + p

and a repeller when

r < 1 −p.

The linearized equation associated with Eq(9.17) about its positive equilibrium y is

z

n+1

−

p −q + qr

(p + 1)(q + 1)

z

n

−

q −p + r

(p + 1)(q + 1)

z

n−1

= 0, n = 0, 1, . . . .

The following result is a consequence of Theorem 1.1.1.

Theorem 9.4.2 Assume that (9.18) holds. Then the positive equilibrium of Eq(9.17)

is locally asymptotically stable when

q + r < 3p + 1 + qr + pq, (9.19)

and unstable (a saddle point) when

q + r > 3p + 1 + qr + pq. (9.20)

Concerning prime period-two solutions for Eq(9.17), it follows from Section 2.5 that the

following result is true.

Theorem 9.4.3 Eq(9.17) has a prime period-two solution

. . . φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

if and only if (9.20) holds. Furthermore when (9.20) holds there is a unique period-two

solution and the values of φ and ψ are the positive roots of the quadratic equation

t

2

−(1 −p −r)t +

p(1 −p −r)

q −1

= 0.

160 Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

9.4.1 Invariant Intervals

The following result, which can be established by direct calculation, gives a list of in-

variant intervals for Eq(9.17).

Lemma 9.4.1 Eq(9.17) possesses the following invariant intervals:

(a)

¸

0,

p + q −r

q + 1

¸

when p = q

2

and q

2

+ q > r

and

[0, K] when p = q

2

and q

2

+ q ≤ r,

where K > 0 is an arbitrary number;

(b)

¸

0,

qr

p −q

2

¸

when q

2

< p ≤ q

2

+ r and p + q > r,

[0, K] when q

2

< p ≤ q

2

+ r and p + q ≤ r,

where K > 0 is an arbitrary number

and

¸

qr

p −q

2

, K

1

¸

when p > q

2

+ r

where

K

1

=

(q −r)(p −q

2

) −qr +

((r −q)(p −q

2

) + qr)

2

+ 4q

3

r(p −q

2

)

2q(p −q

2

)

;

(c)

¸

0,

pr

q

2

−p

¸

when q

2

−qr ≤ p < q

2

and p + q > r,

[0, K] when q

2

−qr ≤ p < q

2

and p + q ≤ r,

where K > 0 is an arbitrary number

and

¸

pr

q

2

−p

, K

2

¸

when q

2

> p + qr,

where

K

2

=

(q −r)(q

2

−p) +

((q −r)(q

2

−p))

2

+ 4p

3

qr

2

2pqr

.

9.4. The Case α = 0 : x

n+1

=

βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

161

Proof.

(a) It is easy to see that when p = q

2

the function

f(x, y) =

px + qy

r + qx + y

is increasing in both arguments. Therefore for any K > 0,

0 ≤ f(x, y) ≤ f(K, K).

Now observe that the inequality f(K, K) ≤ K is equivalent to q

2

+q−r ≤ (q+1)K.

When q

2

+q ≤ r, this inequality is satisﬁed for any K > 0, while when q

2

+q > r

the inequality is true when

K ≥

p + q −r

q + 1

.

(b) It is clear that the function f(x, y) is increasing in both arguments for x <

qr

p−q

2

,

and it is increasing in x and decreasing in y for x ≥

qr

p−q

2

.

First assume that q

2

< p ≤ q

2

+ r .

Hence for y

k−1

, y

k

∈

0,

qr

p−q

2

we obtain

y

k+1

= f(y

k

, y

k−1

) ≤ f(K, K) = (p + q)K

1

r + (q + 1)K

≤ K,

where we set K =

qr

p−q

2

. The last inequality is always satisﬁed when p +q ≤ r and

when p + q > r, it is satisﬁed under the condition r + q

2

> p.

Second assume that p > q

2

+ r.

Then for y

k−1

, y

k

∈

qr

p−q

2

, K

1

**we can see that
**

f

qr

p −q

2

, K

1

≤ y

k+1

= f(y

k

, y

k−1

) ≤ f(K

1

,

qr

p −q

2

) ≤ K

1

.

(c) It is clear that the function f(x, y) is increasing in both arguments for y <

pr

q

2

−p

,

and it is increasing in y and decreasing in x for y ≥

pr

q

2

−p

.

First assume that q

2

−qr ≤ p < q

2

.

Then one can see that for y

k−1

, y

k

∈

0,

pr

q

2

−p

we obtain

y

k+1

= f(y

k

, y

k−1

) ≤ f(K, K) = (p + q)K

1

r + (q + 1)K

≤ K,

with K =

pr

q

2

−p

.

Second assume that p < q

2

−qr. Then for y

k−1

, y

k

∈

pr

q

2

−p

, K

2

**one can see that
**

f

pr

q

2

−p

, K

2

≤ y

k+1

= f(y

k

, y

k−1

) ≤ f

K

2

,

pr

q

2

−p

≤ K

2

.

2

162 Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

9.4.2 Convergence of Solutions

By using the monotonic character of the function

f(x, y) =

px + qy

r + qx + y

in each of the intervals in Lemma 9.4.1, together with the appropriate convergence

theorem (from among Theorems 1.4.5-1.4.8), we can obtain some convergence results

for the solutions with initial conditions in the invariant intervals. For example, the

following results are true for Eq(9.17):

Theorem 9.4.4 (a) Assume that p = q

2

and q

2

+ q > r. Then every solution of

Eq(9.17) with initial conditions in the invariant interval

¸

0,

q

2

+ q −r

q + 1

¸

converges to the equilibrium y.

Assume that p = q

2

and q

2

+ q ≤ r. Then every solution of Eq(9.17) with initial

conditions in the interval [0, K], for any K > 0, converges to the equilibrium y.

(b) Assume that q

2

+r ≥ p > q

2

and p +q > r. Then every solution of Eq(9.17) with

initial conditions in the invariant interval

¸

0,

qr

p −q

2

¸

converges to the equilibrium y.

Assume that q

2

+r ≥ p > q

2

and p +q ≤ r. Then every solution of Eq(9.17) with

initial conditions in the interval [0, K], for any K > 0, converges to the equilibrium

y.

(c) Assume that q

2

−qr ≥ p < q

2

and p +q > r. Then every solution of Eq(9.17) with

initial conditions in the invariant interval

¸

0,

pr

q

2

−p

¸

converges to the equilibrium y.

Assume that q

2

−qr ≤ p < q

2

and p +q ≤ r. Then every solution of Eq(9.17) with

initial conditions in the interval [0, K], for any K > 0, converges to the equilibrium

y.

Proof. The proof is an immediate consequence of Lemma 9.4.1 and Theorem 1.4.8.

2

9.5. Open Problems and Conjectures 163

Theorem 9.4.5 Assume that

p > q

2

+ r

and that one of the following conditions is also satisﬁed:

(i) p ≤ q + r;

(ii) q ≥ 1;

(iii) q < 1 and p ≤

3q

2

+q−qr+r

1−q

.

Then every solution of Eq(9.11) with initial conditions in the invariant interval

qr

p−q

2

, K

1

**converges to the equilibrium y.
**

Proof. The proof is a consequence of Lemma 9.4.1 and Theorem 1.4.5.

2

Theorem 9.4.6 Assume that q

2

> p + qr and that Condition (9.20) is not satis-

ﬁed. Then every solution of Eq(9.11) with initial conditions in the invariant interval

qr

p−q

2

, K

2

**converges to the equilibrium y.
**

Proof. The proof is an immediate consequence of Lemma 9.4.1 and Theorem 1.4.6.

2

9.5 Open Problems and Conjectures

Conjecture 9.5.1 Assume

α, β, A, B, C ∈ (0, ∞).

Show that every positive solution of Eq(9.1) has a ﬁnite limit.

Conjecture 9.5.2 Assume

α, γ, A, B, C ∈ (0, ∞).

Show that every positive solution of Eq(9.2) is bounded.

Conjecture 9.5.3 Assume

β, γ, A, B, C ∈ (0, ∞).

Show that every positive solution of Eq(9.3) is bounded.

164 Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

Conjecture 9.5.4 Assume

α, γ, A, B, C ∈ (0, ∞)

and suppose that Eq(9.2) has no prime period-two solutions. Show that the positive

equilibrium of Eq(9.2) is globally asymptotically stable.

Conjecture 9.5.5 Assume that x

−1

, x

0

∈ [0, ∞) with x

−1

+ x

0

> 0 and that

β, γ, A, B, C ∈ (0, ∞).

Suppose that Eq(9.3) has no prime period-two solutions. Show that the positive equilib-

rium of Eq(9.3) is globally asymptotically stable.

Open Problem 9.5.1 Determine the set G of all initial points (x

−1

, x

0

) ∈ R × R

through which the equation

x

n+1

=

x

n

+ x

n−1

1 + x

n

+ x

n−1

is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0, and for these initial points investigate the long-term behavior

of the solutions {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

. Extend and generalize.

Open Problem 9.5.2 Determine the set G of all initial points (x

−1

, x

0

) ∈ R × R

through which the equation

x

n+1

=

1 + x

n

1 + x

n

+ x

n−1

is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0, and for these initial points investigate the long-term behavior

of the solutions {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

. Extend and generalize.

Open Problem 9.5.3 Determine the set G of all initial points (x

−1

, x

0

) ∈ R × R

through which the equation

x

n+1

=

1 + x

n−1

1 + x

n

+ x

n−1

is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0, and for these initial points investigate the long-term behavior

of the solutions {x

n

}

∞

n=−1

. Extend and generalize.

9.5. Open Problems and Conjectures 165

Open Problem 9.5.4 Assume that {p

n

}

∞

n=0

, {q

n

}

∞

n=0

, and {r

n

}

∞

n=0

are convergent se-

quences of nonnegative real numbers with ﬁnite limits,

p = lim

n→∞

p

n

, q = lim

n→∞

q

n

, and r = lim

n→∞

r

n

.

Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of

each of the following three diﬀerence equations:

y

n+1

=

p

n

+ q

n

y

n

1 + y

n

+ r

n

y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (9.21)

y

n+1

=

p

n

+ q

n

y

n−1

1 + y

n

+ r

n

y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (9.22)

y

n+1

=

p

n

y

n

+ y

n−1

r

n

+ q

n

y

n

+ y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (9.23)

Open Problem 9.5.5 Assume that {p

n

}

∞

n=0

, {q

n

}

∞

n=0

, and {r

n

}

∞

n=0

are period-two se-

quences of nonnegative real numbers. Investigate the global character of all positive

solutions of Eqs(9.21)-(9.23). Extend and generalize.

Open Problem 9.5.6 Assume that (9.12) holds. Investigate the basin of attraction of

the two cycle

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

of Eq(9.11).

Open Problem 9.5.7 Assume that (9.20) holds. Investigate the basin of attraction of

the two cycle

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

of Eq(9.17).

Conjecture 9.5.6 Assume that (9.20) holds. Show that the period-two solution

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

of Eq(9.17) is locally asymptotically stable.

166 Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

Open Problem 9.5.8 Assume that

p, q, r ∈ [0, ∞) and k ∈ {2, 3, . . .}.

Investigate the global behavior of all positive solutions of each of the following diﬀerence

equations:

y

n+1

=

p + qy

n

1 + y

n

+ ry

n−k

, n = 0, 1, . . . (9.24)

y

n+1

=

p + qy

n−k

1 + y

n

+ ry

n−k

, n = 0, 1, . . . (9.25)

y

n+1

=

py

n

+ y

n−k

r + qy

n

+ y

n−k

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (9.26)

Chapter 10

(3, 2)-Type Equations

10.1 Introduction

Eq(1) contains the following three equations of the (3, 2)-type:

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

+ γx

n−1

A + Bx

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (10.1)

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

+ γx

n−1

A + Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (10.2)

and

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

+ γx

n−1

Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (10.3)

Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all parameters that appear in these

equations are positive, the initial conditions are nonnegative, and the denominators are

always positive.

10.2 The Case C = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

This is the (3, 2)-type Eq(10.1) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

A

B

y

n

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

p + qy

n

+ ry

n−1

1 + y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (10.4)

where

p =

αB

A

2

, q =

β

A

, and r =

γ

A

.

167

168 Chapter 10. (3, 2)-Type Equations

(Eq(10.4) was investigated in [29].)

The linearized equation of Eq(10.4) about its unique equilibrium

y =

q + r −1 +

(q + r −1)

2

+ 4p

2

is

z

n+1

−

q −p −ry

(1 + y)

2

z

n

−

r

1 + y

z

n−1

= 0, n = 0, 1, . . . .

By applying the linearized stability Theorem 1.1.1 we see that y is locally asymptot-

ically stable when

r < 1 + q

and is an unstable (saddle point) equilibrium when

r > 1 + q.

When

r = q + 1

Eq(10.4) possesses prime period-two solutions. See Sections 2.5 and 2.7. The main

result in this section is that the solutions of Eq(10.4) exhibit the following trichotomy

character.

Theorem 10.2.1 (a) Assume that

r = q + 1. (10.5)

Then every solution of Eq(10.4) converges to a period-two solution.

(b) Assume that

r < q + 1. (10.6)

Then the equilibrium of Eq(10.4) is globally asymptotically stable.

(c) Assume that

r > q + 1. (10.7)

Then Eq(10.4) possesses unbounded solutions.

The proof of part (a) of Theorem 10.2.1 was given, for a more general equation, in

Section 2.7. The proofs of parts (b) and (c) of Theorem 10.2.1 are given in Sections

10.2.1 and 10.2.2 below.

10.2. The Case C = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

169

10.2.1 Proof of Part (b) of Theorem 10.2.1

Here we assume that Eq(10.6) holds and we prove that the equilibrium of Eq(10.4) is

globally asymptotically stable. We know already that when Eq(10.6) holds the equilib-

rium is locally asymptotically stable so it remains to be shown that every solution of

Eq(10.4) is attracted to the equilibrium.

Observe that

y

n+1

= q +

(p −q) + ry

n−1

1 + y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . .

and so when

p ≥ q (10.8)

we have

y

n

≥ q for n ≥ 1.

Therefore the change of variables

y

n

= q + z

n

transforms Eq(10.4) to the diﬀerence equation

z

n+1

=

(p + rq −q) + rz

n−1

(1 + q) + z

n

, n = 1, . . . (10.9)

which is of the form of the (2, 2)-type Eq(6.23) which was investigated in Section 6.5

and therefore the proof is complete when (10.8) holds.

So in the remaining part of the proof we assume that

p < q.

Now observe that the solutions of Eq(10.4) satisfy the following identity

y

n+1

−q =

r

1 + y

n

y

n−1

−

q −p

r

for n ≥ 0. (10.10)

Note that when

q =

q −p

r

that is when

p + qr −q = 0 (10.11)

the Identity (10.10) reduces to

y

n+1

−q =

r

1 + y

n

(y

n

−q) for n ≥ 0. (10.12)

Also in this case

0 < r = 1 −

p

q

< 1

170 Chapter 10. (3, 2)-Type Equations

and the equilibrium of Eq(10.4) is equal to q.

It follows from (10.12) that

|y

n+1

−q| < r|y

n+1

−q|

and so

lim

n→∞

y

n

= q

which completes the proof when (10.11) holds.

Still to be considered are cases where

p + qr −q > 0 (10.13)

and

p + qr −q < 0. (10.14)

First assume that (10.13) holds. To complete the proof in this case it is suﬃcient to

show that eventually

y

n

≥ q (10.15)

and then use the known result for Eq(10.9). To this end, note that now

q −p

r

< q

and employ (10.10). If (10.15) is not eventually true then either

y

2n

<

q −p

r

for n ≥ 0 (10.16)

or

y

2n−1

<

q −p

r

for n ≥ 0. (10.17)

This is because when

y

N−1

>

q −p

r

for some N ≥ 0,

then it follows from (10.10) that

y

N+1+2K

> q for all K ≥ 0.

We will assume that (10.16) holds. The case where (10.17) holds is similar and will be

omitted. Then we can see from (10.10) that

y

2n+2

−q =

r

1 + y

n+1

y

2n

−

q −p

r

> r

y

2n

−

q −p

r

and so

y

2n+2

> ry

2n

+ p for n ≥ 0. (10.18)

10.2. The Case C = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

171

This is impossible when r ≥ 1, because by (10.16) the solution is bounded. On the other

hand, when r < 1, it follows from (10.16) and (10.18) that

q −p

r

> y

2n+2

> r

n+1

y

0

+ r

n

p + . . . + rp + p

and so

q −p

r

≥

p

1 −r

which contradicts (10.13) and completes the proof when (10.13) holds.

Next assume that (10.14) holds. Now we claim that every solution of Eq(10.4) lies

eventually in the interval

0,

q−p

r

**. Once we establish this result, the proof that the
**

equilibrium is a global attractor of all solutions would be a consequence of Theorem

1.4.8 and the fact that in this case the function

f(x, y) =

p + qx + ry

1 + x

is increasing in both arguments. To this end assume for the sake of contradiction that

the solution is not eventually in the interval

0,

q−p

r

**. Then one can see from (10.10) and
**

the fact that now

q <

q −p

r

,

that either

y

2n

>

q −p

r

for n ≥ 0 (10.19)

or

y

2n−1

>

q −p

r

for n ≥ 0. (10.20)

We will assume that (10.19) holds. The case where (10.20) holds is similar and will be

omitted. Then from (10.10) we see that

y

2n+2

−q =

r

1 + y

2n+1

y

2n

−

q −p

r

< r

y

2n

−

q −p

r

and so

y

2n+2

< ry

2n

+ p for n ≥ 0.

Note that in this case r < 1 and so

q −p

r

< y

2n+2

< r

n+1

y

0

+ r

n

p + . . . + rp + p

which implies that

q −p

r

≤

p

1 −r

.

This contradicts (10.14) and completes the proof of part (b) of Theorem 10.2.1.

172 Chapter 10. (3, 2)-Type Equations

10.2.2 Proof of Part (c) of Theorem 10.2.1

Here we assume that (10.7) holds and show that Eq(10.4) possesses unbounded solutions.

To this end observe that

y

n+1

= q +

p + r(y

n−1

−

q

r

)

1 + y

n

for n ≥ 0

and so when (10.7) holds the interval [q, ∞) is invariant. That is when

y

−1

, y

0

∈ [q, ∞),

then

y

n

≥ q for n ≥ 0.

Now the change of variables

y

n

= q + z

n

transforms Eq(10.4) to Eq(10.9) and the conclusion of part (c) follows from Section 6.5

for appropriate initial conditions y

−1

and y

0

. More speciﬁcally the solutions of Eq(10.4)

with initial conditions such that

q ≤ y

−1

< r −1 and y

0

> r

−1

+

p + q(r −1)

r −1 −q

have the property that the subsequences of even terms converge to ∞ while the subse-

quences of odd terms converge to q.

It should be mentioned that when (10.7) holds, the equilibrium of Eq(10.4) is a

saddle point and so by the stable manifold theorem, in addition to unbounded solu-

tions, Eq(10.4) possesses bounded solutions which in fact converge to the equilibrium of

Eq(10.4).

10.3 The Case B = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Cx

n−1

This is the (3, 2)-type Eq(10.2) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

A

C

y

n

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

p + qy

n

+ ry

n−1

1 + y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (10.21)

where

p =

αC

A

2

, q =

β

A

, and r =

γ

A

.

10.3. The Case B = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Cx

n−1

173

This equation has not been investigated yet. Here we make some simple observations

about linearized stability, invariant intervals, and convergence of solutions in certain

regions of initial conditions.

The linearized equation of Eq(10.21) about its positive equilibrium

y =

q + r −1 +

(q + r −1)

2

+ 4p

2

is

z

n+1

−

q

1 + y

z

n

+

p −r + qy

(1 + y)

2

z

n

= 0, n = 0, 1, . . . .

By applying Theorem 1.1.1 we see that y is locally asymptotically stable for all values

of the parameters p, q, and r.

10.3.1 Invariant Intervals

The following result, which can be established by direct calculation, gives a list of in-

variant intervals for Eq(10.21).

Recall that I is an invariant interval, if whenever,

y

N

, y

N+1

∈ I for some integer N ≥ 0,

then

y

n

∈ I for n ≥ N.

Lemma 10.3.1 Eq(10.21) possesses the following invariant intervals:

(a)

¸

0,

p

1 −q

¸

when q < 1 and p ≥ r;

(b)

¸

0,

r −p

q

¸

when q < 1 and p ≥ r(1 −q).

10.3.2 Global Stability When p ≥ r

Here we discuss the behavior of the solutions of Eq(10.21) when p ≥ r.

Observe that

y

n+1

= r +

(p −r) + qy

n

1 + y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

and so when

p ≥ r

174 Chapter 10. (3, 2)-Type Equations

y

n

≥ r for n ≥ 1.

Therefore the change of variables

y

n

= r + z

n

transforms Eq(10.21) to the diﬀerence equation

z

n+1

=

p + qr −r + qz

n

(1 + r) + z

n−1

, n = 1, 2, . . .

which is of the form of the (2, 2)-type Eq(6.2) which was investigated in Section 6.3.

The following result is now a consequence of the above observations and the results

in Section 6.3.

Theorem 10.3.1 Assume

p ≥ r.

Then the following statements are true.

(a) Every positive solution of Eq(10.21) is bounded.

(b) The positive equilibrium of Eq(10.21) is globally asymptotically stable if one of

the following conditions holds:

(i) q < 1;

(ii)

q ≥ 1

and

either p + qr −r ≤ q or q < p + qr −r ≤ 2(q + 1).

10.3.3 Convergence of Solutions

Here we discuss the behavior of the solutions of Eq(10.21) when p < r.

Theorem 10.3.2 (a) Assume that

q < 1 and r ≥

p

1 −q

.

Then every solution of Eq(10.21) with initial conditions in the invariant interval

¸

0,

r −p

q

¸

converges to the equilibrium y.

10.4. The Case A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

175

(b) Suppose that either

0 ≤ q −1 < r and p < r

or

q < 1 and p < r <

p

1 −q

.

Set

K =

pq + r

2

−pr

q + r −p −q

2

.

Then every solution of Eq(10.21) with initial conditions in the invariant interval

¸

r −p

q

, K

¸

converges to the equilibrium y.

Proof.

(a) In view of Lemma 10.3.1 we see that when y

−1

, y

0

∈

0,

r−p

q

, then y

n

∈

0,

r−p

q

for all n ≥ 0. It is easy to check that y ∈

0,

r−p

q

and that in the interval

0,

r−p

q

**the function f(x, y) increases in both x and y. The result is now a consequence of
**

Theorem 1.4.8.

(b) In view of Lemma 10.3.1 we see that when y

−1

, y

0

∈

r−p

q

, K

, then y

n

∈

r−p

q

, K

for all n ≥ 0. It is easy to check that y ∈

r−p

q

, K

and that in the interval

r−p

q

, K

**the function f(x, y) increases in x and decreases in y. The result is now
**

a consequence of Theorem 1.4.5.

2

10.4 The Case A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

This is the (3, 2)-type Eq(10.3) which by the change of variables

x

n

=

γ

C

y

n

reduces to the diﬀerence equation

y

n+1

=

r + py

n

+ y

n−1

qy

n

+ y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (10.22)

where

p =

β

γ

, q =

B

C

, and r =

αC

γ

2

.

176 Chapter 10. (3, 2)-Type Equations

This equation has not been investigated yet. Here we make some simple observations

about linearized stability, invariant intervals, and the convergence of solutions in certain

regions of initial conditions.

The linearized equation of Eq(10.22) about its positive equilibrium

y =

(1 + p) +

(1 + p)

2

+ 4r(1 + q)

2(1 + q)

is

z

n+1

−

(p −q)y −qr

(q + 1)(r + (p + 1)y)

z

n

+

(p −q)y + r

(q + 1)(r + (p + 1)y)

z

n−1

= 0, n = 0, 1, . . . .

By applying Theorem 1.1.1 we see that y is locally asymptotically stable when either

q ≤ pq + 1 + 3p (10.23)

or

q > pq + 1 + 3p and F

2r

q −pq −1 −3p

> 0

where

F(u) = (q + 1)u

2

−(p + 1)u −r.

The second condition reduces to

q > pq + 1 + 3p. (10.24)

It is interesting to note that the above condition for the local asymptotic stability of y

requires the assumption that r > 0. When r = 0, as in Section 6.9, the inequality in

(10.23) is strict and Condition (10.24) is void.

Concerning prime period-two solution, it follows from Section 2.5 that a period-two

solution exists if and only if

p < 1, q > 1 and 4r < (1 −p)(q −pq −3p −1). (10.25)

Furthermore in this case the prime period-two solution

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

is unique and the values φ and ψ are the positive roots of the quadratic equation

t

2

−(1 −p)t +

r + p(1 −p)

q −1

= 0.

10.4. The Case A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

177

10.4.1 Invariant Intervals

Here we present some results about invariant intervals for Eq(10.21). We consider the

cases where p = q, p > q, and p < q.

Lemma 10.4.1 Eq(10.21) possesses the following invariant intervals:

(a)

[a, b] when p = q and

a and b are positive numbers such that

r + (p + 1)a ≤ (q + 1)ab ≤ r + (p + 1)b. (10.26)

(b)

¸

p

q

,

qr

p −q

¸

when p > q and

p

2

−pq

q

2

< r;

¸

qr

p −q

,

p

q

¸

when p > q and

p

2

−pq

q

2

> r.

(c)

¸

1,

r

q −p

¸

when p < q < p + r;

¸

r

q −p

, 1

¸

when q > p + r.

Proof.

(a) It is easy to see that when p = q the function

f(x, y) =

r + px + y

qx + y

is decreasing in both arguments. Hence

a ≤

r + (p + 1)b

(q + 1)b

= f(b, b) ≤ f(x, y) ≤ f(a, a) =

r + (p + 1)a

(q + 1)a

≤ b.

(b) Clearly the function f(x, y) is decreasing in both arguments when y <

qr

p−q

, and it

is increasing in x and decreasing in y for y ≥

qr

p−q

.

First assume that p > q and

p

2

−pq

q

2

< r.

178 Chapter 10. (3, 2)-Type Equations

Then for x, y ∈

p

q

,

qr

p−q

we obtain

p

q

= f

qr

p −q

,

qr

p −q

≤ f(x, y) ≤ f

p

q

,

p

q

=

qr + p(p + 1)

p(q + 1)

≤

qr

p −q

.

The inequalities

qr + p(p + 1)

p(q + 1)

≤

qr

p −q

and

p

q

<

qr

p −q

are equivalent to the inequality

p

2

−pq

q

2

< r.

Next assume that p > q and

p

2

−pq

q

2

> r.

For x, y ∈

qr

p−q

,

p

q

, we obtain

(qr + p)(p −q) + pq

2

r

q

3

r + p(p −q)

= f

qr

p −q

,

p

q

≤ f(x, y) ≤ f

p

q

,

qr

p −q

=

p

q

.

The inequalities

(qr + p)(p −q) + pq

2

r

q

3

r + p(p −q)

≥

qr

p −q

and

p

q

>

qr

p −q

follow from the inequality

p

2

−pq

q

2

> r.

(c) It is clear that the function f(x, y) is decreasing in both arguments for x <

r

q−p

,

and it is increasing in y and decreasing in x for x ≥

r

q−p

.

First, assume that p < q < p + r.

Using the decreasing character of f, we obtain

1 = f

r

q −p

,

r

q −p

≤ f(x, y) ≤ f(1, 1) =

r + p + 1

q + 1

≤

r

q −p

,

The inequalities

1 <

r

q −p

and

r + p + 1

q + 1

<

r

q −p

are equivalent to the inequality q < p + r.

Next assume that q > p + r.

Using the decreasing character of f in x and the increasing character of f in y, we

obtain

(p + r)(q −p) + r

q(q −p) + r

= f

1,

r

q −p

≤ f(x, y) ≤ f

r

p −q

, 1

= 1.

10.4. The Case A = 0 : x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

179

The inequalities

(p + r)(q −p) + r

q(q −p) + r

≥

r

q −p

and

r

q −p

< 1

follow from the inequality q > p + r.

2

10.4.2 Convergence of Solutions

Here we obtain some convergence results for Eq(10.22).

Theorem 10.4.1 (a) Assume that p = q. Then every solution of Eq(10.22) with

initial conditions in the invariant interval [a, b], where 0 < a < b satisfy (10.26)

converges to the equilibrium y.

(b) Assume that p > q and r >

p

2

−pq

q

2

. Then every solution of Eq(10.22) with initial

conditions in the invariant interval

p

q

,

qr

p−q

**converges to the equilibrium y.
**

(c) Assume that p < q < p+r. Then every solution of Eq(10.22) with initial conditions

in the invariant interval

1,

r

q−p

**converges to the equilibrium y.
**

Proof. The proof is an immediate consequence of Lemma 10.4.1 and Theorem 1.4.7.

2

Theorem 10.4.2 Assume that p > q, r <

p

2

−pq

q

2

, and that either

p ≤ 1

or

p > 1 and (q −1)[(p −1)

2

(q −1) −4q(1 −p −qr)] ≤ 0.

Then every solution of Eq(10.22) with initial conditions in the invariant interval

qr

p−q

,

p

q

**converges to the equilibrium y.
**

Proof. The proof is an immediate consequence of Lemma 10.4.1 and Theorem 1.4.5.

2

Theorem 10.4.3 Assume that p < q, p +r < q, and that Condition (10.25) is not sat-

isﬁed. Then every solution of Eq(10.22) with initial conditions in the invariant interval

r

q−p

, 1

**converges to the equilibrium y.
**

Proof. The proof is an immediate consequence of Lemma 10.4.1 and Theorem 1.4.6.

2

180 Chapter 10. (3, 2)-Type Equations

10.5 Open Problems and Conjectures

Open Problem 10.5.1 We know that every solution {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(10.4) converges

to a not necessarily prime period-two solution

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . . (10.27)

if and only if

r = 1 + q.

(a) Determine the set of initial conditions y

−1

and y

0

for which φ = ψ.

(b) Assume (10.27) is a prime period-two solution of Eq(10.4). Determine the set of

initial conditions y

−1

and y

0

for which {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

converges to (10.27).

Open Problem 10.5.2 Assume

r > q + 1.

(a) Find the set B of all initial conditions (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ (0, ∞) × (0, ∞) such that the

solutions {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

of Eq(10.4) are bounded.

(b) Let (y

−1

, y

0

) ∈ B. Investigate the asymptotic behavior of {y

n

}

∞

n=−1

.

Conjecture 10.5.1 Every positive solution of Eq(10.21) converges to the positive equi-

librium of the equation.

Open Problem 10.5.3 For each of the equations listed below, determine the set G of

all initial conditions (x

−1

, x

0

) ∈ R×R through which the equation is well deﬁned for all

n ≥ 0, and for these initial points investigate the long-term behavior of the corresponding

solution:

x

n+1

=

1 + x

n

+ x

n−1

1 + x

n

(10.28)

x

n+1

=

1 + x

n

+ x

n−1

1 + x

n−1

(10.29)

x

n+1

=

1 + x

n

+ x

n−1

x

n

+ x

n−1

. (10.30)

Extend and generalize.

10.5. Open Problems and Conjectures 181

Conjecture 10.5.2 Assume that

p, q, r ∈ (0, ∞).

Then the following statements are true for Eq(10.22)

(a) Local stability of the positive equilibrium implies global stability.

(b) When Eq(10.22) has no prime period-two solutions the equilibrium y is globally

asymptotically stable.

(c) When Eq(10.22) possesses a period-two solution, the equilibrium y is a saddle

point.

(d) The period-two solution of Eq(10.22), when it exists, is locally asymptotically sta-

ble, but not globally.

Open Problem 10.5.4 Assume that {p

n

}

∞

n=0

, {q

n

}

∞

n=0

, and {r

n

}

∞

n=0

are convergent se-

quences of nonnegative real numbers with ﬁnite limits,

p = lim

n→∞

p

n

, q = lim

n→∞

q

n

, and r = lim

n→∞

r

n

.

Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of

each of the following three diﬀerence equations:

y

n+1

=

p

n

+ q

n

y

n

+ r

n

y

n−1

1 + y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (10.31)

y

n+1

=

p

n

+ q

n

y

n

+ r

n

y

n−1

1 + y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (10.32)

y

n+1

=

r

n

+ p

n

y

n

+ y

n−1

q

n

y

n

+ y

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (10.33)

Open Problem 10.5.5 Assume that {p

n

}

∞

n=0

, {q

n

}

∞

n=0

, and {r

n

}

∞

n=0

are period-two se-

quences of nonnegative real numbers. Investigate the global character of all positive

solutions of Eqs(10.31)-(10.33). Extend and generalize.

182 Chapter 10. (3, 2)-Type Equations

Open Problem 10.5.6 Assume that

p, q, r ∈ [0, ∞) and k ∈ {2, 3, . . .}.

Investigate the global behavior of all positive solutions of each of the following diﬀerence

equations:

y

n+1

=

p + qy

n

+ ry

n−k

1 + y

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (10.34)

y

n+1

=

p + qy

n

+ ry

n−k

1 + y

n−k

, n = 0, 1, . . . (10.35)

y

n+1

=

p + qy

n

+ ry

n−1

qy

n

+ y

n−k

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (10.36)

Chapter 11

The (3, 3)-Type Equation

x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

In this chapter we discuss the (3, 3)-type equation

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

+ γx

n−1

A + Bx

n

+ Cx

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (11.1)

Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all coeﬃcients of this equation are

now assumed to be positive and the initial conditions nonnegative.

This equation has not been investigated yet. Here we make some simple observations

about linearized stability, invariant intervals, and the convergence of solutions in certain

regions of initial conditions.

11.1 Linearized Stability Analysis

Eq(11.1) has a unique equilibrium which is the positive solution of the quadratic equation

(B + C)x

2

−(β + γ −A)x −α = 0.

That is,

x =

β + γ −A +

(A −β −γ)

2

+ 4α(B + C)

2(B + C)

.

The linearized equation about x is (see Section 2.3)

z

n+1

−

(βA −Bα) + (βC −Bγ)x

A

2

+ α(B + C) + (B + C)(A + β + γ)x

z

n

−

(γA −Cα) −(βC −γB)x

A

2

+ α(B + C) + (B + C)(A + β + γ)x

z

n−1

= 0, n = 0, 1, . . . . (11.2)

183

184 Chapter 11. The (3, 3)-Type Equation x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

The equilibrium x is locally asymptotically stable if Conditions (2.13), (2.14), and (2.15)

are satisﬁed.

Eq(11.1) has a prime period-two solution

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

if, see Section 2.5, Conditions (2.31) and (2.32) are satisﬁed; that is,

γ > β+A, B > C, and α <

(γ −β −A)[B(γ −β −A) −C(γ + 3β −A)]

4C

2

. (11.3)

Furthermore, when (11.3), holds the values of φ and ψ are the positive roots of the

quadratic equation

t

2

+

γ −β −A

C

t +

αC + β(γ −β −A)

C(B −C)

= 0. (11.4)

The local asymptotic stability of the two cycle

. . . , φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . .

is discussed in Section 2.6.

11.2 Invariant Intervals

Here we obtain several invariant intervals for Eq(11.1). These intervals are derived by

analyzing the intervals where the function

f(x, y) =

α + βx + γy

A + Bx + Cy

is increasing or decreasing in x and y.

If we set

L = βA −αB, M = βC −γB, and N = γA −αC

then clearly

f

x

=

L + My

(A + Bx + Cy)

2

and f

y

=

N −My

(A + Bx + Cy)

2

.

Recall that an interval I is an invariant interval for Eq(11.1) if whenever,

y

N

, y

N+1

∈ I for some integer N ≥ 0,

then

y

n

∈ I for n ≥ N.

Once we have an invariant interval for Eq(11.1) then we may be able to obtain a con-

vergence result for the solutions of Eq(11.1) by testing whether the hypotheses of one of

the four Theorems 1.4.5-1.4.8 are satisﬁed.

11.2. Invariant Intervals 185

Lemma 11.2.1 (i) Assume that

γ

C

=

β

B

>

α

A

.

Then

α

A

,

β

B

**is an invariant interval for Eq(11.1) and in this interval the function
**

f(x, y) is increasing in both variables.

(ii) Assume that

β

B

>

γ

C

>

α

A

and

γ

C

≤

N

M

.

Then

α

A

,

γ

C

**is an invariant interval for Eq(11.1) and in this interval the function
**

f(x, y) is increasing in both variables.

(iii) Assume that

γ

C

>

β

B

>

α

A

and

β + γ

B + C

≤

αB −βA

βC −γB

.

Then

α

A

,

β+γ

B+C

**is an invariant interval for Eq(11.1) and in this interval the func-
**

tion f(x, y) is increasing in both variables.

(iv) Assume that

γ

C

=

β

B

<

α

A

.

Then

β

B

,

α

A

**is an invariant interval for Eq(11.1) and in this interval the function
**

f(x, y) is decreasing in both variables.

(v) Assume that

γA −αC

βC −γB

≥

α

A

>

β

B

>

γ

C

.

Then

0,

γA−αC

βC−γB

**is an invariant interval for Eq(11.1) and in this interval the func-
**

tion f(x, y) is decreasing in both variables.

(vi) Assume that

β

B

<

γ

C

<

α

A

<

γA −αC

βC −γB

.

Then

0,

α

A

**is an invariant interval for Eq(11.1) and in this interval the function
**

f(x, y) is decreasing in both variables.

(vii) Assume that

α

A

=

β

B

>

γ

C

.

Then

0,

α

A

**is an invariant interval for Eq(11.1) and in this interval the function
**

f(x, y) is increasing in x and decreasing in y.

186 Chapter 11. The (3, 3)-Type Equation x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

(viii) Assume that

β

B

>

α

A

≥

γ

C

.

Then

0,

β

B

**is an invariant interval for Eq(11.1) and in this interval the function
**

f(x, y) is increasing in x and decreasing in y.

(ix) Assume that

α

A

=

β

B

<

γ

C

.

Then

0,

γ

C

**is an invariant interval for Eq(11.1) and in this interval the function
**

f(x, y) is increasing in y and decreasing in x.

(x) Assume that

β

B

<

α

A

≤

γ

C

.

Then

0,

γ

C

**is an invariant interval for Eq(11.1) and in this interval the function
**

f(x, y) is increasing in y and decreasing in x.

Proof.

(i) The condition

γ

C

=

β

B

>

α

A

is equivalent to M = 0 and L > 0, which in turn imply

that N > 0. Thus, in this case the function f is increasing in both variables for

all values of x and y and

α

A

= f(0, 0) ≤ f(x, y) ≤ f(

β

B

,

β

B

) ≤

β + γ

B + C

=

β

B

.

Here we used the fact that under the condition

γ

C

=

β

B

>

α

A

the function f(u, u) is increasing and consequently

f(u, u) ≤

β + γ

B + C

=

β

B

.

(ii) The condition

β

B

>

γ

C

>

α

A

is equivalent to M > 0, L > 0, and N > 0. Thus, in

this case the function f is increasing in x, for every x. In addition, this function

is increasing in y for x <

N

M

. Thus, assuming

γ

C

≤

N

M

we obtain

α

A

= f(0, 0) ≤ f(x, y) ≤ f(

N

M

,

N

M

) =

γ

C

,

for all x, y ∈

α

A

,

γ

C

.

11.2. Invariant Intervals 187

(iii) The condition

γ

C

>

β

B

>

α

A

is equivalent to M < 0 and L > 0, which in turn imply

that N > 0. Thus, in this case the function f is increasing in y, for every y. In

addition, this function is increasing in x for y < −

L

M

. Thus assuming

β+γ

B+C

≤ −

L

M

,

we obtain,

α

A

= f(0, 0) ≤ f(x, y) ≤ f

β + γ

B + C

,

β + γ

B + C

≤

β + γ

B + C

,

for all x, y ∈

α

A

,

β+γ

B+C

.

(iv) The condition

γ

C

=

β

B

<

α

A

is equivalent to M = 0 and L < 0, which in turn imply

that N < 0. Thus, in this case the function f is decreasing in both variables for

all values of x and y and

β

B

≤ f

α

A

,

α

A

≤ f(x, y) ≤ f(0, 0) =

α

A

.

Here we used the fact that under the condition

γ

C

=

β

B

<

α

A

the function f(u, u) is decreasing and consequently

f(u, u) ≥

β + γ

B + C

=

β

B

.

(v) The condition

α

A

>

β

B

>

γ

C

is equivalent to M > 0 and L < 0, which imply that

N < 0. Thus, in this case the function f is decreasing in y, for every y. In addition,

this function is decreasing in x for y < −

L

M

. Thus assuming

α

A

≤ −

L

M

, we obtain

0 ≤ f(x, y) ≤ f(0, 0) =

α

A

≤ −

L

M

,

for all x, y ∈

0, −

L

M

.

(vi) The condition

α

A

>

γ

C

>

β

B

is equivalent to M < 0, L < 0, and N < 0. Thus, in

this case the function f is decreasing in x, for every x. In addition, this function

is decreasing in y for x <

N

M

. Thus assuming

α

A

≤

N

M

, we obtain

0 ≤ f(x, y) ≤ f(0, 0) =

α

A

,

for all x, y ∈

0,

α

A

.

188 Chapter 11. The (3, 3)-Type Equation x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

(vii) The condition

α

A

=

β

B

>

γ

C

is equivalent to M > 0 and L = 0, which in turn imply

that N < 0. Thus, in this case the function f is increasing in x and decreasing in

y for all values of x and y. Using this we obtain,

0 ≤ f(x, y) ≤ f

α

A

, 0

=

α

A

,

for all x, y ∈

0,

α

A

.

(viii) The condition

β

B

>

α

A

>

γ

C

is equivalent to M > 0, L > 0, and N < 0. Thus, in

this case the function f is increasing in x and decreasing in y for all values of x

and y. Using this we obtain,

0 ≤ f(x, y) < f

β

B

, 0

=

β

B

,

for all x, y ∈

0,

β

B

.

(ix) The condition

α

A

=

β

B

<

γ

C

is equivalent to M < 0 and L = 0, which in turn imply

that N > 0. Thus, in this case the function f is decreasing in x and increasing in

y for all values of x and y. Using this we obtain,

0 ≤ f(x, y) ≤ f

0,

γ

C

=

γ

C

,

for all x, y ∈

0,

γ

C

.

(x) The condition

β

B

<

α

A

≤

γ

C

is equivalent to M < 0, L < 0, and N ≥ 0. Thus, in

this case the function f is increasing in x and decreasing in y for all values of x

and y. Using this we obtain,

0 ≤ f(x, y) < f

0,

γ

C

≤

γ

C

,

for all x, y ∈

0,

γ

C

**. Here we use the fact that the function f(0, v) is increasing in
**

v when N > 0 and so

f(0, v) ≤

γ

C

= lim

v→∞

f(0, v),

for all v.

2

The next table summarizes more complicated invariant intervals with the signs of

the partial derivatives f

x

and f

y

.

11.3. Convergence Results 189

Case Invariant intervals Signs of derivatives

1

[0,

N

M

] if

αM+(β+γ)N

AM+(B+C)N

<

N

M

[

N

M

, K

1

] if

αM+(β+γ)N

AM+(B+C)N

>

N

M

f

x

> 0

f

y

> 0 if x <

N

M

; f

y

< 0 if x >

N

M

2

[0,

β−A+

√

(β−A)

2

+4Bα

2B

]

f

x

> 0

f

y

< 0

3

[0,

β+γ−A+

√

(β+γ−A)

2

+4α(B+C)

2(B+C)

]

f

x

> 0

f

y

> 0

4

[0, −

L

M

] if

αM−(β+γ)L

AM−(B+C)L

< −

L

M

[−

L

M

, K

2

] if

βMK+αM−γL

BMK+AM−CL

> −

L

M

f

x

> 0 if y < −

L

M

; f

x

< 0 if y > −

L

M

f

y

> 0

5 [0,

β

B

]

f

x

> 0

f

y

< 0

6 [0,

γ

C

]

f

x

< 0

f

y

> 0

7

[

αM−L(β+γ)

AM−L(B+C)

, −

L

M

] if

αM−L(β+γ)

AM−L(B+C)

< −

L

M

[−

L

M

, K

3

] if

αM−βL+γMK

AM−BL+CMK

> −

L

M

f

x

> 0 if y > −

L

M

; f

x

< 0 if y < −

L

M

f

y

< 0

8 [0,

α

A

]

f

x

< 0

f

y

< 0

9

[

αM+(β+γ)N

AM+(B+C)N

,

N

M

] if

αM+(β+γ)N

AM+(B+C)N

<

N

M

[

N

M

, K

4

] if

αM+βK+γNM

AM+BK+CNM

>

N

M

f

x

< 0

f

y

> 0 if x >

N

M

; f

y

< 0 if x <

N

M

where

K

1

=

(β −A)M −CN +

((β −A)M −NC)

2

+ 4BM(αM + γN)

2BM

,

K

2

=

(A −γ)M −BL +

((A −γ)M −BL)

2

+ 4CM(αM −βL)

−2CM

,

K

3

=

(β −A)M + LC +

((β −A)M + LC)

2

+ 4BM(αM −γL)

2BM

,

K

4

=

(γ −A)M −BN +

((γ −A)M −BN)

2

+ 4BM(αM + βN)

2CM

.

11.3 Convergence Results

The following result is a consequence of Lemma 11.2.1 and Theorems 1.4.5-1.4.8.

Theorem 11.3.1 Let {x

n

} be a solution of Eq(11.1). Then in each of the following

cases

lim

n→∞

x

n

= x.

190 Chapter 11. The (3, 3)-Type Equation x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

(i)

γ

C

=

β

B

>

α

A

and x

−1

, x

0

∈

¸

α

A

,

β

B

¸

;

(ii)

β

B

>

γ

C

>

α

A

,

γ

C

≤

γA −αC

βC −γB

, and x

−1

, x

0

∈

¸

α

A

,

γ

C

;

(iii)

γ

C

>

β

B

>

α

A

,

β + γ

B + C

≤

αB −βA

βC −γB

, and x

−1

, x

0

∈

¸

α

A

,

β + γ

B + C

¸

;

(iv)

γ

C

=

β

B

<

α

A

and x

−1

, x

0

∈

¸

β

B

,

α

A

¸

;

(v)

γA −αC

βC −γB

≥

α

A

>

β

B

>

γ

C

and x

−1

, x

0

∈

¸

0,

γA −αC

βC −γB

¸

;

(vi)

β

B

<

γ

C

<

α

A

<

γA −αC

βC −γB

and x

−1

, x

0

∈

¸

0,

α

A

;

(vii) At least one of the following three conditions is not satisﬁed and x

−1

, x

0

∈

0,

α

A

:

β > γ + A,

B < C,

and

(C −B)[(C −B)(β −γ −A)

2

−4B(αB + γ(β −γ −A))] > 0,

or

α

A

=

β

B

>

γ

C

;

(viii) At least one of the following three conditions is not satisﬁed and x

−1

, x

0

∈

0,

β

B

:

β > γ + A,

B < C,

and

(C −B)[(C −B)(β −γ −A)

2

−4B(αB + γ(β −γ −A))] > 0,

or

β

B

>

α

A

≥

γ

C

;

11.3. Convergence Results 191

(ix) Condition (11.3) is not satisﬁed,

α

A

=

β

B

<

γ

C

and x

−1

, x

0

∈

¸

0,

γ

C

;

(x) Condition (11.3) is not satisﬁed,

β

B

<

α

A

≤

γ

C

and x

−1

, x

0

∈

¸

0,

γ

C

.

Proof. The proofs of statements (i-iii) follow by applying Lemma 11.2.1 (i-iii) and

Theorem 1.4.8.

The proofs of statements (iv-vi) follow by applying Lemma 11.2.1 (iv-vi) and Theo-

rem 1.4.7.

The proofs of statements (vii) and (viii) follow by applying Lemma 11.2.1 (vii) and

(viii) respectively, Theorem 1.4.5, and by observing that the only solution of the system

of equations

m = f(m, M), M = f(M, m);

that is,

m =

α + βm + γM

A + Bm + CM

, M =

α + βM + γm

A + BM + Cm

is m = M.

The proofs of statements (ix) and (x) follow by applying Lemma 11.2.1 (ix) and (x)

respectively, Theorem 1.4.6, and by observing that Eq(11.1) does not possess a prime

period-two solution.

2

11.3.1 Global Stability

Theorem 1.4.2 and linearized stability imply the following global stability result:

Theorem 11.3.2 Assume that

γ

C

< min

β

B

,

α

A

¸

.

Then the equilibrium x of Eq(11.1) is globally asymptotically stable.

By applying Theorem 1.4.3 to Eq(11.1) we obtain the following global asymptotic

result.

192 Chapter 11. The (3, 3)-Type Equation x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

Theorem 11.3.3 Assume that

B ≤ C, γB > βC, αB > βA, and γA > αC.

Then the equilibrium x of Eq(11.1) is globally asymptotically stable.

The following global stability result is a consequence of linearized stability and the

Trichotomy Theorem 1.4.4.

Theorem 11.3.4 (a) Assume that

αC ≥ γA, βA ≥ αB, and 3γB ≥ βC ≥ γB.

Then the equilibrium x of Eq(11.1) is globally asymptotically stable.

(b) Assume that

αB ≥ βA, γA ≥ αC, and 3βC ≥ γB ≥ βC.

Then the equilibrium x of Eq(11.1) is globally asymptotically stable.

11.4 Open Problems and Conjectures

Conjecture 11.4.1 Assume

α, β, γ, A, B, C ∈ (0, ∞).

Show that every positive solution of Eq(11.1) is bounded.

Conjecture 11.4.2 Assume

α, β, γ, A, B, C ∈ (0, ∞)

and that Eq(11.1) has no positive prime period-two solution. Show that every positive

solution of Eq(11.1) converges to the positive equilibrium.

Conjecture 11.4.3 Assume

α, β, γ, A, B, C ∈ (0, ∞)

and that Eq(11.1) has a positive prime period-two solution. Show that the positive equi-

librium of Eq(11.1) is a saddle point and the period-two solution is locally asymptotically

stable.

11.4. Open Problems and Conjectures 193

Conjecture 11.4.4 Assume

α, β, γ, A, B, C ∈ (0, ∞).

Show that Eq(11.1) cannot have a prime period-k solution for any k ≥ 3.

Open Problem 11.4.1 Assume {α

n

}

∞

n=0

, {β

n

}

∞

n=0

, {γ

n

}

∞

n=0

, {A

n

}

∞

n=0

, {B

n

}

∞

n=0

, {C

n

}

∞

n=0

are convergent sequences of nonnegative real numbers with ﬁnite limits. Investigate the

asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of the diﬀerence

equation

x

n+1

=

α

n

+ β

n

x

n

+ γ

n

x

n−1

A

n

+ B

n

x

n

+ C

n

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (11.5)

Open Problem 11.4.2 Assume that the parameters in Eq(11.5) are period-two se-

quences of positive real numbers. Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic

nature of all positive solutions of Eq(11.5).

Open Problem 11.4.3 Assume that

a, A, a

i

, A

i

∈ [0, ∞) for i = 0, 1, . . . , k. (11.6)

Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions so that every positive solution of the equation

x

n+1

=

a + a

0

x

n

+ . . . + a

k

x

n−k

A + A

0

x

n

+ . . . + A

k

x

n−k

, n = 0, 1, . . . . (11.7)

has a ﬁnite limit.

Open Problem 11.4.4 Assume that (11.6) holds. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient con-

ditions so that every positive solution of Eq(11.7) converges to a period-two solution.

Open Problem 11.4.5 Assume that (11.6) holds. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient con-

ditions so that every positive solution of Eq(11.7) is periodic with period-k, k ≥ 2. In

particular, investigate the cases where 2 ≤ k ≤ 8.

194 Chapter 11. The (3, 3)-Type Equation x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

Open Problem 11.4.6 Let

α, β, γ, δ ∈ [0, ∞) with γ + δ > 0.

Investigate the boundedness character, the periodic nature, and the asymptotic behavior

of all positive solutions of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

αx

n

+ βx

n−1

x

n−2

γx

n

x

n−1

+ δx

n−2

, n = 0, 1, . . . .

(See [8] and [61].)

Conjecture 11.4.5 Let k ≥ 2 be a positive integer. Show that every positive solution

of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

x

n

+ . . . + x

n−k

+ x

n−k−1

x

n−k−2

x

n

x

n−1

+ x

n−2

+ . . . + x

n−k−2

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to 1. Extend and generalize.

(See [8], [47], and [60].)

Conjecture 11.4.6 Let

a

ij

∈ (0, ∞) for i, j ∈ {1, 2, 3}.

Show that every positive solution of the system

x

n+1

=

a

11

x

n

+

a

12

y

n

+

a

13

z

n

y

n+1

=

a

21

x

n

+

a

22

y

n

+

a

23

z

n

z

n+1

=

a

31

x

n

+

a

32

y

n

+

a

33

z

n

, n = 0, 1, . . . (11.8)

converges to a period-two solution. Extend to equations with real parameters.

(See [32] for the two dimensional case.)

Conjecture 11.4.7 Assume that

p, q ∈ [0, ∞).

11.4. Open Problems and Conjectures 195

(a) Show that every positive solution of the equation

x

n+1

=

px

n−1

+ x

n−2

q + x

n−2

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to a period-two solution if and only if

p = 1 + q.

(b) Show that when

p < 1 + q

every positive solution has a ﬁnite limit.

(c) Show that when

p > 1 + q

the equation possesses positive unbounded solutions.

(See [62].)

Conjecture 11.4.8 Assume that

p ∈ (0, ∞).

(a) Show that every positive solution of the equation

x

n+1

=

x

n−1

x

n−1

+ px

n−2

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to a period-two solution if

p ≥ 1.

(b) Show that when

p < 1

the positive equilibrium x =

1

1+p

is globally asymptotically stable.

Conjecture 11.4.9 Assume that

p, q ∈ [0, ∞).

196 Chapter 11. The (3, 3)-Type Equation x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

(a) Show that every positive solution of the equation

x

n+1

=

x

n−1

+ p

x

n−2

+ q

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to a period-two solution if and only if

q = 1.

(b) Show that when

q > 1

the positive equilibrium of the equation is globally asymptotically stable.

(c) Show that when

q < 1

the equation possesses positive unbounded solutions.

(See [62].)

Conjecture 11.4.10 Show that every positive solution of the equation

x

n+1

=

x

n

+ x

n−2

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to a period-four solution.

(See [62].)

Conjecture 11.4.11 Show that the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

p + x

n−2

x

n

, n = 0, 1, . . .

has the following trichotomy character:

(i) When p > 1 every positive solution converges to the positive equilibrium.

(ii) When p = 1 every positive solution converges to a period-ﬁve solution.

(iii) When p < 1 there exist positive unbounded solutions.

(See [62].)

11.4. Open Problems and Conjectures 197

Conjecture 11.4.12 Show that every positive solution of the equation

x

n+1

=

1 + x

n

x

n−1

+ x

n−2

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to a period-six solution of the form

. . . , φ, ψ,

ψ

φ

,

1

φ

,

1

ψ

,

φ

ψ

, . . .

where

φ, ψ ∈ (0, ∞).

(See [62].)

Open Problem 11.4.7 Consider the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

α + βx

n

+ γx

n−1

+ δx

n−2

A + Bx

n

+ Dx

n−2

, n = 0, 1, . . . (11.9)

with nonnegative parameters and nonnegative initial conditions such that B+D > 0 and

A + Bx

n

+ Dx

n−2

> 0 for n ≥ 0.

Then one can show that Eq(11.9) has prime period-two solutions if and only if

γ = β + δ + A. (11.10)

(a) In addition to (11.10), what other conditions are needed so that every positive

solution of Eq(11.9) converges to a period-two solution?

(b) Assume

γ < β + δ + A.

What other conditions are needed so that every positive solution of Eq(11.9) con-

verges to the positive equilibrium?

(c) Assume

γ > β + δ + A.

What other conditions are needed so that Eq(11.9) possesses unbounded solutions?

(See [6].)

198 Chapter 11. The (3, 3)-Type Equation x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

Conjecture 11.4.13 Show that every positive solution of each of the two equations

x

n+1

=

1 + x

n−1

+ x

n−2

x

n

, n = 0, 1, . . .

and

x

n+1

=

1 + x

n−1

+ x

n−2

x

n−2

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to a period-two solution.

(See [6].)

Conjecture 11.4.14 Show that every positive solution of the equation

x

n+1

=

1 + x

n−1

1 + x

n

+ x

n−2

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to a period-two solution.

(See [6].)

Conjecture 11.4.15 Show that every positive solution of the equation

x

n+1

=

x

n−2

x

n−1

+ x

n−2

+ x

n−3

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to a period-three solution.

Conjecture 11.4.16 Consider the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

p + qx

n

+ rx

n−2

x

n−1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

where

p ∈ [0, ∞) and q, r ∈ (0, ∞).

(a) Show that when

q = r

every positive solution converges to a period-four solution.

(b) Show that when

q > r

every positive solution converges to the positive equilibrium.

11.4. Open Problems and Conjectures 199

(c) Show that when

q < r

the equation possesses positive unbounded solutions.

(See [62].)

Open Problem 11.4.8 Determine whether every positive solution of each of the fol-

lowing equations converges to a periodic solution of the corresponding equation:

(a)

x

n+1

=

x

n−2

+ x

n−3

x

n

, n = 0, 1, . . .

(b)

x

n+1

=

1 + x

n−3

1 + x

n

+ x

n−3

, n = 0, 1, . . .

(c)

x

n+1

=

1 + x

n

+ x

n−3

x

n−2

, n = 0, 1, . . .

(d)

x

n+1

=

x

n−1

x

n

+ x

n−2

+ x

n−3

, n = 0, 1, . . . .

Open Problem 11.4.9 Assume that k is a positive integer and that

A, B

0

, B

1

, . . . B

k

∈ [0, ∞) with

k

¸

i=0

B

i

> 0.

Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on the parameters A and B

0

, B

1

, . . . B

k

so

that every positive solution of the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

=

x

n−k

A + B

0

x

n

+ . . . + B

k

x

n−k

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to a period-(k + 1) solution of this equation.

(See [6].)

200 Chapter 11. The (3, 3)-Type Equation x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

Open Problem 11.4.10 Assume that k is a positive integer. Then we can easily see

that every nonnegative solution of the equation

x

n+1

=

x

n−k

1 + x

n

+ . . . + x

n−k+1

, n = 0, 1, . . . (11.11)

converges to a period-(k + 1) solution of the form

. . . , 0, 0, ..., 0

. .. .

k−terms

, φ, . . . (11.12)

with φ ≥ 0.

(a) Does Eq(11.11) possess a positive solution which converges to zero?

(b) Determine, in terms of the nonnegative initial conditions x

−k

, . . . , x

0

, the value of

φ in (11.12) which corresponds to the nonnegative solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−k

of Eq(11.11).

(c) Determine the set of all nonnegative initial conditions x

−k

, . . . , x

0

for which the

corresponding solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−k

of Eq(11.11) converges to a period-(k+1) solution

of the form (11.12) with a given φ ≥ 0 ?

(See [6].)

Conjecture 11.4.17 Let k be a positive integer. Show that every positive solution of

x

n+1

=

1 + x

n

+ x

n−k

x

n−k+1

, n = 0, 1, . . .

converges to a periodic solution of period 2k.

Appendix A

Global Attractivity for Higher

Order Equations

In this appendix we present some global attractivity results for higher order diﬀerence

equations which are analogous to Theorems 1.4.5-1.4.8. We state the results for third

order equations from which higher order extensions will become clear.

Let I be some interval of real numbers and let

f : I ×I ×I →I

be a continuously diﬀerentiable function.

Then for every set of initial conditions x

0

, x

−1

, x

−2

∈ I, the diﬀerence equation

x

n+1

= f(x

n

, x

n−1

, x

n−2

), n = 0, 1, . . . (A.1)

has a unique solution {x

n

}

∞

n=−2

.

As we have seen in previous chapters, very often a good strategy for obtaining global

attractivity results for Eq(A.1) is to work in the regions where the function f(x, y, z) is

monotonic in its arguments. In this regard there are eight possible scenarios depending

on whether f(x, y, z) is non decreasing in all three arguments, or non increasing in two

arguments and non decreasing in the third, or non increasing in one and non decreasing

in the other two, or non decreasing in all three.

Theorem A.0.1 Let [a, b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that

f : [a, b]

3

→[a, b]

is a continuous function satisfying the following properties:

(a) f(x, y, z) is non-decreasing in each of its arguments;

(b) The equation

f(x, x, x) = x,

has a unique solution in the interval [a, b].

Then Eq(A.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a, b] and every solution of Eq(A.1)

converges to x.

201

202 Appendix

Proof. Set

m

0

= a and M

0

= b

and for i = 1, 2, . . . set

M

i

= f(M

i−1

, M

i−1

, M

i−1

) and m

i

= f(m

i−1

, m

i−1

, m

i−1

).

Now observe that for each i ≥ 0,

m

0

≤ m

1

≤ . . . ≤ m

i

≤ . . . ≤ M

i

≤ . . . ≤ M

1

≤ M

0

,

and

m

i

≤ x

k

≤ M

i

for k ≥ 3i + 1.

Set

m = lim

i→∞

m

i

and M = lim

i→∞

M

i

.

Then

M ≥ limsup

i→∞

x

i

≥ liminf

i→∞

x

i

≥ m (A.2)

and by the continuity of f,

m = f(m, m, m) and M = f(M, M, M).

In view of (b),

m = M = x,

from which the result follows. 2

Theorem A.0.2 Let [a, b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that

f : [a, b]

3

→[a, b]

is a continuous function satisfying the following properties:

(a) f(x, y, z) is non-decreasing in x and y ∈ [a, b] for each z ∈ [a, b], and is non-

increasing in z ∈ [a, b] for each x and y ∈ [a, b];

(b) If (m, M) ∈ [a, b] ×[a, b] is a solution of the system

m = f(m, m, M) and M = f(M, M, m)

then

m = M.

Then Eq(A.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a, b] and every solution of Eq(A.1) converges

to x.

Appendix 203

Proof. Set

m

0

= a and M

0

= b

and for each i = 1, 2, . . . set

M

i

= f(M

i−1

, M

i−1

, m

i−1

)

and

m

i

= f(m

i−1

, m

i−1

, M

i−1

).

Now observe that for each i ≥ 0

a = m

0

≤ m

1

≤ . . . ≤ m

i

≤ . . . M

i

≤ . . . M

1

≤ M

0

= b.

and

m

i

≤ x

k

≤ M

i

for k ≥ 3i + 1.

Set

m = lim

i→∞

m

i

and M = lim

i→∞

M

i

.

Then (A.2) holds and by the continuity of f,

m = f(m, m, M) and M = f(M, M, m).

Therefore in view of (b)

m = M

from which the result follows. 2

Theorem A.0.3 Let [a, b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that

f : [a, b]

3

→[a, b]

is a continuous function satisfying the following properties:

(a) f(x, y, z) is non-decreasing in x and z in [a, b] for each z ∈ [a, b], and is non-

increasing in y ∈ [a, b] for each x and z in [a, b];

(b) If (m, M) ∈ [a, b] ×[a, b] is a solution of the system

M = f(M, m, M) and m = f(m, M, m)

then

m = M.

Then Eq(A.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a, b] and every solution of Eq(A.1) converges

to x.

204 Appendix

Proof. Set

m

0

= a and M

0

= b

and for each i = 1, 2, . . . set

M

i

= f (M

i−1

, m

i−1

, M

i−1

)

and

m

i

= f (m

i−1

, M

i−1

, m

i−1

) .

Now observe that for each i ≥ 0

a = m

0

≤ m

1

≤ . . . ≤ m

i

≤ . . . M

i

≤ . . . M

1

≤ M

0

= b.

and

m

i

≤ x

k

≤ M

i

for k ≥ 3i + 1.

Set

m = lim

i→∞

m

i

and M = lim

i→∞

M

i

.

Then (A.2) holds and by the continuity of f,

m = f (m, m, M) and M = f (M, M, m) .

Therefore in view of (b)

m = M

from which the results follows. 2

Theorem A.0.4 Let [a, b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that

f : [a, b]

3

→[a, b]

is a continuous function satisfying the following properties:

(a) f(x, y, z) is non-increasing in x for each y and z ∈ [a, b] and is non-decreasing

in y and z for each x, y ∈ [a, b];

(b) If (m, M) ∈ [a, b] ×[a, b] is a solution of the system

M = f(m, M, M) and m = f(M, m, m)

then

m = M.

Then Eq(A.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a, b] and every solution of Eq(A.1) converges

to x.

Appendix 205

Proof. Set

m

0

= a and M

0

= b

and for each i = 1, 2, . . . set

M

i

= f(m

i−1

, M

i−1

, M

i−1

)

and

m

i

= f(M

i−1

, m

i−1

, m

i−1

).

Now observe that for each i ≥ 0

m

0

≤ m

1

≤ . . . ≤ m

i

≤ . . . M

i

≤ . . . M

1

≤ M

0

= b

and

m

i

≤ x

k

≤ M

i

for k ≥ 3i + 1.

Set

m = lim

i→∞

m

i

and M = lim

i→∞

M

i

.

Then (A.2) holds and by the continuity of f,

M = f(m, M, M) and m = f(M, m, m).

Therefore in view of (b)

m = M

from which the results follows. 2

Theorem A.0.5 Let [a, b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that

f : [a, b]

3

→[a, b]

is a continuous function satisfying the following properties:

(a) f(x, y, z) is non-decreasing in x for each y and z ∈ [a, b] and is non-increasing

in y and z for each x ∈ [a, b];

(b) If (m, M) ∈ [a, b] ×[a, b] is a solution of the system

M = f(M, m, m) and m = f(m, M, M)

then

m = M.

Then Eq(A.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a, b] and every solution of Eq(A.1) converges

to x.

206 Appendix

Proof. Set

m

0

= a and M

0

= b

and for each i = 1, 2, . . . set

M

i

= f(M

i−1

, m

i−1

, m

i−1

)

and

m

i

= f(m

i−1

, M

i−1

, M

i−1

).

Now observe that for each i ≥ 0

m

0

≤ m

1

≤ . . . ≤ m

i

≤ . . . M

i

≤ . . . M

1

≤ M

0

= b

and

m

i

≤ x

k

≤ M

i

for k ≥ 3i + 1.

Set

m = lim

i→∞

m

i

and M = lim

i→∞

M

i

.

Then (A.2) holds and by the continuity of f,

M = f(M, m, m) and m = f(m, M, M).

Therefore in view of (b)

m = M

from which the results follows. 2

Theorem A.0.6 Let [a, b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that

f : [a, b]

3

→[a, b]

is a continuous function satisfying the following properties:

(a) f(x, y, z) is non-decreasing in y for each x and z ∈ [a, b] and is non-increasing

in x and z for each y ∈ [a, b];

(b) If (m, M) ∈ [a, b] ×[a, b] is a solution of the system

M = f(m, M, m) and m = f(M, m, M)

then

m = M.

Then Eq(A.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a, b] and every solution of Eq(A.1) converges

to x.

Appendix 207

Proof. Set

m

0

= a and M

0

= b

and for each i = 1, 2, . . . set

M

i

= f(m

i−1

, M

i−1

, m

i−1

)

and

m

i

= f(M

i−1

, m

i−1

, M

i−1

).

Now observe that for each i ≥ 0

m

0

≤ m

1

≤ . . . ≤ m

i

≤ . . . M

i

≤ . . . M

1

≤ M

0

= b

and

m

i

≤ x

k

≤ M

i

for k ≥ 3i + 1.

Set

m = lim

i→∞

m

i

and M = lim

i→∞

M

i

.

Then (A.2) holds and by the continuity of f,

M = f(m, M, m) and m = f(M, m, M).

Therefore in view of (b)

m = M

from which the results follows. 2

Theorem A.0.7 Let [a, b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that

f : [a, b]

3

→[a, b]

is a continuous function satisfying the following properties:

(a) f(x, y, z) is non-decreasing in z for each x and y in [a, b] and is non-increasing

in x and y for each z ∈ [a, b];

(b) If (m, M) ∈ [a, b] ×[a, b] is a solution of the system

M = f(m, m, M) and m = f(M, M, m)

then

m = M.

Then Eq(A.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a, b] and every solution of Eq(A.1) converges

to x.

208 Appendix

Proof. Set

m

0

= a and M

0

= b

and for each i = 1, 2, . . . set

M

i

= f(m

i−1

, m

i−1

, M

i−1

)

and

m

i

= f(M

i−1

, M

i−1

, m

i−1

).

Now observe that for each i ≥ 0

m

0

≤ m

1

≤ . . . ≤ m

i

≤ . . . M

i

≤ . . . M

1

≤ M

0

= b

and

m

i

≤ x

k

≤ M

i

for k ≥ 3i + 1.

Set

m = lim

i→∞

m

i

and M = lim

i→∞

M

i

.

Then (A.2) holds and by the continuity of f,

M = f(m, m, M) and m = f(M, M, m).

Therefore in view of (b)

m = M

from which the results follows. 2

Theorem A.0.8 Let [a, b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that

f : [a, b]

3

→[a, b]

is a continuous function satisfying the following properties:

(a) f(x, y, z) is non-increasing in all three variables x, y, z in [a, b];

(b) If (m, M) ∈ [a, b] ×[a, b] is a solution of the system

M = f(m, m, m) and m = f(M, M, M)

then

m = M.

Then Eq(A.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a, b] and every solution of Eq(A.1) converges

to x.

Appendix 209

Proof. Set

m

0

= a and M

0

= b

and for each i = 1, 2, . . . set

M

i

= f(m

i−1

, m

i−1

, m

i−1

)

and

m

i

= f(M

i−1

, M

i−1

, M

i−1

).

Now observe that for each i ≥ 0

m

0

≤ m

1

≤ . . . ≤ m

i

≤ . . . M

i

≤ . . . M

1

≤ M

0

= b

and

m

i

≤ x

k

≤ M

i

for k ≥ 3i + 1.

Set

m = lim

i→∞

m

i

and M = lim

i→∞

M

i

.

Then (A.2) holds and by the continuity of f,

M = f(m, m, m) and m = f(M, M, M).

Therefore in view of (b)

m = M

from which the results follows. 2

The above theorems can be easily extended to the general diﬀerence equation of order

p

x

n+1

= f(x

n

, x

n−1

, . . . , x

n−p+1

), n = 0, 1, . . . (A.3)

where

f : I

p

→I

is a continuous function. In this case, there are 2

p

possibilities for the function f to

be non decreasing in some arguments and non increasing in the remaining arguments.

This gives 2

p

results of the type found in Theorems A.0.1-A.0.8. Let us formulate one

of these results.

Theorem A.0.9 Let [a, b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that

f : [a, b]

p

→[a, b]

is a continuous function satisfying the following properties:

(a) f(u

1

, u

2

, . . . , u

p

) is non decreasing in the second and the third variables u

2

and

u

3

and is non increasing in all other variables.

210 Appendix

(b) If (m, M) ∈ [a, b] ×[a, b] is a solution of the system

M = f(m, M, M, m, . . . , m) and m = f(M, m, m, M, . . . , M)

then

m = M.

Then Eq(A.3) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a, b] and every solution of Eq(A.3) converges

to x.

Bibliography

[1] R. Agarwal, Diﬀerence Equations and Inequalities. Theory, Methods and Applica-

tions, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, 1992.

[2] L. S. Allen, M. K. Hannigan, and M. J. Strauss, Mathematical analysis of a model

for a plant-herbivore system, Bulletin of Mathematical Biology 55 (1993), 847-864.

[3] L. S. Allen, M. J. Strauss, M. J. Thorvilson, and W. N. Lipe, A Preliminary math-

ematical model of the Apple Twig Borer (Coleoptera: Bostrichidae) and Grapes on

the Texas High Plains Ecological Modelling 58 (1991), 369-382.

[4] K.T. Alligood, T. Sauer and J.A. Yorke , CHAOS An Introduction to Dynamical

Systems, Springer-Verlag, New York, Berlin, Heidelberg, Tokyo, 1997.

[5] American Mathemathical Monthly, Problem 10670, 106(1999), 967-968.

[6] A. M. Amleh and G. Ladas, Convergence to periodic solutions, J. Diﬀer. Equations

Appl. 7(2001), (to appear).

[7] A. M. Amleh, D. A. Georgiou, E. A. Grove, and G. Ladas, On the recursive sequence

x

n+1

= α +

x

n−1

x

n

, J. Math. Anal. Appl. 233(1999), 790-798.

[8] A. M. Amleh, N. Kruse, and G. Ladas, On a class of diﬀerence equations with

strong negative feedback, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 5(6)(1999), 497-515.

[9] A. M. Amleh, G. Ladas, and J. T. Hoag, Boundedness of solutions of a plant-

herbivore system, Proceedings of the Third International Conference on Diﬀerence

Equations and Applications, September 1-5, 1977, Taipei, Taiwan, Gordon and

Breach Science Publishers, 1999, 1-5.

[10] R. Abu-Saris, On the periodicity of the diﬀerence equation x

n+1

= α|x

n

| + βx

n−1

,

J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 5(1)(1999), 57-69.

[11] E. Barbeau, B. Gelbard, and S. Tanny, Periodicities of solutions of the generalized

Lyness recursion, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 1(3)(1995), 291-306.

[12] B. Beckermann and J. Wimp, Some dynamically trivial mappings with applications

to the improvement of simple iteration, Comput. Math. Appl. 24(1998), 89-97.

211

212 BIBLIOGRAPHY

[13] E. Camouzis, R. DeVault, and G. Ladas, On the recursive sequence x

n+1

= −1 +

x

n−1

x

n

, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 7(2001), (to appear).

[14] K. L. Cooke, D. F. Calef, and E. V. Level, Stability or chaos in discrete epidemic

models, Nonlinear Systems and Applications, V. Lakshmikantham, editor, 73-93,

Academic Press, New York, 1977.

[15] K. Cunningham, M. R. S. Kulenovi´c, G. Ladas, and S. Valicenti, On the recursive

Sequence x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

, Proceedings of WCNA2000, Catania, Italy, July 19-26,

2000, Nonlin. Anal. TMA,(to appear).

[16] R. Devaney, A First Course in Chaotic Dynamical Systems: Theory and Experi-

ment, Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1992.

[17] R. Devaney, A Piecewise linear model for the zones of instability of an area-

preserving map, Physica D 10(1984), 387-393.

[18] R. DeVault, L. Galminas, E. J. Janowski and G. Ladas, On the recursive sequence

x

n+1

=

A

x

n

+

B

x

n−1

, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 6(1)(2000), 121-125.

[19] R. DeVault, G. Ladas, and S. W. Schultz, On the Recursive Sequence x

n+1

=

A

x

n

+

1

x

n−2

, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 126 (1998), 3257-3261.

[20] R. DeVault, G. Ladas, and S. W. Schultz, On the recursive sequence x

n+1

=

A

x

n

x

n−1

+

1

x

n−3

x

n−4

, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 6(4)(2000), 481-483.

[21] S. Elaydi, An Introduction to Diﬀerence Equations, 2nd ed., Springer-Verlag, New

York, 1999.

[22] S. Elaydi, Discrete Chaos, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 2000.

[23] H. El-Metwally, E. A. Grove, and G. Ladas, A global convergence result with ap-

plications to periodic solutions, J. Math. Anal. Appl., 245 (2000), 161-170.

[24] H. El-Metwally, E. A. Grove, G. Ladas, R. Levins, and M. Radin, On the diﬀerence

equation x

n+1

= α + βx

n−1

e

−x

n

, Proceedings of WCNA2000, Catania, Italy, July

19-26, 2000, (to appear).

[25] H. El-Metwally, E. A. Grove, G. Ladas, and H. D. Voulov, On the global attractivity

and the periodic character of some diﬀerence equations, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl.

7(2001), (to appear).

[26] J. Feuer, E. J. Janowski, and G. Ladas, Lyness-type equations in the third quadrant,

Nonlinear Anal. 30(1997), 1183-1189.

[27] J. E. Franke, J. T. Hoag, and G. Ladas, Global attractivity and convergence to a

two-cycle in a diﬀerence equation, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 5(2)(1999), 203-209.

BIBLIOGRAPHY 213

[28] C. H. Gibbons, M. R. S. Kulenovi´c, and G. Ladas, On the recursive sequence

x

n+1

=

α+βx

n−1

γ+x

n

, Math. Sci. Res. Hot-Line, 4(2)(2000), 1-11.

[29] C. H. Gibbons, M. R. S. Kulenovi´c, G. Ladas, and H. D. Voulov, On the trichotomy

character of x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+x

n

, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 7(2001) (to appear).

[30] E. A. Grove, E. J. Janowski, C. M. Kent, and G. Ladas, On the rational recursive

sequence x

n+1

= (αx

n

+β)/((γx

n

+C)x

n−1

), Comm. Appl. Nonlinear Anal. 1(1994),

61-72.

[31] E. A. Grove, C. M. Kent, R. Levins, G. Ladas, and S. Valicenti, Global stability

in some population models , Proceedings of the Fourth International Conference

on Diﬀerence Equations and Applications, August 27-31, 1998, Poznan, Poland,

Gordon and Breach Science Publishers, 2000, 149-176.

[32] E. A. Grove, G. Ladas, L.C. McGrath, and C. T. Teixeira, Existence and behavior

of solutions of a rational system, Comm. Appl. Nonlinear Anal. 8(2001), 1-25.

[33] J. Guckenheimer and P. Holmes, Nonlinear Oscillations, Dynamical Systems, and

Bifurcations of Vector Fields, Springer-Verlag, New York, Berlin, Heidelberg,

Tokyo, 1983.

[34] J. Hale and H. Kocak, Dynamics and Bifurcations, Springer-Verlag, New York,

Berlin, Heidelberg, Tokyo, 1991.

[35] M. L. J. Hautus and T.S. Bolis, Solution to Problem E2721, Amer. Math. Monthly,

86(1979), 865-866.

[36] J. H. Jaroma , On the global asymptotic stability of x

n+1

=

a+bx

n

A+x

n−1

, Proceedings of

the First International Conference on Diﬀerence Equations and Applications, May

25-28, 1994, San Antonio, Texas, Gordon and Breach Science Publishers, 1995,

281-294.

[37] G. Karakostas, A discrete semi-ﬂow in the space of sequences and study of con-

vergence of sequences deﬁned by diﬀerence equations, M. E. Greek Math. Society,

(1989), 66-74.

[38] G. Karakostas, Convergence of a diﬀerence equation via the full limiting sequences

method, Diﬀerential Equations Dynam. Systems 1(1993), 289-294.

[39] G. Karakostas, Asymptotic 2-periodic diﬀerence equations with diagonally self-

invertible responses, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 6(3)(2000), 329-335.

[40] G. Karakostas, Ch. G. Philos, and Y. G. Sﬁcas, The dynamics of some discrete

population models, Nonlinear Anal. 17(1991), 1069-1084.

214 BIBLIOGRAPHY

[41] W. G. Kelley and A. C. Peterson, Diﬀerence Equations, Academic Press, New York,

1991.

[42] V. L. Kocic and G. Ladas, Global Behavior of Nonlinear Diﬀerence Equations of

Higher Order with Applications, Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht, Holland,

1993.

[43] V. L. Kocic, G. Ladas, and I. W. Rodrigues, On the rational recursive sequences,

J. Math. Anal. Appl. 173 (1993), 127-157.

[44] V. L. Kocic, G. Ladas, G. Tzanetopoulos, and E. Thomas, On the stability of Ly-

ness’ equation, Dynamics of Continuous, Discrete and Impulsive Systems 1(1995),

245-254.

[45] W. A. Kosmala, M. R. S. Kulenovi´c, G. Ladas, and C. T. Teixeira, On the recursive

sequence y

n+1

=

p+y

n−1

qy

n

+y

n−1

, J. Math. Anal. Appl. 251(2000), 571-586.

[46] U. Krause, Stability trichotomy, path stability, and relative stability for positive

nonlinear diﬀerence equations of higher order, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 1(4)

(1995), 323-346.

[47] N. Kruse and T. Nesemann, Global asymptotic stability for discrete dynamical

systems, J. Math. Anal. Appl. 235 (1999), 151-158.

[48] Y. K. Kuang and J. M. Cushing, Global stability in a nonlinear diﬀerence-delay

equation model of ﬂour beetle population growth, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl.

2(1)(1996), 31-37.

[49] M. R. S. Kulenovi´c, Invariants and related Liapunov functions for diﬀerence equa-

tions, Appl. Math. Lett. 13 (7)(2000), 1-8.

[50] M. R. S. Kulenovi´c and G. Ladas, Open problems and conjectures: On period two

solutions of x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 6(5) (2000), 641-646.

[51] M. R. S. Kulenovi´c, G. Ladas, L. F. Martins, and I. W. Rodrigues, On the dynamics

of x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

facts and conjectures, Comput. Math. Appl., (to appear).

[52] M. R. S. Kulenovi´c, G. Ladas, and N. R. Prokup, On the recursive sequence x

n+1

=

αx

n

+βx

n−1

1+x

n

, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 6(5) (2000), 563-576.

[53] M. R. S. Kulenovi´c, G. Ladas, and N. R. Prokup, On a rational diﬀerence equation,

Comput. Math. Appl. 41(2001), 671-678.

[54] M. R. S. Kulenovi´c, G. Ladas, and W. S. Sizer, On the recursive sequence x

n+1

=

αx

n

+βx

n−1

γx

n

+Cx

n−1

, Math. Sci. Res. Hot-Line 2(1998), no.5, 1-16.

BIBLIOGRAPHY 215

[55] S. Kuruklis and G. Ladas, Oscillation and global attractivity in a discrete delay

logistic model, Quart. Appl. Math. 50 (1992), 227-233.

[56] G. Ladas, Invariants for generalized Lyness equations, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl.

1(2)(1995), 209-214.

[57] G. Ladas, Open problems and conjectures, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 1(1)(1995),

95-97.

[58] G. Ladas, Open problems and conjectures, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 1(3)(1995),

317-321.

[59] G. Ladas, Open Problems and Conjectures, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 1(4)(1995),

413-419.

[60] G. Ladas, On the recursive sequence x

n+1

=

k

i=0

A

i

x

n−2i

, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl.

4(3)(1998), 311-313.

[61] G. Ladas, Open problems and conjectures, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 4(5)(1998),

497-499.

[62] G. Ladas, Open problems and conjectures, J. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. 7(2001), (to

appear).

[63] M. Martelli, Introduction to Discrete Dynamical Systems and Chaos, John Wiley &

Sons, New York, 1999.

[64] Mathemathics Magazine, Problem 1572, 73(2000), 160-161.

[65] Ch. G. Philos, I. K. Purnaras, and Y. G. Sﬁcas, Global attractivity in a nonlinear

diﬀerence equation, Appl. Math. Comput. 62(1994), 249-258.

[66] E. C. Pielou, An Introduction to Mathematical Ecology, John Wiley & Sons, New

York, 1965.

[67] E. C. Pielou, Population and Community Ecology, Gordon and Breach, New York,

1974.

[68] C. Robinson, Stability, Symbolic Dynamics, and Chaos, CRC Press, Boca Raton,

FL, 1995.

[69] H. Sedaghat, Existence of solutions of certain singular diﬀerence equations, J. Dif-

fer. Equations Appl. 6(5)(2000), 535-561.

[70] H. Sedaghat, Geometric stability conditions for higher order diﬀerence equations,

J. Math. Anal. Appl. 224(1998), 255-272.

216 BIBLIOGRAPHY

[71] W. S. Sizer, Some periodic solutions of the Lyness equation , Proceedings of the

Fifth International Conference on Diﬀerence Equations and Applications, January

3-7, 2000, Temuco, Chile, Gordon and Breach Science Publishers, 2001, (to appear).

[72] E. C. Zeeman, Geometric unfolding of a diﬀerence equation,

http://www.math.utsa.edu/ecz/gu.html

[73] Y. Zheng, Existence of nonperiodic solutions of the Lyness equation x

n+1

=

α+x

n

x

n−1

,

J. Math. Anal. Appl. 209(1997), 94-102.

[74] Y. Zheng, On periodic cycles of the Lyness equation, Diﬀerential Equations Dynam.

Systems 6(1998), 319-324.

[75] Y. Zheng, Periodic solutions with the same period of the recursion x

n+1

=

α+βx

n

+γx

n−1

A+Bx

n

+Cx

n−1

, Diﬀerential Equations Dynam. Systems 5(1997), 51-58.

Index

basin of attraction of a two cycle, 38

classiﬁcation of equation types, 3

convergence to period-two solutions, 38

Discrete Epidemic Models, 128

equilibrium point, 5, 29

existence of prime period-two solution,

35

existence of solutions, 2

ﬁxed point, 5

Flour Beetle Model, 129

forbidden set, 2, 17

full limiting sequence, 15

full limiting solution, 16

gingerbreadman map, 75

global asymptotic stability of the zero

equilibrium, 9, 31

global attractivity of the positive equi-

librium, 9–14

global attractor, 6

globally asymptotically stable, 6

invariant, 71

invariant interval, 41–42, 184–189

limiting solution, 15

linearized stability analysis, 5, 183

linearized stability theorem, 6

local asymptotic stability of a two cycle,

36

local stability of the positive equilibrium

, 32

local stability of the zero equilibrium, 30

locally asymptotically stable, 6

locally stable, 6

Lyness’ equation, 2, 70

May’s host parasitoid model, 75

negative feedback condition, 9

negative semicycle, 25

nonoscillatory, 25

open problems and conjectures, 43–46,

49–51, 64–68, 72–75, 123–130, 134–

136, 138–139, 163–166, 180–182,

192–200

oscillate about x, 25

oscillate about zero, 25

periodic solution, 7

periodic solutions with the same period,

33

Pielou’s discrete delay logistic model, 2,

66

Pielou’s equation, 57

Plant-herbivore system, 128

population model, 66, 129

positive equilibrium, 9

positive semicycle, 24

prime period p solution, 7

repeller, 6, 7

Riccati diﬀerence equation, 1, 17, 78

Riccati number, 18

saddle point, 7

semicycle analysis, 24–28

signum invariant, 38

sink, 7

217

218 INDEX

source, 6

stability of equilibrium, 5

stability trichotomy, 10

stable manifold, 8

stable manifold theorem in the plane, 7

strictly oscillatory, 25

table of invariant intervals, 42, 189

trichotomy character, 168

type of equation

(1, 1)-type, 47–48

(1, 2)-type, 53–54

(1, 3)-type, 131

(2, 1)-type, 69–70

(2, 2)-type, 77–78

(2, 3)-type, 141

(3, 1)-type, 137

(3, 2)-type, 167

(3, 3)-type, 183

unstable equilibrium, 6

unstable manifold, 8

**DYNAMICS of SECOND ORDER RATIONAL DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS
**

With Open Problems and Conjectures

**DYNAMICS of SECOND ORDER RATIONAL DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS
**

With Open Problems and Conjectures

M. R. S. Kulenovi´ c G. Ladas

**CHAPMAN & HALL/CRC
**

Boca Raton London New York Washington, D.C.

or for resale. Title.Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Kulenovi´. I. G. Neither this book nor any part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means. cm.. but the author and the publisher cannot assume responsibility for the validity of all materials or for the consequences of their use. c p.S. Ladas. without intent to infringe. and recording. or by any information storage or retrieval system.) c Dynamics of second order rational difference equations : with open problems and conjectures / M.W.S. Corporate Blvd.E. M. Visit the CRC Press Web site at www. for creating new works. Includes bibliographical references and index. Florida 33431.S. II. microﬁlming. A wide variety of references are listed. Kulenovi´ . and are used only for identiﬁcation and explanation.S. Trademark Notice: Product or corporate names may be trademarks or registered trademarks.R. 2000 N.R. Reprinted material is quoted with permission. electronic or mechanical. Ladas. Speciﬁc permission must be obtained in writing from CRC Press LLC for such copying. G. The consent of CRC Press LLC does not extend to copying for general distribution.com © 2002 by Chapman & Hall/CRC No claim to original U. including photocopying. (Mustafa R. and sources are indicated.crcpress. ISBN 1-58488-275-1 1. for promotion. Reasonable efforts have been made to publish reliable data and information. Direct all inquiries to CRC Press LLC. without prior permission in writing from the publisher. QA431 . Government works International Standard Book Number 1-58488-275-1 Library of Congress Card Number 20010370 Printed in the United States of America 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Printed on acid-free paper .K84 2001 515′.625—dc21 20010370 This book contains information obtained from authentic and highly regarded sources. Boca Raton. Difference equations—Numerical solutions.

. . . . . . . . . ix xi 1 5 5 7 9 9 14 17 24 29 29 30 32 33 35 36 38 41 43 47 47 48 49 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Deﬁnitions of Stability and Linearized Stability Analysis 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Local Asymptotic Stability of a Two Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 When is Every Solution Periodic with the Same Period? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . .5 Existence of Prime Period-Two Solutions . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . βxn 3. . . . . . . . . .3 Global Asymptotic Stability of the Zero Equilibrium . .2 The Case α = γ = A = B = 0 : xn+1 = Cxn−1 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . .2 Stability of the Zero Equilibrium . .8 Invariant Intervals . . .Contents Preface Acknowledgements Introduction and Classiﬁcation of Equation Types 1 Preliminary Results 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and Invariant Intervals 2. . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 The Stable Manifold Theorem in the Plane . . .1 Equilibrium Points . . . . 1. . . . Bxn 3. 2. . . . . .6 The Riccati Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Introduction . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . Semicycles. . . . .3 The Case α = β = A = C = 0 : xn+1 = γxn−1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Global Attractivity of the Positive Equilibrium . Periodicity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Local Stability. . . . . . .7 Semicycle Analysis . . .7 Convergence to Period-Two Solutions When C=0 . . . 3 (1. . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Open Problems and Conjectures . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Limiting Solutions . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . .3 Local Stability of the Positive Equilibrium . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1)-Type Equations 3. . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . .4 .1 Invariant Intervals . .4 Global Behavior of Solutions . . . .1 Invariant Intervals . . . . . . .7 The Case α = C = 0 : xn+1 = βxA+Bxn−1 . .2 Semicycle Analysis . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . n +γx 6. . . .2 The Case β = γ = C = 0 : xn+1 = A+Bxn . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . .4 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . . . . . . .2 The Case q < 1 . . . . . . . . 57 58 59 60 61 62 62 64 69 69 70 72 72 . . .4. . . . .3 The Case γ = B = 0 : xn+1 = A+Cxn−1 . . . . . . . . . . 5 (2. . . . . . 1)-Type Equations 5. . . . . .7. . . . . .5 The Case β = C = 0 : xn+1 = α+γxn−1 . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . 4. . . . . . 6. . . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . .1 Introduction . . . . . . . 78 n α+βxn 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bx 5. . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . .3 The Case β = A = C = 0 : xn+1 = α+γxn . . . . . . . .7 The Case α = β = A = 0 : xn+1 = 4. . . . 6.7. . . . . . . . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 The Case β = A = 0 : xn+1 = Bxn +Cxn−1 . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Riccati Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Semicycle Analysis . . . . .6. . . . . . .1 The Case p < 1 . . . .5 The Case α = γ = A = 0 : xn+1 = 4. 82 83 84 87 89 90 90 91 92 93 96 97 100 101 102 103 105 107 . . . . . . . .5. . . . . 55 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . .5.6 The Case α = β = C = 0 : xn+1 = 4. . . . . . 77 α+βx 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 α 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2)-Type Equations 77 6. A+Bxn γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 Pielou’s Equation . . . . . 53 α 4. . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . .2 Invariant Intervals . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Existence and Local Stability of Period-Two Cycles . . . .2 The Case p = 1 . . . . . . . . . 79 6.7.8 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . 6. . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . 2)-Type Equations 53 4. . . . . . . 6 (2. . n 6. .3 The Case q > 1 .2 Semicycle Analysis of Solutions When q ≤ 1 . . 4. . . A+Bxn 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Global Stability and Boundedness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 The Case γ = A = B = 0 : xn+1 = α+βxn . . . .7. . . . . . . The Case γ = A = 0 : xn+1 = Bxα+βxn n +Cxn−1 6. . . . . . . . .vi Contents 4 (1. . .7. . . βxn A+Cxn−1 βxn Bxn +Cxn−1 γxn−1 . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . α+γxn−1 6. . . . . . .Lyness’ Equation Cxn−1 n−1 5. 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 The Case α = γ = B = 0 : xn+1 = 4.4 Global Attractivity When q < 1 . . .3 Semicycle Analysis and Global Attractivity When q = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Introduction . . . . .1 Semicycle Analysis . . . . 6.7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . .3 The Case p > 1 . . . . . . . . . .2 The Case γ = C = 0 : xn+1 = A+Bxn . . . .3 The Case β = γ = A = 0 : xn+1 = Bxn +Cxn−1 . . . . .

. . .2. . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . 2 9. . . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . .3 Global Stability Analysis When p < q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . 131 7.2. . . . . . . . . . . .2 Semicycle Analysis .3. A+Cxn−1 6. . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii 107 109 110 112 113 114 117 117 123 123 7 (1. 9. . . . . . . . . . . .2.1 Existence of a Two Cycle . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 141 141 142 143 144 147 149 150 154 156 157 157 158 160 162 163 . . .4 Global Stability . . . .5 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . . . . .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . 132 n +Cx γx 7. . . . . . . . . α+βxn 9. . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 The Case β = 0 : xn+1 = A+Bxn +Cxn−1 . . .2 The Case β = γ = 0 : xn+1 = A+Bxnα n−1 . . .3. . . .8 The Case α = B = 0 : xn+1 = βxn +γxn−1 . . . 131 +Cx 7. . 3)-Type Equations 131 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Existence and Local Stability of Period-Two Cycles 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . .4 The Case α = 0 : xn+1 = A+Bx+γxn−1 . . . . .7. . . . 3)-Type Equations 9. . . . .3 The Case α = γ = 0 : xn+1 = A+Bxβxn n−1 . 6. . . . . 133 +Cx 7. . . . .5 Semicycle Analysis When pr = q + qr .1 Invariant Intervals and Semicycle Analysis . . . . . .5 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . βxn +γx 6. . .1 Boundedness of Solutions . . . . . . . . . .4 Global Asymptotic Stability .3 Semicycle Analysis . . . . . . . . .8. .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Long-term Behavior of Solutions When q > 1 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . 134 8 (3. . .4 Global Stability Analysis When p > q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 8. . . . . .Contents 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Introduction . . . .2 Invariant Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . α+γxn−1 9. .9. . n +Cxn−1 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . .2 Global Stability of the Positive Equilibrium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . n−1 6. . . . . . . . .2 Convergence of Solutions . . .9 The Case α = A = 0 : xn+1 = Bxn +Cxn−1 . . . . . . . .1 Introduction . . . . .2 Open Problems and Conjectures . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . 1)-Type Equations 137 8. . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . βxn 9. . . . . . . . . . .1 Invariant Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . .2 The Case γ = 0 : xn+1 = A+Bxn +Cxn−1 . .4 The Case α = β = 0 : xn+1 = A+Bxnn−1 n−1 . . . . . .3. . . . 9. 138 9 (2. .2 Invariant Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Convergence of Solutions . . . . .

. . . . . .2 11. . .2. . .2 Convergence of Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . 3)-Type Equation xn+1 = A+Bxn +γxn−1 n +Cxn−1 Linearized Stability Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. . . . . . A+Cxn−1 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . 11 The 11. . . . . . . . . 11. . . . . . .5 Open Problems and Conjectures . . . . .2. . .viii 10 (3. . . A Global Attractivity for Higher Order Equations Bibliography Index . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . .3 The Case B = 0 : xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 . α+βx (3. . . . . .3. . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Proof of Part (c) of Theorem 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Introduction . .3. . .1 Invariant Intervals . .1 11. . . . . . . . . . . . 10. .1 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Open Problems and Conjectures . . Invariant Intervals . . . . . . .2 Global Stability When p ≥ r . . .3 Contents 167 167 167 169 172 172 173 173 174 175 177 179 180 183 183 184 189 191 192 201 211 217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A+Bxn 10. . . . . . .3 Convergence of Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convergence Results . . . . . . . . .1 Global Stability . . . . . . . . .1 Invariant Intervals . .1 Proof of Part (b) of Theorem 10. . . . . . . .1 10. . . . . . . .4 The Case A = 0 : xn+1 = α+βx+Cxn−1 . . . . 2)-Type Equations 10. 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . 10. . . . . . n +γxn−1 10. . . . . . . . 10. .2 The Case C = 0 : xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 . . . . . . .4.2. . . Bxn 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

It is an amazing fact that Eq(1) contains. β. a large number of equations whose dynamics have not been thoroughly understood yet and remain a great challenge for further investigation. Every chapter in this monograph contains several open problems and conjectures related to the particular equation which is investigated and its generalizations. In this sense. (1) where the parameters α. ix . Chapter 1 contains some basic deﬁnitions and some general results which are used throughout the book. γ. In an appendix. B. A. In Chapters 3 to 11 we present the known results and derive several new ones on the various types of equations which comprise Eq(1). the global stability. . . In Chapter 2 we present some general results about periodic solutions and invariant intervals of Eq(1). A + Bxn + Cxn−1 n = 0.Preface In this monograph. as special cases. and the periodicity of solutions of all rational diﬀerence equations of the form xn+1 = α + βxn + γxn−1 . we present some global attractivity results for higher order diﬀerence equations which may be useful for extensions and generalizations. we present the known results and derive several new ones on the boundedness. this is a self-contained monograph and the main prerequisite that the reader needs to understand the material presented here and to be able to attack the open problems and conjectures is a good foundation in analysis. To this end we pose several Open Problems and Conjectures which we believe will stimulate further interest towards a complete understanding of the dynamics of Eq(1) and its functional generalizations. 1. The techniques and results which we develop in this monograph to understand the dynamics of Eq(1) are also extremely useful in analyzing the equations in the mathematical models of various biological systems and other applications. In particular we present necessary and suﬃcient conditions for Eq(1) to have period-two solutions and we also present a table of invariant intervals. at the end of this monograph. . C and the initial conditions x−1 and x0 are nonnegative real numbers. We believe that the results about Eq(1) are of paramount importance in their own right and furthermore we believe that these results oﬀer prototypes towards the development of the basic theory of the global behavior of solutions of nonlinear diﬀerence equations of order greater than one.

.

E. W. K. DeVault. O. McGrath. I. Driver. F. El-Metwally. Prokup. C. Merino. Valicenti. Clark. M. Sizer and to our graduate students A. Rodrigues. Kent. C.Acknowledgements This monograph is the outgrowth of lecture notes and seminars which were given at the University of Rhode Island during the last ﬁve years. N. Gibbons. P. Grove. Schultz. We are thankful to Professors R. Wilkinson for their enthusiastic participation and useful suggestions which helped to improve the exposition. S. H. R. J. S. xi . W. T. D. Martins. E. Janowski. M. J. L. A. C. Camouzis. C. W. M. S. Feuer. Cunningham. Teixeira. and W. Predescu. Briden. A. Kosmala. L. and K. C. E. Hoag. Amleh. Radin.

.

To Senada and Theodora .

.

[41]. . The Riccati diﬀerence equation when γ = C = 0. A + Bxn + Cxn−1 n = 0. [21]. To this end we pose several Open Problems and Conjectures which we believe will stimulate further interest towards a complete understanding of the dynamics of Eq(1) and its functional generalizations. a large number of equations whose dynamics have not been thoroughly established yet. Eq(1) includes among others the following well known classes of equations: 1. and the periodicity of solutions of all rational diﬀerence equations of the form xn+1 = α + βxn + γxn−1 . such as [1]. A. . This equation is studied in many textbooks on diﬀerence equations. we present the known results and derive several new ones on the boundedness.6 where. . (1) where the parameters α. [42]. We believe that the results about Eq(1) are of paramount importance in their own right and furthermore we believe that these results oﬀer prototypes towards the development of the basic theory of the global behavior of solutions of nonlinear diﬀerence equations of order greater than one. γ. It is an amazing fact that Eq(1) contains as special cases. etc. 1. B. in addition to the basic description of the solutions 1 .Introduction and Classiﬁcation of Equation Types In this monograph. The techniques and results which we develop in this monograph to understand the dynamics of Eq(1) are also extremely useful in analyzing the equations in the mathematical models of various biological systems and other applications. See Section 1. C are nonnegative real numbers and the initial conditions x−1 and x0 are arbitrary nonnegative real numbers such that A + Bxn + Cxn−1 > 0 for all n ≥ 0. β. the global stability.

.4. An example of such a problem is the following: Open Problem Find all initial points (x−1 . Lyness’ equation when γ = A = B = 0. See ([42]. [67]. and Section 1. [44]. See [24] and Sections 2. . We believe that the techniques which we develop in this monograph to understand the dynamics of Eq(1) will also be of paramount importance in analyzing the equations in the mathematical models of various biological systems and other applications. 1. 75). 3. See [13].6 for some results in this regard. .2 Introduction and Classiﬁcation of the Riccati equation. . This is the set F of all initial conditions x0 ∈ R through which the equation xn+1 = α + βxn A + Bxn (2) is not well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. [55]. The problem of existence of solutions for diﬀerence equations is of paramount importance but so far has been systematically neglected. and Section 5. [32]. n = 0. [49].2. .7 and 10.2. and Section 4. Throughout this monograph we pose several open problems related to the existence of solutions of some simple equations with the hope that their investigation may throw some light into this very diﬃcult problem. . [69]. A characteristic feature of this equation is that it possesses an invariant which can be used to understand the character of its . p. Pielou’s discrete delay logistic model when α = γ = B = 0. 2. . [57]. See [13]. it is interesting to note the similarities of the dynamics of the population model xn+1 = α + βxn−1 e−xn . x0 ) ∈ R × R through which the equation xn−1 xn+1 = −1 + xn is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. [66]. Hence the solution {xn } of Eq(2) exists for all n ≥ 0. 1. and the rational equation xn+1 = α + αxn + βxn−1 . / if and only if x0 ∈ F. See [42]. [18]. This is a fascinating equation with many interesting extensions and generalizations. we introduce the forbidden set of the equation. For example. 1 + xn n = 0.

Let k and l be positive integers from the set {1. 1. 1. n = 0. is bounded. 1) 3 equations of type (2. Eq(1) contains 49 equations as follows: 9 equations of type (1. . n = 0. . and to bring to their attention several Open Research Problems and Conjectures related to this equation and its functional generalization. . See [7].Introduction and Classiﬁcation 3 solutions. 3) 3 equations of type (3. . 3) 3 equations of type (3. We will say that a special case of Eq(1) is of (k. . and (2. . γ + xn−1 1 + xn . [43]. 2) 3 equations of type (1. n = 0. [15]. The remaining 28 are quite interesting nonlinear diﬀerence equations. xn+1 = A + Bxn + Cxn−1 are of types (1. 3). In this sense. as special cases. . 1). . . [28]. n = 0. . . However to this day. (2. . . . Without the use of this invariant we are still unable to show. for example. many special cases of Eq(1) are not thoroughly understood yet and remain a great challenge for further investigation. l)-type if the equation is of the form of Eq(1) with k positive parameters in the numerator and l positive parameters in the denominator. xn+1 = xn−1 α + βxn xn+1 = . Of these 49 equations. [29]. . 3}. or of the Riccati type. 3) respectively. 2) 1 equation of type (3. Our goal in this monograph is to familiarize readers with the recent techniques and results related to Eq(1) and its extensions. 1) 9 equations of type (1. For convenience we classify all the special cases of Eq(1) as follows. For example the following equations xn . 2) 9 equations of type (2. 1). 2). 1. [45] and [52]-[54]. (2. that every positive solution of the diﬀerence equation α + xn . or linear. xn+1 = xn−1 βxn + γxn−1 . xn+1 = xn−1 where α ∈ (0. 1) 9 equations of type (2. 21 are either trivial. n = 0. 1. [42]. It is an amazing fact that Eq(1) contains. . 1. 2. a large number of equations whose dynamics have not been thoroughly established yet. ∞). Some of them have been recently investigated and have led to the development of some general theory about diﬀerence equations.

.

Deﬁnition 1. xn−1 ). [22]. [33]. . 1. x−1 ∈ I. that is. [21]. and [68].1) if x = f (x. Then for every set of initial conditions x0 . . or equivalently. [4].1). 1. x is a ﬁxed point of f . [41]. [16]. The reader may just glance at the results in this chapter and return for the details when they are needed in the sequel.1 Let x be an equilibrium point of Eq(1.1). [34]. n=−1 A point x ∈ I is called an equilibrium point of Eq(1. (1. the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = f (xn . 5 .1 Deﬁnitions of Stability and Linearized Stability Analysis f :I ×I →I Let I be some interval of real numbers and let be a continuously diﬀerentiable function.1) has a unique solution {xn }∞ . x). n = 0.1. See also [1].Chapter 1 Preliminary Results In this chapter we state some known results and prove some new ones about diﬀerence equations which will be useful in our investigation of Eq(1). . [63]. xn = x for n ≥ 0 is a solution of Eq(1.

Then the equation yn+1 = pyn + qyn−1 . Theorem 1. x−1 ∈ I with |x0 − x| + |x−1 − x| < γ. or a repeller. there exists N ≥ 1 such that |xN − x| ≥ r. n→∞ (iv) The equilibrium x of Eq(1. (vi) The equilibrium x of Eq(1. we have |xn − x| < ε for all n ≥ −1.1). (1.6 Chapter 1.1) is called a source. if there exists r > 0 such that for all x0 . x) ∂u ∂v denote the partial derivatives of f (u. ∂f ∂f (x.2) p= is called the linearized equation associated with Eq(1. there exists δ > 0 such that for all x0 . .1) is called locally asymptotically stable if it is locally stable.1) is called locally stable if for every ε > 0. . Preliminary Results (i) The equilibrium x of Eq(1. x−1 ∈ I we have lim xn = x.1 (Linearized Stability) (a) If both roots of the quadratic equation λ2 − pλ − q = 0 (1. x−1 ∈ I with |x0 − x| + |x−1 − x| < δ.1) is locally asymptotically stable. we have n→∞ lim xn = x. (iii) The equilibrium x of Eq(1.1) is called globally asymptotically stable if it is locally stable and a global attractor.1) about the equilibrium point x.1) is called unstable if it is not stable. (ii) The equilibrium x of Eq(1. and if there exists γ > 0 such that for all x0 .3) Let lie in the open unit disk |λ| < 1. then the equilibrium x of Eq(1. . Clearly a source is an unstable equilibrium.1. 1. v) evaluated at the equilibrium x of Eq(1. x) and q = (x. n = 0. x−1 ∈ I with 0 < |x0 − x| + |x−1 − x| < r. (v) The equilibrium x of Eq(1. .1) is called a global attractor if for every x0 .

1.2. The Stable Manifold Theorem in the Plane

7

(b) If at least one of the roots of Eq(1.3) has absolute value greater than one, then the equilibrium x of Eq(1.1) is unstable. (c) A necessary and suﬃcient condition for both roots of Eq(1.3) to lie in the open unit disk |λ| < 1, is |p| < 1 − q < 2. (1.4) In this case the locally asymptotically stable equilibrium x is also called a sink. (d) A necessary and suﬃcient condition for both roots of Eq(1.3) to have absolute value greater than one is |q| > 1 and |p| < |1 − q| . In this case x is a repeller. (e) A necessary and suﬃcient condition for one root of Eq(1.3) to have absolute value greater than one and for the other to have absolute value less than one is p2 + 4q > 0 and |p| > |1 − q| .

In this case the unstable equilibrium x is called a saddle point. (f ) A necessary and suﬃcient condition for a root of Eq(1.3) to have absolute value equal to one is |p| = |1 − q| or q = −1 and |p| ≤ 2. In this case the equilibrium x is called a nonhyperbolic point. Deﬁnition 1.1.2 if (a) A solution {xn } of Eq(1.1) is said to be periodic with period p xn+p = xn for all n ≥ −1. (1.5)

(b) A solution {xn } of Eq(1.1) is said to be periodic with prime period p, or a p-cycle if it is periodic with period p and p is the least positive integer for which (1.5) holds.

1.2

The Stable Manifold Theorem in the Plane

Let T be a diﬀeomorphism in I × I, i.e., one-to-one, smooth mapping, with smooth inverse. Assume that p ∈ I × I is a saddle ﬁxed point of T, i.e., T(p) = p and the Jacobian JT (p) has one eigenvalue s with |s| < 1 and one eigenvalue u with |u| > 1.

8

Chapter 1. Preliminary Results

Let vs be an eigenvector corresponding to s and let vu be an eigenvector corresponding to u. Let S be the stable manifold of p, i.e., the set of initial points whose forward orbits (under iteration by T) p, T(p), T2 (p), . . . converge to p. Let U be the unstable manifold of p, i.e., the set of initial points whose backward orbits (under iteration by the inverse of T) p, T−1 (p), T−2 (p), . . . converge to p. Then, both S and U are one dimensional manifolds (curves) that contain p. Furthermore, the vectors vs and vu are tangent to S and U at p, respectively. The map T for Eq(1.1) is found as follows: Set un = xn−1 and vn = xn Then un+1 = xn and so T u v = v f (v, u) x x . and vn+1 = f (vn , un ) for n ≥ 0

for n ≥ 0.

Therefore the eigenvalues of the Jacobian JT

at the equilibrium point x of Eq(1.1)

are the roots of Eq(1.3). In this monograph, the way we will make use of the Stable Manifold Theorem in our investigation of the rational diﬀerence equation xn+1 = α + βxn + γxn−1 , A + Bxn + Cxn−1 n = 0, 1, . . . (1.6)

is as follows: Under certain conditions the positive equilibrium of Eq(1.6) will be a saddle point and under the same conditions Eq(1.6) will have a two cycle . . . φ, ψ, φ, ψ, . . . (1.7)

which is locally asymptotically stable. Under these conditions, the two cycle (1.7) cannot be a global attractor of all non-equilibrium solutions. See, for example, Sections 6.6 and 6.9.

1.3. Global Asymptotic Stability of the Zero Equilibrium

9

1.3

Global Asymptotic Stability of the Zero Equilibrium

When zero is an equilibrium point of the Eq(1.6), which we are investigating in this monograph (with β > 0), then the following theorem will be employed to establish conditions for its global asymptotic stability. Amazingly the same theorem is a powerful tool for establishing the global asymptotic stability of the zero equilibrium of several biological models. See, for example, [31] and [48]. Theorem 1.3.1 ([31]. See also [48], and [70]) Consider the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = f0 (xn , xn−1 )xn + f1 (xn , xn−1 )xn−1 , with nonnegative initial conditions and f0 , f1 ∈ C[[0, ∞) × [0, ∞), [0, 1)]. Assume that the following hypotheses hold: (i) f0 and f1 are non-increasing in each of their arguments; (ii) f0 (x, x) > 0 for all x ≥ 0; (iii) f0 (x, y) + f1 (x, y) < 1 for all x, y ∈ (0, ∞). Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(1.8) is globally asymptotically stable. n = 0, 1, . . . (1.8)

1.4

Global Attractivity of the Positive Equilibrium

Unfortunately when it comes to establishing the global attractivity of the positive equilibrium of the Eq(1.6) which we are investigating in this monograph, there are not enough results in the literature to cover all various cases. We strongly believe that the investigation of the various special cases of our equation has already played and will continue to play an important role in the development of the stability theory of general diﬀerence equations of orders greater than one. The ﬁrst theorem, which has also been very useful in applications to mathematical biology, see [31] and [48], was really motivated by a problem in [35]. Theorem 1.4.1 ([31]. See also [35], [48], and ([42], p. 53). Let I ⊆ [0, ∞) be some interval and assume that f ∈ C[I × I, (0, ∞)] satisﬁes the following conditions: (i) f (x, y) is non-decreasing in each of its arguments; (ii) Eq(1.1) has a unique positive equilibrium point x ∈ I and the function f (x, x) satisﬁes the negative feedback condition: (x − x)(f (x, x) − x) < 0 for every x ∈ I − {x}.

Then every positive solution of Eq(1.1) with initial conditions in I converges to x.

10

Chapter 1. Preliminary Results

The following theorem was inspired by the results in [55] that deal with the global asymptotic stability of Pielou’s equation (see Section 4.4), which is a special case of the equation that we are investigating in this monograph. Theorem 1.4.2 ([42], p. 27) Assume (i) f ∈ C[(0, ∞) × (0, ∞), (0, ∞)]; (ii) f (x, y) is nonincreasing in x and decreasing in y; (iii) xf (x, x) is increasing in x; (iv) The equation xn+1 = xn f (xn , xn−1 ), n = 0, 1, . . . has a unique positive equilibrium x. Then x is globally asymptotically stable. Theorem 1.4.3 ([27]) Assume (i) f ∈ C[[0, ∞) × [0, ∞), (0, ∞)]; (ii) f (x, y) is nonincreasing in each argument; (iii) xf (x, y) is nondecreasing in x; (iv) f (x, y) < f (y, x) ⇐⇒ x > y; (v) The equation xn+1 = xn−1 f (xn−1 , xn ), n = 0, 1, . . . (1.10)

(1.9)

has a unique positive equilibrium x. Then x is a global attractor of all positive solutions of Eq(1.10). The next result is known as the stability trichotomy result: Theorem 1.4.4 ([46]) Assume f ∈ C 1 [[0, ∞) × [0, ∞), [0, ∞)] is such that x ∂f ∂f +y < f (x, y) for all x, y ∈ (0, ∞). ∂x ∂y (1.11)

Then Eq(1.1) has stability trichotomy, that is exactly one of the following three cases holds for all solutions of Eq(1.1): (i) limn→∞ xn = ∞ for all (x−1 , x0 ) = (0, 0) . (ii) limn→∞ xn = 0 for all initial points and 0 is the only equilibrium point of Eq(1.1). (iii) limn→∞ xn = x ∈ (0, ∞) for all (x−1 , x0 ) = (0, 0) and x is the only positive equilibrium of Eq(1.1).

y) is monotonic in its arguments. Proof. m) = M.1. b] → [a.) The ﬁrst theorem deals with the case where the function f (x. b]. b] for each y ∈ [a. b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that f : [a.8 where these theorems are utilized. ≤ Mi ≤ . ≤ M1 ≤ M0 and Set mi ≤ xk ≤ Mi m = lim mi i→∞ for k ≥ 2i + 1. b] is a solution of the system f (m.5 ([54]) Let [a.4 and 6.1) converges to x. .4. b] × [a.8 and 1. In this regard there are four possible scenarios depending on whether f (x. y). . y) is non-decreasing in x and non-increasing in y and the second theorem deals with the case where the function f (x. . . . m0 ≤ m1 ≤ . b] is a continuous function satisfying the following properties: (a) f (x. . 2.4. See also the Appendix. . b]. i→∞ and M = lim Mi . Mi−1 ). (b) If (m. (See Section 6. y) is non-decreasing in x ∈ [a. y) is nondecreasing in both arguments. mi−1 ) and mi = f (mi−1 .7 below are new and deal with the remaining two cases relative to the monotonic character of f (x. b] for each x ∈ [a. which describes the extension of these results to higher order diﬀerence equations. .9. at the end of this monograph. Now observe that for each i ≥ 0. set Mi = f (Mi−1 . b] × [a. Then Eq(1. Global Attractivity of the Positive Equilibrium 11 Very often the best strategy for obtaining global attractivity results for Eq(1. See Sections 6.1) is to work in the regions where the function f (x.4. b] and every solution of Eq(1. M ) = m and f (M. or nonincreasing in both arguments. M ) ∈ [a. Set m0 = a and M0 = b and for i = 1. ≤ mi ≤ . Theorems 1. . and f (x. The next two theorems are slight modiﬁcations of results which were obtained in [54] and were developed while we were working on a special case of the equation that we are investigating in this monograph. y) is nonincreasing in y ∈ [a. Theorem 1. y) is non-increasing in x and nondecreasing in y. then m = M .1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a. .4. or nonincreasing in one and nondecreasing in the other.

b] and every solution of Eq(1. Therefore in view of (b). and Set mi ≤ xk ≤ Mi m = lim mi i→∞ for k ≥ 2i + 1. ≤ Mi ≤ . y) is non-increasing in x ∈ [a. . Set m0 = a and M0 = b and for i = 1.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a. . b]. . ≤ mi ≤ . 2 . . b] × [a. (b) The diﬀerence equation Eq(1. b] for each y ∈ [a. b] → [a. . Then clearly (1. m = f (M. b]. set Mi = f (mi−1 . b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that f : [a. m). y) is nondecreasing in y ∈ [a.12) and by the continuity of f . mi−1 ). . M ). . m=M from which the result follows.6 ([54]) Let [a. Now observe that for each i ≥ 0. b]. b] is a continuous function satisfying the following properties: (a) f (x.4.1) converges to x. m=M from which the result follows.12) holds and by the continuity of f . i→∞ and M = lim Mi .1) has no solutions of prime period two in [a. In view of (b). 2. m0 ≤ m1 ≤ . and f (x. b] for each x ∈ [a. . Proof. . 2 Theorem 1. ≤ M1 ≤ M0 . Mi−1 ) and mi = f (Mi−1 . Then Eq(1. m) and M = f (m. Preliminary Results M ≥ lim sup xi ≥ lim inf xi ≥ m i→∞ i→∞ (1. m = f (m. M ) and M = f (M.12 Then Chapter 1.

b] is a continuous function satisfying the following properties: (a) f (x. . Now observe that for each i ≥ 0. m = f (M.1) converges to x. set Mi = f (mi−1 . b] × [a. Then Eq(1.12) holds and by the continuity of f . m=M =x from which the result follows.4. ≤ M1 ≤ M0 . . .4. Proof. M ) ∈ [a. ≤ mi ≤ . y) is non-decreasing in each of its arguments. i→∞ and M = lim Mi . M ) and M = f (m.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a. 2 Theorem 1. Global Attractivity of the Positive Equilibrium Theorem 1.8 Let [a. . m0 ≤ m1 ≤ . b] is a continuous function satisfying the following properties: (a) f (x. b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that f : [a. has a unique positive solution.4. b] is a solution of the system f (m. . . M ) = m. b] and every solution of Eq(1. mi−1 ) and mi = f (Mi−1 . .1. (b) The equation f (x. b] × [a. y) is non-increasing in each of its arguments. . x) = x. Mi−1 ). m) = M and f (M. . .1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a. Then clearly (1. (b) If (m. Set m0 = a and M0 = b and for i = 1. and Set mi ≤ xk ≤ Mi m = lim mi i→∞ for k ≥ 2i + 1. b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that f : [a. 13 then m = M . b] → [a. b] → [a.7 Let [a. 2. m). b] × [a. Then Eq(1. ≤ Mi ≤ . In view of (b). b] and every solution of Eq(1.1) converges to x.

5 Limiting Solutions The concept of limiting solutions was introduced by Karakostas [37] (see also [40]) and is a useful tool in establishing that under certain conditions a solution of a diﬀerence equation which is bounded from above and from below has a limit. from which the result follows. B ∈ J. . . . m0 ≤ m1 ≤ .13) . . (1. . . set Mi = f (Mi−1 . mi−1 ). In view of (b). ≤ Mi ≤ . m = M = x. f ∈ C[J × J. xn−1 ). Let J be some interval of real numbers. m) and M = f (M. . where A.12) is satisﬁed and by the continuity of f . Let L be a limit point of the solution {xn }∞ n=−1 (For example L is the limit superior S or the limit inferior I of the solution). Preliminary Results m0 = a and M0 = b and for i = 1. . n ≥ −k + 1. Set Chapter 1. In this section we ﬁrst give a self-contained version of limiting solutions the way we will use them in this monograph. and mi ≤ xk ≤ Mi Set m = lim mi i→∞ for k ≥ 2i + 1. i→∞ and M = lim Mi .1) such that A ≤ xn ≤ B for all n ≥ −1. m = f (m. . . and let k ≥ 1 be a positive integer. Then clearly the inequality (1. 2 1. . ≤ M1 ≤ M0 . J]. Now observe that for each i ≥ 0. 2. Assume that {xn }∞ n=−1 is a solution of Eq(1. Mi−1 ) and mi = f (mi−1 . M ). Now with the above hypotheses. . ∞ we will show that there exists a solution {Ln }n=−k of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = f (xn .14 Proof. ≤ mi ≤ .

n=−1 The following result. .1. satisﬁes Eq(1.) ∞ We now proceed to show the existence of a limiting solution {Ln }n=−k .5. Clearly there exists a subsequence {xni }∞ of {xn }∞ i=1 n=−1 such that i→∞ lim xni = L. the term LN is a limit point of the solution {xn }∞ . −k+2 j→∞ = L−k and −k+1 = L−k+1 . . . n=−1 is called a limiting solution of Eq(1. . .1). (1. xn−1 ). = f( −k+1 . . . L1 = 1. xnj −k ) = lim xnj −k+2 = L−k+2 . Therefore. .5. . L−k and a subsequence {xnj }n=−1 such that j→∞ lim xnj = L j→∞ lim xnj −1 = L−1 . Limiting Solutions such that L0 = L 15 and for every N ≥ −k. L−3 . L−1 . L−k+1 . Karakostas takes k = ∞ and calls the solution {Ln }∞ n=−∞ a full limiting sequence of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = f (xn . i→∞ i→∞ Continuing in this way and by considering further and further subsequences we obtain ∞ numbers L−2 . j→∞ lim xnj −k = L−k . .13) associated with the The solution {Ln }∞ n=−k solution {xn }∞ n=−1 of Eq(1. ∞ Next the subsequence {xni −1 }i=1 of {xn }∞ n=−1 also lies in interval [A. . is stated in the way we will use it in this monograph: .1).13) with Then clearly. (See Theorem 1.. It follows by induction that the sequence L−k . lim xnij = L and lim xnij −1 = L−1 .13) and every term of this sequence is a limit point of the solution {xn }∞ . L−k ) j→∞ = lim f (xnj −k+1 .2 below. −k ) = f (L−k+1 .. which is a consequence of the above discussion.14) associated with the solution {xn }∞ n=−1 of Eq(1. −k Let { n }∞ n=−k be the solution of Eq(1. B] and so it has a ∞ further subsequence {xnij }j=1 which converges to some limit which we call L−1 . L0 = L = 0 .

and let k ≥ 1 be a positive integer.16) are called full limiting solutions of Eq(1. i=0 xn−i k n = 0. 0. . xn−ν ) which satisfy the equation for all n ∈ Z. 1.15). Suppose that {xn }∞ n=−1 is a bounded solution of Eq(1. . Then Eq(1. xn−ν ). f ∈ C[J × J. Then there exist two solutions ∞ {In }∞ n=−∞ and {Sn }n=−∞ of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = f (xn . (1. Let Z denote the set of all integers {.5. f ∈ C[J ν+1 . with I = lim inf xn . . . . 1. IN and SN are limit points of {xn }∞ . .16 Chapter 1. See [23] and [25] for an application of Theorem 1.2 ([37]) Let J be some interval of real numbers. . . 1. and In . . . . . . −1. xn−1 . S ∈ J. S] for all n ∈ Z and such that for every N ∈ Z.13) has two solutions {In }∞ n=−k with the following properties: and {Sn }∞ n=−k I0 = I. J]. S0 = S We now state the complete version of full limiting sequences. n=−ν Furthermore for every m ≤ −ν. Sn ∈ [I. . ∞ The solutions {In }∞ n=−∞ and {Sn }n=−∞ of the diﬀerence equation (1. which by the change of variables xn = y1 reduce to rational diﬀerence equations of the n form 1 . 1. S ∈ J. n = 0. . . xn−1 . In . . S] for n ≥ −k.16) associated with the solution {xn }∞ n=−k of Eq(1. J]. Preliminary Results Theorem 1.}. n→∞ S = lim sup xn n→∞ n = 0. Theorem 1. there exist two subsequences {xrn } and {xln } of the solution {xn }∞ n=−ν such that the following are true: n→∞ (1. as developed by Karakostas. .1 Let J be some interval of real numbers.5. . . and let {xn }∞ n=−ν be a bounded solution of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = f (xn . .15) and with I. with I0 = I.16) lim xrn +N = IN and n→∞ lim xln +N = SN for every N ≥ m. yn+1 = k i=0 Ai yn−i . .5. Sn ∈ [I. . . with I.1) with limit inferior I and limit superior S. S0 = S.2 to diﬀerence equations of the form xn+1 = Ai .

.19) holds every solution of Eq(1. we will assume that β + A = 0.6 The Riccati Equation α + βxn . Eq(1. Then (1. One of our goals in this section is to determine the forbidden set F of Eq(1.17) will become zero for some value of n ≥ 0 is called the forbidden set F of Eq(1.6. A. (See also [13] and [69].17). C and the initial conditions x−1 . Eq(1. The proof is straightforward and will be omitted. in addition to (1.17) where the parameters α.and short-term behavior of / solutions of Eq(1. (1. we will assume that B = 0 and αB − βA = 0. . β.18).18) Indeed when B = 0. which is extracted from [32].17) is a linear equation and when αB − βA = 0.17) with x0 = is periodic with period two. γ. The Riccati Equation 17 1. A + Bxn B The set of initial conditions x0 ∈ R through which the denominator A+Bxn in Eq(1. To avoid degenerate cases.17) regarding period-two solutions.1 Assume that (1. The ﬁrst result in this section addresses a very special case of Eq(1.) The other goal we have is to describe in detail the long. It should be mentioned here that there is practically nothing known about the forbidden set of Eq(1) (when the parameters α.20) . A + Bxn A diﬀerence equation of the form xn+1 = n = 0. x0 are all real numbers) other than the material presented here.17) possesses a prime periodtwo solution. β. 1. A.6. Theorem 1.17).1. (1. In the sequel. B and the initial condition x0 are real numbers is called a Riccati diﬀerence equation.18) holds and that Eq(1.17) reduces to βA + βxn β xn+1 = B = for all n ≥ 0.19) β + A = 0. B.21) β B (1. (1. Furthermore when (1. .17) when x0 ∈ F.

17). Preliminary Results for n ≥ 0 (1.22).17) through the change of variables (1. (A + Bx)2 of the function For the remainder of this section we focus on Eq(1. .23) it follows that when R< 1 4 . It is interesting to note that the four parameters of Eq(1.18 Now observe that the change of variable xn = β+A A wn − B B Chapter 1.22) transforms Eq(1.23) βA − αB (β + A)2 is a nonzero real number. . (1. wn n = 0. 1.23) and present its forbidden set F and the character of its solutions. From Eq(1. w Also note that the signum of R is equal to the signum of the derivative y =1− f (x) = βA − αB .17) have been reduced to the single parameter R of Eq(1.23). If we set y = g(w) = 1 − then we note that the two asymptotes x=− of the function A B and y = β B R w α + βx A + Bx have now been reduced to the two asymptotes y = f (x) = w = 0 and y = 1 R . Similar results can be obtained for Eq(1.17) into the diﬀerence equation wn+1 = 1 − where R= R . . called the Riccati number of Eq(1.

4 1− √ √ 1 − 4R 1 + 1 − 4R < = w+ 2 2 19 When Eq(1. Now observe that the change of variables wn = with y0 = 1 and y1 = w0 reduces Eq(1. The forbidden set of Eq(1. . respectively. 4 Eq(1.23) has exactly one equilibrium point namely. . 1. 1 The next two theorems deal with the cases R < 1 and R = 4 .23) has no equilibrium points. which can be solved explicitly. . Also w− < 0 if R < 0 and 1 w− > 0 if R ∈ (0. ). 4 1 R= . where 4 the characteristic roots of Eq(1. . n = 0.23) is clearly the set of points where the sequence {yn }∞ n=0 vanishes.23) has the two equilibrium points w− and w+ with w− = and |w− | < w+ .1. 2 Finally.6. when 1 R> .24) are real numbers.23) to the second order linear diﬀerence equation yn+2 − yn+1 + Ryn = 0. (1. Note that in these two cases the characteristic roots of Eq(1.24) yn+1 yn for n = 0.24) are the equilibrium points of Eq(1.23). 1. . 1 w= . The Riccati Equation Eq(1. . .

. . .23) is the sequence of points fn = n−1 2n for n = 1.23) is given by / n+1 n+1 (w0 − w− )w+ − (w+ − w0 )w− . Preliminary Results √ √ 1 − 4R 1 + 1 − 4R w− = and w+ = 2 2 are the only equilibrium points of Eq(1.23) is the sequence of points fn = n−1 n−1 w+ − w− w+ w− n n w+ − w− for n = 1. the solution of Eq(1. 2.25) When w0 ∈ F. . .27) .3 Assume Then w= 1 R= . . The forbidden set F of Eq(1. Theorem 1. 2. if R > 0 and fn < w− while (fn − w− )(fn+1 − w− ) < 0 if R < 0. . (1. 4 1− Chapter 1.6. 4 1 2 is the only equilibrium point of Eq(1. The forbidden set F of Eq(1. 2. .23). (1. The equilibrium w+ is a global attractor as long as w0 ∈ F ∪ {w− } / and the equilibrium w− is a repeller. . wn = n n (w0 − w− )w+ − (w+ − w0 )w− n = 1.6.2 Assume Then 1 R< . .6. . .2 that n→∞ lim fn = w− .23).26) It is now clear from Theorem 1.20 Theorem 1. (1.

4 The characteristic roots of Eq(1. the solution of Eq(1. . Hence wn = √ √ 4R − 1 cos(n + 1)φ + (2w0 − 1) sin(n + 1)φ √ . . . The Riccati Equation 21 which converges to the equilibrium from the left. .6. it is a sink from the right and a source from the left.23) is given by / wn = 1 + (2w0 − 1)(n + 1) 2 + 2(2w0 − 1)n for n = 0. 1 R> . 1. 1. .6. (1. 2w0 − 1 C1 = 1 and C2 = √ .23) is a global 2 / attractor for all solutions with w0 ∈ F but is locally unstable. . 4R − 1 n = 0. π φ ∈ (0. . (1. yn = R 2 (C1 cos(nφ) + C2 sin(nφ)). R 4R − 1 cos(nφ) + (2w0 − 1) sin(nφ) .3 it follows that the equilibrium w = 1 of Eq(1. .29) n Finally consider the case √ R.1. ) 2 and √ 4R − 1 √ sin φ = . . When w0 ∈ F. .24) in this case are √ 4R − 1 1 λ± = ± i 2 2 with |λ± | = Let be such that 1 cos φ = √ 2 R Then with C1 = y0 = 1 and It follows that √ R(C1 cos φ + C2 sin φ) = y1 = w0 . 2 R n = 0. more precisely. 1.28) From Theorem 1.

√ 4R − 1 1 cot(nφ) for n = 1. that is.23) is given by (1. 2 R Then the forbidden set F of Eq(1. that is. the solution of Eq(1.23) is the sequence of points √ 1 4R − 1 fn = − cot(nφ) for n = 1. w0 = − 2 2 The following theorem summarizes the above discussion.31) from which the character of the solutions of Eq(1. 2. .23).4 Assume that R> and let φ ∈ (0. π ) be such that 2 2 √ 4R − 1 2x0 − 1 and sin θ = cos θ = r r where r= Then we obtain. . Preliminary Results as long as the denominator is diﬀerent from zero. 2 n = 0. can now be easily 4 revealed. ) N 2 (1. Theorem 1.22 Chapter 1. 2. (1. 1. For example. .30) 1 Clearly when R > 4 the character of the solution {wn } and the forbidden set F depends on whether or not the number φ ∈ (0. φ= π k π ∈ (0. . .6. . π ) be such that 2 1 cos φ = √ 2 R and 1 4 √ 4R − 1 √ sin φ = . 2 2 When w0 ∈ F. when R > 1 . .32) . . / (1. assume φ is a rational multiple of π. and so √ cos(nφ + φ − θ) √ cos(nφ − θ) cos φ − sin(nφ − θ) sin φ R = R cos(nφ − θ) cos(nφ − θ) √ = R (cos φ − sin φ tan(nφ − θ)) 1 wn = − 2 √ 4R − 1 tan(nφ − θ). .29). . π ) is a rational multiple of π. 2 Let θ ∈ (− π . wn = (4R − 1)2 + (2x0 − 1)2 . .

23) is periodic.5 is not a rational multiple of π.1. 2. .23) with w0 ∈ F is dense in R.6 Assume that the number φ in Theorem 1. . . then every solution of Eq(1.} and 2k < N. . When the number φ in Theorem 1. Equivalently assume that A= where k.23) with √ sin(n k π) − 4R − 1 cos(n k π) p p w0 = k 2 sin(n p π) is periodic with period p. N ∈ {1. 2. . then the following result is true: Theorem 1.23) is periodic with period N . N ∈ {1.6.6.6. The Riccati Equation 23 for some k. p Then every solution of Eq(1. The following theorem summarizes the above discussion. .} with 2k < N. ) p 2 1 4 cos2 φ with φ = k π N Then where k and p are positive comprimes and suppose that √ 4R − 1 1 √ cos φ = √ and sin φ = . . . Then the following statements are true: (i) No solution of Eq(1.6. .5 Assume that φ= k π π ∈ (0. p − 1 . . 2. / for n = 1. √ √ 1 1 4R − 1 4R − 1 wN = − tan(kπ − θ) = − tan(−θ) = w0 2 2 2 2 and so every solution of Eq(1.23) is periodic with period N . Theorem 1. 2 R 2 R or equivalently k 4R cos2 ( π) = 1.6. (ii) The set of limit points of a solution of Eq(1.5 is not a rational multiple of π.

In this section. Statement (i) is true because. are dense in the interval (− π .7 Semicycle Analysis We strongly believe that a semicycle analysis of the solutions of a scalar diﬀerence equation is a powerful tool for a detailed understanding of the entire character of solutions and often leads to straightforward proofs of their long term behavior. n = 0. then the values (nφ − θ)(mod π) for n = 0. Preliminary Results tan(kφ − θ) = tan(lφ − θ) if and only if for some integer N kφ − θ − (lφ − θ) = N π if and only if (k − l)φ = N π that is. . π ). 1. A positive semicycle of a solution {xn } of Eq(1. xl+1 . . . .1) consists of a “string” of terms {xl . with l ≥ −1 and m ≤ ∞ and such that either l = −1.33) under appropriate hypotheses on the function f . (1. . we present some results about the semicycle character of solutions of some general diﬀerence equations of the form xn+1 = f (xn . . all greater than or equal to the equilibrium x.24 Proof. 2 2 2 1. The proof of statement (ii) is a consequence of the form of the solution of Eq(1. . . .23) and the fact that when φ is not a rational multiple of π. or l > −1 and xl−1 < x and either m = ∞. . xm }. . or m < ∞ and xm+1 < x. wk = wl if and only if Chapter 1. First we give the deﬁnitions for the positive and negative semicycle of a solution of Eq(1. xn−1 ). 1.33) relative to an equilibrium point x. φ is a rational multiple of π.

The ﬁrst result was established in [28] while we were working on a special case of the equation we are investigating in this monograph. A sequence {xn } is called strictly oscillatory if for every n0 ≥ 0. Then by using the monotonic character of f (x.33). ∞)] is such that: f (x. . Otherwise the sequence is called nonoscillatory. Semicycle Analysis 25 A negative semicycle of a solution {xn } of Eq(1. xm }. (0. x) = x and xN +2 = f (xN +1 . with l ≥ −1 and m ≤ ∞ and such that either l = −1. xN −1 ) < f (x. there exist n1 . y) is increasing in y for each ﬁxed x.1.1 ([28]) Assume that f ∈ C[(0.7. Let {xn } be a solution of Eq(1. Proof. Deﬁnition 1.33) with at least two semicycles. ∞). (See Section 6. Then there exists N ≥ 0 such that either xN −1 < x ≤ xN or xN −1 ≥ x > xN . Let x be a positive equilibrium of Eq(1. We will assume that xN −1 < x ≤ xN . Thus xN +1 < x < xN +2 or m < ∞ and xm+1 ≥ x. and f (x.33) has semicycles of length one. all less than the equilibrium x.7. n2 ≥ n0 such that xn1 xn2 < 0. . ∞) × (0.33) consists of a “string” of terms {xl .1 (Oscillation) (a) A sequence {xn } is said to oscillate about zero or simply to oscillate if the terms xn are neither eventually all positive nor eventually all negative. .) Theorem 1. Then except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle. xN ) > f (x. every solution of Eq(1. y) is decreasing in x for each ﬁxed y. All other cases are similar and will be omitted. The sequence {xn } is called strictly oscillatory about x if the sequence xn − x is strictly oscillatory.5. . (b) A sequence {xn } is said to oscillate about x if the sequence xn − x oscillates. . or l > −1 and xl−1 ≥ x and either m = ∞. x) = x.7. y) we have xN +1 = f (xN . xl+1 .

y) is decreasing in both arguments. 2 . x) = x which completes the proof.7.2 Assume that f ∈ C[(0. Then except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle. Let x be a positive equilibrium of Eq(1. xN −1 ) > f (x. Proof. Let x be a positive equilibrium of Eq(1. Assume that {xn } is an oscillatory solution with two consecutive terms xN −1 and xN in a positive semicycle xN −1 ≥ x and xN ≥ x with at least one of the inequalities being strict. ∞).3 Assume that f ∈ C[(0.33). The proof in the case of negative semicycle is similar and is omitted. Assume that {xn } is an oscillatory solution with two consecutive terms xN −1 and xN in a positive semicycle xN −1 ≥ x and xN ≥ x. with at least one of the inequalities being strict. The next result applies when the function f is increasing in both arguments. Preliminary Results 2 The next result applies when the function f is decreasing in both arguments. 2 The next result applies when the function f (x. (0. Proof. ∞).26 and the proof follows by induction. y) is increasing in x and decreasing in y. ∞) × (0. Chapter 1.33) has semicycles of length one. ∞) × (0.7. which is a contradiction. Then every oscillatory solution of Eq(1. x) = x which shows that the next term xN +1 also belongs to the positive semicycle. Theorem 1. Theorem 1. (0. Then by using the increasing character of f we obtain: xN +1 = f (xN . Then by using the decreasing character of f we obtain: xN +1 = f (xN . xN −1 ) < f (x. ∞)] and that f (x. y) is increasing in both arguments. The proof in the case of negative semicycle is similar and is omitted. It follows by induction that all future terms of this solution belong to this positive semicycle. ∞)] and that f (x. every oscillatory solution of Eq(1.33) has semicycles of length at most two.33).

33). Furthermore. ∞). every oscillatory solution of Eq(1. Now also assume that {xn } is an oscillatory solution with two consecutive terms xN −1 and xN such that xN −1 > xN ≥ x and xN −2 < x. x) = x which shows that the next term xN +1 also belongs to the positive semicycle. y) < x for every x > y > x (1. xN −1 ) < f (xN . ∞) × (0. xN ) = x which shows that the positive semicycle has length two.34) . Assume that {xn } is an oscillatory solution with two consecutive terms xN −1 and xN such that xN −1 < x ≤ xN . The proof in the case xN −1 ≥ x > xN .4 Assume that f ∈ C[(0. Then by using the increasing character of f and Condition (1.35) then {xn } oscillates about the equilibrium x with semicycles of length two or three. ∞)] is such that: f (x. u) = x for every u and f (x. Proof. xN −1 ) > f (x. Then by using the increasing character of f we obtain xN +1 = f (xN . and in the second term if the semicycle has three terms. if we assume that f (u.34) we obtain xN +1 = f (xN .34) we obtain: xN +1 = f (xN . except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle which may have length one. y) is increasing in x for each ﬁxed y. y) is decreasing in y for each ﬁxed x. xN −1 ) > f (xN . and f (x. except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle. xN ) = x (1.7.1. If xN > xN −1 > x then by using the increasing character of f and Condition (1. Then. The extreme in each semicycle occurs in the ﬁrst term if the semicycle has two terms. Semicycle Analysis 27 Theorem 1. is similar and is omitted. (0.7. Let x be a positive equilibrium of Eq(1.33) has semicycles of length at least two.

36).34) is not enough to guarantee the above result. If. Then by the monotonic character of f and (1.36) f (x.33) has monotonic solutions. on the other hand. the corresponding solution is decreasing.34).34). and the proof follows by induction. y) is increasing in x for each ﬁxed y. The proof of the remaining case is similar and will be omitted. y) > x for every x > y > x. ∞). In view of Condition (1. First. and f (x. f satisﬁes Condition (1. Theorem 1. 2 Condition (1. xN −1 ) < xN and the proof is complete.33). then Eq(1. (0.36) is satisﬁed and that x0 > x−1 > x.34) and (1.36) we get x1 = f (x0 . Assume that f satisﬁes Conditions (1. Preliminary Results xN +1 = f (xN .37) . x−1 ) = x. and f (x.5 Assume that f ∈ C[(0. we assume (1. the corresponding solution is increasing. 2 (1. Proof. we obtain x1 = f (x0 . Let x be a positive equilibrium of Eq(1. ∞)] is such that: f (x.35) we ﬁnd Chapter 1. y) is decreasing in y for each ﬁxed x. ∞) × (0. y) < x for every x < y < x then if x0 < x−1 < x. instead of Condition (1. If. assume that Condition (1.35).7. x−1 ) > f (x−1 . Then if x0 > x−1 > x. x−1 ) > x0 .28 and by using Condition (1.

Semicycles. B. Eq(2. In view of the above restriction on the initial conditions of Eq(2.4) α + (β + γ)x A + (B + C)x (2. .2) and where the initial conditions x−1 and x0 are arbitrary nonnegative real numbers such that the right hand side of Eq(2. A + Bxn + Cxn−1 Here we investigate the equilibrium points of the general equation xn+1 = where α. the equilibrium points of Eq(2. (2.5) holds. (2. C ∈ [0.1) has a positive equilibrium if and only if β + γ > A. in addition to the zero equilibrium . Periodicity. B + C ∈ (0. . β.1) are the nonnegative solutions of the equation x= or equivalently (B + C)x2 − (β + γ − A)x − α = 0.1).3) n = 0. Zero is an equilibrium point of Eq(2. ∞) with α + β + γ. 29 . 1.Chapter 2 Local Stability.1 Equilibrium Points α + βxn + γxn−1 .5) (2. γ.1) if and only if α = 0 and A > 0. .1) is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0.1) When (2. ∞) (2. A. and Invariant Intervals 2.

) In summary. [18]. v) = A + Bu + Cv and observe that (βA − αB) + (βC − γB)v fu (u. A + Bxn there is very little known.8). and [69] for some results in this regard. . Local Stability.2 Stability of the Zero Equilibrium Here we investigate the stability of the zero equilibrium of Eq(2. and Invariant Intervals In fact in this case the positive equilibrium of Eq(2. 1. B+C (2. (See [13].7) β+γ−A .8) of the quadratic equation (2. The problem of investigating Eq(2. 2.1) is the positive solution x= β+γ−A+ (β + γ − A)2 + 4α(B + C) 2(B + C) (2. If we had allowed negative initial conditions then the negative solution of Eq(2. Periodicity.6) Note that in view of Condition (2. Finally when α>0 the only equilibrium point of Eq(2.1) when the initial conditions and the coeﬃcients of the equation are real numbers is of great mathematical importance and.9) . when α = 0. B+C (2. Semicycles. then x is unique. . . it is interesting to observe that when Eq(2.6 about the Riccati equation α + βxn xn+1 = . n = 0. Set α + βu + γv f (u.1) is unique and is given by x= When α = 0 and A = 0 the only equilibrium point of Eq(2.2). This observation simpliﬁes the investigation of the local stability of the positive equilibrium of Eq(2.3) and (2.4). and it is given by (2. . [32].4).1). it satisﬁes Eqs(2. the quantity β + γ is positive.4) would also be an equilibrium worth investigating.1) is positive and is given by x= β+γ . except for our presentation in Section 1. v) = (A + Bu + Cv)2 (2.1).30 Chapter 2.1) has a positive equilibrium x.

.1. For the zero equilibrium of Eq(2. .1) we have p= β A and q = γ A and so the linearized equation associated with Eq(2. in addition to the local stability Theorem 1. . n = 0. The local stability character of x is now described by the linearized stability Theorem 1.2.1. A A For the stability of the zero equilibrium of Eq(2. .1).2. A + Bxn + Cxn−1 n = 0. .2.1) about the zero equilibrium point is β γ zn+1 − zn − zn−1 = 0. 1. x).10) If x denotes an equilibrium point of Eq(2. As a consequence of these two theorems we obtain the following global result: Theorem 2. Furthermore the zero equilibrium point is a sink when a saddle point when a repeller when A>β+γ A < β + γ < A + 2β β + γ > A + 2β. (A + Bu + Cv)2 31 (2.1. v) = (γA − αC) − (βC − γB)u . we have the luxury of the global stability Theorem 1. then the linearized equation associated with Eq(2. Then the zero equilibrium point of the equation xn+1 = βxn + γxn−1 .1 Assume that A > 0. . 1.1.3. is globally asymptotically stable when β+γ ≤A and is unstable when β + γ > A. . .1) about the equilibrium point x is zn+1 − pzn − qzn−1 = 0 where p = fu (x. Stability of the Zero Equilibrium and fv (u. x) and q = fv (x.1).1.

it satisﬁes Eqs(2. Eq(2.13) (2.4). and it is given by (2.11) and q > −1.1. By using the identity (B + C)x2 = (β + γ − A)x + α.32 Chapter 2.14) (2. are equivalent to some inequalities of the form x>ρ .1) the following: |p| < 1 − q (2.11) and (2.1) has a positive equilibrium when either or α > 0.15) A2 + (γA − αC) βC − γB x > −α − .3 Local Stability of the Positive Equilibrium α = 0 and β + γ > A As we mentioned in Section 2. and Invariant Intervals 2.13)-(2. A+β+γ− B+C B+C Out of these inequalities we will obtain explicit stability conditions by using the following procedure: First we observe that Inequalities (2. x) = and q = fv (x. In these cases the positive equilibrium x is unique. x) = (γA − αC) − (βC − γB)x (γA − αC) − (βC − γB)x = 2 . Semicycles.1.3) and (2. Inequalities (2.12) (A + β + γ)x > −α − (2.8). Local Stability.15). 2 (A + (B + C)x) A + α(B + C) + (B + C)(A + β + γ)x (βA − αB) + (βC − γB)x (βA − αB) + (βC − γB)x = 2 2 (A + (B + C)x) A + α(B + C) + (B + C)(A + β + γ)x Hence the conditions for the local asymptotic stability of x are (see Theorem 1. Periodicity.12) are equivalent to the following three inequalities: A+β+γ+2 βC − γB A2 + (βA − αB) − (γA − αC) x > −α − B+C B+C A2 − (βA − αB) − (γA − αC) B+C (2. we see that p = fu (x.

(ii) Assume C = 0.1) with the property that every solution of the equation is periodic with the same period. 1. 33 2. .2. 4. n = 0. . The following four special examples of Eq(2. . . Then A = B = γ = 0. (See also [75].) Theorem 2.4 When is Every Solution Periodic with the Same Period? 1 .1 Let p ≥ 2 be a positive integer and assume that every positive solution of Eq(2. ∞).4.19) 1 + xn . = xn−1 are remarkable in the sense that all positive solutions of each of these four nontrivial equations are periodic with periods 2. .17) (2. σ ∈ [0. The following result characterizes all possible special cases of equations of the form of Eq(2. and 6 respectively.4. n = 0. 5. it is clear that F (x) = 0 and that x > ρ if and only if F (ρ) < 0 while x<σ if and only if F (σ) > 0. xn 1 xn−1 .18) (2. When is Every Solution Periodic with the Same Period? and/or x<σ for some ρ. Now if we set F (u) = (B + C)u2 − (β + γ − A)u − α. . [73]. n = 0. . . . Then γ(α + β) = 0.1) is periodic with period p.1) xn+1 = xn+1 = xn+1 = xn+1 n = 0. Then the following statements are true: (i) Assume C > 0.16) (2. 1. . (2. and [74]. 1. . . . 1. xn−1 xn .

20) α + β + γxp−2 = x0 . Periodicity. Local Stability.4. The proof is complete. for the sake of contradiction.21) we now claim that also γ = 0.1) is periodic with period p.22) holds . 3.1) reduces to one of the equations (2. 2 Corollary 2. In addition to (2.22) Otherwise γ > 0 and by choosing x0 < min α+β γ . Assume that every positive solution of Eq(2. Then by choosing x0 suﬃciently small. and Invariant Intervals Proof. Thus (2.16)-(2. (i) Assume that C > 0. Consider the solution with x−1 = 1 and x0 ∈ (0. (ii) Assume C = 0 and. Then up to a change of variables of the form xn = λyn Eq(2.1) xp = Hence (A + B)x0 + (Cx0 − γ)xp−2 = α + β. 5. A + B + Cxp−2 and xp−1 = x−1 = 1 we see that (2. A+B C we see that (2. 6}. . A+B C (2. Then clearly x0 = xp and so from Eq(2.20) is impossible.19) . Semicycles. assume that γ(α + β) > 0.34 Chapter 2.21) holds. we see that (2. ∞). 4. Then we claim that A = B = 0. Hence (2.20) is impossible. (2. Otherwise A + B > 0 and by choosing x0 > max α+β γ .20) is impossible.21) (2.1 Let p ∈ {2.

1). φ.1) converges to a period-two solution in a nontrivial way according to the following convention. φ. Assume that . Then φ= and ψ= from which we ﬁnd that C(φ + ψ) = γ − β − A and when C>0 we also ﬁnd that (B − C)φψ = One can show that when C = 0 and B > 0 Eq(2. .1) if and only if α + β(φ + ψ) = Bφψ with φ.1) to have a prime period-two solution and we exhibit all prime period-two solutions of the equation. ψ.) Furthermore we are interested in conditions under which every solution of Eq(2.5 Existence of Prime Period-Two Solutions In this section we give necessary and suﬃcient conditions for Eq(2. .5. C (2. . . ∞) and φ = ψ (2. ψ. ψ ∈ [0.23) α + βψ + γφ A + Bψ + Cφ α + βφ + γψ A + Bφ + Cψ . ψ.24) (2. is a prime period-two solution of Eq(2.27) (2. . not necessarily prime. . . Furthermore when (2.27) hold .25) (2. . φ. is a prime period-two solution of Eq(2. .2.1) has a prime period-two solution if and only if γ = β + A. Convention Throughout this book when we say that “every solution of a certain diﬀerence equation converges to a periodic solution with period p” we mean that every solution converges to a. solution with period p and furthermore the set of solutions of the equation with prime period p is nonempty. ψ.26) αC + β(γ − β − A) . .26) and (2. Existence of Prime Period-Two Solutions 35 2. (See [50]. . . φ.

That is. (γ − β − A)[B(γ − β − A) − C(γ + 3β − A)] α< .1) possesses a prime period-two solution . γ−A γ−A − φ.23) and (2. . Then it follows from (2. . be a two cycle of the diﬀerence equation (2.28) Next assume that (2. . .25) that one of the following three conditions must be satisﬁed: B = C. ψ. B > C. − φ. φ. Periodicity.29) (2. . φ. 0. .29) holds.. and φψ ≥ 0. B = C. . the values φ and ψ of the two cycle are given by the two roots of the quadratic equation t2 − γ−β−A αC + β(γ − β − A) t+ =0 C C(B − C) and we should also require that the discriminant of this quadratic equation be positive. . ψ. When (2. . α = β = 0. C γ−A γ−A . ψ. α = β = 0. . the two cycle is . B and ψ = α + βφ . B φ= β+ √ β 2 + αB . C C with 0 ≤ φ < γ−A . φ.1). . .31) γ > β + A and When (2. .30) (2.32) 4C 2 2.30) holds. α + β > 0. .24) holds and that Eq(2.31) holds. . C C Finally when (2. . (2. Set un = xn−1 and vn = xn for n = 0. Semicycles. and φψ = 0. −β + Bφ (2. (2. the two cycle is . Local Stability.6 Let Local Asymptotic Stability of a Two Cycle . . . . .. . .. φ. . . φ. φ. . and Invariant Intervals or equivalently β φ> . ψ. 1. 0. . . . and φψ > 0.36 Chapter 2.

∂v (A + Bψ + Cφ)2 [(βA − αB) − (γB − βC)ψ][(γA − αC) + (γB − βC)ψ] ∂h (φ. ∂u (A + Bφ + Cψ)2 (A + Bψ + Cφ)2 . . φ ψ is a ﬁxed point of T 2 . ψ) ∂v (φ. ψ) ∂u we ﬁnd the following identities: (γA − αC) + (γB − βC)ψ ∂g (φ. . v) α+βv+γu α + β A+Bv+Cu + γv α+βv+γu A + B A+Bv+Cu + Cv .1) in the equivalent form: un+1 = vn α+βv vn+1 = A+Bvn +γun . . ψ) = . ∂u (A + Bψ + Cφ)2 ∂g (βA − αB) − (γB − βC)φ (φ. ψ ∂h ∂h (φ. JT 2 . evaluated at ψ By deﬁnition ∂g ∂g (φ. v) = u v = g(u. ψ) = . 1. n +Cun Let T be the function on [0. Local Asymptotic Stability of a Two Cycle and write Eq(2. the second iterate of T .6. ∞) deﬁned by: T Then u v = v βv+γu+α Bv+Cu+A 37 . v) = α + βv + γu A + Bv + Cu and h(u. . ψ) ∂v (φ. v) h(u. ψ) ∂u φ = JT 2 . ∞) × [0. By computing the partial derivatives of g and h and by using the fact that φ= α + βψ + γφ A + Bψ + Cφ and ψ = α + βφ + γψ A + Bφ + Cψ The two cycle is locally asymptotically stable if the eigenvalues of the Jacobian matrix φ lie inside the unit disk. Furthermore T2 where g(u. ψ) = .2. n = 0.

ψ) (φ. every solution converges to a (not necessarily prime) period-two solution and n = 0.6. ψ) (φ. ∞) with α + β + γ. ψ). . x0 ) through which the solution of Eq(2.7 Convergence to Period-Two Solutions When C=0 α + βxn + γxn−1 . ∂u ∂v ∂v ∂u φ ψ lie inside the Then it follows from Theorem 1. B ∈ [0. A. 1. if and only if |S| < 1 + D and D < 1. + (A + Bφ + Cψ)2 Set S= and D= ∂h ∂g (φ. ψ) ∂u ∂v ∂h ∂g ∂h ∂g (φ. Deﬁnition 2. . and Invariant Intervals [(βA − αB) − (γB − βC)ψ][(βA − αB) − (γB − βC)φ] ∂h (φ. . A + B ∈ (0. .6.33) .33) converges to a period-two solution. A and B so that every solution of Eq(2. The basin of attraction of this two cycle is the set B of all initial conditions (x−1 .7. (2. ψ) = ∂v (A + Bφ + Cψ)2 (A + Bψ + Cφ)2 (γA − αC) + (γB − βC)φ .5.1) converges to the two cycle. and 10.1 (c) that both eigenvalues of JT 2 unit disk |λ| < 1. . φ. . Semicycles.9. φ. be a two cycle of Eq(2.2) to obtain conditions on α. . . ψ. ∞) and nonnegative initial conditions and obtain a signum invariant for its solutions which will be used in the sequel (See Sections 4.1 (Basin of Attraction of a Two Cycle) Let . γ.1. Local Stability.4 for some applications. ψ. 6. 6.7. 6. β.1). That is. . 2. ψ) − (φ. See Sections 6. ψ) + (φ. A + Bxn In this section we consider the equation xn+1 = where α. Periodicity.38 Chapter 2. β. and 7. γ.

In particular. (β + A)J0 = 0.33). Statement (ii) holds if and only if J0 < 0 and β +A > 0. Convergence to Period-Two Solutions When C=0 39 there exist prime period-two solutions. if and only if J0 > 0 and β + A > 0. In this case. ∞ Lemma 2.2 where we present the complete character of solutions of Eq(2. the solution would converge to a period-two solution. the sign of the quantity Jn is constant along each solution. and let {xn }n=−1 be a solution of Eq(2. In this case the subsequences ∞ {x2n }∞ and {x2n−1 }∞ of the solution {xn }n=0 are both increasing and so if we can n=0 n=0 show that they are bounded.2. one and only one of the following three statements is true for each solution of Eq(2. Finally (iii) holds. (See also Section 10. we need the following result. In this case the subsequences {x2n }∞ and {x2n−1 }∞ of the solution {xn }∞ are both decreasing to ﬁnite limits and n=0 n=0 n=0 so in this case the solution converges to a period-two solution.33). Clearly (i) holds. A + Bxn In particular.) Now before we see that when B > 0 every solution of Eq(2. Now observe that xn+1 − xn−1 = β+A (xn − xn−2 ) for n ≥ 1 A + Bxn . Then the following statements are true: (a) β+A Jn for n ≥ 0. if and only if.34) Jn = α + β(xn−1 + xn ) − Bxn−1 xn for n ≥ 0. Jn+1 = (b) xn+1 − xn−1 = Jn A + Bxn for n ≥ 0. the proof of which follows by straightforward computations.33) converges to a periodtwo solution if and only if (2. (iii) xn+1 − xn−1 > 0 for all n ≥ 0.27) holds.7. Set (2.1 Assume that (2.7. (ii) xn+1 − xn−1 < 0 for all n ≥ 0.33): (i) xn+1 − xn−1 = 0 for all n ≥ 0.27) holds. the solution {xn } is periodic with period-two.

. .27) holds every solution of Eq(2. of Eq(2. To this end assume. . Then the following statements hold: (a) Eq(2. .40 and so Chapter 2. ψ. The proof for the subsequence of odd terms is similar and will be omitted. . Periodicity. .27) holds all prime period-two solutions . .27) holds. and Invariant Intervals n xn+1 − xn−1 = (x1 − x−1 ) β+A . (c) When (2. A + Bx2n+1 A + Bx2n A + Bx2N +1 A + Bx2N Set Then K = |x2N − x2N −2 |. Local Stability. Theorem 2. 2.35) to show that the subsequences of even and odd terms of the solution are bounded. φ.35) We will now employ (2. ψ. φ. A + Bxk k=1 (2.28). .1 Assume B > 0. . Semicycles. . Kρ + x2N 1−ρ . + |x2N +2 − x2N | + x2N m for m = 1. A + Bx2N +1 A + Bx2N A+β A+β |x2N − x2N −2 | < Kρ A + Bx2N +1 A + Bx2N A+β A+β |x2N +2 − x2N | < Kρ2 |x2N +4 − x2N +2 | = A + Bx2N +3 A + Bx2N +2 and by induction |x2N +2m − x2N +2(m−1) | < Kρm But then x2N +2m ≤ |x2N +2m − x2N +2m−2 | + . . Then there exists N ≥ 0 such that ρ= Clearly for all n > N . (b) When (2. . We will give the details for the subsequence of even terms. In summary we have established the following result. that the subsequence of even terms increases to ∞. |x2N +2 − x2N | = A+β A+β < 1.7. A+β A+β A+β A+β < = ρ. for the sake of contradiction.33) converges to a period-two solution.33) are given by (2.33) has a prime period-two solution if and only if (2. ≤K ρi + x2N < i=1 which contradicts the hypothesis that the subsequence of even terms is unbounded.

(A + Bx + Cy)2 − + − − − − − − Using this table.1) is an interval I with the property that if two consecutive terms of the solution fall in I then all the subsequent terms of the solution also belong to I. xn−1 ). we obtain the following table of invariant intervals for Eq(2.8. fx < 0 if y < − M fy < 0 fx < 0 and fy = 0 fx < 0 and fy < 0 fx < 0 and fy > 0 fx < 0 and fy > 0 fx < 0 N N fy > 0 if x > M . y) is monotonic in its arguments. xN ∈ I for some N ≥ 0. n = 0. y) = where L = βA − αB.36) are determined from the intervals where the function f (x. . Case L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 + + + + + + 0 0 0 0 M + + + 0 0 − + + − − 0 0 − − N + 0 − + 0 + 0 − + 0 − 0 − + 0 − M = βC − γB. Signs of derivatives fx and fy fx > 0 N N fy > 0 if x < M . y) = N − Mx .2. 1.36) if xN −1 . Invariant Intervals 41 2. . In other words I is an invariant interval for the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = f (xn .1) the partial derivatives are given by (2. (2. For Eq(2. fy < 0 if x > M fx > 0 and fy < 0 fx > 0 and fy < 0 fx > 0 and fy > 0 fx > 0 and fy = 0 L L fx > 0 if y < − M . fx < 0 if y > − M fy > 0 fx > 0 and fy < 0 fx > 0 and fy < 0 fx < 0 and fy > 0 fx < 0 and fy > 0 L L fx > 0 if y > − M . fy < 0 if x < M L + My (A + Bx + Cy)2 and fy (x. then xn ∈ I for every n > N .1). Invariant intervals for Eq(2. .9) and (2.10) and are fx (x. The following table gives the signs of fx and fy in all possible nondegenerate cases. and N = γA − αC. .8 Invariant Intervals An invariant interval for Eq(2.

] if AM +(B+C)N > 2BM αM +γN N [ M . A−β ] if B = 0. ] if B > 0 2B α [0. ] if B > 0 2B α [0. C ] if C > 0 β β2 [ B . K] if C = 0 where k and K satisfy α + βk + (γ − A)K ≤ BkK ≤ α + βK − Ak β γ [ B . A−β ] if B = 0 and A > β L [0. α > 0 and A > β √ β−A+ (β−A)2 +4Bα [0. αC+γ ] if B = 0 and γ > βC γ−βC γ [0. K] if C = 0 where k and K satisfy α + βk + (γ − A)K ≤ BkK ≤ α + βK − Ak γ [0. B ] if B > 0 γ γ2 [ C . ] if AM −BL+CMK > − M 2BM K α [ α(A+β) . Semicycles. ] if B + C > 0 √ 2(B+C) 2 +4αB α β−A+ (β−A) [A. α > 0 and A > β √ β+γ−A+ (β+γ−A)2 +4α(B+C) [0. M ] if AM +(B+C)N < M √ 2 αM +(β+γ)N N (β−A)M −CN + ((β−A)M −N C) +4BM (αM +γN ) [M . and Invariant Intervals Case 1 2 3 4 5 Invariant intervals αM +(β+γ)N N N [0. A ] if A > 0 [k. B + α ] if A = 0 and β > 0 β α [0. C ] if C > 0 β αB+β 2 [ B . ] if B > 0 2B α α [ A . C ] if C > 0 [k. − M ] if AM −L(B+C) < − M √ 2 αM −βL+γM L (β−A)M +LC+ ((β−A)M +LC) +4BM (αM −γL) L [− M . Periodicity. M ] if AM +(B+C)N < M √ 2 N (γ−A)M −BN + ((γ−A)M −BN ) +4BM (αM +βN ) [M . − M ] if L [− M . A−β ] if B = 0. K] if A = 0 where k and K satisfy α+(β+γ)k ≤ kK ≤ α+(β+γ)K B+C B+C γ [0. B(β−γ) ] if C = 0 and β > γ αM −L(β+γ) αM −L(β+γ) L L [ AM −L(B+C) . Local Stability. C ] if C > 0 [k. ] if 2CM αM +βK+γN M AM +BK+CN M > N M . αM −(β+γ)L L AM −(B+C)L < − M √ (A−γ)M −BL+ ((A−γ)M −BL)2 +4CM (αM −βL) ] −2CM βL−αM (γ−A)M +BL ] if C = 0. B(β−γ) ] if A = 0 and β > γ αM +(β+γ)N N αM +(β+γ)N N [ AM +(B+C)N . (γ − A)M + BL > 0 N M and B > 0 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 γ β [ C . A ] if A > 0 A2 +Bα β β [ B . C(γ−β) ] if B = 0 and β < γ βM K+αM L if C = 0 and BM K+AM −γL > − M −CL and −(βM + BL)K ≥ αM + AL β [0.42 Chapter 2. L [− M . B ] if B = 0 2 γ [ C . (A−β)M +CN ] if B = 0 and (A − β)M + CN > 0 √ β−A+ (β−A)2 +4Bα [0.

6.7) that every positive solution of each of the following three equations xn+1 = 1 + xn+1 = xn+1 xn−1 . In particular address the case p = 2. xn n = 0. = 1 + xn . 4. .9 Open Problems and Conjectures What is it that makes all solutions of a nonlinear diﬀerence equation periodic with the same period? For a linear equation.2 Let f ∈ C 1 [[0. ∞)] and let p ≥ 2 be an integer.9. Is it true that the linearized equation about a positive equilibrium point of Eq(2. ∞)] is such that every positive solution of the equation xn+1 = f (xn . ∞) converges to a solution with period p . .4 It is known (see Sections 2. xn−1 ).3 Let p ≥ 2 be an integer and assume that every positive solution of Eq(2.1) with α.7.9.9. every solution is periodic with period p ≥ 2. . C ∈ [0. . Open Problem 2. . Find necessary and suﬃcient conditions so that every nonnegative solution of the diﬀerence equation (2. B.40) 1 + xn−1 . 4. n = 0. n = 0. Open Problems and Conjectures 43 2. 1. 1 + xn xn + 2xn−1 . A. .37) converges to a periodic solution with period p. 1.39) (2. . 5.1 Assume that f ∈ C 1 [(0.37) is periodic with period p ≥ 2. (2.7. and 6. Is it true that p ∈ {2. ∞) × (0.38) (2. (2. ∞). 6}? Open Problem 2. .2.5. n = 0. ∞).37) has the property that every one of its solutions is also periodic with the same period p? What is it that makes every positive solution of a diﬀerence equation converge to a periodic solution with period p ≥ 2 ? Open Problem 2. γ. . (0. . ∞) × [0. β. Open Problem 2. [0.9. if and only if every root of the characteristic equation is a pth root of unity. . . 1. 1.9.

.41) is a period-two solution of Eq(2. A.7. β. Show that the positive equilibrium of Eq(2. C ∈ (0. .1 Assume α. . β.41) In each case. B. (See Sections 2. . 4. .40). Periodicity. Open Problem 2. Semicycles. ∞) for which the solution {xn }∞ n=−1 converges to the period-two solution (2. Conjecture 2.41). 6. if (2.33) is bounded.7.44 Chapter 2. ψ. ∞) and that Eq(2.1) has no period-two solution. (2.1) is bounded.) Conjecture 2. C ∈ (0. β. ∞) and that Eq(2.1) has a positive prime period-two solution.9.38) or Eq(2. A. determine all initial conditions (x−1 . and 10. ∞).9. A.7. 6. Local Stability.3 Assume α.2 Assume α. γ. Conjecture 2. Show that the positive equilibrium is globally asymptotically stable. B. φ. γ. φ. γ. Determine the set of initial conditions x−1 and x0 for which the solution {xn }∞ n=−1 of Eq(2. Conversely.9. ∞) and γ > β + A. ψ. A. . .5 Assume α. Show that every positive solution of Eq(2. ∞) × (0. γ.1) is a saddle point. C ∈ (0. and Invariant Intervals converges to a solution with (not necessarily prime) period-two: . B.9. x0 ) ∈ (0. β. . determine φ and ψ in terms of the initial conditions x−1 and x0 .39) or Eq(2.5. B ∈ (0.2.

C ∈ [0. with nonnegative parameters and nonnegative initial conditions such that γ = β + δ + A. (0.8 Assume f ∈ C[(0. Open Problems and Conjectures Open Problem 2. .9.2. (0.9 Extend Theorem 2.9. ∞). What additional conditions should the parameters satisfy? .9.7 Assume f ∈ C[(0. A. . . γ.1) cannot have a positive prime two cycle which attracts all positive non-equilibrium solutions. γ. A + Bxn−1 + Dxn−2 n = 0. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on f for every positive solution of the equation xn+1 = 1 + to converge to a period-two solution. .1 to third order diﬀerence equations xn+1 = α + βxn + γxn−1 + δxn−2 . B. Open Problem 2. ∞). (See Section 4. ∞)]. B. 1.6 Assume α. 1. β. . ∞). . f (xn−1 ) . . xn n = 0. β. 45 Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions in terms of the coeﬃcients so that every positive solution of Eq(2. Conjecture 2. . Open Problem 2. C ∈ [0. Show that Eq(2. (See Section 5. .9.9. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on f for every solution of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = to be bounded. ∞). A. ∞)].4 Assume that α.9.1) is bounded. f (xn ) .2). Open Problem 2.7). xn−1 n = 0. 1.7.

. n = 0.1 to third order difference equations xn+1 = f (xn . Local Stability.42) to be a repeller. Semicycles. or a saddle point.9. or nonhyperbolic? Extend these results to fourth order diﬀerence equation xn+1 = f (xn . . xn−2 . . . . . n = 0. (2. and Invariant Intervals Open Problem 2. xn−2 ). xn−1 .42) For the equation λ3 + aλ2 + bλ + c = 0 one can see that all roots lie inside the unit disk |λ| < 1 if and only if |a + c| < 1 + b |a − 3c| < 3 − b b + c2 < 1 + ac .1. 1. 1. But how about necessary and suﬃcient conditions for the equilibrium of Eq(2.10 Extend the linearized stability Theorem 1. . . . xn−1 . Periodicity. xn−3 ).46 Chapter 2.

. . 1)-type: xn+1 = n = 0. (3. 1. 1. 1. (3. Bxn n = 0. . . 1. . . . B n = 0. 1)-Type Equations 3.1) xn+1 = α . Cxn−1 47 n = 0. (3. . .6) .4) xn+1 = β . . .2) xn+1 = α . (3. . .Chapter 3 (1.3) xn+1 = βxn . . 1. 1. Cxn−1 n = 0. A n = 0.5) xn+1 = βxn . . (3.1 Introduction α . . A Eq(1) contains the following nine equations of the (1. (3. . .

(3. are treated in the next two sections.6) and (3.8). .9) are trivial.7) xn+1 = and γxn−1 . yn−1 n = 0. . . (3. . y0 1 1 y−1 . Eqs(3. . (3. y−1 y−1 y0 y0 It is interesting to note that except for the equilibrium solution y = 1. 3. .6) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the equation yn+1 = yn . Of these nine equations. The remaining two equations. namely. . . and (3. . A n = 0. . 1. 1. (3. every other solution of Eq(3.48 Chapter 3. . Eqs (3. Indeed the solution with initial conditions y−1 and y0 is the six-cycle: y−1 .10) It is easy to see that every positive solution of Eq(3.5).. Eqs(3.1).2 The Case α = γ = A = B = 0 : xn+1 = β yn C βxn Cxn−1 This is the (1. y0 . Every solution of Eq(3. . .. 1)-type Eq(3.9) Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all parameters that appear in these equations are positive.10) is periodic with period six. 1. Bxn n = 0. . the initial conditions are nonnegative.7) are linear diﬀerence equation. C n = 0. and the denominators are always positive. .. (3.2) is periodic with period two and every solution of Eq(3. .10) has prime period six. 1. . .4) and (3.8) xn+1 = γ . (1. .4) is periodic with period four. 1)-Type Equations xn+1 = γxn−1 .

Eq(3.6) is of the form xn+1 = f (xn .7) is periodic with period two but this is a linear equation. (3. 1. 1)-type Eq(3. Also every solution of Eq(3. .3. . (3. Eq(3.13) n = 0. . . xn−1 ). 3. (0. where f ∈ C[(0. ∞) × (0.8) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the linear equation yn+1 + yn − yn−1 = 0. The general solution of Eq(3. (0.2).6). (3.3 The Case α = β = A = C = 0 : xn+1 = γ yn e B This is the (1.2) and (3. . from which the behavior of solutions is easily derived. ∞)]. (3. 1. n = 0. 1. . which possess the property that every positive nontrivial solution of each of these two equations is periodic with the same prime period. ∞). . ∞)]. . respectively.14) (3.3.12) .11) is yn = C1 −1 + 2 √ 5 n n = 0. ∞). . (3.4 Open Problems and Conjectures Of the nine equations in this chapter we would like to single out the two nonlinear equations. while Eq(3. where f ∈ C[(0. n = 0. . . namely two and six.2) is of the form xn+1 = f (xn ).3) also has the property that every nontrivial positive solution is periodic with prime period four but this equation is really a variant of Eq(3.15) What is it that makes every solution of a nonlinear diﬀerence equation periodic with the same period? We believe this is a question of paramount importance and so we pose the following open problems. . .11) + C2 −1 − 2 √ 5 n . 1. The Case α = β = A = C = 0 : xn+1 = γxn−1 Bxn 49 γxn−1 Bxn 3.

7.4. [0. 8. Open Problem 3. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on f so that every positive solution of Eq(3. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on α. [0. xn−1 n = 0.15) holds. γ so that every solution of the equation xn+1 = α |xn | + βxn−1 + γ. 6. (1.16) is periodic with prime period six. ∞). (3.4. β.3 Let k be a positive integer and assume that α. ∞). ∞)] be such that every positive nontrivial solution of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = f (xn ) . . ∞)] be such that every positive nontrivial solution of the diﬀerence equation (3. . n = 0. and [59]. ∞). 6. . [17].1 Let k ≥ 2 be a positive integer and assume that (3. Show that f (x) = 1 + x.4.13) holds.50 Chapter 3.16) is periodic with prime period ﬁve. In particular address the cases: (See [10].4. 1)-Type Equations Open Problem 3. .) Conjecture 3. 9. Open Problem 3.2 Let f ∈ C 1 [[0. . Show that f (x) = x.1 Let f ∈ C 1 [[0.2 Let k ≥ 2 be a positive integer and assume that (3. 1. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on f so that every positive solution of Eq(3. with real initial conditions is periodic with period k.12) is periodic with period k.4. k = 5. γ ∈ (−∞. .14) is periodic with period k. In particular address the cases k = 4. Conjecture 3. 5. . β. 1.

[0. xn−1 n = 0. Open Problems and Conjectures 51 Open Problem 3. ∞)] such that every positive nontrivial solution of the equation xn+1 = is periodic with prime period three. (3.4. (ii) {pn }∞ converges to ±∞. n = 0. . ∞).5 Let {pn }∞ be a sequence of nonzero real numbers.18) xn−1 ∞ (i) {pn }n=0 converges to a ﬁnite limit. 1. f (xn ) . . n=0 . . .3. .4.4 Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on f ∈ C[[0. n=0 (iii) {pn }∞ is periodic with prime period k ≥ 2. . In each of n=0 the following cases investigate the asymptotic behavior of all positive solutions of the diﬀerence equation pn x n xn+1 = . . (3. 1.17) Open Problem 3.4.

.

A + Cxn−1 n = 0. 1. A + Cxn−1 n = 0. 1. .Chapter 4 (1. (4. 1. .3) xn+1 = βxn . . 1.4) xn+1 = βxn . . . . (4. (4.2) xn+1 = α . . . (4. . . . . A + Bxn n = 0. .1 Introduction α . (4. . . .1) xn+1 = α . A + Bxn Eq(1) contains the following nine equations of the (1. Bxn + Cxn−1 53 n = 0. 2)-Type Equations 4.6) . (4.5) xn+1 = βxn . . 1. 2)-type: xn+1 = n = 0. 1. . Bxn + Cxn−1 n = 0.

from which the global behavior of solutions is easily derived.8) γxn−1 . . 4. Also Eqs(4. and the denominators are always positive. 1. A + Bxn n = 0. . β β n = 0. (4. A + Cxn−1 n = 0.2). the initial conditions are nonnegative. 1. Similarly. . . . . (1. . (4. Two of these equations.1).6 in the Preliminary Results). (See Section 1. namely Eqs(4.8). . . .2).4) to the linear equation yn+1 = A B yn + . In view of the above.4) are Riccati-type diﬀerence equations.8) are essentially Riccati equations. yn+1 = A + Cyn It is also interesting to note that the change of variables xn = 1 yn reduces the Riccati equation (4. (4. .54 Chapter 4. 1. if {xn } is a solution of Eq(4. Bxn + Cxn−1 n = 0. 2)-Type Equations xn+1 = γxn−1 .1) and (4.2 The Case β = γ = C = 0 : xn+1 = A yn B α A+Bxn This is the (1.9) Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all parameters that appear in these equations are positive. Indeed if {xn } is a solution of Eq(4. Eqs(4. 2)-type Eq(4. then the subsequences {x2n−1 } and {x2n } satisfy the Riccati equation γyn n = 0. . (4. 1. .8) will not be discussed any further in this chapter.1) which by the change of variables xn = . then the subsequences {x2n−1 } and {x2n } satisfy the Riccati equation of the form of Eq(4. .4). . and (4. 1. .2) and (4. .7) xn+1 = and xn+1 = γxn−1 .

.2. lim sup yn = ∞ and n→∞ lim inf yn = 0. 4. It is easy to see that if a solution of Eq(4. 2)-type Eq(4.12) Eq(4.12) converges to √ its equilibrium B + C. That is. (4.11) (4. . The Case β = γ = A = 0 : xn+1 = reduces to the Riccati equation yn+1 = where α Bxn +Cxn−1 55 p .1 Every solution of Eq(4.3. . Theorem 4. . n→∞ . Theorem 4. 1.10) is globally asymptotically stable. Proof. So if the theorem is false there should exist a ∞ solution {yn }n=−1 which is neither bounded from above nor from below.3 The Case β = γ = A = 0 : xn+1 = α Bxn +Cxn−1 This is the (1.1 The positive equilibrium y= −1 + √ 2 1 + 4p of Eq(4.2. A2 The Riccati number associated with this equation (see Section 1.3) which by the change of variables √ α xn = yn is transformed to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = C B + .6.12) is bounded from above then it is also bounded from below and vice-versa. .6) is R = −p < 0 and so the following result is a consequence of Theorem 1. (4.4. .3.) We will ﬁrst show that every solution of Eq(4. . 1. (See also [12].12) is bounded and then we will use the method of “limiting solutions” to show that every solution of Eq(4. 1 + yn p= n = 0. yn yn−1 n = 0.12) is bounded and persists.10) αB .12) was investigated in [65].

1. Theorem 4. B + C < yi yj ≤ B + C which is impossible. It remains to be shown that y is a global attractor of all solutions of Eq(4. S0 = S B C + . and S = lim sup yn . (1. 1. To ∞ this end. . . let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(4. Then by Theorem 4.3. The linearized equation of Eq(4. . .1.12).5) there exist two solutions {In }∞ n=−3 and {Sn }∞ n=−3 of the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = with the following properties: I0 = I. B C B+C + > yj−1 yj−2 yi C B+C B + ≤ . By the theory of limiting solutions (see Section 1. 2 √ B + C of Eq(4. j − 1}. yn yn−1 n = −3. and by Theorem 1. .12). y is locally asymptotically stable for all positive values of B and C. . −2.56 Chapter 4. .12) about the equilibrium y = zn+1 = − B C zn − zn−1 . Therefore there exist positive numbers m and M such that m ≤ yn ≤ M Let I = lim inf yn n→∞ We will show that I = S. . {yn }n=−1 is bounded and persists.12) is globally asymptotically √ B + C is (4. . yi−1 yi−2 yj Proof. . n→∞ for n ≥ −1. . .13) for all n ∈ {−1.1 .3. 2)-Type Equations Then clearly we can ﬁnd indices i and j with 1 ≤ i < j such that yi > yn > yj Hence yj = and yi = That is . B+C B+C n = 0.2 The equilibrium y = stable.

14) and (4.5) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to Pielou’s diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where p= pyn .14) from which it follows that (4. C βxn A+Cxn−1 . 2)-type Eq(4. A n = 0. S] for n ≥ −3. Sn ∈ [I.4. (4. From (4.16) . S= B C B+C + ≤ S−1 S−2 I C B+C B + ≥ .4 The Case α = γ = B = 0 : xn+1 = Equation A yn .15) 2 4. 1 + yn−1 β . The Case α = γ = B = 0 : xn+1 = and Then βxn A+Cxn−1 .4. and I= Hence Thus B C B+C B C + =S= = + S−1 S−2 I I I from which it follows that S−1 = S−2 = I.15) we conclude that S=I and the proof is complete. Therefore B C B C + = I = S−1 = + S S S−2 S−3 S = S−2 . (4.Pielou’s This is the (1.Pielou’s Equation 57 In . . . 1. I−1 I−2 S B + C = SI. .

∞) and p > 1.17) In this case the zero equilibrium of Eq(4.22) and ([67]. p.) When p ≤ 1. Eq(4. t≥0 dt P which is a prototype of modelling the dynamics of single-species.16) was investigated in [55].6) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = p + yn . . p. So the interesting case for Eq(4. . Theorem 4. (b) Assume y0 ∈ (0. (1.16) is when p > 1. 0 is locally asymptotically stable when p ≤ 1 and unstable when p > 1.16) is globally asymptotically stable. 2)-type Eq(4.4. Then the positive equilibrium y = p − 1 of Eq(4. x is globally asymptotically stable. p. In fact by employing Theorem 1.16) is unstable and Eq(4.2. B + Cyn βxn Bxn +Cxn−1 This is the (1. 4. (4. Furthermore.79) as a discrete analogue of the delay logistic equation dN N (t − τ ) = rN (t) 1 − . . (4. 1. which is locally asymptotically stable.75).5 The Case α = γ = A = 0 : xn+1 = β . (See also ([42].16) that every positive solution converges to 0. it follows from Eq(4.1 (a) Assume p ≤ 1. it follows that when (4.18) .16) is globally asymptotically stable.16) possesses the unique positive equilibrium y = p − 1.17) holds.4.58 Chapter 4. We summarize the above discussion in the following theorem. p + yn−1 n = 0. 2)-Type Equations This equation was proposed by Pielou in her books ([66]. Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(4.

p= 4.1 (e).19) has semicycles of length one. (b) Assume p < 1.6.6.1. 1.6 The Case α = β = C = 0 : xn+1 = γ yn .19) was investigated in [28].19) (see also Section 2.4. Lemma 4. .4. B γxn−1 A+Bxn This is the (1. (4. .1.7.1 (a) Assume p > 1. except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle. The Case α = β = C = 0 : xn+1 = where γxn−1 A+Bxn 59 B . C Eq(4. 0 is a repeller and y = 1 − p is a saddle point equilibrium. p + yn n = 0.1. Then 0 is the only equilibrium point of Eq(4.5) that 1 yn+1 < yn−1 p and so when p>1 for n ≥ 0 .19) and it is locally asymptotically stable. every solution of Eq(4.19) and they are both unstable. In fact.19) A ∈ (0. That is. 2)-type Eq(4. . ∞). The oscillatory character of the solutions of Eq(4. It follows directly from Eq(4. 73) where it was shown that its equilibrium one is globally asymptotically stable .18) was investigated in ([42] Corollary 3.7) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where p= yn−1 . Then 0 and y = 1 − p are the only equilibrium points of Eq(4.19) is a consequence of Theorem 1. The following local result is a straightforward application of the linearized stability Theorem 1. p. γ Eq(4.

yn+1 − yn−1 = p + yn that every oscillatory solution is such that the subsequences of even and odd terms converge monotonically one to ∞ and the other to 0. ∞).19) converges to a period-two solution . . (4. . yn+1 < yn−1 for n ≥ 0 and so every positive solution of Eq(4. 1. . Finally when p<1 by invoking the stable manifold theory one can see that there exist nonoscillatory solutions which converge monotonically to the positive equilibrium 1 − p. . . . 4. 2)-Type Equations the zero equilibrium of Eq(4. B This equation was investigated in [7] where it was shown that the following statements are true: p= . 1.9) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = p + where yn−1 . .7 The Case α = β = A = 0 : xn+1 = γ Byn γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 This is the (1. .20) C ∈ (0. . n = 0. .19) is globally asymptotically stable. (1. ψ. . ψ.60 Chapter 4. 2)-type Eq(4. yn n = 0. On the other hand when p = 1. It follows from the identity (1 − p) − yn yn−1 . φ. φ. . Furthermore we can see that φψ = 0 but whether there exists solutions with φ=ψ=0 remains an open question. .

20) which consists of a single semicycle.20) converges to a period-two solution.20) is locally asymptotically stable when p > 1 and is an unstable saddle point when p < 1.7. (iii) When p > 1.20) is globally asymptotically stable. .20) which consists of at least two semicycles.1 The Case p < 1 Here we show that there exist solutions of Eq(4. Proof. In fact the following result is true. (4.20) which are unbounded. p+1 p+1 n = 0. 4.1 The equilibrium point y = p + 1 of Eq(4.20) is y = p + 1. Then {yn }∞ n=−1 converges monotonically to y = p + 1. . and let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(4. We now proceed to establish the above results. Theorem 4.20) to be bounded. 1] and y2 ≥ p + y0 and use induction to complete the proof. Moreover.1.1 we obtain the following result: Theorem 4. Theorem 4. Clearly the only equilibrium point of Eq(4. with the possible exception of the ﬁrst semicycle. .7. .7. Note that 1 1−p > p + 1. The linearized equation of Eq(4.7. n→∞ y2n+1 = p. The next result about semicycles is an immediate consequence of some straightforward arguments and Theorem 1.20) such that 0 < 1 y−1 ≤ 1 and y0 ≥ 1−p .21) As a simple consequence of the linearized stability Theorem 1. ∞ (b) Let {yn }n=−1 be a solution of Eq(4. the equilibrium y = p + 1 of Eq(4.7. every solution of Eq(4. The Case α = β = A = 0 : xn+1 = γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 61 (i) p ≥ 1 is a necessary and suﬃcient condition for every solution of Eq(4. 1. n→∞ lim 2.4. .1. lim y2n = ∞. (ii) When p = 1.3 Let p < 1. Then {yn }∞ n=−1 is oscillatory. every semicycle has length one.7. and so y0 > p + 1. Then the following statements are true: 1. It suﬃces to show that y1 ∈ (p.20) about the equilibrium point y = p + 1 is zn+1 + 1 1 zn − zn−1 = 0.2 (a) Let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(4.

4. 4. and let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(4. y1 = p + y−1 1 ≤p+ ≤ 1. Then {yn }∞ n=−1 converges monotonically to y = 2.20) converges to a period-two solution if and only if p = 1. p2 We shall ﬁrst show that lim supn→∞ yn ≤ p−1 .7.62 Indeed y1 = p + y1 y0 Chapter 4. that p < yn for all n ≥ −1.7. It follows from Theorem 4. y0 y0 2 and so y1 ∈ (p. (c) Every solution of Eq(4. Then the following statements are true. (1.7. Also.7. and that p < y0 < p + 1 < y−1 . n→∞ p p−1 n→∞ Proof.3 The Case p > 1 Here we show that the equilibrium point y = p + 1 of Eq(4. Then p+ p2 p−1 ≤ lim inf yn ≤ lim sup yn ≤ .20).20).20). Note that for n ≥ 0. and let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(4. ∞ (a) Suppose {yn }n=−1 consists of a single semicycle. Hence y2 = p + y0 y1 ≥ p + y0 . 2)-Type Equations > p. Lemma 4. . The following result will be useful. Theorem 4. y2n−1 .7.4 Let p = 1. 1. See also Section 2.1 and some straightforward arguments.2 that we may assume that every semicycle of {yn }∞ n=−1 has length one. ∞ (b) Suppose {yn }∞ n=−1 consists of at least two semicycles.20) is globally asymptotically stable.1 Let p > 1.2 The Case p = 1 The following result follows from Lemma 2. p m = 0.7. y2n+1 < p + So as every solution of the diﬀerence equation 1 ym+1 = p + ym . Then {yn }n=−1 converges to a prime period-two solution of Eq(4.5. . 1]. . p .

So let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(4. y) < for all x. Hence p < f (x. ∞) for each x ∈ (0.1 that y = p + 1 is a locally asymptotically stable equilibrium point of Eq(4. p−1 For x. lim inf yn ≥ 2 n→∞ p p 2 We are now ready for the following result. f is decreasing in x ∈ (0. The Case α = β = A = 0 : xn+1 = 2 γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 2 63 p p converges to p−1 . y ∈ p. Let p N ≥ 0 such that for all n ≥ N .7. p−1 f p. and set a = p and b = Note that f and p2 + .4. p2 − p p−1 p2 + . We shall next show that p + p−1 ≤ lim inf n→∞ yn . y ∈ (0. Then the equilibrium y = p + 1 is globally asymptotically stable. ∞) × (0. .7. ∞). ∞). Proof.5 Let p > 1. y) = p + . It suﬃces to show that lim yn = p + 1. Let > 0.20) with prime period two. we have p−1 p3 + p(p − 1) =p+ . There clearly exists y2n = p + So as p−1 p3 + p + p(p − 1) y2n−2 >p+p 2 = .4. set p−1 p2 + >p . p−1 Let n ≥ N . there exist no solutions of Eq(4. n→∞ y f (x.20). ∞)] . (0.p = p + p 2 p−1 p + p2 + p−1 p2 + p−1 = p2 + p3 + p = . p2 + y2n−1 < .7.20). y2n−1 p + p2 + is arbitrary. Recall that by Theorem 4. x Then f ∈ C[(0. it follows that lim supn→∞ yn ≤ p−1 . and f is increasing in y ∈ (0. Theorem 4. We know by Theorem 4. Then > 0.7. ∞) for each y ∈ (0. ∞). ∞).

. φp .64 Finally note that by Lemma 4. l ∈ {0. n=−l Open Problem 4. (b) Assume that the initial conditions y−1 .8 Open Problems and Conjectures xn+1 = A xn−k + B . (a) Find all initial conditions y−1 . (1. .22) converges.8.23) A B λl−k + = 0. 2 4. p<p+ Chapter 4.22) Conjecture 4.8. . . Show that every solution of Eq(4. .22).7. (4. Investigate the global behavior of the solution {yn }. . . [25]. + yn yn−1 (4.1 Let . . . [60]. 1. A+B A+B A. φ2 .2 (see [18]) Assume that A. . Is it bounded? Does limn→∞ yn exist? When does {yn } converge to a two cycle? . [23]. is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. p−1 p2 + p2 ≤ lim inf yn ≤ lim sup yn ≤ < n→∞ p p−1 p−1 n→∞ n→∞ lim yn = p + 1. y0 are such that y−1 y0 < 0 and such that Eq(4. 2)-Type Equations and so by Theorem 1.) Open Problem 4. .8. .6. be a given prime period p solution of Eq(4. . φ1 . . . either to the equilibrium or to a periodic solution with period p ≥ 2 and that what happens and the exact value of p are uniquely determined from the characteristic roots of the linearized equation λl+1 + (See [19].1 Consider the diﬀerence equation where and where the initial conditions x−l . and [61].} with k < l. .1. . y0 with y−1 y0 < 0 for which the equation yn+1 = B A . . x0 such that {xn }∞ converges to this periodic solution. Determine the set of all positive initial conditions x−l .23) is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. B ∈ (0. . ∞) and k. . xn−l n = 0.4. x0 are arbitrary positive real numbers. . ∞). . . 1. . B ∈ (0.

19) has a solution which converges to zero.4 Determine the set G of all initial conditions (y−1 . investigate the global character ∞ of {yn }n=−1 . ∞) ∞ for which the solution {yn }n=−1 of Eq(4. y0 ∈ (0. .20) is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0.6 (See [13]) Find the set G of all initial points (x−1 . Open Problem 4.8.8.2 Assume that p = 1. for these initial points.24) xn is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0.8. Conjecture 4. y0 ∈ R be such that Eq(4. and the periodic ∞ nature of the solution {yn }n=−1 of Eq(4. Open Problems and Conjectures 65 Conjecture 4.24) is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0 and bounded. Open Problem 4.20).3 Assume that p < 1. (b) Let y−1 .3 Show that Eq(4. Determine all initial conditions y−1 . For such an initial point.5 (a) Assume p ∈ (0. investigate the boundedness. y0 ∈ R such that the equation (4. Show that {xn }∞ n=−1 is a three cycle. (c) Discuss (a) and (b) when p < 0. ∞). Show that Eq(4. y0 ) ∈ R × R through which the equation yn−1 yn+1 = 1 + yn is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0 and.19) is bounded. x0 ) ∈ R × R through which the equation xn−1 xn+1 = −1 + (4.4 Assume that (x−1 .4.20) is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0.8.8.20) possesses a solution {yn }∞ n=−1 which remains above the equilibrium for all n ≥ −1. Conjecture 4. x0 ) ∈ R × R is such that the equation (4.8. the asymptotic behavior. Open Problem 4.8. Determine the set of initial conditions y−1 .8. Open Problem 4.

) Assume α ∈ (1. n = 0. ∞). x0 ∈ (0. ∞).8. 1. xn+1 = 1 + xn converges to two? .8. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on f for every positive solution of the equation xn+1 = to be bounded.66 Chapter 4. . + ak xn−k n = 0. . .8 Let a. . Show that the positive equilibrium of Pielou’s discrete logistic model xn+1 = αxn . . 1.9 (See [5]) For which initial values x−1 . . converges to a period-two solution. xn + xn−1 n = 0. < 2 cos α 2k + 1 Open Problem 4. f (xn ) . a + a0 xn + .8. . (0. ∞)]. Conjecture 4. 1. 1. . 1. . n = 0. . ai ∈ (0. ∞) and k ∈ {0. see [55]. . with positive initial conditions is globally asymptotically stable if and only if kπ α−1 . . [66].6 (Pielou’s Discrete Logistic Model. Investigate the global asymptotic stability of the equilibrium points of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = xn . . and [67]. . . with positive initial conditions. . . .5 (See [27]) Assume r ∈ (0. (1. . Show that every positive solution of the population model Jn+1 = Jn−1 er−(Jn +Jn−1 ) . Open Problem 4.7 Let f ∈ C[(0. . . . Conjecture 4. 2)-Type Equations Open Problem 4. 1 + xn−k n = 0. ∞) for i = 0.}.8. ∞) does the sequence deﬁned by xn−1 . .8. k. . 1.

.8. 0.10 (See [31]) Consider the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = yn−1 e−yn . .4. ∞ (b) Let y−1 . 0. . . . 1). . Open Problems and Conjectures (See also Section 4. each of the subsequences {y2n }∞ and {y2n+1 }n=−1 is decreasing and n=0 lim [n→∞ y2n ][n→∞ y2n+1 ] = 0. in terms of the initial conditions y−1 and y0 of the solution. . ∞) through which the solutions of Eq(4. In other words. y0 ∈ (0. yn yn−1 pn yn . 1. 1 + yn−1 n = 0. . (4. ﬁnd the basin of attraction of the equilibrium of Eq(4. . ∞ More precisely. Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of each of the following diﬀerence equations: yn+1 = yn+1 = 1 pn + . . . n = 0. .25) converge to zero. ∞ One can easily see that every solution {yn }n=−1 of Eq(4. . 1.8.8.7) Open Problem 4. . .20) are bounded. Investigate the asymptotic behavior of {yn }n=−1 .25) converges to a period-two solution . 67 (4.25) with nonnegative initial conditions.25). lim p = n→∞ pn . Open Problem 4. (a) Find the set B of all initial conditions y−1 .27) . y0 ∈ [0. ∞) such that the solutions {yn }∞ n=−1 of Eq(4. (b) Determine the limits of the subsequences of even and odd terms of every solution of Eq(4. n = 0.12 Let {pn }∞ be a convergent sequence of nonnegative real numn=0 bers with a ﬁnite limit.26) (4.8. Open Problem 4.25). . y0 ∈ B. lim (a) Find all initial points y−1 .11 Assume p ∈ (0. . 1. .

1 − yn−1 1 + yn .30) yn+1 = yn+1 = pn + Open Problem 4. 1.28) (4. . . yn For those equations from the above list for which you were successful. 1 − yn (4.30).33) (4. yn Chapter 4.(4. .31) yn+1 = (4. Then for every (y−1 . Open Problem 4. 1.26) . investigate the long term behavior of the solution {yn }∞ n=−1 : yn+1 = yn .8.14 For each of the following diﬀerence equations determine the “good” set G ⊂ R × R of all initial conditions (y−1 . . .8. y0 ) ∈ R × R through which the equation is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. 1.34) yn+1 = yn+1 = −1 + yn−1 . n = 0.29) (4.13 Let {pn }∞ be a periodic sequence of nonnegative real numbers n=0 with period k ≥ 2. n = 0. extend your result by introducing arbitrary real parameters in the equation.68 pn + yn . . . . . 1 − yn−1 yn−1 . . . (4. (1. Investigate the global character of all positive solutions of each of Eqs(4. pn + yn−1 yn−1 . y0 ) ∈ G. 2)-Type Equations yn+1 = n = 0. pn + yn yn−1 .32) (4.

. 1)-type: xn+1 = n = 0. 1.1 Introduction α + βxn . . . . (5. (5. . (5. . .2) xn+1 = α + βxn .4) xn+1 = α + γxn−1 . A Eq(1) contains the following nine equations of the (2. . 1. 1. . (5. . . .Chapter 5 (2. . . Cxn−1 n = 0. . A n = 0.6) .1) xn+1 = α + βxn . Bxn n = 0. 1. . 1. (5. . 1)-Type Equations 5. Bxn n = 0. .3) xn+1 = α + γxn−1 .5) xn+1 = α + γxn−1 . Cxn−1 69 n = 0. 1. (5.

. . Bxn n = 0.70 Chapter 5.5. 1.2). 1. 5. (5. C C γ reduces Eq(5.2 The Case γ = A = B = 0 : xn+1 = Equation p + yn . . A n = 0. (5. yn−1 α+βxn Cxn−1 .2) is a Riccati equation and Eq(5. Of these nine equations. (5. . Therefore there remain Eqs(5.7) are linear. . . 1. 1. 1)-type Eq(5. (2. . (5. (5.8) βxn + γxn−1 . which will be investigated in the next two sections. Eqs(5. the initial conditions are nonnegative.9) Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all parameters that appear in these equations are positive. γ Finally the change of variables xn = γ β + yn .6) is essentially like Eq(5.7. which was investigated in Section 4. Cxn−1 n = 0.1). . and the denominators are always positive. .8) to Eq(4.3) and (5.4) and (5. . 1)-Type Equations xn+1 = βxn + γxn−1 . .3) which by the change of variables reduces to the equation yn+1 = n = 0.Lyness’ This is the (2. .20) with p = β .5). The change of variables γ xn = yn .18) with p = β .7) xn+1 = and xn+1 = βxn + γxn−1 .9) to Eq(4.10) . which was investigated in Section 4. B reduces Eq(5. Eq(5. .

See [11].10) are true: (a) The absolute extreme in a semicycle occurs in the ﬁrst or in the second term. (b) Every nontrivial semicycle. y−1 y−1 y0 y0 Eq(5. 1 + y0 1 + y−1 + y0 1 + y−1 .10) has a limit. The Case γ = A = B = 0 : xn+1 = where α+βxn Cxn−1 . .) In this special case. p. [57]-[59]. . . β2 p=1 was discovered by Lyness in 1942 while he was working on a problem in Number Theory. Indeed the solution of Eq(5.11) yn−1 every solution of which is periodic with period ﬁve. It was also shown in [44] by using KAM theory that the positive equilibrium y of Eq(5.Lyness’ Equation 71 p= The special case of Eq(5. [71]. This result was also established in [49] by using a Lyapunov function. .10) where αC .2.10) is stable but not asymptotically stable. n = 0. There is substantial literature on Lyness’ Equation. (See ([42]. Then the following statements about the positive solutions of Eq(5. . . the equation becomes 1 + yn yn+1 = . [42]. contains at least two and at most three terms.. 131) for the history of the problem. [43].2. y0 .10) the following result was established in [43]: Theorem 5. and [72] and the references cited therein.5.1 Assume that p > 0. 1. It was shown in [30] that no nontrivial solution of Eq(5.10) possesses the invariant In = (p + yn−1 + yn ) 1 + 1 yn−1 1+ 1 yn = constant (5..11) with initial conditions y−1 and y0 is the ﬁve-cycle: y−1 .10) is bounded from above and from below by positive constants. (5.12) from which it follows that every solution of Eq(5.. Concerning the semicycles of solutions of Eq(5. . after the ﬁrst one.

4. . From this it follows that a solution of Eq(5. Open Problem 5. yn (5. . To this day we have not found a proof for the boundedness of solutions of Eq(5.4 Open Problems and Conjectures By using the invariant (5.12). (2.13) either approaches the positive equilibrium y monotonically or it oscillates about y with semicycles of length one in such a way that {y2n } and {y2n+1 } converge monotonically one to zero and other to ∞.13) has semicycles of length one.1 one can see that except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle.72 Chapter 5. 1)-Type Equations 5.10) without using essentially the invariant.7.13) is a consequence of the identity yn+1 − yn−1 = yn−1 − yn−2 yn for n ≥ 1.5) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the equation yn+1 = where p= p + yn−1 .13) is a saddle point.13) converges monotonically to the equilibrium y. γ2 Eq(5.1. 5.1 one can see that the unique equilibrium point √ 1 + 1 + 4p y= 2 of Eq(5. 1)-type Eq(5. .13) was investigated in [28]. The global character of solutions of Eq(5. By the linearized stability Theorem 1. By Theorem 1.13) αB .3 The Case β = A = C = 0 : xn+1 = γ yn B n = 0.12). . every oscillatory solution of Eq(5. α+γxn−1 Bxn This is the (2. Concerning the nonoscillatory solutions of Eq(5.1 Show that every solution of Lyness’ Eq(5. 1.13) one can easily see that every nonoscillatory solution of Eq(5. one can easily see that every solution of Lyness’ Eq(5.10) is bounded from above and from below by positive numbers.10) is bounded without using the invariant (5.

∞) through which Eq(5. Open Problems and Conjectures 73 Open Problem 5.15) are unbounded is a set of measure zero.4 (See [26]. 1.4. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions in terms of f so that the diﬀerence equation (5.14) possesses a (nontrivial) invariant.5. ∞)]. What is it that makes Lyness’ equation possess an invariant? What type of diﬀerence equations possess an invariant? Along these lines. Show that the subset of G through which the solutions of Eq(5.15) is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. . ∞).4.4.1 Assume that f ∈ C[(0.14) possesses a unique positive equilibrium point x and a nontrivial invariant. ∞)]. Determine the set G of all initial conditions y−1 .4. (0. To illustrate. Conjecture 5.15) may not even be well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. ∞). Show that the linearized equation of Eq(5. Conjecture 5. xn−1 n = 0. f (xn ) . we oﬀer the following open problems and conjectures. When we allow the initial conditions to be real numbers the equation yn+1 = p + yn yn−1 (5. . we oﬀer the following open problems and conjectures.3 Assume that f ∈ C[(0.4. (0. y0 ∈ (−∞. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions in terms of f so that every positive solution of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = is bounded. ∞). ∞).14) about x does not have both eigenvalues in |λ| < 1 and does not have both eigenvalues in |λ| > 1.4.4. . (5. Open Problem 5.14) Open Problem 5.2 Let G be the set of initial conditions deﬁned in the Open problem 5. .) Assume p ∈ (−∞.2 Assume that f ∈ C[(0. ∞)] and that the diﬀerence equation (5.4. (0.

3 Assume p ∈ (−∞. . 1.4.4. yn n = 0. + yn yn−1 yn−3 yn−4 n = 0.6 Show that the equation yn+1 = 1 + yn−1 . Determine the periodic character and the asymptotic behavior of all solutions with (y−1 . Show that the set of points (y−1 . yn−1 yn−3 n = 0. . + yn−k . . . 1. Open Problem 5. 1 + . Open Problem 5. . .4 Show that every positive solution of the equation yn+1 = converges to a period-six solution. . y0 ) ∈ (−∞. is a set of points without interior. yn yn−4 + .4. . Conjecture 5. 1.74 Chapter 5.15) is not well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. Conjecture 5.5 Determine all positive integers k with the property that every positive solution of the equation yn+1 = is periodic.6 Find the set G of all initial points (y−1 . 1)-Type Equations Conjecture 5. 1. (2.4. Conjecture 5. . ∞) through which Eq(5. . y0 ) ∈ R × R through which the equation 1 + yn−1 yn+1 = yn is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. . has a nontrivial positive solution which decreases monotonically to the equilibrium of the equation. . y0 ) ∈ G. . ∞). ∞) × (−∞. . .4.5 (See [20]) Show that every positive solution of the equation yn+1 = 1 1 . converges to a period-three solution. yn−k−1 n = 0.4.

. . . . Show that every positive solution of May’s Host Parasitoid Model xn+1 = is bounded.16) to where xn = −1+yn 2 if A > 1 if A = 1 if A < 1 n = 0. .17) is called the Gingerbreadman Map and was investigated by Devaney [17]. . 1 if A < 1 if A = 1 δ= 0 −1 if A > 1. Eq(5. . 1.5. see [59]) Assume α > 1. .8 (The Gingerbreadman Map. When δ = 1.4.7 (May’s Host Parasitoid Model. ∞). Note that the change of variables n e y2 max{x2 . .16) A A 1+yn 2 reduces Eq(5. (5. 1. 1.4.4. Show that every positive solution of the equation xn+1 = is bounded. . A} n . (1 + xn )xn−1 n = 0. xn xn−1 n = 0. Open Problems and Conjectures 75 Conjecture 5.17) yn+1 = |yn | − yn−1 + δ. 2 αxn . (5. Conjecture 5. see [59]) Let A ∈ (0.

.

1) xn+1 = α + βxn . . (6. (6.5) xn+1 = α + γxn−1 .3) xn+1 = α + γxn−1 .Chapter 6 (2. Bxn + Cxn−1 77 n = 0. 1. . . . . 1. . 2)-Type Equations 6. . A + Cxn−1 n = 0. . 1.6) . (6.4) xn+1 = α + γxn−1 . 1. . . . . Bxn + Cxn−1 n = 0. (6. (6.1 Introduction α + βxn . A + Cxn−1 n = 0. A + Bxn n = 0. A + Bxn Eq(1) contains the following nine equations of the (2. . . . 2)-type: xn+1 = n = 0. 1. 1. (6. .2) xn+1 = α + βxn . . .

1) which is in fact a Riccati equation. 2)-type Eq(6. A + Czn for n ≥ 0 n = −1. A + Czn n = 0. See Section 1. α + γzn . A + Cxn−1 n = 0. for n ≥ −1. (6. .5) then {x2n }n=0 and {x2n−1 }n=0 are both solutions of the Riccati equations zn+1 = with zn = x2n and zn+1 = with zn = x2n+1 respectively. (6. To avoid a degenerate situation we will assume that αB − βA = 0. . .7) xn+1 = βxn + γxn−1 . (6.2 The Case γ = C = 0 : Equation xn+1 = α+βxn A+Bxn . Bxn + Cxn−1 n = 0. . . .5). 2)-Type Equations xn+1 = βxn + γxn−1 .5) is essentially similar to Eq(6. Therefore we will omit any further discussion of Eq(6. .Riccati This is the (2. 6. 1. 1.1). A + Bxn n = 0. .9) Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all parameters that appear in these equations are positive. 0. . In fact if {xn }∞ n=−1 is a positive solution of ∞ ∞ Eq(6.8) xn+1 = βxn + γxn−1 . . α + γzn . Eq(6. the initial conditions are nonnegative.6. and the denominators are always positive. . 1. . (2.78 Chapter 6. . . . . . 1.

2 A A (Eq(6. (6.10) αC β and q = . See also [36].3. 1.1.3. Eq(6.1 Every solution of Eq(6. 6.3 The Case γ = B = 0 : xn+1 = A yn C α+βxn A+Cxn−1 This is the (2. To this day. 2)-type Eq(6.6. . Lemma 6. The Case γ = B = 0 : xn+1 = α+βxn A+Cxn−1 79 The Riccati number associated with this equation is R= and clearly βA − αB (β + A)2 1 R< .10) is locally asymptotically stable for all values of the parameters p and q. . .2: Theorem 6.) Eq(6. the conjecture has not been proven or refuted.3.10) are the following: Theorem 6.10) was investigated in [42] and [43].1 The equilibrium y of Eq(6.10) is a very simple looking equation for which it has long been conjectured that its equilibrium is globally asymptotically stable.2) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the equation yn+1 = where p + qyn . . 1 + yn−1 n = 0.6.1 The positive equilibrium of Eq(6. The main results known about Eq(6. By applying the linearized stability Theorem 1.10) is bounded from above and from below by positive constants.2. 4 Now the following result is a consequence of Theorem 1.1 we obtain the following result.10) has the unique positive equilibrium y given by p= y= q−1+ (q − 1)2 + 4p 2 .1) is globally asymptotically stable.

The oscillatory character of solutions for Eq(6. if the solution is bounded from above by a constant M .10) is described by the following result: ∞ Theorem 6. the remaining terms in a positive semicycle are strictly decreasing and in a negative semicycle are strictly increasing. (iii) In any two consecutive semicycles. except perhaps for the ﬁrst one.3.2 Let {yn }n=−1 be a nontrivial solution of Eq(6. (ii) The extreme in each semicycle occurs at either the ﬁrst term or the second. in every semicycle.80 Chapter 6. (iv) Assume q ≤ p. Now assume for the sake of contradiction that the solution is not bounded from above. then p yn+1 ≥ 1+M and so it is also bounded from below. Then. their extrema cannot be consecutive terms.10) we see that yn+1 < qyn + p for n ≥ 0 and so k→∞ lim ynk = lim ynk −1 = ∞. Then the following statements are true: (i) Every semicycle. and y1+nk = max{yn : n ≤ nk } for k ≥ 0. (2. From (6. Proof. every semicycle contains two or three terms. 2)-Type Equations Proof.10). except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle. for suﬃciently large k. Let {yn } be a solution of Eq(6. there is at most one term which follows the extreme. has at least two terms. k→∞ Hence. We present the proofs for positive semicycles only. 0 ≤ y1+nk − ynk = p + [(q − 1) − ynk −1 ]ynk <0 1 + ynk −1 2 which is a contradiction and the proof is complete. Furthermore. k→∞ lim y1+nk = ∞.10). Furthermore after the ﬁrst. Then there exists a subsequence {y1+nk }∞ such k=0 that k→∞ lim nk = ∞. The proofs for negative semicycles are similar and will be omitted. . Clearly.

The Case γ = B = 0 : xn+1 = (i) Assume that for some N ≥ 0. (ii) q≥1 and either p ≤ q or q < p ≤ 2(q + 1). > 1 + yN −1 1+y (ii) Assume that for some N ≥ 0. yN +1 . Then yN +1 = p + qyN p + qyN +1 < = yN +2 .10) is globally asymptotically stable if one of the following two conditions holds: (i) q < 1. the ﬁrst two terms in a positive semicycle are yN and yN +1 . .3 The positive equilibrium of Eq(6. Then yN ≥ y.6. p + qyN p + qy = y. α+βxn A+Cxn−1 81 yN −1 < y Then yN +1 = and yN ≥ y. 1 + yN −1 1 + yN (iv) Assume that for some N ≥ 0.3. yN +1 yN +1 1 + yN 1 + yN 1+y (iii) We consider the case where a negative semicycle is followed by a positive one. the terms yN .3. and yN +2 are all in a positive semicycle. So assume that for some N ≥ 0 the last two terms in a negative semicycle are yN −1 and yN with yN −1 ≥ yN . The opposite case is similar and will be omitted. Then yN +3 = p + qyN +2 p + qyN +1 p + qy = y. yN +1 > y and p p +q +q yN +2 1 p + qyN +1 yN +1 = = < y = 1. < < 1 + yN +1 1 + yN +1 1+y 2 Theorem 6.

10) yields i≥ Hence and so because q < 1. p + (q − 1)i ≤ is ≤ p + (q − 1)s i≥s p + qi 1+s and s ≤ p + qs . 1. Theorem 3. 1 ≤ q ≤ p ≤ 2(q + 1) 2 6. 1+i from which the result follows.3. B (6.3) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where p= yn + p . 2)-type Eq(6. p. (2.11) was investigated in [15]. The following result is a consequence of the linearized stability Theorem 1.82 Proof. This result was ﬁrst established in [43].4 The Case γ = A = 0 : xn+1 = β yn B α+βxn Bxn +Cxn−1 This is the (2. Chapter 6. 2)-Type Equations (i) In view of Lemma 6. .1.1.1 exist and are positive numbers.3.11) and q = Eq(6. .3 (f). Then Eq(6. To this end. For the proof when see ([42].1.4. (ii) The proof when p<q follows by applying Theorem 1. . C .4. let i = lim inf yn n→∞ and s = lim sup yn n→∞ which by Theorem 6. it remains to show that every solution {yn }∞ of Eq(6. 71).2. . yn + qyn−1 αB β2 n = 0.10) n=−1 tends to y as n → ∞.

yk ∈ 1. The Case γ = A = 0 : xn+1 = α+βxn Bxn +Cxn−1 83 Theorem 6. yk + qyk−1 yk + q p q yk+1 yk + p = ≥ yk + qyk−1 p q p q +p +q > p q 2 and the proof follows by induction.1 Invariant Intervals The following result establishes that the interval I with end points 1 and p is an invariq ant interval for Eq(6.1 The unique positive equilibrium point y= 1+ 1 + 4p(q + 1) 2(q + 1) of Eq(6. (b) Assume p > q and suppose that for some k ≥ 0. yk + p yk + p yk+1 = ≤ = 1. Then yn ∈ 1. v ∈ [ p .1 Let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(6. for some k ≥ 0. ∞). Proof. q for all n > k.1 .4. the q function u+p f (u. v) = u + qv is increasing in u and decreasing in v.6. then ym ∈ I for all m > k.4. yk−1 . Then the following statements are true: (a) Assume p < q and suppose that for some k ≥ 0.1 q p . q for all n > k. yk ∈ Then yn ∈ p . (b) The proof is similar and will be omitted. Indeed. Lemma 6. . 6.11) in the sense that if.11). yk−1 . p q p .4. two consecutive values yk−1 and yk of a solution lie in I.11) is locally asymptotically stable for all values of the parameters p and q. (a) The basic ingredient behind the proof is the fact that when u.4.

84

Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

6.4.2

Semicycle Analysis

∞ Let {yn }n=−1 be a solution of Eq(6.11). Then observe that the following identities are true: p − yn−1 (6.12) yn+1 − 1 = q q for n ≥ 0, yn + qyn−1

yn+1 − and yn − yn+4 =

p (q − p) + pq(1 − yn−1 ) = q q(yn + qyn−1 )

for n ≥ 0,

(6.13)

(yn − 1)[qyn yn+3 + yn+1 yn+3 ] + qyn+1 (yn − p ) q q(p + yn+1 ) + yn+3 (yn+1 + qyn )

for n ≥ 0.

(6.14)

First we will analyze the semicycles of the solution {yn }∞ n=−1 under the assumption that p > q. (6.15) The following result is a direct consequence of (6.12)-(6.15):

∞ Lemma 6.4.2 Assume that (6.15) holds and let {yn }n=−1 be a solution of Eq(6.11). Then the following statements are true:

(i) If for some N ≥ 0, yN −1 < p , then yN +1 > 1; q (ii) If for some N ≥ 0, yN −1 = p , then yN +1 = 1; q (iii) If for some N ≥ 0, yN −1 > p , then yN +1 < 1; q (iv) If for some N ≥ 0, yN −1 ≥ 1, then yN +1 < p ; q (v) If for some N ≥ 0, yN −1 ≤ 1, then yN +1 > 1; (vi) If for some N ≥ 0, yN ≥ p , then yN +4 < yN ; q (vii) If for some N ≥ 0, yN ≤ 1, then yN +4 > yN ; (viii) If for some N ≥ 0, 1 ≤ yN −1 ≤ p , then 1 ≤ yN +1 ≤ p ; q q (ix) If for some N ≥ 0, 1 ≤ yN −1 , yN ≤ p , then yn ∈ [1, p ] for n ≥ N . That is [1, p ] is q q q an invariant interval for Eq(6.11); (x) p 1<y< . q

6.4. The Case γ = A = 0 : xn+1 =

α+βxn Bxn +Cxn−1

85

The next result, which is a consequence of Theorem 1.7.2, states that when (6.15) holds, every nontrivial and oscillatory solution of Eq(6.11), which lies in the interval [1, p ], oscillates about the equilibrium y with semicycles of length one or two. q Theorem 6.4.2 Assume that Eq(6.11) holds. Then every nontrivial and oscillatory solution of Eq(6.11) which lies in the interval [1, p ], oscillates about y with semicycles q of length one or two.

∞ Next we will analyze the semicycles of the solutions {yn }n=−1 under the assumption that q = p. (6.16)

In this case, Eq(6.11) reduces to yn+1 = with the unique equilibrium point y = 1. Also identities (6.12)-(6.14) reduce to yn+1 − 1 = p and yn − yn+4 = (yn − 1) pyn+1 + pyn yn+3 + yn+1 yn+3 p(p + yn+1 ) + yn+3 (yn+1 + pyn ) for n ≥ 0. (6.19) 1 − yn−1 yn + pyn−1 for n ≥ 0 (6.18) yn + p , yn + pyn−1 n = 0, 1, . . . (6.17)

**and so the following results follow immediately:
**

∞ Lemma 6.4.3 Let {yn }n=−1 be a solution of Eq(6.17). Then the following statements are true:

(i) If for some N ≥ 0, yN −1 < 1, then yN +1 > 1; (ii) If for some N ≥ 0, yN −1 = 1, then yN +1 = 1; (iii) If for some N ≥ 0, yN −1 > 1, then yN +1 < 1; (iv) If for some N ≥ 0, yN < 1, then yN < yN +4 < 1; (v) If for some N ≥ 0, yN > 1, then yN > yN +4 > 1.

∞ Corollary 6.4.1 Let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a nontrivial solution of Eq(6.17). Then {yn }n=−1 oscillates about the equilibrium 1 and, except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle, the following are true:

86

Chapter 6. (2, 2)-Type Equations

(i) If y−1 = 1 or y0 = 1, then the positive semicycle has length three and the negative semicycle has length one. (ii) If (1 − y−1 )(1 − y0 ) = 0, then every semicycle has length two. Finally we will analyze the semicycles of the solutions {yn }∞ under the assumption n=−1 that p < q. (6.20) The following result is a direct consequence of (6.12)-(6.14) and (6.20). Lemma 6.4.4 Assume that (6.20) holds and let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(6.11). Then the following statements are true: (i) If for some N ≥ 0, yN −1 < p , then yN +1 > 1; q (ii) If for some N ≥ 0, yN −1 = p , then yN +1 = 1; q (iii) If for some N ≥ 0, yN −1 > p , then yN +1 < 1; q (iv) If for some N ≥ 0, yN −1 ≤ 1, then yN +1 > p ; q (v) If for some N ≥ 0, yN −1 ≤ p , then yN +1 > p ; q q (vi) If for some N ≥ 0, yN ≥ 1, then yN +4 < yN ; (vii) If for some N ≥ 0, yN ≤ p , then yN +4 > yN ; q (viii) If for some N ≥ 0,

p q p q

≤ yN −1 ≤ 1, then

≤ yN +1 ≤ 1;

(ix) If for some N ≥ 0, p ≤ yN −1 , yN ≤ 1, then yn ∈ [ p , 1] for n ≥ N . That is, [ p , 1] is q q q an invariant interval for Eq(6.11); (x) p < y < 1. q

The next result, which is a consequence of Theorem 1.7.4, states that when (6.20) holds, every nontrivial and oscillatory solution of Eq(6.11) which lies in the interval [ p , 1], after the ﬁrst semicycle, oscillates with semicycles of length at least two. q Theorem 6.4.3 Assume that (6.20) holds. Then every nontrivial and oscillatory solution of Eq(6.11) which lies in the interval [ p , 1], after the ﬁrst semicycle, oscillates with q semicycles of length at least two.

6.4. The Case γ = A = 0 : xn+1 =

α+βxn Bxn +Cxn−1

87

How do solutions which do not eventually lie in the invariant interval behave? First assume that p>q

∞ and let {yn }n=−1 be a solution which does not eventually lie in the interval I = [1, p ]. q Then one can see that the solution oscillates relative to the interval [1, p ], essentially in q one of the following two ways: (i) Two consecutive terms in ( p , ∞) are followed by two consecutive terms in (0, 1), q are followed by two consecutive terms in ( p , ∞), and so on. The solution never visits q the interval (1, p ). q (ii) There exists exactly one term in ( p , ∞), which is followed by exactly one term in q (1, p ), which is followed by exactly one term in (0, 1), which is followed by exactly one q term in (1, p ), which is followed by exactly one term in ( p , ∞), and so on. The solution q q visits consecutively the intervals

...,

p p p p , ∞ , 1, ,∞ ,... , (0, 1), 1, , q q q q

in this order with one term per interval. The situation is essentially the same relative to the interval [ p , 1] when q p < q.

6.4.3

Global Stability and Boundedness

Our goal in this section is to establish the following result: Theorem 6.4.4 when (b) Assume that q > 1 + 4p. Then every solution of Eq(6.11) lies eventually in the interval Proof. (a) We have already shown that the equilibrium y is locally asymptotically stable so it remains to be shown that y is a global attractor of every solution {yn }∞ n=−1 of Eq(6.11). Case 1 Assume p = q. It follows from (6.19) that each of the four subsequences {y4n+i }∞ n=0 for i = 1, 2, 3, 4

p ,1 q

(a) The equilibrium y of Eq(6.11) is globally asymptotically stable q ≤ 1 + 4p. (6.21)

.

.4. 4 and so n→∞ for i = 1. we assume that p > q. Case 2 Assume p = q. In this interval the function q f (u. By applying (6.11) converges to y. L2 . p ]. assume that p < q. By q using an argument similar to that in the case p = q. In this interval the q function u+p f (u. p ] is an invariant interval. p ] converges to y. As in Case 2 we can see that every solution of Eq(6. 4. 2. 1].2 that [1.5 applies and so every solution of Eq(6. Now. Recall from Lemma 6.11) n→∞ lim yn = y and the proof is complete.11) with two consecutive values in [1.14) to this period four solution we obtain a contradiction and so every solution of Eq(6. we can see that if a solution is not eventually in [1.7 that every solution of Eq(6. . 2 . p ]. Set Li = n→∞ y4n+i lim Thus clearly . . By applying (6.11) with period four. L4 . L3 . v) = u+p u + qv is increasing in u and decreasing in v. lim yn = 1. q Hence for every solution {yn }∞ n=−1 of Eq(6.4. 2.4.19) to the solution (6. it converges to a periodic solution with period-four which q is not the equilibrium.88 Chapter 6. Under the assumption that q ≤ 1 + 4p. 3. . (2. 2)-Type Equations is either identically equal to one or else it is strictly monotonically convergent. Theorem 1. .11) must eventually lie in the interval [ p .22) is a periodic solution of Eq(6.22) we see that Li = 1 for i = 1. (b) The proof follows from the discussion in part (a). 3. . First. L1 . (6.11) must lie eventually in [1. v) = u + qv is decreasing in both variables and so it follows by applying Theorem 1.

. 1.1 we obtain the following result: Theorem 6. . ψ ∈ (0.1.4) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where p= p + qyn−1 . .23) converges to a period two solution.7.6.5. φ. Theorem 6. ψ.24) . A (6. Then the values φ and ψ of all prime period-two solutions (6. The Case β = C = 0 : xn+1 = α+γxn−1 A+Bxn 89 α+γxn−1 A+Bxn 6. (6. . . if and only if q = 1.23) has a prime period-two solution .23) and q = (Eq(6.) The only equilibrium point of Eq(6.23) is y= q−1+ (q − 1)2 + 4p 2 and by applying the linearized stability Theorem 1. ψ. 2)-type Eq(6. .25) holds.2 (a) Eq(6.23) was investigated in [28].25) holds. ∞) : φψ = p}. Then every solution of Eq(6. (6. 1 + yn αB A2 n = 0.5. γ . the following result is a consequence of the results in Section 2. Concerning prime period-two solutions. (c) Assume that (6. φ. and is an unstable saddle point when q > 1. .5 The Case β = C = 0 : xn+1 = A yn B This is the (2.25) (b) Assume (6. .24) are given by {φ. .5.1 The equilibrium y of Eq(6.23) is locally asymptotically stable when q < 1.

1 + yn0 2 p + qx 1+x 6. yn0 ) < f (y.23) are as follows: Theorem 6.23) is globally asymptotically stable.7. So assume for the sake of contradiction that for some n0 ≥ K. (a) This follows immediately from Theorem 1. Clearly. (b) Assume p ≥ q. 2)-Type Equations 6.2 The Case q < 1 The main result in this section is the following: Theorem 6. (2.26) . Then the positive equilibrium of Eq(6. the condition p ≥ q implies that the function f (x) = is decreasing. an oscillatory solution {yn } of Eq(6.3 Let {yn } be a nontrivial solution of Eq(6. Then the following statements are true: (a) After the ﬁrst semicycle. Then every nonoscillatory solution of Eq(6. Then yn0 +1 = which is impossible. Clearly yn+1 = Set M= p + qyn−1 < p + qyn−1 .23) converges monotonically to the equilibrium y.23) and let y denote the unique positive equilibrium of Eq(6.5. Proof. y) = y.5.1 (b) Let {yn } be a nonoscillatory solution of Eq(6. yn0 > yn0 −1 .5. 1−q n ≥ 0.4 Assume that q < 1. 1 + yn p + . We will assume that there exists a positive integer K such that yn−1 ≥ y for every n ≥ K.23). The case where yn−1 < y for n ≥ K is similar and will be omitted. Proof. p + qyn0 −1 = f (yn0 .5.23) oscillates about the equilibrium y with semicycles of length one. yn0 −1 ) < f (yn0 .90 Chapter 6. (6.1 Semicycle Analysis Our results on the semicycles of solutions for Eq(6. It is suﬃcient to show that {yn } is a decreasing sequence for n ≥ K.23).

q−1 p + q(q − 1) p + qy−1 < <q−1 1 + y0 1 + y0 p + qy0 p + qy0 p > = y0 + 1 + y1 q q p q for n ≥ 1. a ≤ f (x. 1+x 1−q Then clearly.26) and Eq(6. one of which is monotonically approaching 0 and the other is monotonically approaching ∞.6.23). b] × [a.5. The local stability of y was established in Theorem 6. M ]. In fact this is true for every solution {yn }∞ n=−1 whose initial conditions are such that the following inequalities are true: y−1 < q − 1 and y0 > q − 1 + To this end observe that y1 = and y2 = and by induction. . a = 0.6 it follows that y is a global attractor of all solutions of Eq(6. and b = + .3 The Case q > 1 In this case we will show that there exist solutions that have two subsequences. it now follows that every solution of Eq(6. for all (x.5. y) ∈ [a. y2n−1 < q − 1 and y2n > y0 + n Hence n→∞ p .5. b].23).4. Set p + qy p f (x. By applying Theorem 1. lim y2n = ∞ p + qy2n−1 =0 1 + y2n and lim y2n+1 = lim n→∞ n→∞ and the proof is complete.23) lies eventually in the interval [0. y) ≤ b. 2 6. y) = . The proof is complete. The Case β = C = 0 : xn+1 = α+γxn−1 A+Bxn 91 where is some positive number.1. From Eq(6.

. C (6. (6.6) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where p= p + yn−1 . qyn + yn−1 αC γ2 n = 0. 1. (2. B .27) was investigated in [45].6 The Case β = A = 0 : xn+1 = γ yn C α+γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 This is the (2. 1. Clearly the equilibrium y is the positive solution of the quadratic equation (1 + q)y 2 − y − p = 0.29) is satisﬁed if and only if either q≤1 or q > 1 and F 2p q−1 > 0. . 2)-Type Equations 6. (6. .27) about y is zn+1 + q qy − p zn − zn−1 = 0.) Eq(6.30) (6.28) By employing Theorem 1.29) .92 Chapter 6.27) and q = (Eq(6.1 we see that y is locally asymptotically stable when (q − 1)y < 2p and unstable (a saddle point) when (q − 1)y > 2p. F (u) = (1 + q)u2 − u − p. . . The linearized equation associated with Eq(6. .1.27) has the unique positive equilibrium y= 1+ 1 + 4p(1 + q) 2(1 + q) . 1+q (y + p)(1 + q) n = 0. . If we now set it is easy to see that (6. 2)-type Eq(6.

6.30) is satisﬁed if and only if q > 1 and F 2p q−1 < 0.31) 6.6. when q > 1 + 4p. . qφ + ψ It now follows after some calculations that the following result is true: Theorem 6.27).6.32) holds. φ. .2 Eq(6.6. q−1 . be a period-two cycle of Eq(6. . . (6.1 The equilibrium y of Eq(6. if and only if q > 1 + 4p. Furthermore when (6. .32) (6. . . and more precisely a saddle point equilibrium.1 Let Existence and Local Stability of Period-Two Cycles . the period-two solution is “unique” and the values of φ and ψ are the positive roots of the quadratic equation t2 − t + p = 0. ψ.27) is locally asymptotically stable when q < 1 + 4p and unstable.6. ψ. φ. The following result is now a consequence of the above discussion and some simple calculations: Theorem 6. . . . ψ. φ. . ψ. .27) has a prime period-two solution . Then φ= p+φ qψ + φ and ψ = p+ψ . The Case β = A = 0 : xn+1 = α+γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 93 Similarly (6. φ.

ψ. . . ψ) ∂u ∂v where. evaluated at ψ We have ∂g ∂g (φ. .27) in the equivalent form: un+1 = vn vn+1 = p+un qvn +un . By a simple calculation we ﬁnd that T2 where g(u. 2)-Type Equations for n = 0. Chapter 6. φ. ψ) ∂h (φ. . . qg(u. . . and write Eq(6. the second iterate of T . Jacobian matrix JT 2 . ψ) ∂u φ JT 2 = ψ ∂h (φ. . . v) h(u. . ψ) = . φ ψ is a ﬁxed point of T 2 . Let T be the function on (0. n = 0. ∞) × (0. ψ) = − . ∂v (qψ + φ)2 . . ψ) ∂v (φ. ∂u (qψ + φ)2 ∂g (p + φ)q (φ. ∞) deﬁned by: T Then u v = v p+u qv+u . v) + v and h(u.94 To investigate the local stability of the two cycle . . v) = p+u qv + u u v = g(u. v) p+v . ψ. ∂g qψ − p (φ. v) = Clearly the two cycle is locally asymptotically stable when the eigenvalues of the φ lie inside the unit disk. 1. we set un = yn−1 and vn = yn . 1. φ. . (2.

1 that both eigenvalues of JT 2 unit disk |λ| < 1. ψ) ∂u ∂v ∂g ∂h ∂h ∂g (φ. + 2 (qψ + φ)2 ∂v (qφ + ψ) (qφ + ψ)2 Set S= and D= ∂h ∂g (φ. ψ) + (φ. Inequality (6. ψ).36) (qψ − p)(qφ + ψ)2 + (qφ − p)(qψ + φ)2 + q 2 (p + ψ)(p + φ) − (qψ − p)(qφ − p) < (qψ + φ)2 (qφ + ψ)2 which is true if and only if p (q 3 + 2q 2 − 4qp + 2q 2 p + 2p − 3q) + q − p + q 2 p2 + qp − p2 < (qψ + φ)2 (qφ + ψ)2 q−1 which is true if and only if −q 3 p + 7q 2 p − 8qp2 + 4q 2 p2 + 4p2 − 7qp + 2q 2 − q + p − q 3 < 0 which is true if and only if −(p + 1)(q − 1)(q − which is true because q > 1 + 4p. if and only if |S| < 1 + D < 2. To this end observe that (6. ψ) − (φ.34) is equivalent to (6.6. The Case β = A = 0 : xn+1 = α+γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 95 q(p + ψ)(qψ − p) ∂h (φ. First we will establish Inequality (6. ψ) = − . ψ) (φ.35) (6.33) (6.1.33) is equivalent to the following three inequalities: S <1+D −1 − D < S D < 1. p )[q − (1 + 4p)] < 0 p+1 . ψ) = . ψ) (φ. ∂u ∂v ∂v ∂u φ ψ lie inside the Then it follows from Theorem 1. ∂u (qφ + ψ)2 (qψ + φ)2 ∂h q 2 (p + φ)(p + ψ) qφ − p (φ.34).6.34) (6.

q Then p ≤ yn ≤ 1 for all n ≥ N. p ≤ yN ≤ 1.6.2 Invariant Intervals Here we show that the interval I with end points one and p is an invariant interval for q Eq(6. Then the following statements are true.27).6.3 Let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(6. More precisely we show that the values of any solution {yn }∞ n=−1 of Eq(6.27). we establish Inequality (6. Observe that (6. Observe that (6.36). Finally.27) either remain forever outside the interval I or the solution is eventually trapped into I. q .96 Chapter 6.35).35) is equivalent to −(qψ + φ)2 (qφ + ψ)2 which is true if and only if < (qψ − p)(qφ + ψ)2 + (qφ − p)2 (qψ + φ)2 + q 2 (p + ψ)(p + φ) + (qψ − p)(qφ − p) −(qψ + φ)2 (qφ + ψ)2 < p (q 3 + 4q 2 − 4qp + 2q 2 p + 2p − 3q) − p + q 2 p2 q−1 which is true if and only if q 2 + 2pq + 2p2 q 2 − p2 + qp2 − q 3 − 3q 3 p − 2q 3 p2 − p < 0 which is true if and only if p2 (−2q 3 + 2q 2 + q − 1) + p(−3q 3 + 2q − 1) − q 3 + q 2 < 0 which is true because q > 1. Theorem 6. (a) Assume that p ≤ q and that for some N ≥ 0. 2)-Type Equations Next we will establish Inequality (6. 6. (2.36) is true if and only if (qψ − p)(qφ − p) < (qψ + φ)2 (qφ + ψ)2 which is true if and only if p [q 2 − (q − 1)(q − p)] < (pq − p + q)2 q−1 which is true if and only if q(pq − p + q)(pq − 2p + q − 1) > 0 which is true because q > 1 + 4p.

Let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(6.3 Semicycle Analysis Here we present a thorough semicycle analysis of the solutions of Eq(6.27). (6.39) 2 qyn−1 (yn − p ) + (yn − 1)(yn−1 yn + qyn ) q . (a) Indeed we have yN +1 = and yN +1 = p + yN −1 p + yN −1 ≤ =1 qyN + yN −1 p + yN −1 p q p + yN −1 p = p + yN −1 q p q for all n ≥ N.6. The Case β = A = 0 : xn+1 = α+γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 97 (b) Assume that p ≥ q and that for some N ≥ 0. p 1 ≤ yN ≤ .37) yn+1 − 1 = q q qyn + yn−1 qyn−1 (1 − p ) + pq(1 − yn ) p q yn+1 − = q q(qyn + yn−1 ) yn − yn+2 = q(p + yn−1 ) + yn (qyn + yn−1 ) for n ≥ 0.27).6. (b) Clearly.6. p + yN −1 p + yN −1 ≥ = q qyN + yN −1 (pyN + p yN −1 ) p q and the proof follows by induction. 6. q Then 1 ≤ yn ≤ Proof. yN +1 = and yN +1 = p + yN −1 p + yN −1 =1 ≥ qyN + yN −1 p + yN −1 p q p + yN −1 ≤ pyN + p yN −1 q p q p p + yN −1 = p + yN −1 q 2 p + yN −1 = qyN + yN −1 and the proof follows by induction.27) relative to the equilibrium y and relative to the end points of the invariant interval of Eq(6. Then observe that the following identities are true: p − yn for n ≥ 0. for n ≥ 0. (6.38) (6.

42) The following three lemmas are now direct consequences of (6. yN ≤ p . q Lemma 6. yN ≥ p . yN = p . yN ≤ 1.41) 2 pyn−1 + yn−1 yn + pyn p(p + yn−1 ) + yn (pyn + yn−1 ) (6. Lemma 6. . then yN +2 < yN .40) the above identities reduce to the following: yn+1 − 1 = p and yn − yn+2 = (yn − 1) 1 − yn pyn + yn−1 for n ≥ 0 for n ≥ 0. 2)-Type Equations n = 0. q (ii) If for some N ≥ 0.6. then yN +1 > 1. p ] is an q q q invariant interval for Eq(6.27). (2. . (6. q (iv) If for some N ≥ 0.27).27). then yN +1 > 1. . q (v) If for some N ≥ 0. .1 Assume that p>q and let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(6. yN < p . pyn + yn−1 Chapter 6. yN > p . (viii) p 1<y< . then yN +1 < p . then yN +1 = 1. Then the following statements are true: (i) If for some N ≥ 0.2 Assume that p=q ∞ and let {yn }n=−1 be a solution of Eq(6. yN < 1. q (iii) If for some N ≥ 0. q (vi) If for some N ≥ 0. Then the following statements are true: (i) If for some N ≥ 0. (6.42). In particular [1. 1.98 When p=q that is for the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = p + yn−1 .6. p ] for n ≥ N . (vii) If for some N ≥ 0. then yN +2 > yN .37)-(6. then yn ∈ [1. then yN +1 < 1. yN ≥ 1.

yN ≤ 1. then yN +1 ≥ 1. 1] is an q q invariant interval for Eq(6.27). q (ii) If for some N ≥ 0.1-6. (vii) If for some N ≥ 0. Lemma 6.6. Then the following statements are true: (i) If for some N ≥ 0. then yN +1 = 1. yN > 1.3: . then yN +2 < yN .6.6. yN < 1. yN > 1. In particular [ p . then yN > yN +2 > 1.2 and Lemmas 6. then yN +1 > 1. yN = p . then yN +1 < 1. 1] for n ≥ N .1 and 1. yN ≤ 1. q q The following result is now a consequence of Theorems 1. (iv) If for some N ≥ 0. then yN +2 > yN . yN > p .6. yN < p . then yn ∈ [ p . q (iv) If for some N ≥ 0.6. q (vi) If for some N ≥ 0. then yN +1 > p . yN ≤ p . yN ≥ 1. then yN +1 < 1. (ix) p < y < 1. The Case β = A = 0 : xn+1 = α+γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 99 (ii) If for some N ≥ 0. then yN +1 = 1. then yN < yN +2 < 1. v) = p+v qu + v is always decreasing in u but in v it is decreasing when u < p and increasing when u > p . q Note that the function f (u. yN = 1. (v) If for some N ≥ 0.3 Assume that p<q ∞ and let {yn }n=−1 be a solution of Eq(6.7. (iii) If for some N ≥ 0.27). yN ≤ p . q (v) If for some N ≥ 0. q (viii) If for some N ≥ 0. q (iii) If for some N ≥ 0.7.

. When (6.45).44)-(6. The character of these solutions remains an open question. When (6.27) has a “unique” prime period-two solution . yn ∈ I for n ≥ N. and only then.44) (6. The above observations are summarized in the following theorem: Theorem 6. (2.6 and 1. Hence. . p<q the length is one. φ. . with φ + ψ = 1 and φψ = p . ψ. On the other hand when (6. any solution which remains forever outside the interval I = [ p .4 Global Behavior of Solutions Recall that Eq(6. every solution of Eq(6.46) Also recall that a solution {yn }∞ n=−1 of Eq(6.32) holds.6. if Theorem 6.5 (a) Assume q ≤ 1 + 4p. except for the length of the ﬁrst semicycle of the solution.31) holds.4 Let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(6.43) holds. 2)-Type Equations Then either all the even terms of the solution lie in J and all odd terms lie in K. 1] must converge to the two cycle (6.27). Let I be the closed interval p with end points 1 and q and let J and K be the intervals which are disjoint from I and such that I ∪ J ∪ K = (0. or vice-versa. (6. Eq(6. . q−1 (6.27) eventually enters and remains in the interval I.100 Chapter 6. or stays forever outside I.32) holds.45) there are no period-two solutions and so the solutions must eventually enter and remain in I and.27) is global attractor.4.27) has a unique equilibrium y which is locally stable when (6.4. in view of Theorems 1.27) either eventually enters the interval I with end points 1 and p and remains there. φ. ψ. while if p>q the length is at most two.6. must converge to y. ∞). .43) 6.32) holds. But this two cycle lies q inside the interval I. q Now when q ≤ 1 + 4p Then the equilibrium y of Eq(6. .7.6. . when (6. (6. or for some N ≥ 0.

7. (b) Assume p + q > 1. 1+y So y = 0 is always an equilibrium point. (6.1 (a) Assume p + q ≤ 1.1: Theorem 6.47) was investigated in [52].7 The Case α = C = 0 : xn+1 = A yn B βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn This is the (2. 1 + yn n = 0. Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(6. .47).1 and the linearized stability Theorem 1. . The Case α = C = 0 : xn+1 = (b) Assume βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn 101 q > 1 + 4p. 2)-type equation Eq(6. 1. More precisely it is a saddle point when 1−p<q <1+p and a repeller when q > 1 + p. . Then every solution of Eq(6.3. y = p + q − 1 is the only positive equilibrium point of Eq(6.47) is globally asymptotically stable.1.7) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where pyn + qyn−1 .47) is unstable. 1].6.7.) The equilibrium points of Eq(6. A A (Eq(6.27) eventually enters and remains in the interval [ p . Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(6. The following result follows from Theorem 1.47) are the solutions of the equation p= y= py + qy . and when p + q > 1. . q 6.47) β γ and q = .

remains in this interval. . q . p ]. Concerning prime period-two solutions it follows from Sections 2. . . p ].3 (a) Assume that q < 1. [ p . ψ ∈ (p. φ. The case is treated in Section 6.48) Furthermore when (6.47) eventually enters the interval [ p .2 Eq(6.7. ψ. That is. (6. q (0. Then the positive equilibrium y = p + q − 1 of Eq(6.49) The main result here is the following theorem about Eq(6.50) Then every solution of Eq(6. q (b) Assume that q > 1. .7.47) with q = 1. (2.51) Then every solution of Eq(6. φ−p 6. Then the positive equilibrium y = p + q − 1 of Eq(6.7.47). (6.47) is locally asymptotically stable. .47) eventually enters the interval (0.48) holds. ψ. p ] is an invariant interval for Eq(6.47).1 Invariant Intervals q=1 (6.47) q with initial conditions in (0.102 (c) Assume Chapter 6. Furtherq more. 2)-Type Equations 1 − p < q < 1 + p. . the values of φ and ψ of all prime period-two solutions are given by: pφ {φ. ∞) : ψ = = 2p}.47) has a prime period-two solution . if and only if q = 1 + p. every solution of Eq(6.47) is an unstable saddle point.3.5 that the following result is true: Theorem 6. Theorem 6. (d) Assume q > 1 + p. ∞). φ. Furthermore. (6.7. ∞) is an invariant interval for Eq(6.

4 Suppose Let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a positive solution of Eq(6. ∞). Then for any k. qm q 6.51) holds. y refers to the positive equilibrium p + q − 1 of Eq(6. ∞) → [0. yk ≥ and yk+2 ≤ p p =⇒ yk+2 ≥ p > q q p p =⇒ yk > m+1 > p. Then the following statements are true for every n ≥ 0: p + q > 1 and q ≤ 1. ∞) denote the function f (x. that is. m ∈ N. ∞) deﬁned by g(x) = (p + q)x . ∞) → [0. Hereafter. Let f : [0. Theorem 6. m q q (b) Assume that (6. whose proof is straightforward and will be omitted.47). Then for any k.1 (a) Assume that (6. y) = px + qy .2 Here we discuss the behavior of the semicycles of solutions of Eq(6.47) when p + q > 1 and q ≤ 1.7. (x − x)(f (x.6. ∞) − {x}.7.7. 1+x Semicycle Analysis of Solutions When q ≤ 1 Then f satisﬁes the negative feedback condition. yk ≤ and yk+2 ≥ p p =⇒ yk+2 ≤ p < q q p p =⇒ yk > m+1 > p. Consider the function g : [0. The Case α = C = 0 : xn+1 = βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn 103 The proof of the above theorem is an elementary consequence of the following lemma.7. Lemma 6. . x) − x) < 0 for x ∈ (0. 1+x Observe that g(y) = y and that g increases on [0.50) holds. ∞) × [0. m ∈ N.47).

yn ≤ y. we obtain q yn+1 = pyn + qyn−1 pyn + qy ≥ ≥ g(y) = y. Then yn+1 = y . 2−q Chapter 6. min{yn−1 . yn . yn } pyn + qyn−1 ≤ = max{yn−1 . 1 + yn 1 + yn 1 + yn Since q ≤ 1 and yn−1 < y. Then yn+1 = pyn + qyn−1 (p + q)yn (1 + y)yn < = < yn . yn }. (2. (a) Suppose y ≤ yn−1 . yn } ≤ yn+1 < y. (p + q) max{yn−1 . (b) Suppose yn−1 . which is equivalent to q ≤ 1. 1 + yn 1+y Observe that all inequalities are strict if we assume that yn−1 < y or yn < y. yn } pyn + qyn−1 ≥ = min{yn−1 .104 (a) If y ≤ yn−1 . Thus px+qyn−1 1+x p − qyn−1 > p − qy = (1 − q)(p + q) ≥ 0. increases in x and so pyn + qyn−1 pyn−1 + qyn−1 > = g(yn−1 ) > yn−1 . Then in view of the previous case yn+1 = and pyn + qy pyn + qyn−1 ≤ < g(y) = y 1 + yn 1 + yn (p + q) min{yn−1 . (c) If yn−1 < y ≤ yn . yn ≤ y. yn }. 1 + yn 1 + yn Since the function Observe that all inequalities are strict if we assume that yn−1 > y or yn > y. (b) If yn−1 . . yn < yn+1 < yn−1 . 1 + yn 1+y px + qx . 1 + yn 1 + yn−1 yn+1 = The last inequality follows from the negative feedback property. yn+1 = (c) Suppose yn−1 < y ≤ yn . 1+x is increasing for y < p . yn . (e) If y < yk < Proof. yn−1 < yn+1 < yn . for every k ≥ −1. then {yn } decreases to the equilibrium y. yn }. 2)-Type Equations then then then then y ≤ yn+1 ≤ max{yn−1 . (d) If yn < y ≤ yn−1 .

Then px+qyn−1 increases in x and so 1+x yn+1 = pyn−1 + qyn−1 pyn + qyn−1 ≤ < yn−1 . Then yn+1 = (e) Observe that yn+1 = and so from which the result follows.7. . we must consider two cases: Case 1. Here we discuss the behavior of the solutions of Eq(6. yn−1 ≥ qyn−1 > y + (q − 1)yn > yn 2 pyn + qyn−1 qyn−1 (yn + 1) < ≤ yn−1 .52) holds.47) when Here the positive equilibrium of Eq(6. (a) Assume y−1 ≥ p and y0 ≥ p.6.52) holds. To see that yn+1 < yn−1 .47) is y = p. (c) Assume either y−1 < p < y0 or y−1 > p > y0 . Then the equilibrium y of Eq(6.3 Semicycle Analysis and Global Attractivity When q = 1 q = 1.47) is globally asymptotically stable. Then yn ≤ p for all n > 0 and (6. Theorem 6. Then {yn }∞ n=−1 oscillates about the equilibrium p with semicycles of length one and (6. Suppose p − qyn−1 < 0.5 Suppose that q = 1 and let y−1 + y0 > 0. 1 + yn 1 + yn−1 The last inequality follows from the negative feedback property. Suppose p − qyn−1 ≥ 0. Case 2.7. Then yn ≥ p for all n > 0 and n→∞ lim yn = p. The Case α = C = 0 : xn+1 = (d) Suppose yn < y ≤ yn−1 . Then yn+1 = βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn 105 pyn + qyn pyn + qyn−1 > = g(yn ) > yn 1 + yn 1 + yn by the negative feedback property. 1 + yn 1 + yn pyn + qyn−1 >y =p+q−1 1 + yn 6. More precisely the following statements are true.7.52) (b) Assume y−1 ≤ p and y0 ≤ p. (6.

≥ p and y0 > y2 > y4 > . Next.106 Chapter 6. (a) The case where y−1 = y0 = p is trivial. . As Eq(6. since y−1 + py0 > y−1 + y−1 y0 then y1 = py0 + y−1 > y−1 1 + y0 . . The proof when y0 < p < y−1 is similar and will be omitted. (b) The proof of (b) is similar to the proof of (a) and will be omitted. Then y1 = and py0 + p py0 + y−1 ≥ = p. > p. . y−1 ≥ p implies that y2 = py0 + y−1 ≤ y−1 y0 + y−1 and so y−1 y0 + y−1 py0 + y−1 ≤ = y−1 . (c) Assume y−1 < p < y0 . 1 + y0 1 + y0 Similarly. it follows that m = M = p and the proof of part (a) is complete. Thus. 1 + y0 1 + y0 and py1 + p py1 + y0 > = p. we claim that the subsequence {y2k+1 }∞ k=−1 is increasing. The case y−1 > p and y0 ≥ p is similar and will be omitted. 1 + y0 1 + y0 py1 + y0 py1 + p > = p. there exist m ≥ p and M ≥ p such that k→∞ lim y2k+1 = m and k→∞ lim y2k = M. It is interesting to note that y−1 = p ⇒ y2k+1 = p for k ≥ 0 and y0 = p ⇒ y2k = p for k ≥ 0. (2. 1 + y1 1 + y1 It follows by induction that yn ≥ p for all n > 0.47) has no period-two solutions when q = 1. . y2 = 1 + y1 1 + y1 It follows by induction that the solution oscillates about p with semicycles of length one. py0 + y−1 py0 + p y1 = < = p. we can show that y2 < y0 and by induction y1 = y−1 ≥ y1 ≥ y3 ≥ . and so convergent. Furthermore. In fact. 2)-Type Equations Proof. We will assume that y−1 ≥ p and y0 > p.

Concerning the long-term behavior of solutions of Eq(6.47) is global attractor of all positive solutions of Eq(6. 2 6. In a similar way we can show that the subsequence {y2k }∞ is decreasing. .6 Assume 1 − p < q < 1. m = M . there exist m ≤ p and M ≥ p such k=0 that lim y2k+1 = m and lim y2k = M k→∞ k→∞ and as in (a).7. every positive solution of Eq(6. y) = px + qy 1+x satisﬁes the hypotheses of Theorem 1. ∞).47) we may assume. and so convergent. Observe that the consistency condition y ≤ p is equivalent to the condition q q ≤ 1. without loss of generality.4 Global Attractivity When q < 1 1 − p < q < 1. that y−1 . Proof.7.5 Long-term Behavior of Solutions When q > 1 q>1 Here we discuss the behavior of the solutions of Eq(6. q In this case. 2 6.47).6. ∞). Then every positive solution of Eq(6.7. Theorem 6. Thus.47) converges to the positive equilibrium y.47) when which is equivalent to p y> . Here we consider the case where and we show that the equilibrium point y = p + q − 1 of Eq(6.47) lies eventually in the interval [p.7.3 (a) we may assume that the initial conditions y−1 and y0 lie in the interval I = (0. By Theorem 6.7. p ]. The Case α = C = 0 : xn+1 = βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn 107 and the claim follows by induction.4. y0 ∈ [p.5 in the interval I from which the result follows. Now clearly the function q f (x.

7.47) converges to a period-two solution. 2)-Type Equations p(q − 1) + qun−1 1 + p + un (6.47). Then every positive solution of Eq(6. (b) Assume 1 < q < 1 + p.53) where un ≥ 0 for n ≥ 0.108 Then the change of variable yn = un + p. By applying the results of Section 6.8 (a) Assume q = 1 + p.7 After the ﬁrst semicycle.5.47) to the equation un+1 = Chapter 6. The character of solutions of Eq(6. we obtain the following theorems about the solutions of Eq(6.53). .53) was investigated in Section 6.47) oscillates about the positive equilibrium y with semicycles of length one. Then Eq(6. (2. an oscillatory solution of Eq(6. transforms Eq(6. Theorem 6. (c) Assume q > 1 + p.47) has unbounded solutions.7. Then every solution of Eq(6.5 to Eq(6.47) converges to the positive equilibrium of Eq(6.47) when q > 1: Theorem 6.

54) is locally asymptotically stable.55) holds.54) is globally asymptotically stable. q+y So y = 0 is always an equilibrium point of Eq(6. .1 and 1. the positive equilibrium y = p + 1 − q of Eq(6.6.54) and so we will assume without further mention that (6.54) are the solutions of the equation y= py + y .54) and q = (Eq(6.1 (a) Assume p + 1 ≤ q. 1. . 2)-type Eq(6.3. (6.8 The Case α = B = 0 : xn+1 = xn = γ yn C This is the (2.55) holds and y−1 + y0 > 0.8. . In the remainder of this section we will investigate the character of the positive equilibrium of Eq(6. . (b) Assume p + 1 > q. Eq(6. A .8) which by the change of variables reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where p= pyn + yn−1 .54) also possesses the unique positive equilibrium y = p + 1 − q.) The equilibrium points of Eq(6. The Case α = B = 0 : xn+1 = βxn +γxn−1 A+Cxn−1 109 βxn +γxn−1 A+Cxn−1 6. q + yn−1 β γ n = 0.54) is unstable and the positive equilibrium y = p + 1 − q of Eq(6.54) is globally asymptotically stable. Our goal is to show that when (6. γ (6. Furthermore the zero equilibrium is a saddle point when 1−p<q <1+p and a repeller when q < 1 − p.54) was investigated in [53]. Theorem 6.55) Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(6.1.8.1.54) and when p + 1 > q. Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(6. The following result follows from Theorems 1.

(6. p + yn−1 n = 0.1 Invariant Intervals and Semicycle Analysis Let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a positive solution of Eq(6.58) reduce to the following: yn+1 − 1 = (yn − 1) and yn+1 − yn = (1 − yn ) p p + yn−1 yn−1 p + yn−1 for n ≥ 0 for n ≥ 0.110 Chapter 6.59) the identities (6. for n ≥ 0. Then the following identities are easily established: q yn − p yn+1 − 1 = p for n ≥ 0. (6. When p=q that is for the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = pyn + yn−1 . (6.60) (6.8.56)-(6. (6. . (2.57) and yn+1 − yn = (p − q)yn + (1 − yn )yn−1 q + yn−1 (6. Lemma 6.54) is such that: < 1 if p < q < p + 1 y is = 1 if p = q > 1 if p > q.62) and let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a positive solution of Eq(6. .54).8.58) Note that the positive equilibrium y =p+1−q of Eq(6.56) q + yn−1 q p2 [yn − p ] + (p − q)yn−1 q yn+1 − = p p(q + yn−1 ) 2 for n ≥ 0. .54). 2)-Type Equations 6. 1.1 Assume that p<q (6.61) The following three lemmas are now direct consequences of the above identities. Then the following statements are true: .

q (ii) If for some N ≥ 0. Then the following statements are true: (i) If y0 < 1. Lemma 6. yN > p . yn < 1 and the solution is strictly increasing. Lemma 6. yN = p .8.54). then yN +1 = 1. p q then yN +1 > p . then yN +1 < yN . (iv) If for some N ≥ 0. then for n ≥ 0.54). yn > 1 and the solution is strictly decreasing. q (ii) If for some N ≥ 0.2 Assume that p=q (6. then yN +1 < 1. p q then yN +1 < p . yN ≥ 1. then yN +1 > yN . (v) If for some N ≥ 0. yN ≥ 1. then yN +1 = 1. then yN +1 < 1. q (iii) If for some N ≥ 0.64) and let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a positive solution of Eq(6.3 Assume that p>q (6. then for n ≥ 0. then yN +1 < 1. yN = p . then yn = 1 for n ≥ 0.6. yN < p . (ii) If y0 = 1. . then yN +1 > 1.63) and let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a positive solution of Eq(6. yN < p .8. (v) If for some N ≥ 0. yN ≤ 1. yN > p . Then the following statements are true: q (i) If for some N ≥ 0. (iv) If for some N ≥ 0. yN > q 2 . q (iii) If for some N ≥ 0. The Case α = B = 0 : xn+1 = βxn +γxn−1 A+Cxn−1 111 q (i) If for some N ≥ 0. (vi) If for some N ≥ 0. yN > q 2 . yN ≤ 1.8. then yN +1 > 1. (vi) If for some N ≥ 0. then yN +1 > q p and yN +2 > 1. (iii) If y0 > 1.

2 Assume that p + 1 > q and that y−1 + y0 > 0.1. Here it is clear from Lemma 6.8. .8.1 that if a solution {yn }∞ n=−1 is such that yn ≥ 1 for all n ≥ 0 then the solution decreases and its limit lies in the interval [1. 2)-Type Equations 6. v) = pu + v q+v is increasing in both arguments and by Theorem 1.2 that every solution of Eq(6. it follows from Lemma 6. Hence.54) eventually enters and remains in the interval (1.8. (2. When (6. 2)-type equation was investigated in Section 6.54) converges to the equilibrium y = 1.2 Global Stability of the Positive Equilibrium When (6.8. q+1 From the above observations and in view of Theorem 6. ∞). (6. ∞). 1. y is a global attractor. 1) the function f (u.63) holds. Without loss of generality we will assume that yn > 1 for n ≥ −1.65) with positive parameters and positive initial conditions.3. .54) eventually enters and remains in the interval (0. assume that (6.8. This (2.64) holds.8.3 that every solution converges to its positive equilibrium u= p−q . . Now in the interval (0. every positive solution of Eq(6.3 that every solution of Eq(6. 1). it follows from Lemma 6.62) holds.8.8. Next. Then we can see that {un }∞ n=−1 satisﬁes the diﬀerence equation un+1 = p−q (q+1)2 + p u q+1 n 1 + un−1 .1 we have the following result: Theorem 6. by Lemma 6. Set yn = 1 + (q + 1)un for n ≥ −1.54) is globally asymptotically stable. Then the positive equilibrium y = p + 1 − q of Eq(6. n = 0.4.3 where we established in Theorem 6.112 Chapter 6. This is impossible because y < 1. .

6.9. .66) is locally asymptotically stable. (6. By applying the linearized stability Theorem 1.1 (a) Assume that p > q.66) about y is zn+1 − p−q p−q zn + zn−1 = 0. 2)-type Eq(6.1.9.68) (6. qyn + yn−1 n = 0. . . . 1. γ C To avoid a degenerate situation we will also assume that p= p = q.9) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the equation yn+1 = where pyn + yn−1 .1 we obtain the following result: Theorem 6. Then the positive equilibrium of Eq(6.66) is y= p+1 q+1 and the linearized equation of Eq(6. (p + 1)(q + 1) (p + 1)(q + 1) n = 0.66) is locally asymptotically stable when q < pq + 1 + 3p and is unstable (and more precisely a saddle point equilibrium) when q > pq + 1 + 3p. .) The only equilibrium point of Eq(6.66) B β and q = .67) . . (b) Assume that p < q. (Eq(6.66) was investigated in [54]. .9 The Case α = A = 0 : xn+1 = γ yn C This is the (2. The Case α = A = 0 : xn+1 = βxn +γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 113 βxn +γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 6. (6. Then the positive equilibrium of Eq(6. 1.

ψ. .9. One can see that ψ JT 2 φ ψ = (p−q)ψ − (qψ+φ)2 (p−q) ψ − (qψ+φ)2 (qφ+ψ)2 2 2 (p−q)φ (qψ+φ)2 (p−q)φ (qφ+ψ)2 (p−q)ψ (qψ+φ)2 −1 . . On the other hand when p<q and q > pq + 1 + 3p.114 Chapter 6. v) = = . qv Let T be the function on (0. evaluated at lie inside the unit disk. .69) where the values of φ and ψ are the (positive and distinct) solutions of the quadratic equation p(1 − p) (6. ∞) × (0.66) has no prime period-two solutions. v) h(u. . n = 0.66) possesses a unique prime period-two solution: . . . φ. and write Eq(6. Eq(6. . the second iterate of T . 1. Eq(6. .5 that when p > q. φ. ∞) deﬁned by: T Then u v = φ ψ u v g(u. ψ. v) = qv + u and h(u.70) t2 − (1 − p)t + = 0. . . we set un = yn−1 and vn = yn for n = 0. (2. .1 Existence of a Two Cycle It follows from Section 2. v) p pv+u + v qv+u q pv+u + v qv+u v pv+u qv+u . . The prime period-two solution (6. .66) in the equivalent form: un+1 = vn n +un vn+1 = pvn +un . (6.69) is asymptotically stable if the eigenvalues of the φ Jacobian matrix JT 2 . is a ﬁxed point of T 2 . q−1 In order to investigate the stability nature of this prime period-two solution. . One can see that T2 where pv + u g(u. 1. 2)-Type Equations 6.

We will use the fact that φ + ψ = 1 − p.71) (6.1.9. (qφ + ψ)2 p−q (qψ + φ)2 φ ψ = and Q = and its characteristic equation is Pφ −P ψ −P Qψ 2 P Qφψ − Qφ λ2 + (P ψ + Qφ − P Qφψ)λ + P Qφψ = 0. By applying Theorem 1.6. The Case α = A = 0 : xn+1 = Set P = Then JT 2 βxn +γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 115 p−q .72) φ ψ and ψ = Inequality (6.72) is always true. Observe that φ > 0.71) is equivalent to (p − q)φ (p − q)ψ + +1>0 (qψ + φ)2 (qφ + ψ)2 which is true if and only if (q − p)[(qφ + ψ)2 ψ + (qψ + φ)2 φ] < (qψ + φ)2 (qφ + ψ)2 . it follows that both eigenvalues of JT 2 lie inside the unit disk if and only if |P ψ + Qφ − P Qφψ| < 1 + P Qφψ < 2 or equivalently if and only if the following three inequalities hold: P ψ + Qφ + 1 > 0 P ψ + Qφ < 1 + 2P Qφψ and P Qφψ < 1.73) (6. qφ + ψ (6. Next we will establish Inequality (6.1 (c). P < 0 and Q < 0 and so Inequality (6. φ= pψ + φ qψ + φ φψ = p(1 − p) q−1 pφ + ψ . ψ > 0.71).

Now observe that the lefthand side of (6. Finally. 2)-Type Equations (q − p)[(qφ + ψ)(pφ + ψ) + (qψ + φ)(pψ + φ)] < [(qφ + ψ)(qψ + φ)]2 .68) holds.74) = (q − p)(1 − p)2 (qp + 1 + 2p). Inequality (6. (2. = [q(φ + ψ)2 + (q − 1)2 φψ]2 (q − p) φψ < (1 − p)(q − p) .71) is true if and only if (6.116 if and only if Chapter 6.74) is p(1 − p) (p − 1)(q − 1)] q−1 (6. II = [(qψ + φ)(qφ + ψ)]2 = [(q 2 + 1)ψφ + q(φ2 + ψ 2 )]2 = [q(1 − p)2 + (q − 1)p(1 − p)]2 Hence.73) is equivalent to (p − q)2 φψ < (qψ + φ)2 (qφ + ψ)2 which is true if and only if (q − p) φψ < (qψ + φ)(qφ + ψ) if and only if if and only if if and only if if and only if (q − p) φψ < (q 2 + 1)φψ + q(φ2 + ψ 2 ) (q − p) φψ < (q 2 + 1)φψ + q[(φ + ψ)2 − 2φψ] (q − p) φψ < (q − 1)2 φψ + q(φ + ψ)2 (q − p) φψ < (q − 1)2 if and only if p(1 − p) + q(1 − p)2 q−1 = (1 − p)2 (q − p)2 .74) is I = (q − p)[(qp + 1)(φ2 + ψ 2 ) + 2(p + q)φψ] = (q − p)[(qp + 1)(φ + ψ)2 − 2φψ(qp + 1 − p − q)] = (q − p)[(qp + 1)(1 − p)2 − 2 The righthand side of (6. Inequality (6.

ψ. . where φ and ψ are the two positive and distinct roots of the quadratic Eq(6. . Then {yn } oscillates about the equilibrium y with semicycles of length two or three.3 Let {yn } be a nontrivial solution of Eq(6.9.4 Assume that p<q and (6. except possibly for the ﬁrst semicycle which may have length one. or {yn } converges monotonically to y. y) is increasing in y and decreasing in x. (b) Assume p < q. 6. .2 Assume that Condition (6. y) = qx + y is increasing in x and decreasing in y. 6.9. after the ﬁrst semicycle.3 Global Stability Analysis When p < q The main result in this section is the following Theorem 6.35). Then the positive equilibrium y of Eq(6.9. This function also satisﬁes Condition (1.1 by observing that when p < q.66) is globally asymptotically stable. Then the following statements are true: (a) Assume p > q.67) holds. . the following result is true about the local stability of the prime periodtwo solution (6.66).66).66): Theorem 6. In summary. .9. Furthermore this prime period-two solution is locally asymptotically stable. The extreme in each semicycle occurs in the ﬁrst term if the semicycle has two terms and in the second term if the semicycle has three terms. The Case α = A = 0 : xn+1 = if and only if βxn +γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 117 p(1 − p) < (1 − p)2 q−1 if and only if q > pq + 1 which is clearly true.9. φ.6. Theorem 6.7. the function 2 f (x.68) holds. we present a semicycle analysis of the solutions of Eq(6. .66) posseses the prime period-two solution .2 Semicycle Analysis In this section. . (a) The proof follows from Theorem 1. ψ. φ.69) of Eq(6.9.7.70). (b) The proof follows from Theorem 1.4 by observing that the condition p > q implies that the function px + y f (x. Then Eq(6. Then either {yn } oscillates about the equilibrium y with semicycles of length one. Proof.

.67). qx + y from which we conclude that limk→∞ yN +2k = ψ and limk→∞ yN +2k+1 = φ.4.5 Assume that (6. ψ. 2 Next we want to ﬁnd more cases where the conclusion of the last theorem holds. and increasing in y for each ﬁxed x. y) is decreasing in x for each ﬁxed y. . .68) holds.. with φ < ψ. Let φ.9. . . denote the two cycle of Eq(6. Eq(6. y) = Then clearly. Set f (x.6 and the fact that y is locally asymptotically stable.68) holds. . Assume that (6. and lim inf yn = φ n→∞ Now as in the proof of Theorem 1. yN +2 = f (yN +1 . ψ. yN +1 ) ≤ f (ψ.66) converge to the two cycle (6. y) = px + y . Theorem 6. Also clearly. (6. (6.66) and for some index N ≥ −1. Proof. φ. .9. y) ≤ 1 for all x.75) yN ≥ ψ and yN +1 ≤ φ. We consider ﬁrst the case where eventually consecutive terms yi .. ψ) = ψ.6 lim sup yn = ψ n→∞ px + y . (2.75) holds. yN +3 = f (yN +2 .67).4. Then this solution converges to the two cycle φ. ψ. yN ) ≥ f (φ.4. . . y > 0. qx + y Chapter 6.69) when instead of (6. q Finally in view of (6. 2 The method employed in the proof of Theorem 1.6 can also be used to establish that certain solutions of Eq(6. Now the conclusion of Theorem 6. p ≤ f (x. φ. Set f (x. yi+1 lie between m and M .66).4 follows as a consequence of Theorem 1. . .118 Proof. ψ.66) has no prime period-two solution. 2)-Type Equations and note that f (x. Assume that for some solution {yn }∞ n=−1 of Eq(6. φ) = φ and in general yN +2k ≥ ψ and yN +2k+1 ≤ φ for k = 0. 1.

Using the monotonic character of the function f we have m = f (M. m= 2 Since the case in which the solution lies outside of the interval [m. m) ≤ f (yi+1 .1 Suppose that for some i ≥ 0. we are left with the case in which the solution lies eventually in [m. Since the proofs are similar for all cases we will give the details in case (A). then we have one of the following four cases: (A) y2n > M and M ≥ y2n+1 > m for every n. qM − p = m and the proof is complete. . M ] is answered by Theorem 6. Proof. (C) y2n < m and m ≤ y2n+1 < M for every n. . M ] (that is. ψ. (B) y2n+1 > M and M ≥ y2n > m for every n.9. for every i. From Eq(6.9. M ) = M. Then yk ∈ [m. yi ) = yi+2 ≤ f (m. . yi+1 ≤ M. M ) = pm + M qm + M for m we ﬁnd Thus. either yi > M and yi+1 < m or yi < m and yi+1 > M ). . (D) y2n+1 < m and m ≤ y2n < M for every n.2 In all cases (A)-(D) the corresponding solution {yn } converges to the two cycle . . Lemma 6. ψ. . φ.9. m ≤ yi . M ]. By our earlier observation we have that M ≥ lim supi→∞ yi . Hence limn→∞ y2n = M .9. The Case α = A = 0 : xn+1 = βxn +γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 119 Lemma 6. . M ] and if we never get two successive terms outside of the interval [m. n→∞ qM − p On the other hand by solving the equation M = f (m. Proof. and the result follows by induction. qy2n+2 − p M − M2 lim y2n+1 = .66) we have y2n+1 = and so y2n − y2n y2n+2 . 2 If we never get two successive terms in the interval [m.6. M ] for every k > i.5. and so M ≥ lim supn→∞ y2n ≥ lim inf n→∞ y2n ≥ M. φ. limn→∞ y2n+1 M − M2 .

ψ. φ. which of course depends on y. Proof. . y) = y.9. y) > y if and only if x < y . y ) > y and y > y. as the following results show. y) = y. We denote this value by y . . 2)-Type Equations Lemma 6. φ. and the sequence {yi+2k+1 } is a non increasing sequence and bounded below by m.76) has a q unique positive solution for x. ψ. In view of the uniqueness of the two cycle and the fact that at least one of yi . yi ) = yi+2 and yi+5 = f (yi+4 . Then {yn } converges to the two cycle . .The case M ≥ yi+3 ≥ yi+1 ≥ y ≥ yi ≥ yi+2 ≥ m is handled in a similar way. . so we are led to the general equation f (x. . (3) For y < y < M. Thus. In this case we need to know more about the condition yi+2 = f (yi+1 . Thus f (y . yi+1 ) = yi+3 . (2. 2 Using a similar technique one can prove that if M ≥ yi ≥ yi+2 ≥ y ≥ yi+3 ≥ yi+1 ≥ m or M ≥ yi+1 ≥ yi+3 ≥ y ≥ yi+2 ≥ yi ≥ m we would get convergence to y . yi ) ≤ yi . both subsequences converge and their limits form a two cycle. but this situation cannot occur. f (y.9. yi+3 ) ≤ f (yi+2 . The correspondence between y and y has the following properties: Lemma 6. (2) x > y if and only if x < y . (6.120 Chapter 6.76) It makes sense to consider this equation only for y ∈ ( p . in which case Eq(6. the sequence {yi+2k } is non decreasing and bounded above by M . Here we have yi+4 = f (yi+3 . y ) < y and y > y . yi+2 ) ≥ f (yi+1 .3 Suppose M ≥ yi+2 ≥ yi ≥ y ≥ yi+1 ≥ yi+3 ≥ m and not both yi+2 and yi+3 are equal to y. . Let us consider the ﬁrst case. Therefore. and for m < y < y. the proof is complete. Induction on i then establishes the monotonicity of the two sequences. 1). Proof. . yi+1 is diﬀerent from y. The second case can be handled in a similar way. f (y.4 (1) f (x.

y ) < y . y ) < y . y ) we get px + x − x2 = qx − p qx + x−x2 qx−p x−x2 qx−p . M ≥ yi ≥ yi+2 ≥ y ≥ yi+1 ≥ m. y ) > y . y) = y.9. y < y < M ⇒ f (y. y) = y.5 Assume that for some i. y. . Then yi+3 ≤ yi+1 with equality only in the case of a two cycle. (3) Eliminating y from the equations y = f (y . y < y . (2) Solving f (y . Hence q m < y < y ⇒ f (y. y ) < 1. f (y. g (y) < 0. so the roots of the numerator are not real. y>y . Clearly as y approaches p y approaches ∞. and for y < y < M. 2 Now we will use this result to prove the following: Lemma 6. By (1) then. y) and y = f (y. M . However q p < f (y. x < y if and only if f (x. so y is decreasing function q of y. The Case α = A = 0 : xn+1 = βxn +γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 121 (1) Since f is decreasing in the ﬁrst variable and f (y . y) = y for y gives y = g(y) = Computing the derivative of g we get g (y) = − p − 2y + qy 2 . y) > f (y .6. y ) > y . (p − qy)2 y − y2 . 1). Thus each of these roots is simple and so f (y. M < y <⇒ f (y.9. y ) − y changes sign as y passes each of these values. for m < y < y. For y ∈ ( p . Simplifying this equation we get a fourth degree polynomial equation with roots 0. m. Thus for y < m. qy − p The discriminant of the numerator is 4p2 − 4pq = 4p(p − q) < 0.

If c = y. as well as 2 yi+3 = yi+1 .. . it follows by Theorem 6. yi ) ≥ f (yi+1 . To show yi+3 = f (yi+2 .9. yi+1 ). We also obtain the following lemma: Lemma 6. Proof. Thus equality occurs only in the case of a two cycle. and solving for yi+2n we see yi+2n = y also.69). and our solution is a two cycle.9. Remark.66) are generated by initial values {y−1 . y0 } that are on opposite sides of the equilibrium y. and by (3) yi ≥ yi . Then every oscillatory solution of Eq(6. ≥ yi+3 ≥ yi+1 ≥ . solving for limn→∞ yi+2n gives limn→∞ yi+2n = M . ≥ yi+2 ≥ yi ≥ y ≥ .122 Chapter 6. . so either c = y or c = m. then yi+2n+1 = y for all n. 2)-Type Equations Proof.6 Unless {yn } is a period-two solution.6 Assume that p < q. we must show yi+2 ≥ yi+1 . . Thus yi ≥ yi+1 .66) converges to this two cycle. . .66) possesses the two-cycle solution (6. Thus by (2) of the previous lemma yi ≥ yi+1 . Since {yi+2k+1 } is a bounded monotonic sequence it has a limit c. as required. Since f is increasing in the second argument and yi ≥ yi+1 we get yi+2 = f (yi+1 . This can only happen if yi+2n = M 2 for all n. since m ≤ yi+1 ≤ y. Since yi+2 = f (yi+1 . ≥ y ≥ yi+1 ≥ yi+3 ≥ . . By (3) of the previous lemma. . But then yi = yi+1 = y. . The case m ≤ yi ≤ yi+2 ≤ y ≤ yi+1 ≤ M is similar. f (yi+1 . in which case yi+2n+1 = m for all n. yi+1 ) ≥ yi+1 . Thus yi+2 ≥ yi+1 . The above sequence of lemmas leads to the following result: Theorem 6. yi+1 ) ≤ yi+1 . If c = m. To get equality we must have yi+1 = yi or equivalently yi+2 = yi . ≥ m. there is no i such that either M ≥ yi ≥ yi+2 ≥ . . . The value c will be one value in a two cycle. the second case is similar.6 that all such pairs belong to the stable manifold of the two cycle. which also gives a two cycle.9. . (2. We will consider the ﬁrst case. Since some of the oscillatory solutions of Eq(6. we have yi+1 ≥ yi . yi ) ≤ yi . and that Eq(6. ≥ m. or M ≥ .

4.77) holds. Proof. cxn + dxn−1 n = 0. 1.5. y) is increasing in x for each ﬁxed y. .7 Assume that p>q and p ≤ pq + 1 + 3q. qM + m m= pm + M . d ∈ R.4.10 Open Problems and Conjectures a. . Now the result is a consequence of Theorem 1. set f (x. . Then the positive equilibrium y of Eq(6.6.66) is globally asymptotically stable. . investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic ∞ nature of the solution {xn }n=−1 . 2 pM + m .1 (See [64]) Assume that (a) Investigate the forbidden set F of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = axn + bxn−1 xn .10. y) ≤ p q for all x. c. / (b) For every point (x−1 . y) = px + y . .10. Finally observe that when (6.4 Global Stability Analysis When p > q Here we have the following result: Theorem 6. b. x0 ) ∈ F. qm + M 6. the function f (x. y > 0. Open Problem 6. We will employ Theorem 1. qx + y (6. the only solution of the system M= is m = M. To this end. Also 1 ≤ f (x.9.5.77) and observe that when p > q. and is decreasing in y for each ﬁxed x. Open Problems and Conjectures 123 6.9.

) Conjecture 6. Show that every positive solution of Eq(6.3. See also [36].10. (Note that by Theorem 6. (See Section 1.124 (See Section 1. . Show that the equation yn+1 = p + yn−1 .4.2. ∞). .6. . 1.1 Assume p. . .10) has a ﬁnite limit. An . .3.4.10.6 for the autonomous case. (Note that by Theorem 6. . 2)-Type Equations Open Problem 6.3 Assume p ∈ (0.10. (Note that by Theorem 6. An + Bn xn n = 0. has a positive and monotonically decreasing solution. .2 Assume that αn . Show that every positive solution of Eq(6. (2. every positive solution converges to a. q ∈ (0. 1. 1 + yn n = 0. . Investigate the forbidden set and the asymptotic character of solutions of the nonautonomous Riccati equation xn+1 = αn + βn xn . not necessarily prime. βn . ∞). 1.) . Bn ∈ R for n = 0.) Conjecture 6.2 Assume that p. this conjecture has been conﬁrmed for q ≤ 1 + 4p.) Conjecture 6.10.) Chapter 6. are convergent sequences of real numbers with ﬁnite limits.11) has a ﬁnite limit.5. period-two solution. q ∈ (0. ∞). we need only to conﬁrm this conjecture for p > 2(q +1) and q ≥ 1. .

q ∈ (0. q ∈ (0.9. Conjecture 6.6.10. (Note that by Theorem 6. (See Section 6.5 Assume p > q. Show that every positive solution of Eq(6. ∞) and q > pq + 1 + 3p. 125 Show that every positive solution of Eq(6.10.27) either converges to a ﬁnite limit or to a two cycle.5 Find the set of all initial conditions (y−1 . .27). Find the basin of attraction of the period-two solution of Eq(6. as n → ∞. this conjecture has been conﬁrmed for p ≤ pq + 1 + 3q.10.4 Assume that p. ∞).3 Assume that p.66). q ∈ (0.10.7.) Open Problem 6. y0 ) ∈ R × R through which the solution of the equation yn+1 = yn + yn−1 1 + yn is well deﬁned and converges to 1.6.10. Find the basin of attraction of the period-two solution of Eq(6. ∞) and q > 1 + 4p. Open Problems and Conjectures Conjecture 6. Open Problem 6.10.66) has a ﬁnite limit.4 Assume that p.) Open Problem 6.

investigate the long-term behavior of the solution {yn }∞ : n=−1 yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = 1 − yn 1 − yn−1 yn − 1 yn − yn−1 1 − yn−1 1 − yn (6. 1.80) (6.10. y0 ) ∈ G. . y0 ) ∈ R × R through which the equation is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0.126 Chapter 6.78) (6.10. β. y0 ) ∈ R × R through which the solution of the equation yn+1 = yn + yn−1 1 + yn−1 is well deﬁned and converges to 1. xn+1 = Axn + Bxn−1 + Cxn−2 Extend and generalize. A. (6. B. γ. . .8 Assume α.79) (6. C ∈ (0. as n → ∞.82) (6. n = 0. Open Problem 6.Then for every (y−1 . (2.10.84) yn − yn−1 For those equations from the above list for which you were successful.83) yn − yn−1 yn − 1 yn − yn−1 1 − yn−1 1 − yn−1 yn − yn−1 yn + yn−1 .7 For each of the following diﬀerence equations determine the “good” set G ⊂ R × R of initial conditions (y−1 . . . Open Problem 6. extend your result by introducing arbitrary real parameters in the equation. Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of solutions of the diﬀerence equation αxn + βxn−1 + γxn−2 .6 Find the set of all initial conditions (y−1 .81) (6. 2)-Type Equations Open Problem 6. ∞).

92) pn + qn yn . n = 0. . 1. .87) (6. . yn + qn yn−1 pn + qn yn−1 . . . . . . Open Problem 6. qn yn + yn−1 pn yn + qn yn−1 .9 Assume that {pn }n=0 and {qn }∞ are convergent sequences of n=0 nonnegative real numbers with ﬁnite limits. (a) Find the set B of all initial conditions (y−1 . n = 0. n=−1 . .10.10. 1. . p = n→∞ pn lim lim and q = n→∞ qn . n = 0. n = 0. 1.10 Assume that {pn }∞ and {qn }∞ are period-two sequences n=0 n=0 of nonnegative real numbers.10. . . y0 ) ∈ B. ∞) such that the solutions {yn }∞ n=−1 of Eq(6. . n = 0. . . 1 + yn pn yn + yn−1 . .85)-(6. ∞) × (0.23) are bounded. qn + yn n = 0. qn yn + yn−1 yn+1 = yn+1 = Open Problem 6.90) (6. . 1. Investigate the global character of all positive solutions of Eqs(6. 1. 1 + yn−1 yn + pn . 1. .92).11 Assume q ∈ (1. .91) (6. qn + yn−1 pn yn + yn−1 . y0 ) ∈ (0. .10. Extend and generalize.6. . n = 0.88) (6. 1.85) (6. . ∞). . 1.86) (6. 1 + yn pn + yn−1 .89) (6. Open Problems and Conjectures 127 ∞ Open Problem 6. (6. n = 0. . . (b) Let (y−1 . Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of each of the following eight diﬀerence equations: yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = pn + yn . Investigate the asymptotic behavior of {yn }∞ .

y0 ) ∈ (0. (6.10. the periodic nature. n = 0. ∞) × (0. 2)-Type Equations (a) Find the set B of all initial conditions (y−1 . β ∈ (0. ∞). ∞) such that the solutions {yn }∞ n=−1 of Eq(6. See [14]. 1. Investigate the boundedness character. (c) Extend and generalize. . ∞) × (0. Open Problem 6.47) are bounded. and [2]) Assume α ∈ (1. Investigate the asymptotic behavior of {yn }n=−1 . 1 β = 1 and γ = .93) Conjecture 6. (a) Determine the set G of initial conditions (y−1 .10.94).128 Open Problem 6. x0 ) ∈ G. .10. . y0 ) ∈ B. [3].6 Assume x0 . (b) Let (x−1 . Chapter 6. . ∞).93) is globally asymptotically stable. 1. ∞). y0 ∈ (0. . and the asymptotic behavior of the solution {xn }∞ n=−1 of Eq(6.14 (Discrete Epidemic Models. . See [9]. 3). 2 Show that the positive equilibrium of System (6. 1) with α + β > 1 + β . y0 ) ∈ (0.10. γ Obtain conditions for the global asymptotic stability of the positive equilibrium of the system xn+1 = αxn βxn +eyn yn+1 = γ(xn + 1)yn . . (6. ∞ (b) Let (y−1 . ∞). are nonnegative. ∞) through which the solutions {xn }∞ n=−1 of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = (1 − xn − xn−1 )(1 − e−Axn ).13 (A Plant-Herbivore System. (2. and γ ∈ (0.12 Assume q ∈ (1. ∞) and that α ∈ (2.94) .) Let A ∈ (0. n = 0. Open Problem 6.

. . yn + q pyn + yn−k . n = 0. . .10. .17 Assume that p. . ∞). (6.95) 1 + yn−k yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = yn + p . Investigate the global character of all positive solutions of the system . (6. Open Problem 6. qyn + yn−k yn + pyn−k .97) (6. 129 Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions for the global asymptotic stability of the Flour Beetle Model: xn+1 = axn + bxn−2 e−c1 xn −c2 xn−2 . Assume a ∈ (0. n = 0. ∞) with c1 + c2 > 0.10. . . n = 0.6. . Open Problems and Conjectures Open Problem 6. n = 0. . . . 1). . ) which may be viewed as a population model. ∞). ∞) and k ∈ {2. n = 0. .}. . 1. . with positive initial conditions. . b ∈ (0. 1) and xn+1 = αxn e−yn + β yn+1 = αxn (1 − e −yn β ∈ (1. Open Problem 6. 1 + yn p + yn−k . See [48]). .16 (A Population Model) Assume α ∈ (0. . 1. 1.99) (6. 1. n = 0.98) (6. and c1 . 1. yn + qyn−k p + qyn−k . n = 0. q ∈ [0.10. qyn + yn−k n = 0. Investigate the global behavior of all positive solutions of each of the following diﬀerence equations: p + qyn yn+1 = .15 (The Flour Beetle Model. q + yn−k pyn + yn−k . 3. 1. .101) . . n = 0. 1. 1. . c2 ∈ [0.100) (6.10. . . . . . .96) (6. . . 1. . .

also converges to a period-two solution.11) and (6. Open Problem 6. 1.130 Chapter 6. .10.10. .102) has a two cycle which is locally asymptotically stable. n = 0. xn−1 ).102) converges to a period-two solution. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on f so that every positive solution of the equation xn+1 = f (xn−2 . .18 Obtain a general result for an equation of the form yn+1 = f (yn .20 Assume that Eq(6. . . . 1. which extends and uniﬁes the global asymptotic stability results for Eqs(6. (6. (2. . . n = 0. 2)-Type Equations Open Problem 6. 1. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on f so that the same two cycle is a locally asymptotically stable solution of Eq(6. yn−1 ).103). xn−1 ). Extend and generalize. n = 0.103) Open Problem 6. (6.19 Assume that every positive solution of an equation of the form xn+1 = f (xn . . .27).10.

A + Bxn + Cxn−1 n = 0. (7. n = 0. . . .Chapter 7 (1. A + Bxn + Cxn−1 βxn . 1. 1 + pyn + qyn−1 αB A2 and q = 131 n = 0. 7. . . 3)-type Eq. 3)-type: Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all the parameters in the above (1.1) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where p= 1 . 1.1) (7. 1. 3)-Type Equations 7. . . (7. A2 . 3)-type equations are positive and that the initial conditions are nonnegative. .2 The Case β = γ = 0 : xn+1 = α yn A α A+Bxn +Cxn−1 This is the (1. A + Bxn + Cxn−1 n = 0. 1. .2) Eq(1) contains the following three equations of the (1.(7. .1 Introduction xn+1 = xn+1 = and xn+1 = γxn−1 . . . (7.4) αC . .3) α .

q Theorem 7. 3)-Type Equations One can easily see that the positive equilibrium of Eq(7. 3)-type Eq(7. Theorem 7.4) has no prime period two solutions. The following result is a straightforward consequence of Theorem 1.1 Assume p ≤ 1. 1.2. 7.4.2.1 The positive equilibrium of Eq(7.5) is globally asymptotically stable.4. It also follows by applying Theorem 1.5 in the interval [0. Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(7. ∞) and p > 1. .3.7 in the interval [0.5) β B and q = .4) is locally asymptotically stable for all values of the parameters and that Eq(7. or Theorem 1.2 Assume that y−1 . The following result is now a straightforward consequence of either the stability trichotomy Theorem 1. . y0 ∈ (0.4.4.1. (1.5) always has zero as an equilibrium point and when p>1 it also has the unique positive equilibrium point y= p−1 . .5) is globally asymptotically stable. p ]. (7. .4) is globally asymptotically stable.3. 1 + pyn + qyn−1 p= n = 0. A C Eq(7. q+1 The following result is a straightforward consequence of Theorem 1.3. Theorem 7.132 Chapter 7.2) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where yn . 1]. Then the positive equilibrium of Eq(7.3 The Case α = γ = 0 : xn+1 = A yn C βxn A+Bxn +Cxn−1 This is the (1.4.

The Case α = β = 0 : xn+1 = γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 133 γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 7. if and only if p < 1. .6) always has the zero equilibrium and when p<1 it also has the unique positive equilibrium y= 1−p . 1. .1 and 1. .6) is globally asymptotically stable when p≥1 and is unstable (a repeller) when p < 1. . 3)-type Eq(7. 1+q The subsequent result is a straightforward application of Theorems 1. p + qyn + yn−1 A γ n = 0. Concerning prime period-two solutions one can see that Eq(7.3. φ.1. φ. ψ. (b) Assume that p < 1. .6) and q = Eq(7.1 (a) The zero equilibrium of Eq(7.1. B .4.6) has a prime periodtwo solution . ψ.4 The Case α = β = 0 : xn+1 = γ yn C This is the (1. .7. Then the positive equilibrium of Eq(7. . . . Theorem 7. .3) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the equation yn+1 = where p= yn−1 .6) is locally asymptotically stable when q<1 and is unstable (a saddle point) when q > 1.4. C (7.

7) (7. . . 0. .134 Furthermore when Chapter 7.2 Assume that p<1 Then the period-two solution . . (7. 3)-Type Equations p < 1 and q = 1 the only prime period-two solution is . 1 − p. 0. On the other hand. 0.4.5. 1 − p. (1. Therefore 1−p the prime period-two solution (7. . . q ∈ (0. . 1 − p − φ. .5 Open Problems and Conjectures p. 2 and in view of (7. 2 and q > 1. Proof. 1 − p − φ.1 Assume Show that every positive solution of Eq(7.8) is locally asymptotically stable. 0.6 that here JT 2 0 1−p = 1 p+q(1−p) q(1−p) − p+q(1−p) 1−p . . . . . . 1). . 1 − p. when p < 1 and q = 1 all prime period-two solutions of Eq(7. . φ. of Eq(7. . It follows from Section 2. 1 − p. . φ.7) both eigenvalues of JT 2 7.6) has a ﬁnite limit.6) is locally asymptotically stable.8) 0 p 0 lie in the disk |λ| < 1. .6) are given by . . with 0 ≤ φ ≤ 1 − p and φ = Theorem 7. . Conjecture 7.

5.6).11). . let (x−1 .5. . . 1) and q ∈ (1. 0. .9) (7.2 Investigate the asymptotic character and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = where p.10) (7. Extend and generalize. not necessarily prime. 1.9)-(7. 135 Show that every positive solution of Eq(7. .3 For each of the equations given below. . ∞). and investigate ∞ the long term-behavior of the solution {xn }n=−1 .6) converges to a.11) Now for each of the equations (7. xn−2 . 1 − p. Find the basin of attraction of the two cycle . 1 − p.5.5. ∞).7. of Eq(7. . Open Problem 7. Open Problem 7. Open Problem 7. periodtwo solution. 0. .5.2 Assume p < 1 and q ≥ 1. ﬁnd the set G of all points (x−1 . 1 + xn + xn−1 (7. q ∈ [0. 1 + pxn + qxn−1 + xn−2 n = 0.1 Assume p ∈ (0. . x0 ) ∈ R × R through which the equation is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0: xn+1 = xn+1 = xn+1 = 1 1 + xn + xn−1 xn 1 + xn + xn−1 xn−1 . x0 ) ∈ G be an initial point through which the corresponding equation is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. . Open Problems and Conjectures Conjecture 7.

Extend and generalize. 1. pn + qn yn + yn−1 n = 0. .136 Chapter 7. . 1 + pn yn + qn yn−1 yn−1 . 1 + pn yn + qn yn−1 yn . lim Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of each of the following three diﬀerence equations: yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = 1 . .12) (7. . 1. n = 0. n = 0. . . (1. .4 Assume that {pn }∞ and {qn }∞ are convergent sequences of n=0 n=0 nonnegative real numbers with ﬁnite limits. 1. 3)-Type Equations Open Problem 7.5 Assume that {pn }∞ and {qn }∞ are period-two sequences of n=0 n=0 nonnegative real numbers.13) (7. .5.5. Investigate the global character of all positive solutions of Eqs(7. p = lim pn n→∞ and q = n→∞ qn .12)-(7.14) Open Problem 7. . .14). (7. .

.1) is a linear diﬀerence equation and can be solved explicitly. . . β + Byn n = 0.2) by the change of the variables xn = yn + β . . . 1)-Type Equations 8. .3) by the change of the variables xn = yn + 137 γ . . 1. Eq(8. . 2)-type equation of the form of Eq(6. .1 Introduction α + βxn + γxn−1 .1) (8. the initial conditions are nonnegative. 1.Chapter 8 (3. (8.5). Cxn−1 n = 0. (8. C . .4) (see Section 6. 3)-type: xn+1 = xn+1 = and xn+1 = α + βxn + γxn−1 .2) Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all parameters that appear in these equations are positive. . A α + βxn + γxn−1 . Eq(8. 1. Bxn Eq(1) contains the following three equations of the (1. . Eq(8. B is reduced to a (2.3) n = 0. namely. . 1. yn+1 = (α + βγ ) + γyn−1 B . . n = 0. and the denominators are always positive.

. x0 ) ∈ R × R through which the equation 1 + xn + xn−1 xn+1 = xn−1 is well deﬁned for all n and for these initial points determine the long-term behavior of the solutions {xn }∞ .2.2 (a) Assume γ = β and let .4 Determine the set G of all initial points (x−1 . Open Problem 8. φ. . = γ + Cyn−1 n = 0. yn+1 (α + βγ ) + βyn C . Determine the basin of attraction of (8. ψ. 1)-Type Equations is reduced to a (2. (8. 2)-type equation of the form of Eq(6.2. . .3) converges to the positive equilibrium of the equation. ∞) through which the solutions of Eq(8.2).2) which converges to (8.1 Assume γ > β. . Determine the set of initial conditions (x−1 . (b) Let {xn }∞ n=−1 be a positive solution of Eq(8.2 Open Problems and Conjectures Open Problem 8.4). x0 ) ∈ (0. (3.4) be a period-two solution of Eq(8. n=−1 .1 Show that every positive solution of Eq(8.2) (see Section 6. x0 ) ∈ R × R through which the equation 1 + xn + xn−1 xn+1 = xn is well deﬁned for all n and for these initial points determine the long-term behavior of the solutions {xn }∞ .4). .2. . . φ. .3) namely. Determine the values of φ and ψ in terms of the initial conditions x−1 and x0 . 1. Open Problem 8. ∞) × (0.3 Determine the set G of all initial points (x−1 . Hence there is nothing else remaining to do about these equations other than to pose some Open Problems and Conjectures. ψ. Conjecture 8. .2) are bounded.138 Chapter 8. n=−1 Open Problem 8.2.2. 8.

8.2. Open Problems and Conjectures

139

Open Problem 8.2.5 Assume that {pn }∞ and {qn }∞ are convergent sequences of n=0 n=0 nonnegative real numbers with ﬁnite limits, lim p = n→∞ pn and q = n→∞ qn . lim

Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of each of the following two diﬀerence equations: yn+1 = yn+1 = pn + xn + xn−1 , q n xn pn + xn + xn−1 , qn xn−1 n = 0, 1, . . . (8.5)

n = 0, 1, . . . .

(8.6)

∞ ∞ Open Problem 8.2.6 Assume that {pn }n=0 and {qn }n=0 are period-two sequences of nonnegative real numbers. Investigate the global character of all positive solutions of Eqs(8.5) and (8.6). Extend and generalize.

**Chapter 9 (2, 3)-Type Equations
**

9.1 Introduction

α + βxn , A + Bxn + Cxn−1 α + γxn−1 , A + Bxn + Cxn−1 βxn + γxn−1 , A + Bxn + Cxn−1

Eq(1) contains the following three equations of the (2, 3)-type: xn+1 = xn+1 = and xn+1 = n = 0, 1, . . . . (9.3) n = 0, 1, . . . n = 0, 1, . . . (9.1) (9.2)

Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all the parameters in the above (2, 3)-type equations are positive and the initial conditions are nonnegative.

9.2

The Case γ = 0 : xn+1 =

α+βxn A+Bxn +Cxn−1

This is the (2, 3)-type Eq(9.1) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where p= p + qyn , 1 + yn + ryn−1 q= β , A n = 0, 1, . . . C . B (9.4) A yn B

αB , A2

and r =

141

142

Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

(Eq(9.4) was investigated in [51].) Here we make some simple observations about linearized stability, invariant intervals, and the convergence of solutions in certain regions of initial conditions. Eq(9.4) has a unique equilibrium y which is positive and is given by y= q−1+ (q − 1)2 + 4p(r + 1) 2(r + 1) .

By employing the linearized stability Theorem 1.1.1, we obtain the following result: Theorem 9.2.1 The equilibrium y of Eq(9.4) is locally asymptotically stable for all values of the parameters p, q and r.

9.2.1

Boundedness of Solutions

We will prove that all solutions of Eq(9.4) are bounded. Theorem 9.2.2 Every solution of Eq(9.4) is bounded from above and from below by positive constants. Proof. Let {yn } be a solution of Eq(9.4). Clearly, if the solution is bounded from above by a constant M , then p yn+1 ≥ 1 + (1 + r)M and so it is also bounded from below. Now assume for the sake of contradiction that the solution is not bounded from above. Then there exists a subsequence {y1+nk }∞ such k=0 that

k→∞

lim nk = ∞,

k→∞

lim y1+nk = ∞,

and y1+nk = max{yn : n ≤ nk } for k ≥ 0.

**From (9.4) we see that yn+1 < qyn + p for n ≥ 0 and so
**

k→∞

**lim ynk = lim ynk −1 = ∞.
**

k→∞

Hence for suﬃciently large k, 0 < y1+nk − ynk = p + [(q − 1) − ynk − rynk −1 ]ynk <0 1 + ynk + rynk −1 2

which is a contradiction and the proof is complete.

The above proof has an advantage that extends to several equations of the form of Eq(9.1) with nonnegative parameters. The boundedness of solutions of the special

9.2. The Case γ = 0 : xn+1 =

α+βxn A+Bxn +Cxn−1

143

equation (9.4) with positive parameters immediately follows from the observation that if M = max{1, p, q} then yn+1 ≤ M + M yn =M 1 + yn f or n ≥ 0.

9.2.2

Invariant Intervals

The following result, which can be established by direct calculation, gives a list of invariant intervals for Eq(9.4). Recall that I is an invariant interval, if whenever, yN , yN +1 ∈ I then yn ∈ I (a) for n ≥ N. Lemma 9.2.1 Eq(9.4) possesses the following invariant intervals:

for some integer N ≥ 0,

0,

q−1+

(q − 1)2 + 4p 2

,

when p ≤ q;

(b) p−q ,q , qr (c) q, p−q , qr when p > q(rq + 1). when q < p < q(rq + 1);

Proof. (a) Set q − 1 + (q − 1)2 + 4p p + qx and b = 1+x 2 and observe that g is an increasing function and g(b) ≤ b. Using Eq(9.4) we see that when yk−1 , yk ∈ [0, b], then g(x) = yk+1 = p + qyk p + qyk ≤ = g(yk ) ≤ g(b) ≤ b. 1 + yk + ryk−1 1 + yk

The proof follows by induction.

144 (b) It is clear that the function f (x, y) =

Chapter 9. (2, 3)-Type Equations

p + qx 1 + x + ry

p−q ,q qr

is increasing in x for y > p−q . Using Eq(9.4) we see that when yk−1 , yk ∈ qr then p + qyk p−q = f (yk , yk−1 ) ≤ f q, = q. yk+1 = 1 + yk + ryk−1 qr Also by using the condition p < q(rq + 1) we obtain yk+1 = p + qyk = f (yk , yk−1 ) ≥ f 1 + yk + ryk−1

,

p−q q(pr + p − q) p−q > ,q = . 2 + rq + p − q qr (rq) qr

The proof follows by the induction. (c) It is clear that the function f (x, y) = p + qx 1 + x + ry

is decreasing in x for y < p−q . Using Eq(9.4) we see that when yk−1 , yk ∈ q, p−q , qr qr then p + qyk p−q p−q yk+1 = = q. , = f (yk , yk−1 ) ≥ f 1 + yk + ryk−1 qr qr Also by using the condition p > q(rq + 1) we obtain yk+1 = p + qyk p−q p + q2 < . = f (yk , yk−1 ) ≤ f (q, q) = 1 + yk + ryk−1 1 + (r + 1)q qr

The proof follows by induction. 2

9.2.3

Semicycle Analysis

qr( p−q − yn−1 ) qr 1 + yn + ryn−1

**Let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(9.4). Then the following identitites are true for n ≥ 0: yn+1 − q = qr q − p−q yn+1 − = qr
**

p−q qr

, + pr(q − yn−1 )

(9.5)

qr(1 + yn + ryn−1 ) yn − yn+4 =

yn + qr yn−1 −

p−q qr

,

(9.6)

9.2. The Case γ = 0 : xn+1 = qr yn −

p−q qr

α+βxn A+Bxn +Cxn−1

145

2 yn+1 + (yn − q)(yn+1 yn+3 + yn+3 + yn+1 + ryn yn+3 ) + yn + ryn − p

(1 + yn+3 )(1 + yn+1 + ryn ) + r(p + qyn+1 )

,

(9.7) yn+1 − y = (y − q)(y − yn ) + yr(y − yn−1 ) . 1 + yn + ryn−1 (9.8)

The proofs of the following two lemmas are straightforward consequences of the Identities (9.5)- (9.8) and will be omitted. Lemma 9.2.2 Assume p > q(qr + 1) and let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(9.4). Then the following statements are true: (i) If for some N ≥ 0, (ii) If for some N ≥ 0, (iii) If for some N ≥ 0, (iv) If for some N ≥ 0, (v) If for some N ≥ 0, (vi) If for some N ≥ 0, (vii) q < y <

p−q . qr

yN > yN = yN <

p−q , qr p−q , qr p−q , qr

**then then then
**

p−q , qr

yN +2 < q; yN +2 = q; yN +2 > q; q < yN +2 <

p−q ; qr

q < yN <

then

y ≥ yN −1 and y ≥ yN , then y < yN −1 and y < yN , then

yN +1 ≥ y; yN +1 < y;

Lemma 9.2.3 Assume q < p < q(qr + 1) and let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(9.4). Then the following statements are true: (i) If for some N ≥ 0, (ii) If for some N ≥ 0, (iii) If for some N ≥ 0, (iv) If for some N ≥ 0, (v)

p−q qr

yN < yN = yN > yN >

p−q , qr p−q , qr p−q , qr p−q qr

then then then

yN +2 > q; yN +2 = q; yN +2 < q; then q > yN +2 >

p−q ; qr

and yN < q

< y < q.

2 Here we present a semicycle analysis of the solutions of Eq(9. 1 + yn + ryn−1 n = 0.4 Assume p = q(qr + 1) and let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a solution of Eq(9. y4k ≤ 1.4). and y4k+2 ≥ q. and y4k+2 ≤ q. and y4k+2 ≥ q. 3)-Type Equations qr (q − yn−1 ). 2 . y4k ≤ 1.146 Lemma 9.2. the following statements are true for all k ≥ 0: (i) y−1 > q and y0 ≤ q =⇒ y4k−1 > q. and y4k+2 ≤ q. (ii) y−1 < q and y0 ≥ q =⇒ y4k−1 < q.10) is a consequence of the fact that in this case qr ∈ (0. y4k ≥ 1.2. y4k+1 < q.9) (9.9) follows by straightforward computation. In this case Eq(9.4) when p = q(1 + rq).4) has no period-two solution. . excluding the ﬁrst. ∞) and Eq(9. More precisely. . Then this solution is oscillatory and the sum of the lengths of two consecutive semicycles. 1. y4k ≥ 1. and the only equilibrium point is y = q. y4k+1 > q. Proof. . Identity (9.3 Suppose that p = q + rq 2 and let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a nontrivial solution of Eq(9. (iv) y−1 < q and y0 ≤ q =⇒ y4k−1 < q.4) becomes yn+1 = q + rq 2 + qyn . Then yn+1 − q = Furthermore when qr < 1. y4k+1 < q. (9. 1 + yn + ryn−1 lim yn = y.4). The limit (9. (2. The proof follows from identity (9. Theorem 9. y4k+1 > q.10) Proof. (iii) y−1 > q and y0 ≥ q =⇒ y4k−1 > q. is equal to four.5). then n→∞ Chapter 9.

qr n→∞ lim yn = y ∈ I and yN +2 < p−q . yN ≤ b. Next assume that q < p < q(qr + 1) and. for the sake of contradiction.2.4). Then every solution of Eq(9. yN +1 < p−q . q−1+ (q−1) +4p ] if p ≤ q. p−q ] qr if if q < p < q(qr + 1). the following is true: Lemma 9. First assume that p ≤ q. Set b= and observe that yn+1 − b = (q − p)(yn − b) − r(p + qb)yn−1 . The Case γ = 0 : xn+1 = α+βxn A+Bxn +Cxn−1 147 9.4) lies eventually in I. Now assume for the sake of contradiction that yn > b for n > 0. ∞ Proof.2.2.2. 2 I= [ p−q .3. (1 + yn + ryn−1 )(1 + b) n ≥ 0. y ∈ I. (ii) yN > q.4) described in Lemma 9. there exists N > 0 such that one of the following three cases holds: (i) yN > q.2. q−1+ (q − 1)2 + 4p 2 Hence. qr and yN +2 < .1. More precisely. q] qr [q.4 Global Asymptotic Stability The following lemma establishes that when p = q(qr + 1). p > q(qr + 1). qr p−q . if for some N .5 Let I denote the interval which is deﬁned as follows: √ 2 [0. Then clearly. yN +1 > q. Then by Lemma 9. every solution of Eq(9. Then yn > y for n ≥ 0 and so which is a contradiction. then yN +1 < b. also assume that the solution {yn }∞ n=−1 is not eventually in the interval I. Let {yn }n=−1 be a solution of Eq(9.4) is eventually trapped into one of the three invariant intervals of Eq(9.9.

qr The desired contradiction is now obtained by using the Identity (9.4) is globally asymptotically stable. then yN + ryN − p < 0. and yN +2 < p−q . p−q qr Chapter 9. 3}.4) is globally asymptotically stable. (b) Assume that either (iii) r > 1 (ii) r ≤ 1. 1. we can obtain some global asymptotic stability results for the solutions of Eq(9.1.4): Theorem 9.7 and 1.4. then yN + ryN − p > 0 and 2 if yN ≤ p−q . . (2.4 (a) Assume that either p ≥ q + q 2 r.2. or q . For example. and (q − 1)2 (r − 1) ≤ 4p. 3)-Type Equations ≤ yN +1 ≤ q. y) = p + qx 1 + x + ry 2 in each of the intervals in Lemma 9.7) from which it follows that for j ∈ {0. By using the monotonic character of the function f (x. qr Also observe that 2 if yN ≥ q.148 (iii) yN > q. p< p≤q or q < p < q + q2r and that one of the following conditions is also satisﬁed: (i) q ≤ 1. the following results are true for Eq(9. together with the appropriate convergence Theorems 1. 2.4). The proof when p > q(qr + 1) is similar and will be omitted. 1+r Then the equilibrium y of Eq(9.5. Then the equilibrium y of Eq(9.4. Proof. each subsequence {yn+4k+j }∞ with all its terms outside k=0 the interval I converges monotonically and enters in the interval I.2.

the function f increases in x and and that in the interval 0.2. 2 decreases in y. We will employ Theorem 1. 3)-type Eq(9.1 and Theorem 1. Clearly now if Condition (ii) or (iii) is satisﬁed. m) then M = m.2.9.5. 1 + yn + ryn−1 q= γ . 0.11) A yn B αB . It is easy to check that y ∈ 0. The proof when q < p < q + q 2 r holds follows from Lemma 9. 1. 2 2 √ 2 +4p q−1+ (q−1) . m = M from which the result follows.2) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where p= p + qyn−1 . M ) and M = f (M. For instance. .4 and Theorems 1. The Case β = 0 : xn+1 = α+γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 149 (a) The proof follows from Lemmas 9. y0 ∈ 0. Now if m + M = q − 1.2.7 and 1. √ q−1+ (q−1)2 +4p (b) In view of Lemma 9. .4. B (9. C .4. A2 and r = . A n = 0.2. then yn ∈ 2 √ √ q−1+ (q−1)2 +4p q−1+ (q−1)2 +4p for all n ≥ 0. 2 9. If m + M = q − 1 then m and M satisfy the equation (r − 1)m2 + (r − 1)(1 − q)m + p = 0.1 we see that when y−1 . this is the case if Condition (i) is satisﬁed.2.4.5 and so it remains to be shown that if m = f (m. .1 and 9. . 1 + M + rm Hence (M − m)(1 − q + M + m) = 0. then M = m.4. This system has the form m= p + qm 1 + m + rM and M = p + qM .3.3 The Case β = 0 : xn+1 = α+γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 This is the (2.

11) is locally asymptotically stable when either q≤1 or q > 1 and (r − 1)(q − 1)2 + 4pr2 > 0. ψ.1 Let Existence and Local Stability of Period-Two Cycles .12) holds.11).3.1. Theorem 9. and more precisely a saddle point. . Furthermore when (9. when q > 1 and (r − 1)(q − 1)2 + 4pr2 < 0.11) has a prime period-two solution . (9.11) has a unique equilibrium y which is positive and is given by y= q−1+ (q − 1)2 + 4p(r + 1) 2(r + 1) .1 we obtain the following result.11) is unstable. φ. By employing the linearized stability Theorem 1. the period-two solution is “unique” and the values of φ and ψ are the positive roots of the quadratic equation t2 − p q−1 = 0.12) 9. . . . . .1 (a) The equilibrium y of Eq(9. invariant intervals. . Eq(9. t+ r 1−r . .3.150 Chapter 9. . (2.12) holds. 1 + φ + rψ It now follows after some calculation that the following result is true. Lemma 9. φ. ψ. ψ. . . and the convergence of solutions in certain regions of initial conditions. be a period-two cycle of Eq(9. . ψ. φ. 3)-Type Equations This equation has not been investigated yet. (b) The equilibrium y of Eq(9. φ. if and only if (9. Then φ= p + qφ 1 + ψ + rφ and ψ = p + qψ .1 Eq(9. Here we make some simple observations about linearized stability.3.

1. . . v) p + qv . ∞) deﬁned by: T Then u v = v p+qu 1+v+ru . ψ) = ∂u (1 + ψ + rφ)2 ∂g −p − qφ (φ. ψ) ∂u where ∂g q − pr + qψ . ψ ∂h ∂h (φ. v) h(u. . we set un = yn−1 and vn = yn . ψ) ∂v (φ. ψ) ∂u φ = JT 2 . . . . . .3. and write Eq(9. . v) = Clearly the two cycle is locally asymptotically stable when the eigenvalues of the φ . φ.11) in the equivalent form: un+1 = vn vn+1 = p+qun 1+vn +run . 1. ψ) ∂v (φ. The Case β = 0 : xn+1 = α+γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 151 To investigate the local stability of the two cycle . φ ψ is a ﬁxed point of T 2 . . ψ) = . for n = 0. . the second iterate of T . ψ. 1 + g(u. Let T be the function on (0. n = 0. By a simple calculation we ﬁnd that T2 where g(u. φ. Jacobian matrix JT 2 . ∂v (1 + ψ + rφ)2 . lie inside the unit disk. evaluated at ψ We have ∂g ∂g (φ. (φ. . ∞) × (0. ψ. v) + rv and h(u.9. . v) = p + qu 1 + v + ru u v = g(u.

ψ) (φ. This inequality is equivalent to (q − pr + qφ) (q − pr + qψ) − (1 + ψ + rφ)2 (1 + φ + rψ)2 < 0. ∂u (1 + ψ + rφ)2 (1 + φ + rψ)2 ∂h (p + qψ)(p + qφ) q − pr + qφ (φ. ψ) = . ψ) ∂u ∂v ∂h ∂g ∂h ∂g (φ.1 that both eigenvalues of JT 2 unit disk |λ| < 1.14). (9. ψ) − (φ. Observe that. (q − pr + qφ) (q − pr + qψ) = (q − pr)2 + q(q − pr)(φ + ψ) + q 2 φψ = = −2q 2 r + q 2 r2 + 3qpr2 − 2qpr3 − p2 r3 + p2 r4 − q 3 + rq 3 + q 2 − pr2 q 2 − qpr r (−1 + r) (1 + ψ + rφ)2 (1 + φ + rψ)2 = 1 + φ + rψ + ψ + ψφ + rψ 2 + rφ + φ2 r + r2 φψ = −pr2 + qr + pr − q + q 2 r 2 2 and that . ψ).152 Chapter 9. ψ) + (φ. Inequality (9.14) (9. ψ) = + .16) First we will establish Inequality (9.1. ∂u ∂v ∂v ∂u φ ψ lie inside the Then it follows from Theorem 1. ψ) (φ. (2. if and only if |S| < 1 + D < 2.15) (9. 3)-Type Equations ∂h (p + qψ)(pr − q − qψ) (φ. Thus . 2 (1 + φ + rψ)2 ∂v (1 + ψ + rφ) (1 + φ + rψ)2 Set S= and D= ∂h ∂g (φ.13) (9.13) is equivalent to the following three inequalities: D<1 S <1+D −1 − D < S.

r2 (1 − r) −r2 p + rp − q + q 2 + qr = rp(1 − r) + q(q − 1) + qr > 0. After some lengthy calculation one can see that this inequality is also a consequence of Condition (9. After some lengthy calculation one can see that this inequality is a consequence of Condition (9. This inequality is equivalent to (q − pr + qψ)(1 + φ + rψ)2 + (p + qψ)(p + qφ) + (q − pr + qφ)(1 + ψ + rφ)2 − (q − pr + qφ) (q − pr + qψ) − (1 + ψ + rφ)2 (1 + φ + rψ)2 < 0.16) is equivalent to (q − pr + qψ)(1 + φ + rψ)2 + (p + qψ)(p + qφ) + (q − pr + qφ)(1 + ψ + rφ)2 + (q − pr + qφ) (q − pr + qψ) + (1 + ψ + rφ)2 (1 + φ + rψ)2 > 0.9.12).12). In summary. The Case β = 0 : xn+1 = α+γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 153 (q − pr + qφ) (q − pr + qψ) − (1 + ψ + rφ)2 (1 + φ + rψ)2 = −pr3 q 2 + 2q 2 r − q 2 r2 − q 2 + 3p2 r3 − 2p2 r4 − 3rq 3 + 3qpr3 − 5qpr2 r2 (1 − r) + 2qpr + 4pr2 q 2 + 2q 3 + q 4 r − p2 r2 − 2prq 2 − q 4 + r2 q 3 r2 (1 − r) Note that (2r2 p − rp + q − q 2 − qr + q 2 r) (−r2 p + rp − q + q 2 + qr) = . Also by using Condition (9. Finally Inequality (9. we have established the following result: .15). Next we turn to Inequality (9.12) we see that (r − 1)(q − 1)2 + 4pr2 = q 2 r − 2qr + r − q 2 + 2q − 1 + 4r2 p < 0 and so 2r2 p − rp + q − q 2 − qr + q 2 r < 2r2 p − rp + q − qr + 2qr − r − 2q + 1 − 4r2 p = −2r2 p − rp − q + qr − r + 1 = −2r2 p − rp + (r − 1) (q − 1) < 0 from which the result follows.3.

11).3. ψ. . φ.2 Eq(9. .12) holds. (a) Set g(x) = p + qx 1 + rx and b = q−1+ (q − 1)2 + 4pr 2r and observe that g is an increasing function and g(b) ≤ b. r q when pr ≥ q + q2 . Furthermore when (9. 1 + yk + qyk−1 1 + ryk−1 The proof follows by induction.154 Chapter 9.12) holds. 3)-Type Equations Theorem 9.3. r r Proof.3. gives a list of invariant intervals for Eq(9. q r (c) q pr − q . (2. b]. . 9.2 Invariant Intervals The following result. (b) pr − q q .11) we see that when yk−1 . ψ. q−1+ (q − 1)2 + 4pr 2r when pr ≤ q.2 Eq(9. yk ∈ [0. this period-two solution is locally asymptotically stable. if and only if (9. Lemma 9.11) has a unique prime period-two solution . Using Eq(9. φ.11) possesses the following invariant intervals: (a) 0. which can be established by direct calculation. . . r when 1 < q < pr < q + q2 q − . . then yk+1 = p + qyk−1 p + qyk−1 ≤ = g(yk−1 ) ≤ g(b) ≤ b. .

r q is increasing in y for x > pr−q . Now by using the monotonic character of the function f (x. 1 + yk + qyk−1 r r = pr + q 2 pr − q . yk−1 ) ≥ f . yk ∈ q then q pr − q p + qyk−1 pr − q = f (yk . q r q = . y) is decreasing in both arguments and the condition pr > q + rq2 we obtain yk+1 = q q p + qyk−1 = f (yk . q r pr−q .9. r The proof follows by induction. Using Eq(9. r By using the fact that f (x. yk−1 ) ≤ f .11) we see that when yk−1 . y) and the condition 2 q < pr < q + qr we obtain yk+1 = p + qyk−1 = f (yk . ≥ yk+1 = 1 + yk + ryk−1 r q q . < r + (r + 1)q q The proof follows by induction. then yk+1 = Using Eq(9.3. 2 . q p + qy 1 + x + ry . y) = is decreasing in y for x < q pr−q . (c) It is clear that the function f (x. yk−1 ) ≥ f 1 + yk + qyk−1 pr − q pr − q . The Case β = 0 : xn+1 = α+γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 155 (b) It is clear that the function f (x. yk−1 ) ≤ f 1 + yk + ryk−1 pr − q q .11) we see that when yk−1 . . y) = p + qy 1 + x + ry pr−q q . q q q = . yk ∈ p + qyk−1 = f (yk .

Then every solution of Eq(9. for all n ≥ 0. . then Proof.4. 3)-Type Equations 9.3 Assume that pr ≤ q and that one of the following conditions is also satisﬁed: (i) q ≤ 1. together with the appropriate convergence theorem (from among Theorems 1. 2 Theorem 9. the function f decreases in x and increases 2r in y. For example.2 we see that when y−1 .3. y0 ∈ 0. (ii) r ≥ 1.156 Chapter 9. It is easy to check that y ∈ 0. the following results are true for Eq(9. 2r 2r √ q−1+ (q−1)2 +4pr and that in the interval 0.2. (2.4 (a) Assume that 1 < q < pr < q+ qr − q and that one of the following r conditions is also satisﬁed: (i) r ≥ 1.3. In view of Lemma 9.5-1. (iii) r < 1 and (r − 1)(q − 1)2 + 4pr2 ≥ 0.11) with initial conditions in the invariant interval 0.3.3 Convergence of Solutions p + qy 1 + x + ry By using the monotonic character of the function f (x.4.3.11): Theorem 9. 2r √ √ q−1+ (q−1)2 +4pr q−1+ (q−1)2 +4pr yn ∈ 0.4.6. y) = in each of the intervals in Lemma 9. q−1+ (q − 1)2 + 4pr 2r converges to the equilibrium y. 2 q−1+ √ (q−1)2 +4pr (ii) r < 1 and (r − 1)(q − 1)2 + 4pr2 ≥ 0. The result now follows by employing Theorem 1.8) we can obtain some convergence results for the solutions with initial conditions in the invariant intervals.3. .

(a) In view of Lemma 9. 1. The Case β = 0 : xn+1 = α+γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 157 Then every solution of Eq(9.11) when pr = q + this case Eq(9. Then every solution of Eq(9.2 we conclude that yn ∈ for all n ≥ 0. we obtain the following global asymptotic stability result.6.11) is globally asymptotically stable.5 Semicycle Analysis When pr = q + Here we present a semicycle analysis of the solutions of Eq(9. . y) decreases in x and increases in y.3 to Eq(9.2 we conclude that yn ∈ pr−q q . pr−q r q for all n ≥ 0. r2 + r2 yn + r3 yn−1 n = 0.3. Then the positive equilibrium of Eq(9.3. It is easy to 9.11) with initial conditions in the invariant interval pr − q q .4 Global Stability By applying Theorem 1.4.11) with initial conditions in the invariant interval q pr − q . It is easy to (b) In view of Lemma 9.4.5 Assume r ≥ 1 and pr ≤ q. In and the only positive equilibrium is y = q . Theorem 9. q2 r q2 . r 9. Proof. . r q converges to the equilibrium y. the function f decreases check that y ∈ q .11). q r interval q . .r q 2 check that y ∈ and that the function f (x.3.3.9. The result now follows by employing Theorem 1.3.4.7. r .3. The result now follows by employing Theorem 1.r q pr−q q .11) becomes yn+1 = qr + q 2 + qr2 yn−1 . pr−q and that in the r q in both x and in y. (b) Assume that pr > q + qr . q r converges to the equilibrium y. 2 q pr−q .

158 2 Chapter 9.6 Suppose that pr = q + qr and let {yn }∞ n=−1 be a nontrivial solution of Eq(9. The equilibrium points of Eq(9.1 and Theorem 1.18) The following theorem is a consequence of Theorem 1. (9. . and the convergence of solutions in certain regions of initial conditions.1. .3) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where p= pyn + yn−1 . r r r (1 + yn + ryn−1 ) 2 9. r + (1 + q)y Hence zero is always an equilibrium point and when p + 1 > r. C n = 0. the solution oscillates about the equilibrium y with semicycles of length one. Here we make some simple observations about linearized stability. invariant intervals. Proof. . . r + qyn + yn−1 β .17) also possesses the unique positive equilibrium y= p+1−r . γ This equation has not been investigated yet.3.4 The Case α = 0 : xn+1 = βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 This is the (2. (2. γ q= B .11).1. q+1 (9.17) are the nonnegative solutions of the equation y= (p + 1)y .3. Eq(9. 3)-type Eq(9. 3)-Type Equations Theorem 9. The proof follows from the relation yn+1 − q q qr2 = ( − yn ) 3 . C and r = A . Then after the ﬁrst semicycle.17) γ yn . 1.

Then the positive equilibrium of Eq(9. Theorem 9. it follows from Section 2. Theorem 9. . and unstable (a saddle point) when q + r > 3p + 1 + qr + pq.5 that the following result is true.4.17).20) holds there is a unique period-two solution and the values of φ and ψ are the positive roots of the quadratic equation t2 − (1 − p − r)t + p(1 − p − r) = 0. .4. .1 βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 159 (a) Assume that p + 1 ≤ r. (b) Assume that p + 1 > r. Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(9.9.17) is locally asymptotically stable when q + r < 3p + 1 + qr + pq. .4. The linearized equation associated with Eq(9. (9. The following result is a consequence of Theorem 1.17) about its positive equilibrium y is zn+1 − p − q + qr q−p+r zn − zn−1 = 0. . The Case α = 0 : xn+1 = Theorem 9. (p + 1)(q + 1) (p + 1)(q + 1) n = 0. . φ.17) is unstable. Then the zero equilibrium of Eq(9. q−1 .3 Eq(9. 1.4. if and only if (9.17) has a prime period-two solution . φ.1.18) holds.17) is globally asymptotically stable.2 Assume that (9. ψ. . .20) (9. Furthermore the zero equilibrium is a saddle point when 1−p<r <1+p and a repeller when r < 1 − p.20) holds. ψ.19) Concerning prime period-two solutions for Eq(9. Furthermore when (9.1. .

3)-Type Equations 9. when p > q 2 + r where ((r − q)(p − q 2 ) + qr)2 + 4q 3 r(p − q 2 ) 2q(p − q 2 ) .17) possesses the following invariant intervals: (a) 0.160 Chapter 9. K] when q 2 < p ≤ q 2 + r and p + q ≤ r. ((q − r)(q 2 − p))2 + 4p3 qr2 2pqr (q − r)(q 2 − p) + . (2. (b) 0. and [0. p+q−r q+1 when p = q 2 and q 2 + q > r where K > 0 is an arbitrary number and qr . K] when q 2 − qr ≤ p < q 2 and p + q ≤ r. . Lemma 9.1 Eq(9.1 Invariant Intervals The following result. K1 p − q2 K1 = (c) 0. K2 −p [0.4.4. when q 2 − qr ≤ p < q 2 and p + q > r. q2 where K2 = when q 2 > p + qr.17). and q 2 + q ≤ r. gives a list of invariant intervals for Eq(9. qr p − q2 when q 2 < p ≤ q 2 + r and p + q > r. q2 pr −p (q − r)(p − q 2 ) − qr + [0. K] when p = q 2 where K > 0 is an arbitrary number. which can be established by direct calculation. where K > 0 is an arbitrary number and pr .

q 2 −p First assume that q 2 − qr ≤ p < q 2 . K). Then for yk−1 . q+1 (b) It is clear that the function f (x. yk−1 ) ≤ f (K1 . yk−1 ) ≤ f K2 . βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 161 (a) It is easy to see that when p = q 2 the function px + qy f (x.9. while when q 2 + q > r the inequality is true when p+q−r K≥ . y) is increasing in both arguments for x < qr and it is increasing in x and decreasing in y for x ≥ p−q2 . it is satisﬁed under the condition r + q 2 > p. 1 ≤ K. The last inequality is always satisﬁed when p + q ≤ r and when p + q > r. yk−1 ) ≤ f (K. K) = (p + q)K with K = pr . yk+1 = f (yk . Therefore for any K > 0. y) = r + qx + y is increasing in both arguments. p−q 2 0 ≤ f (x. 2 pr pr . yk ∈ f one can see that ≤ K2 . When q 2 + q ≤ r. K) ≤ K is equivalent to q 2 +q−r ≤ (q+1)K. K2 q 2 −p Second assume that p < q 2 − qr. qr Hence for yk−1 . K1 p−q 2 we can see that qr qr . First assume that q 2 < p ≤ q 2 + r . Then for yk−1 . r + (q + 1)K pr . r + (q + 1)K qr where we set K = p−q2 . K1 ≤ yk+1 = f (yk .4. 1 ≤ K. y) is increasing in both arguments for y < and it is increasing in y and decreasing in x for y ≥ q2pr . yk−1 ) ≤ f (K. p−q2 we obtain qr . q2pr we obtain −p yk+1 = f (yk . yk ∈ f qr . this inequality is satisﬁed for any K > 0. y) ≤ f (K. q 2 −p (c) It is clear that the function f (x. The Case α = 0 : xn+1 = Proof. −p Then one can see that for yk−1 . K) = (p + q)K Second assume that p > q 2 + r. yk ∈ 0. ) ≤ K1 . 2 q2 − p q −p . 2 p−q p − q2 pr . Now observe that the inequality f (K. K2 ≤ yk+1 = f (yk . yk ∈ 0.

converges to the equilibrium y. converges to the equilibrium y. Then every solution of Eq(9. (2. K]. 2 q2 pr −p qr p − q2 q2 + q − r q+1 . we can obtain some convergence results for the solutions with initial conditions in the invariant intervals. 3)-Type Equations 9. Then every solution of Eq(9.17) with initial conditions in the invariant interval 0. K].17) with initial conditions in the interval [0.2 Convergence of Solutions px + qy r + qx + y By using the monotonic character of the function f (x.17) with initial conditions in the invariant interval 0. together with the appropriate convergence theorem (from among Theorems 1. y) = in each of the intervals in Lemma 9. for any K > 0. the following results are true for Eq(9.4. Then every solution of Eq(9.162 Chapter 9.8).1.17): Theorem 9.5-1.17) with initial conditions in the invariant interval 0.8. Assume that p = q 2 and q 2 + q ≤ r. The proof is an immediate consequence of Lemma 9.4.4. For example. Then every solution of Eq(9.17) with initial conditions in the interval [0. Then every solution of Eq(9.17) with initial conditions in the interval [0.4. (b) Assume that q 2 + r ≥ p > q 2 and p + q > r. K]. Proof. converges to the equilibrium y. Assume that q 2 + r ≥ p > q 2 and p + q ≤ r.4. converges to the equilibrium y. Assume that q 2 − qr ≤ p < q 2 and p + q ≤ r. (c) Assume that q 2 − qr ≥ p < q 2 and p + q > r. Then every solution of Eq(9.1 and Theorem 1. for any K > 0. converges to the equilibrium y.4.4. for any K > 0. converges to the equilibrium y.4 (a) Assume that p = q 2 and q 2 + q > r.

5 Assume that p > q2 + r and that one of the following conditions is also satisﬁed: (i) p ≤ q + r. A.4. p−q 2 Proof. C ∈ (0.3 Assume β. γ.4.1) has a ﬁnite limit. Proof.5.20) is not satisﬁed. β.5.4.1 Assume Show that every positive solution of Eq(9. Conjecture 9. (ii) q ≥ 1. 2 9.5. γ.2 Assume α.9. ∞). Open Problems and Conjectures Theorem 9. ∞). B. . B. B.2) is bounded.6. Conjecture 9.1 and Theorem 1. K1 p−q 2 3q 2 +q−qr+r . A. K2 converges to the equilibrium y.11) with initial conditions in the invariant interval qr . Then every solution of Eq(9.5 Open Problems and Conjectures α. 2 Theorem 9. C ∈ (0. The proof is a consequence of Lemma 9.6 Assume that q 2 > p + qr and that Condition (9. ∞). (iii) q < 1 qr . 1−q 163 and p ≤ Then every solution of Eq(9. A.11) with initial conditions in the invariant interval converges to the equilibrium y.5. Show that every positive solution of Eq(9.4. Conjecture 9. Show that every positive solution of Eq(9.3) is bounded. The proof is an immediate consequence of Lemma 9.5. C ∈ (0.1 and Theorem 1.4.4.

x0 ) ∈ R × R through which the equation xn + xn−1 xn+1 = 1 + xn + xn−1 is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0.4 Assume Chapter 9. n=−1 .2) is globally asymptotically stable. x0 ∈ [0. γ.2) has no prime period-two solutions. A. C ∈ (0.3) has no prime period-two solutions. ∞) with x−1 + x0 > 0 and that β. ∞) and suppose that Eq(9. x0 ) ∈ R × R through which the equation 1 + xn xn+1 = 1 + xn + xn−1 is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. Extend and generalize.5 Assume that x−1 . x0 ) ∈ R × R through which the equation 1 + xn−1 xn+1 = 1 + xn + xn−1 is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. and for these initial points investigate the long-term behavior of the solutions {xn }∞ . C ∈ (0. (2.5. Show that the positive equilibrium of Eq(9.5.3) is globally asymptotically stable. Extend and generalize.5. Suppose that Eq(9. ∞). n=−1 Open Problem 9. n=−1 Open Problem 9. 3)-Type Equations α. and for these initial points investigate the long-term behavior of the solutions {xn }∞ .164 Conjecture 9. Extend and generalize.1 Determine the set G of all initial points (x−1 . γ. Show that the positive equilibrium of Eq(9. A.5. Open Problem 9.5. B.2 Determine the set G of all initial points (x−1 . and for these initial points investigate the long-term behavior of the solutions {xn }∞ . Conjecture 9.3 Determine the set G of all initial points (x−1 . B.

. and {rn }∞ are convergent sen=0 n=0 n=0 quences of nonnegative real numbers with ﬁnite limits. {qn }n=0 . φ.5.11). 1 + yn + rn yn−1 n = 0.23) pn yn + yn−1 . φ. Investigate the global character of all positive solutions of Eqs(9.23). φ. . . ψ. ψ. . . lim and r = n→∞ rn . of Eq(9.21)-(9. .17) is locally asymptotically stable. ψ.5. n = 0. n→∞ q = n→∞ qn . . . .20) holds. 1. . . 1. . (9. .22) (9. and {rn }∞ are period-two sen=0 n=0 quences of nonnegative real numbers. .5 Assume that {pn }∞ . . Open Problem 9. Extend and generalize. Investigate the basin of attraction of the two cycle .5. Conjecture 9. . 1 + yn + rn yn−1 pn + qn yn−1 . {qn }∞ .5.17). . p = lim pn . 1. . lim Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of each of the following three diﬀerence equations: yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = pn + qn yn . ψ. . . φ.12) holds. . .5. .4 Assume that {pn }∞ . Open Problem 9. rn + qn yn + yn−1 ∞ Open Problem 9. . . n = 0. Investigate the basin of attraction of the two cycle . Open Problems and Conjectures 165 Open Problem 9.5.21) (9.6 Assume that (9.9.6 Assume that (9. . φ. ψ.20) holds. of Eq(9. . . . ψ. Show that the period-two solution .7 Assume that (9. of Eq(9. φ.

. n = 0.24) yn+1 = . . n = 0. q. .25) (9. .166 Open Problem 9. . (9. 3)-Type Equations k ∈ {2. ∞) and Chapter 9. 3. Investigate the global behavior of all positive solutions of each of the following diﬀerence equations: p + qyn (9. 1 + yn + ryn−k pyn + yn−k . 1. . . (2.}.8 Assume that p. . . . r ∈ [0. 1 + yn + ryn−k yn+1 = yn+1 = p + qyn−k . r + qyn + yn−k n = 0. 1. .5. .26) . . 1.

A + Bxn α + βxn + γxn−1 . .1) (10. n = 0. xn+1 = n = 0. 1 + yn αB . n = 0. A2 q= β . 1. the initial conditions are nonnegative. . .1) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where p= p + qyn + ryn−1 . A + Cxn−1 Eq(1) contains the following three equations of the (3. . (10. . A n = 0. 2)-Type Equations 10. 1. . . 2)-type: xn+1 = xn+1 = and α + βxn + γxn−1 . 1. γ .4) and r = 167 . 2)-type Eq(10. and the denominators are always positive.2 The Case C = 0 : xn+1 = A yn B α+βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn This is the (3. 1.1 Introduction α + βxn + γxn−1 . A (10. .Chapter 10 (3.3) Bxn + Cxn−1 Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all parameters that appear in these equations are positive. .2) 10. . . . (10. .

Then the equilibrium of Eq(10. for a more general equation. (c) Assume that r > q + 1.4) about its unique equilibrium y= is zn+1 − q+r−1+ (q + r − 1)2 + 4p 2 q − p − ry r zn − zn−1 = 0.) The linearized equation of Eq(10.4) was investigated in [29].2.7. By applying the linearized stability Theorem 1.4) converges to a period-two solution. The proof of part (a) of Theorem 10.168 Chapter 10. . (10.1 (a) Assume that r = q + 1. Theorem 10. The main result in this section is that the solutions of Eq(10. in Section 2. See Sections 2.5) . 2 (1 + y) 1+y n = 0.4) is globally asymptotically stable. 1.7) (10.2. (b) Assume that r < q + 1.2.1 and 10.4) possesses prime period-two solutions. When r =q+1 Eq(10.7.1 was given. (3. Then Eq(10. 2)-Type Equations (Eq(10.2 below. The proofs of parts (b) and (c) of Theorem 10. Then every solution of Eq(10. .2.2.4) exhibit the following trichotomy character.1.4) possesses unbounded solutions. .1 we see that y is locally asymptotically stable when r <1+q and is an unstable (saddle point) equilibrium when r > 1 + q.1 are given in Sections 10. .5 and 2.6) (10.

1 Proof of Part (b) of Theorem 10.8) holds. (10.10.12) (10. 1.2.6) holds and we prove that the equilibrium of Eq(10.1 Here we assume that Eq(10.10) reduces to yn+1 − q = Also in this case 0<r =1− r (yn − q) for n ≥ 0.4) is attracted to the equilibrium.2.23) which was investigated in Section 6. (10. . 2)-type Eq(6.5 and therefore the proof is complete when (10. . n = 0.10) .8) which is of the form of the (2.6) holds the equilibrium is locally asymptotically stable so it remains to be shown that every solution of Eq(10. .11) q−p r yn−1 − 1 + yn r q−p r for n ≥ 0. (1 + q) + zn n = 1. . . Observe that (p − q) + ryn−1 yn+1 = q + . 1 + yn and so when p≥q we have yn ≥ q Therefore the change of variables yn = q + zn transforms Eq(10.4) is globally asymptotically stable. We know already that when Eq(10. So in the remaining part of the proof we assume that p < q. .4) to the diﬀerence equation zn+1 = (p + rq − q) + rzn−1 .9) for n ≥ 1. 1 + yn p <1 q (10. Now observe that the solutions of Eq(10.4) satisfy the following identity yn+1 − q = Note that when q= that is when p + qr − q = 0 the Identity (10.2. The Case C = 0 : xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn 169 10. (10.

(10.13) (10. We will assume that (10.10) that y2n+2 − q = and so y2n+2 > ry2n + p for n ≥ 0. Then we can see from (10.12) that Chapter 10.16) (10.11) holds. note that now q−p <q r and employ (10. (10.15) yn ≥ q and then use the known result for Eq(10.170 and the equilibrium of Eq(10. (3. (10.13) holds. Still to be considered are cases where p + qr − q > 0 and p + qr − q < 0.10). If (10.15) is not eventually true then either y2n < or y2n−1 < This is because when yN −1 > then it follows from (10.9). 2)-Type Equations |yn+1 − q| < r|yn+1 − q| and so n→∞ lim yn = q which completes the proof when (10. It follows from (10.4) is equal to q.14) First assume that (10.10) that yN +1+2K > q for all K ≥ 0. q−p r q−p r for n ≥ 0 for n ≥ 0.17) holds is similar and will be omitted.18) q−p q−p r y2n − > r y2n − 1 + yn+1 r r .16) holds. To complete the proof in this case it is suﬃcient to show that eventually (10. To this end. The case where (10.17) q−p r for some N ≥ 0.

The Case C = 0 : xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn 171 This is impossible when r ≥ 1.19) holds. because by (10. Note that in this case r < 1 and so q−p < y2n+2 < rn+1 y0 + rn p + .20) r We will assume that (10.18) that q−p > y2n+2 > rn+1 y0 + rn p + . y2n−1 > (10. r that either q−p y2n > for n ≥ 0 (10.8 and the fact that in this case the function f (x.2.16) the solution is bounded.4. .13) holds. .20) holds is similar and will be omitted. q−p r q−p < r y2n − y2n − 1 + y2n+1 r r . y) = p + qx + ry 1+x is increasing in both arguments.2.10) we see that y2n+2 − q = and so y2n+2 < ry2n + p for n ≥ 0. The case where (10. when r < 1. Next assume that (10.4) lies eventually in the interval 0. On the other hand.10. To this end assume for the sake of contradiction that the solution is not eventually in the interval 0. .16) and (10. it follows from (10. + rp + p r which implies that p q−p ≤ .1.10) and r the fact that now q−p q< . r 1−r This contradicts (10. + rp + p r and so p q−p ≥ r 1−r which contradicts (10. Then from (10. q−p . the proof that the r equilibrium is a global attractor of all solutions would be a consequence of Theorem 1.14) and completes the proof of part (b) of Theorem 10. q−p . Once we establish this result. Then one can see from (10.14) holds. . Now we claim that every solution of Eq(10.19) r or q−p for n ≥ 0.13) and completes the proof when (10.

. A (10.4) possesses unbounded solutions.4) with initial conditions such that q ≤ y−1 < r − 1 and y0 > r−1 + p + q(r − 1) r−1−q for n ≥ 0. y0 ∈ [q. That is when y−1 .3 The Case B = 0 : xn+1 = A yn C α+βxn +γxn−1 A+Cxn−1 This is the (3. (3. in addition to unbounded solutions. .4). Eq(10. the equilibrium of Eq(10. have the property that the subsequences of even terms converge to ∞ while the subsequences of odd terms converge to q. More speciﬁcally the solutions of Eq(10.4) is a saddle point and so by the stable manifold theorem. γ . . 2)-type Eq(10.4) possesses bounded solutions which in fact converge to the equilibrium of Eq(10.9) and the conclusion of part (c) follows from Section 6.5 for appropriate initial conditions y−1 and y0 .1 Here we assume that (10. 1.172 Chapter 10.7) holds and show that Eq(10.7) holds the interval [q. ∞) is invariant. 1 + yn−1 q= β .2 Proof of Part (c) of Theorem 10. A n = 0.2) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where p= p + qyn + ryn−1 .7) holds.4) to Eq(10. 2)-Type Equations 10.21) αC .2. It should be mentioned that when (10. then yn ≥ q Now the change of variables yn = q + zn transforms Eq(10. To this end observe that yn+1 = q + q p + r(yn−1 − r ) 1 + yn for n ≥ 0 and so when (10. 10. ∞).2. A2 and r = .

21) when p ≥ r.21) about its positive equilibrium y= is zn+1 − q+r−1+ (q + r − 1)2 + 4p 2 q p − r + qy zn = 0. The linearized equation of Eq(10. q. 1. and r. n = 0. yN . yN +1 ∈ I then yn ∈ I for n ≥ N.1 we see that y is locally asymptotically stable for all values of the parameters p.1 Invariant Intervals The following result. (b) 0. . .21). . and convergence of solutions in certain regions of initial conditions.1.2 Here we discuss the behavior of the solutions of Eq(10. zn + 1+y (1 + y)2 n = 0.1 Eq(10.3.21) possesses the following invariant intervals: (a) 0. . . if whenever. for some integer N ≥ 0. The Case B = 0 : xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 A+Cxn−1 173 This equation has not been investigated yet. p 1−q when q < 1 and p ≥ r.3. gives a list of invariant intervals for Eq(10.3. r−p q when q < 1 and p ≥ r(1 − q). Here we make some simple observations about linearized stability. Observe that (p − r) + qyn . 1.10. 10. invariant intervals. By applying Theorem 1. . 10. yn+1 = r + 1 + yn−1 and so when p≥r Global Stability When p ≥ r .3. Recall that I is an invariant interval. which can be established by direct calculation. Lemma 10. .

2) which was investigated in Section 6. Theorem 10. (b) The positive equilibrium of Eq(10. r−p q .3 Convergence of Solutions Here we discuss the behavior of the solutions of Eq(10. 1−q Then every solution of Eq(10.21) when p < r. (3. Then the following statements are true.3. (1 + r) + zn−1 Chapter 10. .3. which is of the form of the (2. n = 1.174 yn ≥ r Therefore the change of variables yn = r + zn transforms Eq(10. 2)-Type Equations for n ≥ 1.21) is bounded.3.21) with initial conditions in the invariant interval 0. (a) Every positive solution of Eq(10. Theorem 10.21) is globally asymptotically stable if one of the following conditions holds: (i) q < 1.3. converges to the equilibrium y. (ii) q≥1 and either p + qr − r ≤ q or q < p + qr − r ≤ 2(q + 1). The following result is now a consequence of the above observations and the results in Section 6. .21) to the diﬀerence equation zn+1 = p + qr − r + qzn . 10.3. . 2)-type Eq(6.2 (a) Assume that q < 1 and r ≥ p .1 Assume p ≥ r. 2.

(a) In view of Lemma 10. 1−q and p < r < Then every solution of Eq(10. r−p q q for all n ≥ 0.10.3. r−p .4 The Case A = 0 : xn+1 = γ yn C α+βxn +γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 This is the (3. It is easy to check that y ∈ r−p .22) β . γ and r = . αC . then yn ∈ r−p . . r−p and that in the interval 0.1 we see that when y−1 . y0 ∈ for all n ≥ 0. 1. It is easy to check that y ∈ 0.3) which by the change of variables xn = reduces to the diﬀerence equation yn+1 = where p= r + pyn + yn−1 .4.K q converges to the equilibrium y. . The result is now a consequence of Theorem 1. Proof. r−p q q the function f (x. r−p . 2)-type Eq(10.3. 2 10.8.K q and that in the interval .4.21) with initial conditions in the invariant interval r−p . The result is now a consequence of Theorem 1.K q r−p . y0 ∈ 0. y) increases in both x and y.5.4. K= q + r − p − q2 (b) In view of Lemma 10. qyn + yn−1 q= B .K q the function f (x. then yn ∈ 0. γ2 (10. The Case A = 0 : xn+1 = (b) Suppose that either or Set α+βxn +γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 175 0≤q−1<r q<1 and p < r p . y) increases in x and decreases in y. .K q pq + r2 − pr .1 we see that when y−1 . C n = 0.

(10.1 we see that y is locally asymptotically stable when either q ≤ pq + 1 + 3p or q > pq + 1 + 3p and F where F (u) = (q + 1)u2 − (p + 1)u − r. (10. . . q > 1 and 4r < (1 − p)(q − pq − 3p − 1). When r = 0.24) 2r q − pq − 1 − 3p >0 (10. φ. it follows from Section 2. The linearized equation of Eq(10. .1. ψ. . and the convergence of solutions in certain regions of initial conditions. is unique and the values φ and ψ are the positive roots of the quadratic equation t2 − (1 − p)t + r + p(1 − p) = 0. 1. . (q + 1)(r + (p + 1)y) (q + 1)(r + (p + 1)y) n = 0. . Concerning prime period-two solution.176 Chapter 10.5 that a period-two solution exists if and only if p < 1. as in Section 6. . q−1 . Here we make some simple observations about linearized stability. ψ. invariant intervals.22) about its positive equilibrium y= is zn+1 − (p − q)y − qr (p − q)y + r zn + zn−1 = 0. the inequality in (10. The second condition reduces to q > pq + 1 + 3p. (1 + p) + (1 + p)2 + 4r(1 + q) 2(1 + q) By applying Theorem 1.25) Furthermore in this case the prime period-two solution .9. . .24) is void.23) is strict and Condition (10. φ. . (3.23) It is interesting to note that the above condition for the local asymptotic stability of y requires the assumption that r > 0. 2)-Type Equations This equation has not been investigated yet.

(q + 1)b (q + 1)a qr .1 Eq(10.4. r q−p r .10. Hence a≤ r + (p + 1)b r + (p + 1)a = f (b.1 q−p Proof. r + px + y qx + y (b) Clearly the function f (x. y) ≤ f (a. p > q. y) is decreasing in both arguments when y < qr is increasing in x and decreasing in y for y ≥ p−q . b] when p = q a and b are positive numbers such that r + (p + 1)a ≤ (q + 1)ab ≤ r + (p + 1)b.4. Lemma 10. The Case A = 0 : xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 177 10. . q p−q qr p . p−q q (c) 1.4. y) = is decreasing in both arguments.21) possesses the following invariant intervals: (a) [a. when q > p + r. (a) It is easy to see that when p = q the function f (x. a) = ≤ b. q2 p2 − pq > r. p−q and (10. First assume that p > q and p2 −pq q2 and it < r. q2 when p > q and when p < q < p + r.21). (b) p qr .26) when p > q and p2 − pq < r. We consider the cases where p = q. b) ≤ f (x. and p < q.1 Invariant Intervals Here we present some results about invariant intervals for Eq(10.

y) ≤ f p p . p−q q ≤ f (x. y) ≤ f (1. r . p−q q p2 −pq q2 and p qr < q p−q < r. p(q + 1) p−q qr qr . q−p (c) It is clear that the function f (x. y) ≤ f p qr . we obtain 1=f The inequalities r r . q (qr + p)(p − q) + pq 2 r =f q 3 r + p(p − q) The inequalities (qr + p)(p − q) + pq 2 r qr ≥ 3 r + p(p − q) q p−q follow from the inequality p2 −pq q2 and qr p > q p−q > r. p−q p−q The inequalities qr + p(p + 1) qr ≤ p(q + 1) p−q are equivalent to the inequality Next assume that p > q and For x. 1 = 1. q q = qr qr + p(p + 1) ≤ . p−q . q+1 q−p r+p+1 r r < and q−p q+1 q−p are equivalent to the inequality q < p + r.178 Then for x. q(q − p) + r q−p ≤ f (x. 2)-Type Equations we obtain ≤ f (x. y) is decreasing in both arguments for x < r and it is increasing in y and decreasing in x for x ≥ q−p . . q p−q p = . q−p q−p 1< ≤ f (x. p2 −pq q2 > r. y ∈ p =f q p qr . assume that p < q < p + r. y) ≤ f r . Using the decreasing character of f . First. Using the decreasing character of f in x and the increasing character of f in y. 1) = r+p+1 r ≤ . q p−q Chapter 10. we obtain qr p . we obtain r (p + r)(q − p) + r = f 1. y ∈ qr p . Next assume that q > p + r. (3.

Then every solution of Eq(10. Proof. 1 converges to the equilibrium y.26) converges to the equilibrium y.2 Convergence of Solutions Here we obtain some convergence results for Eq(10. The proof is an immediate consequence of Lemma 10.1 (a) Assume that p = q.4. 2 .4. and that Condition (10. (b) Assume that p > q and r > p2 −pq .4. b].4. q2 and that either p≤1 or p > 1 and (q − 1)[(p − 1)2 (q − 1) − 4q(1 − p − qr)] ≤ 0. r < p2 −pq .22). Then every solution of Eq(10. 2 Theorem 10.1 and Theorem 1. Theorem 10.4.4.4.10. The Case A = 0 : xn+1 = The inequalities α+βxn +γxn−1 Bxn +Cxn−1 179 (p + r)(q − p) + r r ≥ q(q − p) + r q−p follow from the inequality q > p + r.4.5. q−p converges to the equilibrium y. where 0 < a < b satisfy (10.2 Assume that p > q. Then every solution of Eq(10. (c) Assume that p < q < p+r. p−q q Proof.6. The proof is an immediate consequence of Lemma 10.1 and Theorem 1.22) with initial conditions r in the invariant interval 1.1 and Theorem 1.4.3 Assume that p < q. qr p . 2 Theorem 10. and r <1 q−p 2 10. p + r < q. Then every solution of Eq(10.4.22) with initial p qr .22) with initial conditions in the invariant interval converges to the equilibrium y. q2 Then every solution of Eq(10.4.7. q−p Proof.25) is not satisﬁed.22) with initial conditions in the invariant interval [a. The proof is an immediate consequence of Lemma 10. q p−q conditions in the invariant interval converges to the equilibrium y.22) with initial conditions in the invariant interval r .

21) converges to the positive equilibrium of the equation. y0 ) ∈ B. ψ.5. ∞) × (0.3 For each of the equations listed below. . (10.30) xn+1 = xn + xn−1 Extend and generalize. .1 Every positive solution of Eq(10. ∞) such that the ∞ solutions {yn }n=−1 of Eq(10.5. (3.4) converges to a not necessarily prime period-two solution .5 Open Problems and Conjectures ∞ Open Problem 10.27). 2)-Type Equations 10.27) (b) Assume (10. . (a) Find the set B of all initial conditions (y−1 .28) 1 + xn 1 + xn + xn−1 xn+1 = (10.180 Chapter 10.1 We know that every solution {yn }n=−1 of Eq(10. (a) Determine the set of initial conditions y−1 and y0 for which φ = ψ.2 Assume r > q + 1. φ. .29) 1 + xn−1 1 + xn + xn−1 .4) are bounded. Determine the set of initial conditions y−1 and y0 for which {yn }∞ n=−1 converges to (10. determine the set G of all initial conditions (x−1 .4). if and only if r = 1 + q. ψ. Investigate the asymptotic behavior of {yn }n=−1 . . x0 ) ∈ R × R through which the equation is well deﬁned for all n ≥ 0. . y0 ) ∈ (0. Conjecture 10.5. Open Problem 10.5. Open Problem 10. and for these initial points investigate the long-term behavior of the corresponding solution: 1 + xn + xn−1 xn+1 = (10. ∞ (b) Let (y−1 . . (10. φ.27) is a prime period-two solution of Eq(10.

. when it exists. (10. . . is locally asymptotically stable. lim lim and r = n→∞ rn . Investigate the global character of all positive solutions of Eqs(10. {qn }∞ . (10.5 Assume that {pn }∞ . but not globally.22) (a) Local stability of the positive equilibrium implies global stability. .5. Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of each of the following three diﬀerence equations: yn+1 = pn + qn yn + rn yn−1 .5.5. 1.31)-(10.22) possesses a period-two solution.22). 1. (c) When Eq(10. q. .33) Open Problem 10. . . n→∞ q = n→∞ qn . and {rn }n=0 are convergent sen=0 n=0 quences of nonnegative real numbers with ﬁnite limits. Then the following statements are true for Eq(10. . r ∈ (0. Extend and generalize.31) yn+1 = yn+1 = n = 0. .5. 1.2 Assume that p. .22) has no prime period-two solutions the equilibrium y is globally asymptotically stable. 1 + yn−1 rn + pn yn + yn−1 . Open Problems and Conjectures Conjecture 10.32) (10. n = 0. . qn yn + yn−1 n = 0. ∞). 1 + yn pn + qn yn + rn yn−1 .10. {qn }∞ . 181 (b) When Eq(10. p = lim pn .33). the equilibrium y is a saddle point. (d) The period-two solution of Eq(10.4 Assume that {pn }∞ . and {rn }∞ are period-two sen=0 n=0 n=0 quences of nonnegative real numbers. ∞ Open Problem 10.

n = 0. ∞) and k ∈ {2. . .36) . . qyn + yn−k n = 0. . . n = 0. . Investigate the global behavior of all positive solutions of each of the following diﬀerence equations: yn+1 = yn+1 = yn+1 = p + qyn + ryn−k . 1.35) (10. . 1. . 1. .}. (3.6 Assume that Chapter 10. . (10. q. .182 Open Problem 10. 2)-Type Equations p. 3. r ∈ [0.34) (10. 1 + yn−k p + qyn + ryn−1 . 1 + yn p + qyn + ryn−k . .5. .

. .3) zn+1 − (βA − Bα) + (βC − Bγ)x zn + α(B + C) + (B + C)(A + β + γ)x (γA − Cα) − (βC − γB)x = 0. invariant intervals. . x= β+γ−A+ (A − β − γ)2 + 4α(B + C) 2(B + C) . and the convergence of solutions in certain regions of initial conditions. The linearized equation about x is (see Section 2. Eq(11.1) has a unique equilibrium which is the positive solution of the quadratic equation That is. 11. . 1. − z 2 + α(B + C) + (B + C)(A + β + γ)x n−1 A A2 183 n = 0. .1 Linearized Stability Analysis (B + C)x2 − (β + γ − A)x − α = 0. 3)-Type Equation α+βx xn+1 = A+Bxn+γxn−1 n+Cx n−1 In this chapter we discuss the (3. (11. 3)-type equation xn+1 = α + βxn + γxn−1 .1) Please recall our classiﬁcation convention in which all coeﬃcients of this equation are now assumed to be positive and the initial conditions nonnegative. . (11. 1. This equation has not been investigated yet. Here we make some simple observations about linearized stability.Chapter 11 The (3.2) . A + Bxn + Cxn−1 n = 0. . .

holds the values of φ and ψ are the positive roots of the quadratic equation t2 + γ−β−A αC + β(γ − β − A) t+ = 0. and (2. if.1) has a prime period-two solution .1). for n ≥ N.1) then we may be able to obtain a convergence result for the solutions of Eq(11. when (11. that is.1) if whenever.4. yN . yn ∈ I . . C C(B − C) .4. (2. (11.1) by testing whether the hypotheses of one of the four Theorems 1. . ψ. . φ. see Section 2.4) The local asymptotic stability of the two cycle 11. Conditions (2. 3)-Type Equation xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 The equilibrium x is locally asymptotically stable if Conditions (2. is discussed in Section 2.8 are satisﬁed. and N = γA − αC α + βx + γy A + Bx + Cy L + My N − My and fy = .14). and α < (γ − β − A)[B(γ − β − A) − C(γ + 3β − A)] . . . ψ. (11. Once we have an invariant interval for Eq(11. .31) and (2.32) are satisﬁed.3). .2 Invariant Intervals Here we obtain several invariant intervals for Eq(11. φ. The (3.6. φ. 2 (A + Bx + Cy) (A + Bx + Cy)2 Recall that an interval I is an invariant interval for Eq(11.3) 4C 2 Furthermore. γ > β+A. . then clearly fx = M = βC − γB. These intervals are derived by analyzing the intervals where the function f (x. . B > C. .5. yN +1 ∈ I then for some integer N ≥ 0. . ψ. φ. . ψ. If we set L = βA − αB. y) = is increasing or decreasing in x and y. Eq(11.5-1.13).184 Chapter 11.15) are satisﬁed.

A B C α Then 0. (iii) Assume that β α γ > > C B A and β+γ αB − βA ≤ . βC−γB is an invariant interval for Eq(11. A is an invariant interval for Eq(11. (iv) Assume that β α γ = < . y) is increasing in both variables.1) and in this interval the function f (x. y) is decreasing in both variables. Invariant Intervals Lemma 11.11. (v) Assume that α β γ γA − αC > . C B A β α Then B . B is an invariant interval for Eq(11. B+C is an invariant interval for Eq(11. A is an invariant interval for Eq(11.1) and in this interval the function f (x.2. C is an invariant interval for Eq(11. (ii) Assume that β γ α > > B C A and γ N ≤ . y) is increasing in both variables. (vii) Assume that α β γ = > .2.1) and in this interval the function f (x. y) is increasing in x and decreasing in y. ≥ > βC − γB A B C γA−αC Then 0. (vi) Assume that β γ α γA − αC . y) is decreasing in both variables.1) and in this interval the function f (x. C B A 185 α β Then A . y) is increasing in both variables.1) and in this interval the function f (x.1) and in this interval the function f (x.1 (i) Assume that β α γ = > . A is an invariant interval for Eq(11. y) is decreasing in both variables.1) and in this interval the function f (x. < < < B C A βC − γB α Then 0. B+C βC − γB α β+γ Then A . . C M α γ Then A .

for every x. A B C γ Then 0. Thus. = f (0. ) = . (x) Assume that β α γ < ≤ . in this case the function f is increasing in x. 3)-Type Equation xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 β α γ > ≥ . y ∈ α γ . B is an invariant interval for Eq(11. 0) ≤ f (x. A M M C for all x. A C . 0) ≤ f (x. Thus. u) is increasing and consequently f (u. u) ≤ β β+γ = . y) ≤ f ( .1) and in this interval the function f (x. γ β α (i) The condition C = B > A is equivalent to M = 0 and L > 0. which in turn imply that N > 0. this function γ N N is increasing in y for x < M . assuming C ≤ M we obtain N N γ α = f (0. y) is increasing in y and decreasing in x. B A C γ Then 0. y) is increasing in x and decreasing in y. The (3. (ix) Assume that α β γ = < . ) ≤ A B B B+C B Here we used the fact that under the condition γ β α = > C B A the function f (u. L > 0. . C is an invariant interval for Eq(11. Proof.1) and in this interval the function f (x. B+C B γ β α (ii) The condition B > C > A is equivalent to M > 0. B A C β Then 0.186 (viii) Assume that Chapter 11. y) is increasing in y and decreasing in x. y) ≤ f ( . in this case the function f is increasing in both variables for all values of x and y and α β+γ β β β = .1) and in this interval the function f (x. Thus. and N > 0. In addition. C is an invariant interval for Eq(11.

in this case the function f is decreasing in both variables for all values of x and y and α α β α ≤f . y) ≤ f (0. for every x. 0) = L for all x. α L L this function is decreasing in x for y < − M . which in turn imply that N < 0. L < 0. A M γ β α (vi) The condition A > C > B is equivalent to M < 0. Thus. ≤ f (x. this function α N N is decreasing in y for x < M . u) ≥ β+γ β = . y) ≤ f (0. 0) = α for all x. for every y. A . y ∈ 0. Thus assuming A ≤ M . A B+C β+γ β+γ . α L ≤− . In addition. y) ≤ f (0. u) is decreasing and consequently f (u. In addition.2. which in turn imply that N > 0. Thus. for every y. this function is increasing in x for y < − M . 0) = .11. B+C B β γ α (v) The condition A > B > C is equivalent to M > 0 and L < 0. y) ≤ f A for all x. y ∈ 0. in this case the function f is decreasing in y. in this case the function f is decreasing in x. B+C . α . y ∈ α β+γ . B+C B+C ≤ β+γ . γ β α (iv) The condition C = B < A is equivalent to M = 0 and L < 0. we obtain. in this case the function f is increasing in y. we obtain 0 ≤ f (x. 0) ≤ f (x. which imply that N < 0. Thus assuming A ≤ − M . and N < 0. − M . A . Thus assuming B+C ≤ − M . Invariant Intervals 187 γ β α (iii) The condition C > B > A is equivalent to M < 0 and L > 0. Thus. α = f (0. B A A A Here we used the fact that under the condition β α γ = < C B A the function f (u. we obtain 0 ≤ f (x. Thus. In β+γ L L addition.

v) is increasing in v when N > 0 and so γ f (0. B B β γ α (ix) The condition A = B < C is equivalent to M < 0 and L = 0. y ∈ 0. 0 ≤ f (x. in this case the function f is decreasing in x and increasing in y for all values of x and y. y) < f β for all x. y ∈ 0. C γ β α (x) The condition B < A ≤ C is equivalent to M < 0. Using this we obtain. 3)-Type Equation xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 β γ α (vii) The condition A = B > C is equivalent to M > 0 and L = 0. Using this we obtain. 0 ≤ f (x. v) ≤ = lim f (0.0 = . Thus. Using this we obtain. y) < f 0. Thus. and N < 0. γ C ≤ γ . A . 0 ≤ f (x. Here we use the fact that the function f (0. γ for all x. in this case the function f is increasing in x and decreasing in y for all values of x and y. A A β γ α (viii) The condition B > A > C is equivalent to M > 0. C γ for all x. α α . The (3. in this case the function f is increasing in x and decreasing in y for all values of x and y. y ∈ 0. y) ≤ f α for all x. C v→∞ for all v. in this case the function f is increasing in x and decreasing in y for all values of x and y. and N ≥ 0.0 = . Using this we obtain. which in turn imply that N > 0. L > 0. Thus. y ∈ 0. γ C = γ . 0 ≤ f (x. β β . v). Thus. C . . C . B . 2 The next table summarizes more complicated invariant intervals with the signs of the partial derivatives fx and fy . L < 0. which in turn imply that N < 0. y) ≤ f 0.188 Chapter 11.

n→∞ . B ] γ [0.1 Let {xn } be a solution of Eq(11. K3 ] if AM −BL+CMK > − M K α [0.4. Convergence Results 189 Case 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Invariant intervals αM +(β+γ)N N [0. fy < 0 if x < M αM +(β+γ)N αM +(β+γ)N N [ AM +(B+C)N . − M ] if AM −(B+C)L < − M βM K+αM L L [− M . K4 ] if AM +BK+CNM > M M N M where K1 = K2 = K3 = K4 = (β − A)M − CN + (A − γ)M − BL + (β − A)M + LC + (γ − A)M − BN + ((β − A)M − N C)2 + 4BM (αM + γN ) 2BM ((A − γ)M − BL)2 + 4CM (αM − βL) ((β − A)M + LC)2 + 4BM (αM − γL) 2BM 2CM −2CM . Theorem 11.4. K2 ] if BM K+AM −γL > − M −CL β+γ−A+ β [0. − M ] if AM −L(B+C) < − M αM −βL+γM L L [− M . if √ αM +(β+γ)N AM +(B+C)N > N M fx > 0 fy > 0 if x < fx > 0 fy < 0 fx > 0 fy > 0 N M . fx < 0 if y > − M fy > 0 fx > 0 fy < 0 fx < 0 fy > 0 L L fx > 0 if y > − M . M ] if AM +(B+C)N < αM +βK+γN N N [ M . A ] √ L L fx > 0 if y < − M . Then in each of the following cases lim xn = x.2. . [0.5-1. K1 ] β−A+ Signs of derivatives N M [0.1). ((γ − A)M − BN )2 + 4BM (αM + βN ) 11.3 Convergence Results The following result is a consequence of Lemma 11.1 and Theorems 1. fx < 0 if y < − M fy < 0 fx < 0 fy < 0 fx < 0 N N fy > 0 if x > M . .11.3.3. fy < 0 if x > N M (β−A)2 +4Bα ] 2B (β+γ−A)2 +4α(B+C) ] 2(B+C) αM −(β+γ)L L L [0. C ] αM −L(β+γ) αM −L(β+γ) L L [ AM −L(B+C) . M ] if AM +(B+C)N < N [ M .8. .

x0 ∈ α β . β α γ > ≥ . B < C. B : β > γ + A. 3)-Type Equation xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 γ β α = > C B A (ii) β γ α > > . β γ α = > . A B C β (viii) At least one of the following three conditions is not satisﬁed and x−1 . A B+C γ γA − αC ≤ . A C α β+γ . x0 ∈ 0. . The (3. x0 ∈ αB − βA β+γ ≤ . x0 ∈ β α . βC − γB α . B < C. B+C βC − γB and x−1 . . C βC − γB and x−1 . B C A (iii) γ β α > > . and or (C − B)[(C − B)(β − γ − A)2 − 4B(αB + γ(β − γ − A))] > 0. A : β > γ + A. A B α γ . α (vii) At least one of the following three conditions is not satisﬁed and x−1 . γA − αC . C B A (iv) γ β α = < C B A (v) and x−1 . A β γ α γA − αC < < < B C A βC − γB and x−1 . B A C . B A and x−1 . x0 ∈ 0. x0 ∈ 0. . x0 ∈ 0. .190 (i) Chapter 11. x0 ∈ α β γ γA − αC ≥ > > βC − γB A B C (vi) and x−1 . and or (C − B)[(C − B)(β − γ − A)2 − 4B(αB + γ(β − γ − A))] > 0.

A + Bm + CM M= α + βM + γm A + BM + Cm is m = M . Convergence Results (ix) Condition (11. and by observing that the only solution of the system of equations m = f (m. C B A Then the equilibrium x of Eq(11.8. that is.11. γ .4. m).2 Assume that γ β α < min .3) is not satisﬁed. The proofs of statements (i-iii) follow by applying Lemma 11. x0 ∈ 0. m= α + βm + γM . Theorem 1.3 to Eq(11.4. 2 11.5. and by observing that Eq(11. γ .4.1) is globally asymptotically stable.7.4. Theorem 1.1 Global Stability Theorem 1.2.4.1 (vii) and (viii) respectively. C and x−1 .6. .2.3.1 (ix) and (x) respectively. C 191 Proof.2. The proofs of statements (iv-vi) follow by applying Lemma 11.1) we obtain the following global asymptotic result.1) does not possess a prime period-two solution.1 (iv-vi) and Theorem 1. .3. The proofs of statements (ix) and (x) follow by applying Lemma 11. M ). α γ β < ≤ B A C and x−1 .3) is not satisﬁed. The proofs of statements (vii) and (viii) follow by applying Lemma 11. β γ α = < A B C (x) Condition (11. By applying Theorem 1.1 (i-iii) and Theorem 1.2 and linearized stability imply the following global stability result: Theorem 11.3. M = f (M.4. x0 ∈ 0.2.

3)-Type Equation xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 Theorem 11.1) is globally asymptotically stable. γ. Show that the positive equilibrium of Eq(11. Then the equilibrium x of Eq(11.3. Conjecture 11. Conjecture 11. and 3βC ≥ γB ≥ βC.4 (a) Assume that αC ≥ γA. Show that every positive solution of Eq(11. β. β. γB > βC. A.4 Open Problems and Conjectures α. C ∈ (0. ∞). Then the equilibrium x of Eq(11. β. γ. βA ≥ αB. ∞) and that Eq(11. Then the equilibrium x of Eq(11.4.1) is globally asymptotically stable.4. .1) converges to the positive equilibrium. 11. and γA > αC. Conjecture 11.1) is bounded. B. αB > βA.4.2 Assume α. C ∈ (0.1 Assume Show that every positive solution of Eq(11. and 3γB ≥ βC ≥ γB. B. A.4. The following global stability result is a consequence of linearized stability and the Trichotomy Theorem 1. γA ≥ αC.3.3 Assume that B ≤ C.1) is a saddle point and the period-two solution is locally asymptotically stable.192 Chapter 11.1) is globally asymptotically stable. γ. ∞) and that Eq(11. Theorem 11.1) has no positive prime period-two solution. A. The (3. C ∈ (0.3 Assume α.1) has a positive prime period-two solution. B. (b) Assume that αB ≥ βA.4.

5) are period-two sequences of positive real numbers. 1.2 Assume that the parameters in Eq(11. Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of the diﬀerence equation αn + βn xn + γn xn−1 . A + A0 xn + .4. {Cn }∞ n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 are convergent sequences of nonnegative real numbers with ﬁnite limits.5). C ∈ (0.4. Show that Eq(11. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions so that every positive solution of Eq(11. {γn }∞ . . Open Problems and Conjectures Conjecture 11. .4 Assume α.6) Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions so that every positive solution of the equation xn+1 = has a ﬁnite limit. A. a + a0 xn + . .6) holds. Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions so that every positive solution of Eq(11. . k. xn+1 = (11. . ∞). . n = 0. .1) cannot have a prime period-k solution for any k ≥ 3. . {Bn }∞ . ai . Open Problem 11. γ. investigate the cases where 2 ≤ k ≤ 8.7) converges to a period-two solution. Ai ∈ [0. B. β. {βn }∞ . Investigate the asymptotic behavior and the periodic nature of all positive solutions of Eq(11.4 Assume that (11. . n = 0. ∞) for i = 0. k ≥ 2.4. .11.4. . . . + Ak xn−k (11.4. {An }n=0 . .5 Assume that (11. + ak xn−k .3 Assume that a. . (11.6) holds.7) is periodic with period-k. In particular.5) An + Bn xn + Cn xn−1 Open Problem 11.7) Open Problem 11. 1. 1.4. Open Problem 11.4. A. .1 Assume {αn }n=0 . 193 ∞ ∞ Open Problem 11. .

+ xn−k + xn−k−1 xn−k−2 . 1. (See [32] for the two dimensional case.4. [47]. 1.6 Let aij ∈ (0. . + xn−k−2 converges to 1. The (3. (See [8]. n = 0. . . j ∈ {1. . Extend and generalize. . ∞). . . .4.4. γxn xn−1 + δxn−2 Conjecture 11. β. .7 Assume that p. and [60]. n = 0. γ. q ∈ [0.4. 1.8) converges to a period-two solution. .6 Let α. ∞) with γ + δ > 0. and the asymptotic behavior of all positive solutions of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = (See [8] and [61]. 2.) Conjecture 11. Extend to equations with real parameters. Show that every positive solution of the system xn+1 = yn+1 = zn+1 = a11 xn a21 xn a31 xn + + + a12 yn a22 yn a32 yn + + + a13 zn a23 zn a33 zn . (11. Show that every positive solution of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = xn + . δ ∈ [0. ∞) for i. xn xn−1 + xn−2 + .) αxn + βxn−1 xn−2 . . n = 0.194 Chapter 11. Investigate the boundedness character. the periodic nature. . . 3}. .) Conjecture 11.5 Let k ≥ 2 be a positive integer. 3)-Type Equation xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 Open Problem 11. .

Open Problems and Conjectures (a) Show that every positive solution of the equation xn+1 = pxn−1 + xn−2 . (a) Show that every positive solution of the equation xn+1 = xn−1 . . . . 195 converges to a period-two solution if and only if p = 1 + q. xn−1 + pxn−2 n = 0. .4.4. q ∈ [0.4. q + xn−2 n = 0.11. . (b) Show that when p<1 the positive equilibrium x = 1 1+p is globally asymptotically stable. converges to a period-two solution if p ≥ 1. (c) Show that when p>1+q the equation possesses positive unbounded solutions. 1. (b) Show that when p<1+q every positive solution has a ﬁnite limit. (See [62].9 Assume that p. . Conjecture 11. ∞).) Conjecture 11. 1.8 Assume that p ∈ (0. . ∞).

1. (See [62]. . . 3)-Type Equation xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 (a) Show that every positive solution of the equation xn+1 = xn−1 + p . 1. (ii) When p = 1 every positive solution converges to a period-ﬁve solution. 1. converges to a period-four solution. (See [62]. xn−2 + q n = 0. The (3.11 Show that the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = p + xn−2 .4.4. xn n = 0. (b) Show that when q>1 the positive equilibrium of the equation is globally asymptotically stable. . . has the following trichotomy character: (i) When p > 1 every positive solution converges to the positive equilibrium. . .) Conjecture 11. (See [62]. . . (iii) When p < 1 there exist positive unbounded solutions. xn−1 n = 0.196 Chapter 11. .) . (c) Show that when q<1 the equation possesses positive unbounded solutions.10 Show that every positive solution of the equation xn+1 = xn + xn−2 . converges to a period-two solution if and only if q = 1.) Conjecture 11.

.9) with nonnegative parameters and nonnegative initial conditions such that B + D > 0 and A + Bxn + Dxn−2 > 0 for n ≥ 0.12 Show that every positive solution of the equation xn+1 = 1 + xn . A + Bxn + Dxn−2 (11. . . what other conditions are needed so that every positive solution of Eq(11. . . ∞).. (11. 197 converges to a period-six solution of the form . φ φ ψ ψ Open Problem 11. .4.9) converges to the positive equilibrium? (c) Assume γ > β + δ + A.) . Then one can show that Eq(11.11.9) has prime period-two solutions if and only if γ = β + δ + A.) ψ 1 1 φ . .9) possesses unbounded solutions? (See [6]. (See [62]. xn−1 + xn−2 n = 0. . ψ ∈ (0. Open Problems and Conjectures Conjecture 11. n = 0. .7 Consider the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = α + βxn + γxn−1 + δxn−2 .10) (a) In addition to (11. . where φ. φ.4.9) converges to a period-two solution? (b) Assume γ < β + δ + A.. ψ.10). 1.. .4. What other conditions are needed so that Eq(11. What other conditions are needed so that every positive solution of Eq(11. 1. .

4. . 1. converges to a period-three solution. xn−1 n = 0.14 Show that every positive solution of the equation xn+1 = 1 + xn−1 . 1 + xn + xn−2 n = 0. xn−2 n = 0. . . . . . ∞). xn−1 + xn−2 + xn−3 n = 0. 1. (b) Show that when q>r every positive solution converges to the positive equilibrium. p + qxn + rxn−2 . . 1. . r ∈ (0.4. . . . ∞) and q. .198 Chapter 11.15 Show that every positive solution of the equation xn+1 = xn−2 . (See [6]. (See [6]. . Conjecture 11. converges to a period-two solution.4.) Conjecture 11. (a) Show that when q=r every positive solution converges to a period-four solution.) Conjecture 11. The (3. . .16 Consider the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = where p ∈ [0.13 Show that every positive solution of each of the two equations xn+1 = and xn+1 = 1 + xn−1 + xn−2 . n = 0. xn 1 + xn−1 + xn−2 . .4. 1. 3)-Type Equation xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 Conjecture 11. converges to a period-two solution. 1.

. .11. . A + B0 xn + .8 Determine whether every positive solution of each of the following equations converges to a periodic solution of the corresponding equation: (a) xn+1 = (b) xn+1 = (c) xn+1 = (d) xn+1 = 1 + xn + xn−3 . xn−1 . . . 1. . . . Open Problem 11. (See [6].) . Bk ∈ [0. . . Bk so that every positive solution of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = xn−k . xn−2 n = 0. Open Problems and Conjectures (c) Show that when q<r the equation possesses positive unbounded solutions. B1 . xn n = 0. . . . . (See [62].4. ∞) with i=0 Bi > 0. .9 Assume that k is a positive integer and that k A. 1. xn + xn−2 + xn−3 n = 0. .4. . Obtain necessary and suﬃcient conditions on the parameters A and B0 . 1. .4. 1. 1 + xn−3 . . + Bk xn−k n = 0. . . .) 199 Open Problem 11. 1. xn−2 + xn−3 . . B0 . . 1 + xn + xn−3 n = 0. B1 . converges to a period-(k + 1) solution of this equation.

0.. . 1 + xn + . . 0.11). converges to a periodic solution of period 2k. 0.200 Chapter 11. . (c) Determine the set of all nonnegative initial conditions x−k . xn−k+1 n = 0. . .10 Assume that k is a positive integer.4. φ. x0 for which the ∞ corresponding solution {xn }n=−k of Eq(11.12) which corresponds to the nonnegative solution {xn }∞ n=−k of Eq(11. 1. . .. .11) possess a positive solution which converges to zero? (b) Determine.. (a) Does Eq(11. . . x0 . . . 1. .4. . . 3)-Type Equation xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 A+Bxn +Cxn−1 Open Problem 11. (11.12) with φ ≥ 0. the value of φ in (11. . + xn−k+1 n = 0. .12) with a given φ ≥ 0 ? (See [6]. . Then we can easily see that every nonnegative solution of the equation xn+1 = xn−k .11) converges to a period-(k+1) solution of the form (11. .11) converges to a period-(k + 1) solution of the form . The (3. k−terms (11. . . in terms of the nonnegative initial conditions x−k . . . Show that every positive solution of xn+1 = 1 + xn + xn−k . .) Conjecture 11.17 Let k be a positive integer.

1) is to work in the regions where the function f (x. or non decreasing in all three.1) converges to x. x. b]3 → [a.4. very often a good strategy for obtaining global attractivity results for Eq(A. In this regard there are eight possible scenarios depending on whether f (x. We state the results for third order equations from which higher order extensions will become clear. (A. z) is monotonic in its arguments. Then Eq(A. .1 Let [a. the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = f (xn . y. Theorem A.4. z) is non decreasing in all three arguments. xn−2 ).0.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a. . Then for every set of initial conditions x0 .8. or non increasing in one and non decreasing in the other two.1) ∞ has a unique solution {xn }n=−2 . xn−1 . has a unique solution in the interval [a. y. 1. or non increasing in two arguments and non decreasing in the third.Appendix A Global Attractivity for Higher Order Equations In this appendix we present some global attractivity results for higher order diﬀerence equations which are analogous to Theorems 1. x−2 ∈ I. b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that f : [a. As we have seen in previous chapters. 201 . b]. z) is non-decreasing in each of its arguments. . x−1 . n = 0. Let I be some interval of real numbers and let f :I ×I ×I →I be a continuously diﬀerentiable function. b] and every solution of Eq(A. x) = x. b] is a continuous function satisfying the following properties: (a) f (x. y.5-1. (b) The equation f (x.

Then Eq(A. b] × [a. Mi−1 ) and mi = f (mi−1 . m. M ). m) and M = f (M. from which the result follows.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a. b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that f : [a. 2. (b) If (m. ≤ mi ≤ . b] for each x and y ∈ [a.0. mi−1 . ≤ Mi ≤ .2 Let [a. b].202 Proof. . . . . M. M ) and M = f (M. . Set m0 = a and M0 = b and for i = 1. m. ≤ M1 ≤ M0 . b] and every solution of Eq(A. m) then m = M. . y.2) Then M ≥ lim sup xi ≥ lim inf xi ≥ m i→∞ i→∞ and by the continuity of f . b]. mi−1 ). Now observe that for each i ≥ 0. i→∞ and M = lim Mi . and mi ≤ xk ≤ Mi Set m = lim mi i→∞ Appendix for k ≥ 3i + 1. . and is nonincreasing in z ∈ [a.1) converges to x. . b] is a solution of the system m = f (m. b]3 → [a. M. set Mi = f (Mi−1 . m0 ≤ m1 ≤ . . M ) ∈ [a. Mi−1 . b] for each z ∈ [a. m = f (m. . m = M = x. z) is non-decreasing in x and y ∈ [a. (A. b] is a continuous function satisfying the following properties: (a) f (x. 2 Theorem A. In view of (b).

. M ) and m = f (m. z) is non-decreasing in x and z in [a. Then Eq(A. Mi−1 . m. b] × [a. b]. set Mi = f (Mi−1 . b] is a continuous function satisfying the following properties: (a) f (x. b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that f : [a. 2 Theorem A. . mi−1 . and is nonincreasing in y ∈ [a. m. M ) ∈ [a.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a. Now observe that for each i ≥ 0 a = m0 ≤ m1 ≤ . b]3 → [a. M.1) converges to x. Mi−1 ).3 Let [a. m). . . (b) If (m. Then (A.0. b]. b] for each x and z in [a.Appendix Proof. Set m0 = a and M0 = b and for each i = 1. . Mi ≤ . b] for each z ∈ [a. b] is a solution of the system M = f (M. . . y. M. Therefore in view of (b) m=M from which the result follows. mi−1 ) and mi = f (mi−1 .2) holds and by the continuity of f . 2. m) then m = M. . M ) and M = f (M. i→∞ and M = lim Mi . M1 ≤ M0 = b. m = f (m. . . b] and every solution of Eq(A. and mi ≤ xk ≤ Mi Set m = lim mi i→∞ 203 for k ≥ 3i + 1. ≤ mi ≤ .

Then (A. b]. m. m = f (m. set Mi = f (Mi−1 . m) then m = M. M. mi−1 . M1 ≤ M0 = b. . 2. b]3 → [a. M ) ∈ [a. y. . b] is a continuous function satisfying the following properties: (a) f (x.2) holds and by the continuity of f . . Now observe that for each i ≥ 0 a = m0 ≤ m1 ≤ . and mi ≤ xk ≤ Mi Set m = lim mi i→∞ Appendix for k ≥ 3i + 1. M ) and m = f (M. M ) Therefore in view of (b) m=M from which the results follows. mi−1 ) .4 Let [a. b] and every solution of Eq(A.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a. . y ∈ [a. b] and is non-decreasing in y and z for each x. b] is a solution of the system M = f (m. Mi ≤ . Mi−1 ) and mi = f (mi−1 . .1) converges to x. . i→∞ and M = lim Mi . . m. . Mi−1 . b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that f : [a. 2 and M = f (M.0. b] × [a. (b) If (m. Then Eq(A. . M. ≤ mi ≤ . . Set m0 = a and M0 = b and for each i = 1. Theorem A.204 Proof. m) . z) is non-increasing in x for each y and z ∈ [a.

(b) If (m. ≤ mi ≤ . M ) then m = M. b]. z) is non-decreasing in x for each y and z ∈ [a. M ) and m = f (M. m) and m = f (m. mi−1 ). Therefore in view of (b) m=M from which the results follows.5 Let [a. M. m.2) holds and by the continuity of f . M1 ≤ M0 = b and mi ≤ xk ≤ Mi Set m = lim mi i→∞ 205 for k ≥ 3i + 1. Mi−1 ) and mi = f (Mi−1 . .Appendix Proof. m). m. 2 Theorem A. i→∞ and M = lim Mi . Mi ≤ . . . b] is a solution of the system M = f (M. . y. b] is a continuous function satisfying the following properties: (a) f (x. M ) ∈ [a. . . M = f (m. b] and is non-increasing in y and z for each x ∈ [a. set Mi = f (mi−1 . mi−1 . b] × [a. . . Then Eq(A. M. 2.0. Then (A. b] and every solution of Eq(A.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a. Now observe that for each i ≥ 0 m0 ≤ m1 ≤ .1) converges to x. Mi−1 . . Set m0 = a and M0 = b and for each i = 1. b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that f : [a. . b]3 → [a.

z) is non-decreasing in y for each x and z ∈ [a. b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that f : [a. b] is a continuous function satisfying the following properties: (a) f (x. M = f (M. m. . b] is a solution of the system M = f (m. mi−1 ) and mi = f (mi−1 . .2) holds and by the continuity of f . m. 2. Then (A. Therefore in view of (b) m=M from which the results follows. M ) then m = M. b] × [a. . m) and m = f (m. . b]. b] and is non-increasing in x and z for each y ∈ [a. . M ) ∈ [a.0. Now observe that for each i ≥ 0 m0 ≤ m1 ≤ .6 Let [a. b]3 → [a. 2 Theorem A. Set m0 = a and M0 = b and for each i = 1. . b] and every solution of Eq(A. M. Then Eq(A. . i→∞ and M = lim Mi . M ). y.1) converges to x.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a. . . ≤ mi ≤ . Mi ≤ . M. mi−1 . set Mi = f (Mi−1 .206 Proof. m) and m = f (M. M1 ≤ M0 = b and mi ≤ xk ≤ Mi Set m = lim mi i→∞ Appendix for k ≥ 3i + 1. Mi−1 . (b) If (m. . Mi−1 ).

. m) and m = f (M. Then Eq(A. m.7 Let [a. 2. y.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a. Now observe that for each i ≥ 0 m0 ≤ m1 ≤ . Therefore in view of (b) m=M from which the results follows. Mi−1 ). .1) converges to x. b] and every solution of Eq(A. M. M1 ≤ M0 = b and mi ≤ xk ≤ Mi Set m = lim mi i→∞ 207 for k ≥ 3i + 1. b] is a continuous function satisfying the following properties: (a) f (x.Appendix Proof. M ) ∈ [a. M = f (m. b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that f : [a. b] and is non-increasing in x and y for each z ∈ [a. M ) and m = f (M. m) then m = M. Set m0 = a and M0 = b and for each i = 1. . . b]3 → [a. m. Mi ≤ . b] × [a. Then (A. b].2) holds and by the continuity of f . Mi−1 . mi−1 ) and mi = f (Mi−1 . M. . . . i→∞ and M = lim Mi . mi−1 . (b) If (m.0. ≤ mi ≤ . b] is a solution of the system M = f (m. . . . M ). z) is non-decreasing in z for each x and y in [a. set Mi = f (mi−1 . 2 Theorem A.

208 Proof. Mi ≤ .0. b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that f : [a.1) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a. . m. M. mi−1 . . . Now observe that for each i ≥ 0 m0 ≤ m1 ≤ . . z in [a. z) is non-increasing in all three variables x. M1 ≤ M0 = b and mi ≤ xk ≤ Mi Set m = lim mi i→∞ Appendix for k ≥ 3i + 1. M. Then Eq(A. Mi−1 . . set Mi = f (mi−1 . b] is a solution of the system M = f (m. M ) ∈ [a. 2 Theorem A. b] × [a. y. 2. M = f (m. m) and m = f (M.2) holds and by the continuity of f .1) converges to x. b] is a continuous function satisfying the following properties: (a) f (x. m. b]. . Mi−1 ) and mi = f (Mi−1 . i→∞ and M = lim Mi . M ) and m = f (M. Then (A.8 Let [a. Therefore in view of (b) m=M from which the results follows. . M ) then m = M. Set m0 = a and M0 = b and for each i = 1. m). ≤ mi ≤ . (b) If (m. b]3 → [a. . . y. mi−1 ). b] and every solution of Eq(A. .

Mi ≤ .0. . . (A. This gives 2p results of the type found in Theorems A. . M. M1 ≤ M0 = b and m i ≤ x k ≤ Mi Set m = lim mi i→∞ 209 for k ≥ 3i + 1. up ) is non decreasing in the second and the third variables u2 and u3 and is non increasing in all other variables. . i→∞ and M = lim Mi . . Then (A. Theorem A. . . Let us formulate one of these results. Therefore in view of (b) m=M from which the results follows. .Appendix Proof. .0. p xn+1 = f (xn . In this case. set Mi = f (mi−1 . f : Ip → I n = 0. . there are 2p possibilities for the function f to be non decreasing in some arguments and non increasing in the remaining arguments.9 Let [a. b] is a continuous function satisfying the following properties: (a) f (u1 . M = f (m. b]p → [a. . mi−1 .3) 2 The above theorems can be easily extended to the general diﬀerence equation of order . . m. . Mi−1 ). Mi−1 .2) holds and by the continuity of f . . u2 . xn−p+1 ).1-A. xn−1 . where is a continuous function. 2.0. . . b] be an interval of real numbers and assume that f : [a. mi−1 ) and mi = f (Mi−1 . .8. 1. . M ). m) and m = f (M. ≤ mi ≤ . Set m0 = a and M0 = b and for each i = 1. . . Now observe that for each i ≥ 0 m0 ≤ m1 ≤ .

. Appendix Then Eq(A. . M ) then m = M. b] × [a. . . M. . M ) ∈ [a. m. M.3) converges to x.210 (b) If (m. . m) and m = f (M. b] and every solution of Eq(A. b] is a solution of the system M = f (m. m. M.3) has a unique equilibrium x ∈ [a. . . . m.

Bibliography [1] R. 790-798. Yorke . Anal. Tokyo. [9] A. [5] American Mathemathical Monthly. Allen. Methods and Applications. T. 1977. G. On a class of diﬀerence equations with strong negative feedback. D. 57-69. 497-515. 5(6)(1999). Taiwan. Proceedings of the Third International Conference on Diﬀerence Equations and Applications. J. [7] A. and G. 89-97. [4] K. New York. 1997. Ladas. Wimp. N. Equations Appl. Equations Appl. Strauss. Diﬀer. J. Comput. Convergence to periodic solutions. On the periodicity of the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = α|xn | + βxn−1 . M. M. J. Amleh. E. 106(1999). Hannigan. M. [8] A. Bulletin of Mathematical Biology 55 (1993). A. B. Appl. and W. and J. Thorvilson. S. Abu-Saris. Diﬀer. J. 967-968. Equations Appl. Math. 1999.A. 291-306. J. J. and S. 1-5. Springer-Verlag. Diﬀer. Amleh and G.. S. Boundedness of solutions of a plantherbivore system. A Preliminary mathematical model of the Apple Twig Borer (Coleoptera: Bostrichidae) and Grapes on the Texas High Plains Ecological Modelling 58 (1991). T. Alligood. Hoag. Math. (to appear).T. 369-382. 233(1999). [10] R. Appl. Some dynamically trivial mappings with applications to the improvement of simple iteration. New York. 7(2001). Problem 10670. [2] L. September 1-5. Diﬀerence Equations and Inequalities. Taipei. Kruse. 5(1)(1999). A. J. 24(1998). 1(3)(1995). Allen. Heidelberg. M. Amleh. N. Periodicities of solutions of the generalized Lyness recursion. Gordon and Breach Science Publishers. Ladas. [6] A. Mathematical analysis of a model for a plant-herbivore system. Sauer and J. Equations Appl. [11] E. Ladas. Gelbard. Strauss. M. Theory. 211 . J. K. M. CHAOS An Introduction to Dynamical Systems. and M. Beckermann and J. 847-864. and G. [3] L. Grove. Agarwal. 1992. Marcel Dekker Inc. Tanny. Barbeau. Diﬀer. [12] B. M. Ladas. Georgiou. Lipe. On the recursive sequence n−1 xn+1 = α + xxn . Berlin. Amleh.

126 (1998). Hoag. Ladas. Diﬀer.212 BIBLIOGRAPHY [13] E. Stability or chaos in discrete epidemic models. J. Grove. Grove. Radin. Ladas. MA. D. J.(to appear). J. Lyness-type equations in the third quadrant. T. Schultz. Ladas. D. On the diﬀerence equation xn+1 = α + βxn−1 e−xn . L. Springer-Verlag. and M. Ladas. and S. Amer. [15] K. FL. G. Catania. and E. On the recursive sequence xn+1 = 1 . An Introduction to Diﬀerence Equations. Physica D 10(1984). 387-393. On the global attractivity and the periodic character of some diﬀerence equations. El-Metwally. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. . Math. R. [27] J. El-Metwally. 5(2)(1999). DeVault. J. TMA. On the recursive c α+βxn Sequence xn+1 = Bxn +Cxn−1 . A global convergence result with applications to periodic solutions. Levins. [25] H. 2000. [23] H. Elaydi. A Piecewise linear model for the zones of instability of an areapreserving map. G. G. Equations Appl. Valicenti. Devaney. Nonlinear Anal. Equations Appl. 6(1)(2000). Diﬀer. and G. 3257-3261. Elaydi. and G. Nonlinear Systems and Applications. Lakshmikantham. F. M. [18] R. Diﬀer. (to appear). 2000. 203-209. J. On the recursive sequence xn+1 = −1 + xn−1 . [22] S. Math. 1999. Galminas. Ladas. Calef. E. On the recursive sequence A B xn+1 = xn + xn−1 . 7(2001). Cunningham. Devaney. Ladas. [26] J. Schultz. L. xn [14] K. A. DeVault. Janowski and G. 1183-1189. [16] R. Ladas. 2nd ed. J. Addison-Wesley. (to appear). V. Soc. Diﬀer. [17] R. G. Equations Appl. A. J.. and S. DeVault. Ladas. xn [20] R. and S. July 19-26. Reading. 30(1997). W. A First Course in Chaotic Dynamical Systems: Theory and Experiment. R. E. S. 245 (2000). 1977. and G. editor. Catania. New York. xn−3 xn−4 A + xn xn−1 [21] S.. Anal. Italy. July 19-26. Kulenovi´. G. E. 73-93. [19] R. Camouzis. Grove. Appl. R. W. Ladas. J. Feuer. 6(4)(2000). A. 2000. E. Franke. 1992. (to appear). New York. Cooke. 121-125. 161-170. E. On the Recursive Sequence xn+1 = A 1 + xn−2 . Ladas. [24] H. Level. Global attractivity and convergence to a two-cycle in a diﬀerence equation. Voulov. Discrete Chaos. and H. Proc. Anal. El-Metwally. and G. Equations Appl. Italy. Nonlin. DeVault. 7(2001). V. E. Proceedings of WCNA2000. Proceedings of WCNA2000. Boca Raton. Academic Press. 481-483. Janowski. J. CRC Press.

Kulenovi´. 66-74. Ladas. Gordon and Breach Science Publishers. 865-866. 1-25. Kent. [32] E.BIBLIOGRAPHY 213 [28] C. a+bxn [36] J. Philos. The dynamics of some discrete population models. Dynamics and Bifurcations. New York. Voulov. Tokyo. San Antonio. Levins. 7(2001) (to appear). G. Systems 1(1993). D. Janowski. J. Valicenti. Appl. Jaroma . Convergence of a diﬀerence equation via the full limiting sequences method. G. G. Karakostas. Hot-Line. 1995. H. A discrete semi-ﬂow in the space of sequences and study of convergence of sequences deﬁned by diﬀerence equations. August 27-31. M. Diﬀerential Equations Dynam. J. McGrath. Gibbons. May 25-28. 4(2)(2000). [35] M. Ladas. M. R. Asymptotic 2-periodic diﬀerence equations with diagonally selfinvertible responses. Existence and behavior of solutions of a rational system. Hale and H. Ladas. Math. Karakostas. Karakostas. Society. [33] J. A. Bolis. 2000. Hautus and T. G. Appl. Comm. On the global asymptotic stability of xn+1 = A+xn−1 . Grove. Ch. [39] G. Equations Appl. 149-176. and S. 86(1979). and Bifurcations of Vector Fields. Springer-Verlag. Grove. 1069-1084. Texas. 17(1991). On the trichotomy c character of xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 . Heidelberg. (1989). Nonlinear Anal. 61-72. L. E. Ladas. . 1983. 1998. [40] G. Tokyo. 329-335. Nonlinear Oscillations. Poland. [34] J. New York. R. [29] C. Res. Monthly. Sci. Proceedings of the Fourth International Conference on Diﬀerence Equations and Applications. G. L. Gibbons. Heidelberg. and Y. Poznan. Berlin. H. Holmes. C. Dynamical Systems. S. and H. A. 1(1994). and C. A+xn [30] E. Gordon and Breach Science Publishers. [37] G. Diﬀer. M. Sﬁcas. Proceedings of the First International Conference on Diﬀerence Equations and Applications. Equations Appl. Diﬀer. 1-11. Kulenovi´. 281-294. Teixeira. Grove. S. Nonlinear Anal. M. H. Math. Kocak. R. C. [38] G. Karakostas. 1991.C. Global stability in some population models . 289-294. 6(3)(2000). M. J. 8(2001). Solution to Problem E2721. Ladas. Nonlinear Anal. Greek Math. Guckenheimer and P. E.S. Comm. On the recursive sequence c α+βxn−1 xn+1 = γ+xn . A. On the rational recursive sequence xn+1 = (αxn +β)/((γxn +C)xn−1 ). Springer-Verlag. J. Amer. and G. and G. Kent. Berlin. 1994. [31] E. T.

On the rational recursive sequences. 235 (1999). Invariants and related Liapunov functions for diﬀerence equac tions. [47] N. M. J. J. Teixeira. On the stability of Lyness’ equation. Dynamics of Continuous. 1991. 1993. [45] W. Kulenovi´. 151-158. Appl. L. (to appear). Diﬀerence Equations. Kruse and T. R. J. Global Behavior of Nonlinear Diﬀerence Equations of Higher Order with Applications. Ladas. Equations Appl. Tzanetopoulos. 671-678. 1(4) (1995). 571-586. On the dynamics c α+βxn of xn+1 = A+Bxn +Cxn−1 facts and conjectures. S. G. G. [49] M. Equations Appl. S. Ladas.214 BIBLIOGRAPHY [41] W. 1-8. Lett. L. J. 563-576. Ladas. Kocic. Kelley and A. and I. L. G. Kulenovi´ and G. G. G. Ladas. Equations Appl. Ladas. Stability trichotomy. Sci. G. Kulenovi´. Appl. R. Appl. Res. R. 1+xn [53] M. W. Rodrigues. S. Math. M. and E. γxn +Cxn−1 . J. F. Ladas. 251(2000). 1-16. K. Equations Appl. Kuang and J. Martins. Academic Press. Comput. Anal. 2(1)(1996). S. Math. S. S. Appl. [52] M. Ladas. Appl. Anal. [42] V. [44] V. and N. 31-37. C. Kulenovi´. J. Peterson. Thomas. S. Kulenovi´. Kulenovi´. R. n +Cxn−1 [51] M. Appl. On the recursive sequence xn+1 = c αxn +βxn−1 . 41(2001). Dordrecht. Cushing. On the recursive sequence xn+1 = c αxn +βxn−1 . Diﬀer. Math. Ladas. Sizer. On the recursive c p+yn−1 sequence yn+1 = qyn +yn−1 . [43] V. [48] Y. R. path stability. Hot-Line 2(1998). J. Diﬀer. R. 6(5) (2000). 127-157. Diﬀer. Kulenovi´. Math. c Comput. A. W. R. and N. Holland. [54] M. Kluwer Academic Publishers. New York. Global asymptotic stability for discrete dynamical systems. L. 245-254. no. 641-646. On a rational diﬀerence equation. R. Kosmala. T. Math. 13 (7)(2000). R. Rodrigues. Discrete and Impulsive Systems 1(1995). Ladas. Krause. and W.5. Anal.. G. 323-346. Kocic and G. [50] M. G. Diﬀer. Global stability in a nonlinear diﬀerence-delay equation model of ﬂour beetle population growth. 6(5) (2000). and I. Open problems and conjectures: On period two c α+βx solutions of xn+1 = A+Bxn +γxn−1 . Nesemann. and relative stability for positive nonlinear diﬀerence equations of higher order. Math. Prokup. Math. 173 (1993). and C. Kocic. G. [46] U. S. Prokup.

New York. Problem 1572. 1(3)(1995). Ladas. Oscillation and global attractivity in a discrete delay logistic model. 209-214. Appl. Martelli. Ladas. [61] G. J. [70] H. [66] E. 255-272. 1974. Equations Appl. [56] G. Open problems and conjectures. Math. 1(1)(1995). Equations Appl. Ladas.BIBLIOGRAPHY 215 [55] S. Diﬀer. 73(2000). [57] G. Math. 1(4)(1995). CRC Press. 160-161. and Chaos. Ladas. [60] G. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. Diﬀer. Equations Appl. Purnaras. Open problems and conjectures. Ladas. 6(5)(2000). Geometric stability conditions for higher order diﬀerence equations. J. 224(1998). Appl. Pielou. K. C. J. . Diﬀer. An Introduction to Mathematical Ecology. 311-313. Comput. Anal. Sedaghat. 1965. FL. Diﬀer. Diﬀer. G. Invariants for generalized Lyness equations. New York. Population and Community Ecology. [59] G. Robinson. 317-321. 1995. J. [65] Ch. J. Appl. 50 (1992). 249-258. Equations Appl. 95-97. Diﬀer. C. New York. (to appear). Ladas. I. Equations Appl. [64] Mathemathics Magazine. Ladas. [68] C. 227-233. 535-561. [69] H. Boca Raton. Equations Appl. Open Problems and Conjectures. [62] G. J. Open problems and conjectures. Sedaghat. J. Sﬁcas. Math. J. Introduction to Discrete Dynamical Systems and Chaos. On the recursive sequence xn+1 = 4(3)(1998). Stability. J. Kuruklis and G. Quart. Differ. John Wiley & Sons. Existence of solutions of certain singular diﬀerence equations. 7(2001). Pielou. and Y. Symbolic Dynamics. Equations Appl. G. [63] M. k Ai i=0 xn−2i . Open problems and conjectures. [67] E. Global attractivity in a nonlinear diﬀerence equation. 4(5)(1998). Ladas. 413-419. 62(1994). John Wiley & Sons. Philos. 1(2)(1995). Gordon and Breach. [58] G. 497-499. 1999.

Periodic solutions with the same period of the recursion xn+1 = α+βxn +γxn−1 .edu/ecz/gu. Sizer. 51-58. α+xn . Anal. Systems 5(1997). Appl.math. C. Existence of nonperiodic solutions of the Lyness equation xn+1 = J. Gordon and Breach Science Publishers. A+Bxn +Cxn−1 . Zheng.utsa. Temuco. Math.216 BIBLIOGRAPHY [71] W. Diﬀerential Equations Dynam.html [73] Y. Chile. Systems 6(1998). Diﬀerential Equations Dynam. xn−1 [74] Y. Zheng. 2001. Proceedings of the Fifth International Conference on Diﬀerence Equations and Applications. S. (to appear). 94-102. Geometric unfolding of a diﬀerence equation. Zheng. [75] Y. 319-324. On periodic cycles of the Lyness equation. 209(1997). 2000. [72] E. Zeeman. January 3-7. http://www. Some periodic solutions of the Lyness equation .

Index basin of attraction of a two cycle. 6 local asymptotic stability of a two cycle. 43–46. 183 linearized stability theorem. 6 Lyness’ equation. 15 linearized stability analysis. 38 Discrete Epidemic Models. 192–200 oscillate about x. 25 open problems and conjectures. 36 local stability of the positive equilibrium . 17 full limiting sequence. 5 Flour Beetle Model. 41–42. 75 global asymptotic stability of the zero equilibrium. 25 nonoscillatory. 128 equilibrium point. 128 population model. 3 convergence to period-two solutions. 29 existence of prime period-two solution. 78 Riccati number. 9–14 global attractor. 24–28 signum invariant. 66 Pielou’s equation. 2. 6 locally stable. 2 ﬁxed point. 64–68. 32 local stability of the zero equilibrium. 2. 38 classiﬁcation of equation types. 9 negative semicycle. 49–51. 70 May’s host parasitoid model. 30 217 locally asymptotically stable. 7 Riccati diﬀerence equation. 16 gingerbreadman map. 9 positive semicycle. 5. 180–182. 7 . 184–189 limiting solution. 134– 136. 7 periodic solutions with the same period. 1. 72–75. 25 periodic solution. 123–130. 75 negative feedback condition. 6 globally asymptotically stable. 25 oscillate about zero. 7 repeller. 5. 18 saddle point. 31 global attractivity of the positive equilibrium. 6. 6 invariant. 129 positive equilibrium. 71 invariant interval. 24 prime period p solution. 17. 38 sink. 66. 9. 15 full limiting solution. 7 semicycle analysis. 163–166. 129 forbidden set. 35 existence of solutions. 57 Plant-herbivore system. 33 Pielou’s discrete delay logistic model. 138–139. 2.

2)-type. 3)-type. 1)-type. 3)-type. 189 trichotomy character. 168 type of equation (1. 5 stability trichotomy. 141 (3. 1)-type. 183 unstable equilibrium.218 source. 131 (2. 10 stable manifold. 6 stability of equilibrium. 6 unstable manifold. 3)-type. 8 INDEX . 2)-type. 167 (3. 7 strictly oscillatory. 53–54 (1. 69–70 (2. 47–48 (1. 2)-type. 1)-type. 42. 25 table of invariant intervals. 77–78 (2. 8 stable manifold theorem in the plane. 137 (3.

- 00000thesys MIT LMI
- control system
- Qb Second Order
- 2014InfSci Finite-time Cascaded Tracking Control Approach for Mobile Robots_2
- 82. Aissani - Ref
- SM14_sdarticle
- The Stability of Nonlinear Dissipative Systems
- ch_2
- Absolute Stability Analysis of Discrete-Time Systems
- 07080948
- Sequences and Series - Jim Fowler and Bart Snapp
- Ch2 Review
- Qualitative Study of a Model of Chagas’ Disease
- Linear Control Systems, Modeling,Analysis and Design
- 50413 ApplicationofDerivatives CN IITAdvanced MathsFinalChecked
- Nonlinear Differential Equations
- Spine Stability the Six Blind Men and the Elephant
- Behaviours in a Dynamical Model of Traffic
- tac00_2
- 10.1007978-3-662-48417-3_sách-SMC
- Advances in Mechanics of Solids
- Uniform Exponential Stability for evolution families
- 1.Mathematical Physics_GATE.pdf
- Power System Control and Automation
- Non Expansive
- 06727473
- LOTKA v Model
- Enhanced Hierarchical Classification via Isotonic Smoothing
- nonlinear Dynamic course
- m2l1

Sign up to vote on this title

UsefulNot usefulClose Dialog## Are you sure?

This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?

Close Dialog## This title now requires a credit

Use one of your book credits to continue reading from where you left off, or restart the preview.

Loading